initial commit of ebook 17546HEADmain

1 files changed, 13126 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/17546.txt b/17546.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..faac1f9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/17546.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,13126 @@
+The Project Gutenberg eBook, The Lion of Saint Mark, by G. A. Henty
+
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+
+
+
+Title: The Lion of Saint Mark
+       A Story of Venice in the Fourteenth Century
+
+
+Author: G. A. Henty
+
+
+
+Release Date: January 18, 2006  [eBook #17546]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-646-US (US-ASCII)
+
+
+***START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE LION OF SAINT MARK***
+
+
+E-text prepared by Martin Robb
+
+
+
+THE LION OF ST. MARK:
+
+A Story of Venice in the Fourteenth Century
+
+by
+
+G. A. Henty.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+Preface.
+Chapter 1:  Venice.
+Chapter 2:  A Conspiracy.
+Chapter 3:  On The Grand Canal.
+Chapter 4:  Carried Off.
+Chapter 5:  Finding A Clue.
+Chapter 6:  The Hut On San Nicolo.
+Chapter 7:  On Board A Trader.
+Chapter 8:  An Attack By Pirates.
+Chapter 9:  The Capture Of The Lido.
+Chapter 10: Recaptured.
+Chapter 11: The Battle Of Antium.
+Chapter 12: In Mocenigo's Power.
+Chapter 13: The Pirates' Raid.
+Chapter 14: The End Of The Persecutor.
+Chapter 15: The Battle Of Pola.
+Chapter 16: The Recapture Of The Pluto.
+Chapter 17: An Ungrateful Republic.
+Chapter 18: The Release Of Pisani.
+Chapter 19: The Siege Of Chioggia.
+Chapter 20: The Triumph Of Venice.
+
+
+
+Preface.
+
+
+Of all the chapters of history, there are few more interesting or
+wonderful than that which tells the story of the rise and progress of
+Venice. Built upon a few sandy islands in a shallow lagoon, and
+originally founded by fugitives from the mainland, Venice became one of
+the greatest and most respected powers of Europe. She was mistress of
+the sea; conquered and ruled over a considerable territory bordering on
+the Adriatic; checked the rising power of the Turks; conquered
+Constantinople; successfully defied all the attacks of her jealous
+rivals to shake her power; and carried on a trade relatively as great
+as that of England in the present day. I have laid my story in the time
+not of the triumphs of Venice, but of her hardest struggle for
+existence--when she defended herself successfully against the coalition
+of Hungary, Padua, and Genoa--for never at any time were the virtues of
+Venice, her steadfastness, her patriotism, and her willingness to make
+all sacrifice for her independence, more brilliantly shown. The
+historical portion of the story is drawn from Hazlitt's History of the
+Republic of Venice, and with it I have woven the adventures of an
+English boy, endowed with a full share of that energy and pluck which,
+more than any other qualities, have made the British empire the
+greatest the world has ever seen.
+
+G. A. Henty.
+
+
+
+Chapter 1: Venice.
+
+
+"I suppose you never have such nights as these in that misty island of
+yours, Francisco?"
+
+"Yes, we have," the other said stoutly. "I have seen just as bright
+nights on the Thames. I have stood down by Paul's Stairs and watched
+the reflection of the moon on the water, and the lights of the houses
+on the bridge, and the passing boats, just as we are doing now.
+
+"But," he added honestly, "I must confess that we do not have such
+still, bright nights very often, while with you they are the rule,
+though sometimes even here a mist rises up and dims the water, just as
+it does with us."
+
+"But I have heard you say that the stars are not so bright as we have
+them here."
+
+"No, I do not think they are, Matteo. I do not remember now, but I do
+know, when I first came here, I was struck with the brightness of the
+stars, so I suppose there must have been a difference."
+
+"But you like this better than England? You are glad that your father
+came out here?"
+
+Francis Hammond did not answer at once.
+
+"I am glad he came out," he said after a pause, "because I have seen
+many things I should never have seen if I had stayed at home, and I
+have learned to speak your tongue. But I do not know that I like it
+better than home. Things are different, you see. There was more fun at
+home. My father had two or three apprentices, whom I used to play with
+when the shop was closed, and there were often what you would call
+tumults, but which were not serious. Sometimes there would be a fight
+between the apprentices of one ward and another. A shout would be
+raised of 'Clubs!' and all the 'prentices would catch up their sticks
+and pour out of the shops, and then there would be a fight till the
+city guard turned out and separated them. Then there used to be the
+shooting at the butts, and the shows, and the Mayday revels, and all
+sorts of things. The people were more merry than you are here, and much
+more free. You see, the barons, who are the same to us that your great
+families are to you, had no influence in the city. You are a nation of
+traders, and so are we; but in London the traders have the power, and
+are absolute masters inside their own walls, caring nothing for the
+barons, and not much for the king. If anyone did wrong he got an open
+and fair trial. There was no fear of secret accusations. Everyone
+thought and said as he pleased. There was no Lion's Mouth, and no
+Council of Ten."
+
+"Hush! hush! Francisco," the other said, grasping his arm. "Do not say
+a word against the council. There is no saying who may be listening."
+
+And he looked nervously round to see if anyone was within earshot.
+
+"There it is, you see," his companion said. "So long as we have a safe
+conscience, in London we are frightened at nothing, whereas here no one
+can say with certainty that he may not, before tomorrow morning, be
+lying in the dungeons of St. Mark, without the slightest idea in the
+world as to what his crime has been."
+
+"There, there, Francisco," Matteo said uneasily. "Do talk about other
+things. Your notions may do very well in England, but are not safe to
+discuss here. Of course there are plenty here who would gladly see a
+change in some matters, but one cannot have everything; and, after all,
+when one has so much to be proud of, one need not grumble because
+everything is not just as one would like."
+
+"Yes, you have much to be proud of," Francis Hammond agreed. "It is
+marvellous that the people of these scattered islets should be masters
+of the sea, that their alliance should be coveted by every power in
+Europe, that they should be the greatest trading community in the
+world. If I were not English I should like to be Venetian."
+
+The speakers were standing at the edge of the water in front of the
+Palace of St. Mark. In the piazza behind them a throng of people were
+walking to and fro, gossiping over the latest news from Constantinople,
+the last rumour as to the doings of the hated rival of Venice, Genoa,
+or the purport of the letter which had, as everyone knew, been brought
+by the Bishop of Treviso from the pope to the seignory.
+
+The moon was shining brightly overhead, and glittering in the waters of
+the lagoon, which were broken into innumerable little wavelets by the
+continual crossing and recrossing of the gondolas dotting its surface.
+There was a constant arrival and departure of boats from the steps,
+fifty yards to the right of the spot where the speakers were standing;
+but where they had stationed themselves, about halfway between the
+landing steps and the canal running down by the side of the ducal
+palace, there were but few people about.
+
+Francis Hammond was a lad between fifteen and sixteen years old. His
+father was a merchant of London. He was a man of great enterprise and
+energy, and had four years before determined to leave his junior
+partner in charge of the business in London, and to come out himself
+for a time to Venice, so as to buy the Eastern stuffs in which he dealt
+at the headquarters of the trade, instead of paying such prices as the
+agents of the Venetian traders might demand in London.
+
+He had succeeded beyond his expectations. In Venice there were
+constantly bargains to be purchased from ships returning laden with the
+spoils of some captured Genoese merchantman, or taken in the sack of
+some Eastern seaport. The prices, too, asked by the traders with the
+towns of Syria or the Black Sea, were but a fraction of those charged
+when these goods arrived in London. It was true that occasionally some
+of his cargoes were lost on the homeward voyage, captured either by the
+Genoese or the Moorish pirates; but even allowing for this, the profits
+of the trade were excellent.
+
+The English merchant occupied a good position in Venice. The promptness
+of his payments, and the integrity of his dealings, made him generally
+respected; and the fact that he was engaged in trade was no drawback to
+his social position, in a city in which, of all others, trade was
+considered honourable, and where members of even the most aristocratic
+families were, with scarcely an exception, engaged in commerce. There
+were many foreign merchants settled in Venice, for from the first the
+republic had encouraged strangers to take up their residence there, and
+had granted them several privileges and advantages.
+
+Between Venice and England there had always been good feeling. Although
+jealous of foreigners, England had granted the Venetians liberty to
+trade in London, Southampton, and some other towns as far back as the
+year 1304; and their relations had always been cordial, as there were
+no grounds for jealousy or rivalry between the two peoples; whereas the
+interference of France, Germany, Austria, and Hungary in the affairs of
+Italy, had frequently caused uneasiness to Venice, and had on several
+occasions embroiled her with one or other of the three last named
+powers. France had as yet taken a very minor part in the continual wars
+which were waged between the rival cities of Italy, and during the
+Crusades there had been a close alliance between her and Venice, the
+troops of the two nations fighting together at the siege of
+Constantinople, and causing the temporary overthrow of the Greek Empire
+of the East.
+
+The rise of Venice had been rapid, and she owed her advancement to a
+combination of circumstances. In the first place, her insular position
+rendered her almost impervious to attack, and she had therefore no
+occasion to keep on foot any army, and was able to throw all her
+strength on to the sea, where Genoa was her only formidable rival. In
+the second place, her mercantile spirit, and her extensive trade with
+the East, brought in a steady influx of wealth, and her gold enabled
+her to purchase allies, to maintain lengthy struggles without
+faltering, and to emerge unscathed from wars which exhausted the
+resources, and crippled the powers, of her rivals.
+
+The third source of her success lay in the spirit of her population.
+Like Rome in her early days, she was never cast down by reverses.
+Misfortune only nerved her to further exertions, and after each defeat
+she rose stronger than before. But the cause which, more than all,
+contributed to give to Venice her ascendancy among the cities of Italy,
+was her form of government. Democratic at first, as among all
+communities, it had gradually assumed the character of a close
+oligarchy, and although nominally ruled by a council containing a large
+number of members, her destinies were actually in the hands of the
+Doge, elected for life, and the Council of Ten, chosen from the great
+body of the council. Thus she had from the first been free from those
+factions which were the bane of Genoa and Florence. Some of the great
+families had from time to time come more prominently to the front than
+others, but none had attained predominant political power, and beyond a
+few street tumults of slight importance, Venice had not suffered from
+the popular tumults and uprisings which played so prominent a part in
+the history of her rivals.
+
+Thus, undisturbed by discord at home, Venice had been able to give all
+her attention and all her care to her interests abroad, and her
+affairs, conducted as they were by her wisest citizens, with a single
+eye to the benefit of the state, had been distinguished by a rare
+sagacity. Her object had been single and uniform, to protect her own
+interests, and to prevent any one city on the mainland attaining such a
+preponderance as would render her a dangerous neighbour. Hence she was
+always ready to ally herself with the weaker against the stronger, and
+to aid with money and men any state struggling against an ambitious
+neighbour. Acting on this principle she by turns assisted Padua against
+Verona, and Verona against Padua, or either of them when threatened by
+the growing power of Milan, and at the end of a war she generally came
+out with an increased territory, and added importance.
+
+It is probable that no community was ever governed, for hundreds of
+years, with such uniform wisdom and sagacity as was Venice; but the
+advantage was not without drawbacks. The vigilance of the Council of
+Ten in repressing plots, not unfrequently set on foot by the enemies of
+the republic, resulted in the adoption of a hateful system of
+espionage. The city was pervaded with spies, and even secret
+denunciations were attended to, and the slightest expression of
+discontent against the ruling authorities was severely punished. On the
+other hand, comparatively slight attention was paid to private crime.
+Assassinations were of frequent occurrence, and unless the victim
+happened to be very powerfully connected, no notice was taken when a
+man was found to be missing from his usual place, and his corpse was
+discovered floating in the lagoon. Consequently crimes of this kind
+were, in the great majority of cases, committed with impunity, and even
+when traced, the authors, if possessed of powerful protectors, seldom
+suffered any greater punishment than temporary banishment.
+
+After standing for some time on the Piazzetta, the two lads turned and,
+entering the square of Saint Mark, mingled with the crowd. It was a
+motley one. Nobles in silks and satins jostled with fishermen of the
+lagoons. Natives of all the coasts and islands which owned the sway of
+Venice, Greeks from Constantinople, Tartar merchants from the Crimea,
+Tyrians, and inhabitants of the islands of the Aegean, were present in
+considerable numbers; while among the crowd, vendors of fruit and
+flowers from the mainland, and of fresh water or cooling drinks, sold
+their wares. The English lad's companion--Matteo Giustiniani--belonged
+to one of the leading families of Venice, and was able to name to
+Francis most of the nobles and persons of importance whom they passed.
+
+"There is Pisani," he said. "Of course you know him. What a jolly,
+good-tempered looking fellow he is! The sailors would do anything for
+him, and they say he will have command of the next fleet that puts to
+sea. I wish I was going with him. There is sure to be a fierce fight
+when he comes across the Genoese. His father was one of our greatest
+admirals.
+
+"That noble just behind him is Fiofio Dandolo. What a grand family they
+have been, what a number of great men they have given to the republic!
+I should like to have seen the grand old Doge who stormed the walls of
+Constantinople, and divided the Eastern empire among the crusading
+barons. He was a hero indeed.
+
+"No; I don't know who that young noble in the green velvet cap and plum
+coloured dress is. O yes, I do, though; it is Ruggiero Mocenigo; he has
+been away for the last two years at Constantinople; he was banished for
+having killed Polo Morosini--he declared it was in fair fight, but no
+one believed him. They had quarrelled a few days before over some
+question of the precedence of their families, and Morosini was found
+dead at the top of the steps close to the church of Saint Paolo. Some
+people heard a cry and ran up just as Mocenigo leapt into his gondola,
+but as it rowed off their shouts called the attention of one of the
+city guard boats which happened to be passing, and it was stopped. As
+his sword was still wet with blood, he could not deny that he was the
+author of the deed, but, as I said, he declared it was in fair fight.
+The Morosinis asserted that Polo's sword was undrawn, but the Mocenigo
+family brought forward a man, who swore that he was one of the first to
+arrive, and pick up the sword and place it in its scabbard to prevent
+its being lost. No doubt he lied; but as Mocenigo's influence in the
+council was greater than that of the Morosini, the story was accepted.
+However, the public feeling was so strong that they could not do less
+than sentence Ruggiero to two years' banishment. I suppose that has
+just expired, and he has returned from Constantinople. He had a bad
+reputation before this affair took place, but as his connections are so
+powerful, I suppose he will be received as if nothing had happened.
+There are plenty of others as bad as he is."
+
+"It's a scandalous thing," Francis Hammond said indignantly, "that,
+just because they have got powerful connections, men should be allowed
+to do, almost with impunity, things for which an ordinary man would be
+hung. There ought to be one law for the rich as well as the poor."
+
+"So there is as far as the state is concerned," his companion replied.
+"A noble who plots against the state is as certain of a place in the
+lowest dungeons as a fisherman who has done the same; but in other
+respects there is naturally some difference."
+
+"Why naturally?" Francis retorted. "You belong to a powerful family,
+Giustiniani, and my father is only a trader, but I don't see that
+naturally you have any more right to get me stabbed in the back, than I
+have to get you put out of the way."
+
+"Naturally perhaps not," Matteo laughed; "but you see it has become a
+second nature to us here in Venice. But seriously I admit that the
+present state of things has grown to be a scandal, and that the doings
+of some of our class ought to be put down with a strong hand."
+
+"Well, I shall say goodnight now," the English boy said. "My father
+doesn't like my being out after ten. He keeps up his English habits of
+shutting up early, and has not learned to turn night into day as you do
+here in Venice."
+
+"The bell has just tolled the hour, Francis," his father said as he
+entered.
+
+"I didn't think it was quite so late, father; the Piazza is crowded. I
+really do not think there is one person in Venice who goes to bed so
+early as we do. It is so pleasant in the moonlight after the heat of
+the day."
+
+"That is true enough, Francis, but men are meant to sleep at night and
+to work in the day. I think our fathers carried this too far when they
+rang the curfew at eight; but ten is quite late enough for any honest
+man to be about in the streets, and the hours of the early morning are
+just as pleasant and far more healthy than those of the evening,
+especially in a place like this where the mists rise from the water, to
+say nothing of the chance of meeting a band of wild gallants on their
+way homewards heated with wine, or of getting a stab in the back from
+some midnight assassin. However, I do not blame Venice for enjoying
+herself while she can. She will have more serious matters to attend to
+soon."
+
+"But she is at peace with every one at present, father. I thought when
+she signed the treaty with Austria after a year's fighting, she was
+going to have rest for a time."
+
+"That was only the beginning of the trouble, Francis, and the council
+knew it well; that was why they made such terms with Austria as they
+did. They knew that Austria was only acting in accord with Hungary, and
+Padua, and Genoa. The others were not ready to begin, so Austria came
+on her own account to get what booty and plunder she could. But the
+storm is gathering, and will burst before long. But do not let us stand
+talking here any longer. It is high time for you to be in bed."
+
+But though Francis retired to his room, it was more than an hour before
+he got into bed. His window looked down upon one of the canals running
+into the Grand Canal. Gondolas lighted by lanterns, or by torches held
+by servitors, passed constantly backwards and forwards beneath his
+window, and by leaning out he could see the passing lights of those on
+the Grand Canal. Snatches of song and laughter came up to him, and
+sometimes the note of a musical instrument. The air was soft and balmy,
+and he felt no inclination for sleep.
+
+Francis thought over what his father had said of the probability of
+war, as he sat at his window, and wished that he were a couple of years
+older and could take part in the struggle. The Venetian fleet had
+performed such marvels of valour, that, in the days when military
+service was almost the sole avenue to distinction and fortune, the
+desire to take part in a naval expedition, which promised unusual
+opportunities of gaining credit and renown, was the most natural thing
+possible for a boy of spirit.
+
+Francis was a well built lad of nearly sixteen. He had, until he left
+London when about twelve years old, taken his full share in the rough
+sports which formed so good a training for the youths of England, and
+in which the citizens of London were in no way behind the rest of the
+kingdom. He had practised shooting with a light bow and arrows, in
+company with boys of his own age, in the fields outside the city walls;
+had engaged in many a rough tussle with light clubs and quarterstaffs;
+and his whole time--except for an hour or two daily which he had, as
+the son of a well to do citizen, spent in learning to read and
+write--had been occupied in games and exercises of one kind or other.
+
+Since his arrival in Venice he had not altogether discontinued his
+former habits. At his earnest solicitation, his father had permitted
+him to attend the School of Arms, where the sons of patricians and
+well-to-do merchants learned the use of sword and dagger, to hurl the
+javelin, and wield the mace and battleaxe; and was, besides, a
+frequenter of some of the schools where old soldiers gave private
+lessons in arms to such as could afford it; and the skill and strength
+of the English lad excited no slight envy among the young Venetian
+nobles. Often, too, he would go out to one of the sandy islets, and
+there setting up a mark, practise with the bow. His muscles too, had
+gained strength and hardness by rowing. It was his constant habit of an
+evening, when well away from the crowded canals in the gondola, with
+Giuseppi, the son and assistant of his father's gondolier, to take an
+oar, for he had thoroughly mastered the difficult accomplishment of
+rowing well in a gondola; but he only did this when far out from the
+city, or when the darkness of evening would prevent his figure from
+being recognized by any of his acquaintances, for no Venetian of good
+family would demean himself by handling an oar. Francis, however,
+accustomed to row upon the Thames, could see no reason why he should
+not do the same in a gondola, and in time he and his companion could
+send the boat dancing over the water, at a rate which enabled them to
+overtake and distance most pair-oared boats.
+
+After breakfast next morning he went down to the steps, where Beppo and
+Giuseppi, in their black cloth suits with red sashes round their
+waists, were waiting with the gondola in which Mr. Hammond was going
+out to Malamocco, to examine a cargo which had the day before arrived
+from Azoph. Giuseppi jumped ashore.
+
+"I have heard of just the gondola to suit you, Messer Francisco, and
+you can get her a bargain."
+
+"What is she like, Giuseppi?"
+
+"She belongs to a man out at Lido. She was built for the race two years
+ago, but her owner fell sick and was unable to start. He has not got
+strong again, and wants to sell his boat, which is far too light for
+ordinary work. They say she is almost like an eggshell, and you and I
+will be able to send her along grandly. She cost four ducats, but he
+will sell her for two."
+
+"That is capital, Giuseppi. This gondola is all well enough for my
+father, but she is very heavy. This evening we will row over to Lido
+and look at her."
+
+A few minutes later Mr. Hammond came down. Beppo and his son took off
+their jackets, and in their snow white shirts and black trousers, set
+off by the red scarf and a red ribbon round their broad hats, took
+their places on the bow and stern. Mr. Hammond sat down on the cushions
+in the middle of the boat, and with an easy, noiseless motion the
+gondola glided away from the stairs. Francis, with a little sigh,
+turned away and strolled off for a couple of hours' work with the
+preceptor, with whom he had continued his studies since he came to
+Venice.
+
+This work consisted chiefly of learning various languages, for in those
+days there was little else to learn. Latin was almost universally
+spoken by educated men in southern Europe, and Greeks, Italians,
+Spaniards, and Frenchmen were able to converse in this common medium.
+French Francis understood, for it was the language in use in the court
+and among the upper classes in England. Italian he picked up naturally
+during his residence, and spoke it with the facility of a native. He
+could now converse freely in Latin, and had some knowledge of German.
+At the same school were many lads of good Venetian families, and it was
+here that he had first made the acquaintance of Matteo Giustiniani, who
+was now his most intimate friend.
+
+Matteo, like all the young nobles of Venice, was anxious to excel in
+military exercises, but he had none of the ardour for really hard work
+which distinguished his friend. He admired the latter's strength and
+activity, but could not bring himself to imitate him, in the exercises
+by which that strength was attained, and had often remonstrated with
+him upon his fondness for rowing.
+
+"It is not seemly, Francisco, for a gentleman to be labouring like a
+common gondolier. These men are paid for doing it; but what pleasure
+there can be in standing up working that oar, till you are drenched
+with perspiration, I cannot understand. I don't mind getting hot in the
+School of Arms, because one cannot learn to use the sword and dagger
+without it, but that's quite another thing from tugging at an oar."
+
+"But I like it, Matteo; and see how strong it has made my muscles, not
+of the arm only, but the leg and back. You often say you envy me my
+strength, but you might be just as strong if you chose to work as I do.
+Besides, it is delightful, when you are accustomed to it, to feel the
+gondola flying away under your stroke."
+
+"I prefer feeling it fly away under some one else's stroke, Francisco.
+That is pleasant enough, I grant; but the very thought of working as
+you do throws me into a perspiration. I should like to be as strong as
+you are, but to work as a gondolier is too high a price to pay for it."
+
+That evening, Francis crossed the lagoon in the gondola with Giuseppi,
+to inspect the boat he had heard of. It was just what he wanted. In
+appearance it differed in no way from an ordinary gondola, but it was a
+mere shell. The timbers and planking were extremely light, and the
+weight of the boat was little more than a third of that of other craft.
+She had been built like a working gondola, instead of in the form of
+those mostly used for racing, because her owner had intended, after the
+race was over, to plank her inside and strengthen her for everyday
+work. But the race had never come off, and the boat lay just as she had
+come from the hands of her builder, except that she had been painted
+black, like other gondolas, to prevent her planks from opening. When
+her owner had determined to part with her he had given her a fresh coat
+of paint, and had put her in the water, that her seams might close up.
+
+"I don't like parting with her," the young fisherman to whom she
+belonged said. "I tried her once or twice, and she went like the wind,
+but I got fever in my bones and I am unlikely to race again, and the
+times are hard, and I must part with her."
+
+Francis and Giuseppi gave her a trial, and were delighted with the
+speed and ease with which she flew through the water. On their return
+Francis at once paid the price asked for her. His father made him a
+handsome allowance, in order that he might be able to mix, without
+discomfort, with the lads of good family whom he met at his preceptor's
+and at the schools of arms. But Francis did not care for strolling in
+the Piazza, or sitting for hours sipping liquors. Still less did he
+care for dress or finery. Consequently he had always plenty of money to
+indulge in his own special fancies.
+
+As soon as the bargain was completed, Giuseppi took his place in the
+old gondola, while Francis took the oar in his new acquisition, and
+found to his satisfaction that with scarcely an effort he could dart
+ahead of his companion and leave him far behind. By nightfall the two
+gondolas were fastened, side by side, behind the gaily painted posts
+which, in almost all Venetian houses, are driven into the canal close
+to the steps, and behind which the gondolas belonging to the house lie
+safe from injury by passing craft.
+
+"I have bought another gondola, father," Francis said the next morning.
+"She is a very light, fast craft, and I got her cheap."
+
+"I don't see what you wanted another gondola for, Francis. I do not use
+mine very much, and you are always welcome to take it when I do not
+want it."
+
+"Yes, father, but you often use it in the evening, and that is just the
+time when one wants to go out. You very often only take Beppo with you,
+when you do not go on business, and I often want a boat that I could
+take with Giuseppi. Besides, your gondola is a very solid one, and I
+like passing people."
+
+"Young people always want to go fast," Mr. Hammond said. "Why, I can't
+make out. However, Francis, I am not sorry that you have got a boat of
+your own, for it has happened several times lately, that when in the
+evening I have gone down intending to row round to the Piazzetta, I
+have found the boat gone, and have had to walk. Now I shall be able to
+rely on finding Beppo asleep in the boat at the steps. In future, since
+you have a boat of your own, I shall not be so particular as to your
+being in at ten. I do not so much mind your being out on the water,
+only you must promise me that you will not be in the streets after that
+hour. There are frequent broils as the evening gets on, not to mention
+the danger of cutthroats in unfrequented lanes; but if you will promise
+me that you will never be about the streets after half past nine, I
+will give you leave to stay out on the water till a later hour; but
+when you come in late be careful always to close and bar the door, and
+do not make more noise than you can help in coming up to your room."
+
+Francis was much pleased with this concession, for the obligation to
+return at ten o'clock, just when the temperature was most delightful
+and the Grand Canal at its gayest, had been very irksome to him. As to
+the prohibition against being in the streets of Venice after half past
+nine, he felt that no hardship whatever, as he found no amusement in
+strolling in the crowded Piazza.
+
+
+
+Chapter 2: A Conspiracy.
+
+
+"Who are those ladies, Matteo?" Francis asked his friend one evening,
+as the latter, who was sitting with him in his gondola, while Giuseppi
+rowed them along the Grand Canal, half rose and saluted two girls in a
+passing gondola.
+
+"They are distant cousins of mine, Maria and Giulia Polani. They only
+returned a short time since from Corfu. Their father is one of the
+richest merchants of our city. He has for the last three years been
+living in Corfu, which is the headquarters of his trade. The family is
+an old one, and has given doges to Venice. They are two of our richest
+heiresses, for they have no brothers. Their mother died soon after the
+birth of Giulia."
+
+"They both look very young," Francis said.
+
+"Maria is about sixteen, her sister two years younger. There will be no
+lack of suitors for their hands, for although the family is not
+politically powerful, as it used to be, their wealth would cause them
+to be gladly received in our very first families."
+
+"Who was the middle-aged lady sitting between them?"
+
+"She is only their duenna," Matteo said carelessly. "She has been with
+them since they were children, and their father places great confidence
+in her. And he had need to, for Maria will ere long be receiving
+bouquets and perfumed notes from many a young gallant."
+
+"I can quite fancy that," Francis said, "for she is very pretty as well
+as very rich, and, as far as I have observed, the two things do not go
+very often together. However, no doubt by this time her father has
+pretty well arranged in his mind whom she is to marry."
+
+"I expect so," agreed Matteo.
+
+"That is the worst of being born of good family. You have got to marry
+some one of your father's choice, not your own, and that choice is
+determined simply by the desire to add to the political influence of
+the family, to strengthen distant ties, or to obtain powerful
+connections. I suppose it is the same everywhere, Matteo, but I do
+think that a man or woman ought to have some voice in a matter of such
+importance to them."
+
+"I think so, too, at the present time," Matteo laughed; "but I don't
+suppose that I shall be of that opinion when I have a family of sons
+and daughters to marry.
+
+"This gondola of yours must be a fast one indeed, Francisco, for with
+only one rower she keeps up with almost all the pair oared boats, and
+your boy is not exerting himself to the utmost, either."
+
+"She can fly along, I can tell you, Matteo. You shall come out in her
+some evening when Giuseppi and I both take oars. I have had her ten
+days now, and we have not come across anything that can hold her for a
+moment."
+
+"It is always useful," Matteo said, "to have a fast boat. It is
+invaluable in case you have been getting into a scrape, and have one of
+the boats of the city watch in chase of you."
+
+"I hope I sha'n't want it for any purpose of that sort," Francis
+answered, laughing. "I do not think I am likely to give cause to the
+city watch to chase me."
+
+"I don't think you are, Francisco, but there is never any saying."
+
+"At any rate it is always useful to be able to go fast if necessary,
+and if we did want to get away, I do not think there are many
+pair-oared gondolas afloat that would overtake us, though a good four
+oar might do so. Giuseppi and I are so accustomed to each other's
+stroke now, that though in a heavy boat we might not be a match for two
+men, in a light craft like this, where weight does not count for so
+much, we would not mind entering her for a race against the two best
+gondoliers on the canals, in an ordinary boat."
+
+A few evenings later, Francis was returning homewards at about half
+past ten, when, in passing along a quiet canal, the boat was hailed
+from the shore.
+
+"Shall we take him, Messer Francisco?" Giuseppi asked in a low voice;
+for more than once they had late in the evening taken a fare.
+
+Francis rowed, like Giuseppi, in his shirt, and in the darkness they
+were often taken for a pair-oared gondola on the lookout for a fare.
+Francis had sometimes accepted the offer, because it was an amusement
+to see where the passenger wished to go--to guess whether he was a
+lover hastening to keep an appointment, a gambler on a visit to some
+quiet locality, where high play went on unknown to the authorities, or
+simply one who had by some error missed his own gondola, and was
+anxious to return home. It made no difference to him which way he
+rowed. It was always possible that some adventure was to be met with,
+and the fare paid was a not unwelcome addition to Giuseppi's funds.
+
+"Yes, we may as well take him," he replied to Giuseppi's question.
+
+"You are in no hurry to get to bed, I suppose?" the man who had hailed
+them said as the boat drew up against the wall of the canal.
+
+"It does not make much difference to us, if we are well paid, to keep
+awake," Giuseppi said.
+
+Upon such occasions he was always the spokesman.
+
+"You know San Nicolo?"
+
+"Yes, I know it," Giuseppi said; "but it is a long row--six miles, if
+it's a foot."
+
+"You will have to wait there for an hour or two, but I will give you
+half a ducat for your night's work."
+
+"What do you say, partner?" Giuseppi asked Francis.
+
+"We may as well go," the lad replied after a moment's pause.
+
+The row was certainly a long one, but the night was delightful, and the
+half ducat was a prize for Giuseppi; but what influenced Francis
+principally in accepting was curiosity. San Nicolo was a little sandy
+islet lying quite on the outside of the group of islands. It was
+inhabited only by a few fishermen; and Francis wondered that a man,
+evidently by his voice and manner of address belonging to the upper
+class, should want to go to such a place as this at this hour of the
+night. Certainly no ordinary motives could actuate him.
+
+As the stranger took his place in the boat, Francis saw by the light of
+the stars that he was masked; but there was nothing very unusual in
+this, as masks were not unfrequently worn at night by young gallants,
+when engaged on any frolic in which they wished their identity to be
+unrecognized. Still it added to the interest of the trip; and dipping
+his oar in the water he set out at a slow, steady stroke well within
+his power. He adopted this partly in view of the length of the row
+before them, partly because the idea struck him that it might be as
+well that their passenger should not suspect that the boat was other
+than an ordinary gondola. The passenger, however, was well satisfied
+with the speed, for they passed two or three other gondolas before
+issuing from the narrow canals, and starting across the broad stretch
+of the lagoon.
+
+Not a word was spoken until the gondola neared its destination. Then
+the passenger said:
+
+"You row well. If you like the job I may employ you again."
+
+"We are always ready to earn money," Francis said, speaking in a gruff
+voice quite unlike his own.
+
+"Very well. I will let you know, as we return, what night I shall want
+you again. I suppose you can keep your mouths shut on occasion, and can
+go without gossiping to your fellows as to any job on which you are
+employed?"
+
+"We can do that," Francis said. "It's no matter to us where our
+customers want to go, if they are willing to pay for it; and as to
+gossiping, there is a saying, 'A silver gag is the best for keeping the
+mouth closed.'"
+
+A few minutes later the bow of the gondola ran up on the sandy shore of
+San Nicolo. The stranger made his way forward and leapt out, and with
+the words, "It may be two hours before I am back," walked rapidly away.
+
+"Why, Messer Francisco," Giuseppi said when their passenger was well
+out of hearing, "what on earth possessed you to accept a fare to such a
+place as this? Of course, for myself, I am glad enough to earn half a
+ducat, which will buy me a new jacket with silver buttons for the next
+festa; but to make such a journey as this was too much, and it will be
+very late before we are back. If the padrone knew it he would be very
+angry."
+
+"I didn't do it to enable you to earn half a ducat, Giuseppi, although
+I am glad enough you should do so; but I did it because it seemed to
+promise the chance of an adventure. There must be something in this. A
+noble--for I have no doubt he is one--would never be coming out to San
+Nicolo, at this time of night, without some very strong motive. There
+can be no rich heiress whom he might want to carry off living here, so
+that can't be what he has come for. I think there must be some secret
+meeting, for as we came across the lagoon I saw one or two beats in the
+distance heading in this direction. Anyhow, I mean to try and find out
+what it all means."
+
+"You had better not, sir," Giuseppi said earnestly. "If there is any
+plot on foot we had best not get mixed up in it. No one is too high or
+too low to escape the vengeance of the council, if found plotting
+against the state; and before now gondolas, staved in and empty, have
+been found drifting on the lagoons, and the men who rowed them have
+never been heard of again. Once in the dungeons of Saint Mark it would
+be of no use to plead that you had entered into the affair simply for
+the amusement. The fact that you were not a regular boatman would make
+the matter all the worse, and the maxim that 'dead men tell no tales'
+is largely acted upon in Venice.
+
+"I think, sir, the best plan will be to row straight back, and leave
+our fare to find his way home as best he may."
+
+"I mean to find something out about it if I can, Giuseppi. A state
+secret may be dangerous, but it may be valuable. Anyhow, there can be
+no great risk in it. On the water I think we can show our heels to
+anyone who chases us; and once in Venice, we are absolutely safe, for
+no one would suspect a gondola of Mr. Hammond, the English merchant, of
+having any connection with a hired craft with its two gondoliers."
+
+"That is true enough, sir; but I don't like it for all that. However,
+if you have made up your mind to it, there is nothing more to be said."
+
+"Very well. You stay here, and I will go and look round. You had better
+get the gondola afloat, and be ready to start at the instant, so that,
+if I should have to run for it, I can jump on board and be off in a
+moment."
+
+Francis made his way quietly up to the little group of huts inhabited
+by the fishermen, but in none of them could he see any signs of
+life--no lights were visible, nor could he hear the murmur of voices.
+There were, he knew, other buildings scattered about on the island; but
+he had only the light of the stars to guide him, and, not knowing
+anything of the exact position of the houses, he thought it better to
+return to the boat.
+
+"I can find no signs of them, Giuseppi."
+
+"All the better, Messer Francisco. There are some sorts of game, which
+it is well for the safety of the hunter not to discover. I was very
+glad, I can tell you, when I heard your whistle, and made out your
+figure returning at a walk. Now you are back I will take an hour's nap,
+and I should advise you to do the same."
+
+But Francis had no thought of sleep, and sat down at his end of the
+gondola, wondering over the adventure, and considering whether or not
+it would be worth while to follow it up another night. That it was a
+plot of some sort he had little doubt. There were always in Venice two
+parties, equally anxious perhaps for the prosperity of the republic,
+but differing widely as to the means by which that prosperity would be
+best achieved, and as to the alliances which would, in the long run,
+prove most beneficial to her. There were also needy and desperate men
+ready enough to take bribes from any who might offer them, and to
+intrigue in the interest of Padua or Ferrara, Verona, Milan, or
+Genoa--whichever might for the time be their paymasters.
+
+Francis was English, but he had been long enough in Venice to feel a
+pride in the island city, and to be almost as keenly interested in her
+fortunes as were his companions and friends; and a certain sense of
+duty, mingled with his natural love of adventure, decided him to follow
+up the chance which had befallen him, and to endeavour to ascertain the
+nature of the plot which was, he had little doubt, being hatched at San
+Nicolo.
+
+In a very few minutes the regular breathing of Giuseppi, who had curled
+himself up in the bottom of the boat, showed that he had gone to sleep;
+and he did not stir until, an hour and a half after the return of
+Francis, the latter heard the fall of footsteps approaching the
+gondola.
+
+"Wake up, Giuseppi, here comes our fare!"
+
+Francis stood up and stretched himself as the stranger came alongside,
+as if he too had been fast asleep.
+
+"Take me back to the spot where I hailed you," the fare said briefly,
+as he stepped into the boat and threw himself back on the cushions, and
+without a word the lads dipped their oars in the water and the gondola
+glided away towards Venice.
+
+Just as they reached the mouth of the Grand Canal, and were about to
+turn into it, a six-oared gondola shot out from under the point, and a
+voice called out:
+
+"Stop, in the name of the republic, and give an account of yourselves!"
+
+"Row on," the passenger exclaimed, starting up. "Ten ducats if you can
+set me safely on shore."
+
+Had the lads been real gondoliers, it is probable that even this
+tempting offer would not have induced them to disregard the order from
+the galley, for they would have run no slight risk in so doing. But
+Francis had no desire to be caught, and perhaps imprisoned for a
+considerable time, until he was able to convince the council that his
+share of the night's work had been merely the result of a boyish freak.
+With two strokes of his oar, therefore, he swept the boat's head round,
+thereby throwing their pursuers directly astern of them; then he and
+Giuseppi threw their whole weight into the stroke, and the boat danced
+over the water at a pace very different to that at which it had
+hitherto proceeded.
+
+But, fast as they went, the galley travelled somewhat faster, the
+rowers doing their utmost in obedience to the angry orders of their
+officer; and had the race been continued on a broad stretch of water,
+it would sooner or later have overhauled the gondola. But Francis was
+perfectly aware of this, and edged the boat away towards the end of the
+Piazzetta, and then, shooting her head round, dashed at full speed
+along the canal by the side of the ducal palace, the galley being at
+the time some forty yards behind.
+
+"The first to the right," Francis said, and with scarce a pause in
+their speed, they turned off at right angles up the first canal they
+came to. Again and again they turned and twisted, regardless of the
+direction in which the canals took them, their only object being to
+gain on their pursuers, who lost considerably at each turn, being
+obliged always to check their speed, before arriving at each angle, to
+allow the boat to go round.
+
+In ten minutes she was far behind, and they then abated their speed,
+and turned the boat's head in the direction in which they wished to go.
+
+"By San Paolo," the stranger said, "that was well done! You are masters
+of your craft, and sent your boat along at a pace which must have
+astonished those fellows in that lumbering galley. I had no reason to
+fear them, but I do not care to be interfered with and questioned by
+these jacks-in-office of the republic."
+
+A few minutes later they reached the place where he embarked, and as he
+got out he handed the money he had promised to Giuseppi.
+
+"Next Thursday night," he said, "at half past ten."
+
+"It seems a dangerous sort of service, signor," Giuseppi said
+hesitatingly. "It is no joke to disobey the officers of the republic,
+and next time we may not be so fortunate."
+
+"It's worth taking a little risk when you are well paid," the other
+said, turning away, "and it is not likely we shall run against one of
+the state galleys another night."
+
+"Home, now, Giuseppi," Francis said, "we can talk about it tomorrow.
+It's the best night's work you ever did in your life, and as I have had
+a grand excitement we are both contented."
+
+During the next few days Francis debated seriously with himself whether
+to follow up the adventure; but he finally decided on doing so, feeling
+convinced that there could be no real danger, even were the boat seized
+by one of the state galleys; as his story, that he had gone into the
+matter simply to discover whether any plot was intended against the
+republic, would finally be believed, as it would be beyond the bounds
+of probability that a lad of his age could himself have been concerned
+in such a conspiracy. As to Giuseppi, he offered no remonstrance when
+Francis told him that he intended to go out to San Nicolo on the
+following Thursday, for the ten ducats he had received were a sum
+larger than he could have saved in a couple of years' steady work, and
+were indeed quite a fortune in his eyes. Another such a sum, and he
+would be able, when the time came, to buy a gondola of his own, to
+marry, and set up housekeeping in grand style. As for the danger, if
+Francis was willing to run it he could do the same; for after all, a
+few months' imprisonment was the worst that could befall him for his
+share in the business.
+
+Before the day came Matteo Giustiniani told Francis a piece of news
+which interested him.
+
+"You remember my cousin Maria Polani, whom we met the other evening on
+the Grand Canal?"
+
+"Of course I do, Matteo. What of her?"
+
+"Well, what do you think? Ruggiero Mocenigo, whom I pointed out to you
+on the Piazza--the man who had been banished for two years--has asked
+for her hand in marriage."
+
+"He is not going to have it, I hope," Francis said indignantly. "It
+would be a shame, indeed, to give her to such a man as that."
+
+"That is just what her father thought, Francisco, and he refused
+Ruggiero pretty curtly, and told him, I believe, he would rather see
+her in her grave than married to him; and I hear there was a regular
+scene, and Ruggiero went away swearing Polani should regret his
+refusal."
+
+"I suppose your cousin does not care much about his threats," Francis
+said.
+
+"I don't suppose he cares much about them," Matteo replied; "but
+Ruggiero is very powerfully connected, and may do him damage, not to
+speak of the chance of his hiring a bravo to stab him on the first
+opportunity. I know my father advised Polani to be very cautious where
+he went at night for a time. This fellow, Ruggiero, is a dangerous
+enemy. If he were to get Polani stabbed, it would be next to impossible
+to prove that it was his doing, however strong the suspicion might be;
+for mere suspicion goes for nothing against a man with his influence
+and connections. He has two near relations on the council, and if he
+were to burn down Polani's mansion, and to carry off Maria, the chances
+are against his being punished, if he did but keep out of the way for a
+few months."
+
+As in England powerful barons were in the habit of waging private wars
+with each other, and the carrying off a bride by force was no very rare
+event, this state of things did not appear, to Francis, as outrageous
+as it would do to an English lad of the present day, but he shook his
+head.
+
+"Of course one understands, Matteo, that everywhere powerful nobles do
+things which would be regarded as crimes if done by others; but,
+elsewhere, people can fortify their houses, and call out and arm their
+retainers, and stand on their guard. But that here, in a city like
+this, private feuds should be carried on, and men stabbed when
+unconscious of danger, seems to me detestable."
+
+"Of course it isn't right," Matteo said carelessly, "but I don't know
+how you are going to put a stop to it; and after all, our quarrels here
+only involve a life or two, while in other countries nobles go to war
+with each other, and hundreds of lives, of people who have nothing to
+do with the quarrel, may be sacrificed."
+
+This was a light in which Francis had hardly looked upon the matter
+before, and he was obliged to own that even private assassination,
+detestable as it was, yet caused much less suffering than feudal war.
+Still, he was not disposed entirely to give in to his friend's opinion.
+
+"That is true, Matteo; but at the same time, in a war it is fair
+fighting, while a stab in the back is a cowardly business."
+
+"It is not always fair fighting," Matteo replied. "You hear of castles
+being surprised, and the people massacred without a chance of
+resistance; of villages being burned, and the people butchered
+unresistingly. I don't think there is so much more fairness one way
+than the other. Polani knows he will have to be careful, and if he
+likes he can hire bravos to put Ruggiero out of the way, just as
+Ruggiero can do to remove him. There's a good deal to be said for both
+sides of the question."
+
+Francis felt this was so, and that although he had an abhorrence of the
+Venetian method of settling quarrels, he saw that as far as the public
+were concerned, it was really preferable to the feudal method, of both
+parties calling out their retainers and going to war with each other,
+especially as assassinations played no inconsiderable part in the
+feudal struggles of the time.
+
+On the Thursday night the gondola was in waiting at the agreed spot.
+Francis had thought it probable that the stranger might this time ask
+some questions as to where they lived and their usual place of plying
+for hire, and would endeavour to find out as much as he could about
+them, as they could not but suspect that he was engaged in some very
+unusual enterprise. He had therefore warned Giuseppi to be very careful
+in his replies. He knew that it was not necessary to say more, for
+Giuseppi had plenty of shrewdness, and would, he was sure, invent some
+plausible story without the least difficulty, possessing, as he did,
+plenty of the easy mendacity so general among the lower classes of the
+races inhabiting countries bordering on the Mediterranean. Their fare
+came down to the gondola a few minutes after the clock had tolled the
+half hour.
+
+"I see you are punctual," he said, "which is more than most of you men
+are."
+
+Francis was rowing the bow oar, and therefore stood with his back to
+the passenger, and was not likely to be addressed by him, as he would
+naturally turn to Giuseppi, who stood close behind him. As Francis had
+expected, as soon as they were out on the lagoon the passenger turned
+to his companion and began to question him.
+
+"I cannot see your faces," he said; "but by your figures you are both
+young, are you not?"
+
+"I am but twenty-two," Giuseppi said, "and my brother is a year
+younger."
+
+"And what are your names?"
+
+"Giovanni and Beppo Morani."
+
+"And is this boat your own?"
+
+"It is, signor. Our father died three years ago, leaving us his boat."
+
+"And where do you usually ply?"
+
+"Anywhere, signor, just as the fancy seizes us. Sometimes one place is
+good, sometimes another."
+
+"And where do you live?"
+
+"We don't live anywhere, signor. When night comes, and business is
+over, we tie up the boat to a post, wrap ourselves up, and go to sleep
+at the bottom. It costs nothing, and we are just as comfortable there
+as we should be on straw in a room."
+
+"Then you must be saving money."
+
+"Yes; we are laying money by. Some day, I suppose, we shall marry, and
+our wives must have homes. Besides, sometimes we are lazy and don't
+work. One must have some pleasure, you know."
+
+"Would you like to enter service?"
+
+"No, signor. We prefer being our own masters; to take a fare or leave
+it as we please."
+
+"Your boat is a very fast one. You went at a tremendous rate when the
+galley was after us the other night."
+
+"The boat is like others," Giuseppi said carelessly; "but most men can
+row fast when the alternative is ten ducats one way or a prison the
+other."
+
+"Then there would be no place where I could always find you in the
+daytime if I wanted you?"
+
+"No, signor; there would be no saying where we might be. We have
+sometimes regular customers, and it would not pay us to disappoint
+them, even if you paid us five times the ordinary fare. But we could
+always meet you at night anywhere, when you choose to appoint."
+
+"But how can I appoint," the passenger said irritably, "if I don't know
+where to find you?"
+
+Giuseppi was silent for a stroke or two.
+
+"If your excellency would write in figures, half past ten or eleven, or
+whatever time we should meet you, just at the base of the column of the
+palace--the corner one on the Piazzetta--we should be sure to be there
+sometime or other during the day, and would look for it."
+
+"You can read and write, then?" the passenger asked.
+
+"I cannot do that, signor," Giuseppi said, "but I can make out figures.
+That is necessary to us, as how else could we keep time with our
+customers? We can read the sundials, as everyone else can; but as to
+reading and writing, that is not for poor lads like us."
+
+The stranger was satisfied. Certainly every one could read the
+sundials; and the gondoliers would, as they said, understand his
+figures if he wrote them.
+
+"Very well," he said. "It is probable I shall generally know, each time
+I discharge you, when I shall want you again; but should there be any
+change, I will make the figures on the base of the column at the corner
+of the Piazzetta, and that will mean the hour at which you are to meet
+me that night at the usual place."
+
+Nothing more was said, until the gondola arrived at the same spot at
+which it had landed the passenger on the previous occasion.
+
+"I shall be back in about the same time as before," the fare said when
+he alighted.
+
+As he strode away into the darkness, Francis followed him. He was
+shoeless, for at that time the lower class seldom wore any protection
+to the feet, unless when going a journey over rough ground. Among the
+gondoliers shoes were unknown; and Francis himself generally took his
+off, for coolness and comfort, when out for the evening in his boat.
+
+He kept some distance behind the man he was following, for as there
+were no hedges or inclosures, he could make out his figure against the
+sky at a considerable distance. As Francis had expected, he did not
+make towards the village, but kept along the island at a short distance
+from the edge of the water.
+
+Presently Francis heard the dip of oars, and a gondola ran up on the
+sands halfway between himself and the man he was following. He threw
+himself down on the ground. Two men alighted, and went in the same
+direction as the one who had gone ahead.
+
+Francis made a detour, so as to avoid being noticed by the gondoliers,
+and then again followed. After keeping more than a quarter of a mile
+near the water, the two figures ahead struck inshore. Francis followed
+them, and in a few minutes they stopped at a black mass, rising above
+the sand. He heard them knock, and then a low murmur, as if they were
+answering some question from within. Then they entered, and a door
+closed.
+
+He moved up to the building. It was a hut of some size, but had a
+deserted appearance. It stood between two ridges of low sand hills, and
+the sand had drifted till it was halfway up the walls. There was no
+garden or inclosure round it, and any passerby would have concluded
+that it was uninhabited. The shutters were closed, and no gleam of
+light showed from within.
+
+After stepping carefully round it, Francis took his post round the
+angle close to the door, and waited. Presently he heard footsteps
+approaching--three knocks were given on the door, and a voice within
+asked, "Who is there?"
+
+The reply was, "One who is in distress."
+
+The question came, "What ails you?"
+
+And the answer, "All is wrong within."
+
+Then there was a sound of bars being withdrawn, and the door opened and
+closed again.
+
+There were four other arrivals. The same questions were asked and
+answered each time. Then some minutes elapsed without any fresh comers,
+and Francis thought that the number was probably complete. He lay down
+on the sand, and with his dagger began to make a hole through the wood,
+which was old and rotten, and gave him no difficulty in piercing it.
+
+He applied his eye to the orifice, and saw that there were some twelve
+men seated round a table. Of those facing him he knew three or four by
+sight; all were men of good family. Two of them belonged to the
+council, but not to the inner Council of Ten. One, sitting at the top
+of the table, was speaking; but although Francis applied his ear to the
+hole he had made, he could hear but a confused murmur, and could not
+catch the words. He now rose cautiously, scooped up the sand so as to
+cover the hole in the wall, and swept a little down over the spot where
+he had been lying, although he had no doubt that the breeze, which
+would spring up before morning, would soon drift the light shifting
+sand over it, and obliterate the mark of his recumbent figure. Then he
+went round to the other side of the hut and bored another hole, so as
+to obtain a view of the faces of those whose backs had before been
+towards him.
+
+One of these was Ruggiero Mocenigo. Another was a stranger to Francis,
+and some difference in the fashion of his garments indicated that he
+was not a Venetian, but, Francis thought, a Hungarian. The other three
+were not nobles. One of them Francis recognized, as being a man of much
+influence among the fishermen and sailors. The other two were unknown
+to him.
+
+As upwards of an hour had been spent in making the two holes and taking
+observations, Francis thought it better now to make his way back to his
+boat, especially as it was evident that he would gain nothing by
+remaining longer. Therefore, after taking the same precautions as
+before, to conceal all signs of his presence, he made his way across
+the sands back to his gondola.
+
+"Heaven be praised, you are back again!" Giuseppi said, when he heard
+his low whistle, as he came down to the boat. "I have been in a fever
+ever since I lost sight of you. Have you succeeded?"
+
+"I have found out that there is certainly a plot of some sort being got
+up, and I know some of those concerned in it, but I could hear nothing
+that went on. Still, I have succeeded better than I expected, and I am
+well satisfied with the night's work."
+
+"I hope you won't come again, Messer Francisco. In the first place, you
+may not always have the fortune to get away unseen. In the next place,
+it is a dangerous matter to have to do with conspiracies, whichever
+side you are on. The way to live long in Venice is to make no enemies."
+
+"Yes, I know that, Giuseppi, and I haven't decided yet what to do in
+the matter."
+
+A quarter of an hour later, their fare returned to the boat. This time
+they took a long detour, and, entering Venice by one of the many
+canals, reached the landing place without adventure. The stranger
+handed Giuseppi a ducat.
+
+"I do not know when I shall want you again; but I will mark the hour,
+as agreed, on the pillar. Do not fail to go there every afternoon; and
+even if you don't see it, you might as well come round here at half
+past ten of a night. I may want you suddenly."
+
+Before going to sleep that night, Francis thought the matter over
+seriously, and finally concluded that he would have no more to do with
+it. No doubt, by crossing over to San Nicolo in the daytime, he might
+be able to loosen a plank at the back of the hut, or to cut so large an
+opening that he could hear, as well as see, what was going on within;
+but supposing he discovered that a plot was on hand in favour of the
+enemies of Venice, such as Padua or Hungary, what was he to do next? At
+the best, if he denounced it, and the officers of the republic
+surrounded the hut when the conspirators were gathered there, arrested
+them, and found upon them, or in their houses, proofs sufficient to
+condemn them, his own position would not be enviable. He would gain,
+indeed, the gratitude of the republic; but as for rewards, he had no
+need of them. On the other hand, he would draw upon himself the enmity
+of some eight or ten important families, and all their connections and
+followers, and his life would be placed in imminent danger. They would
+be all the more bitter against him, inasmuch as the discovery would not
+have been made by accident, but by an act of deliberate prying into
+matters which concerned him in no way, he not being a citizen of the
+republic.
+
+So far his action in the matter had been a mere boyish freak; and now
+that he saw it was likely to become an affair of grave importance,
+involving the lives of many persons, he determined to have nothing
+further to do with it.
+
+
+
+Chapter 3: On The Grand Canal.
+
+
+Giuseppi, next morning, heard the announcement of the determination of
+Francis, to interfere no further in the matter of the conspiracy at San
+Nicolo, with immense satisfaction. For the last few nights he had
+scarcely slept, and whenever he dozed off, dreamed either of being
+tortured in dungeons, or of being murdered in his gondola; and no money
+could make up for the constant terrors which assailed him. In his
+waking moments he was more anxious for his employer than for himself,
+for it was upon him that the vengeance of the conspirators would fall,
+rather than upon a young gondolier, who was only obeying the orders of
+his master.
+
+It was, then, with unbounded relief that he heard Francis had decided
+to go no more out to San Nicolo.
+
+During the next few days Francis went more frequently than usual to the
+Piazza of Saint Mark, and had no difficulty in recognizing there the
+various persons he had seen in the hut, and in ascertaining their names
+and families. One of the citizens he had failed to recognize was a
+large contractor in the salt works on the mainland. The other was the
+largest importer of beasts for the supply of meat to the markets of the
+city.
+
+Francis was well satisfied with the knowledge he had gained. It might
+never be of any use to him, but it might, on the other hand, be of
+importance when least expected.
+
+As a matter of precaution he drew up an exact account of the
+proceedings of the two nights on the lagoons, giving an account of the
+meeting, and the names of the persons present, and placed it in a
+drawer in his room. He told Giuseppi what he had done.
+
+"I do not think there is the least chance of our ever being recognized,
+Giuseppi. There was not enough light for the man to have made out our
+features. Still there is nothing like taking precautions, and if--I
+don't think it is likely, mind--but if anything should ever happen to
+me--if I should be missing, for example, and not return by the
+following morning--you take that paper out of my drawer and drop it
+into the Lion's Mouth. Then, if you are questioned, tell the whole
+story."
+
+"But they will never believe me, Messer Francisco," Giuseppi said in
+alarm.
+
+"They will believe you, because it will be a confirmation of my story;
+but I don't think that there is the least chance of our ever hearing
+anything further about it."
+
+"Why not denounce them at once without putting your name to it,"
+Giuseppi said. "Then they could pounce upon them over there, and find
+out all about it for themselves?"
+
+"I have thought about it, Giuseppi, but there is something treacherous
+in secret denunciations. These men have done me no harm, and as a
+foreigner their political schemes do not greatly concern me. I should
+not like to think I had sent twelve men to the dungeons and perhaps to
+death."
+
+"I think it's a pity you ever went there at all, Messer Francisco."
+
+"Well, perhaps it is, Giuseppi; but I never thought it would turn out a
+serious affair like this. However, I do wish I hadn't gone now; not
+that I think it really matters, or that we shall ever hear anything
+more of it. We may, perhaps, some day see the result of this
+conspiracy, that is, if its objects are such as I guess them to be;
+namely, to form a party opposed to war with Hungary, Padua, or Genoa."
+
+For some days after this Francis abstained from late excursions in the
+gondola. It was improbable that he or Giuseppi would be recognized did
+their late passenger meet them. Still, it was possible that they might
+be so; and when he went out he sat quietly among the cushions while
+Giuseppi rowed, as it would be a pair-oared gondola the stranger would
+be looking for. He was sure that the conspirator would feel uneasy when
+the boat did not come to the rendezvous, especially when they found
+that, on three successive days, figures were marked as had been
+arranged on the column at the corner of the Piazzetta.
+
+Giuseppi learned indeed, a week later, that inquiries had been made
+among the gondoliers for a boat rowed by two brothers, Giovanni and
+Beppo; and the inquirer, who was dressed as a retainer of a noble
+family, had offered five ducats reward for information concerning it.
+No such names, however, were down upon the register of gondoliers
+licensed to ply for hire. Giuseppi learned that the search had been
+conducted quietly but vigorously, and that several young gondoliers who
+rowed together had been seen and questioned.
+
+The general opinion, among the boatmen, was that some lady must have
+been carried off, and that her friends were seeking for a clue as to
+the spot to which she had been taken.
+
+One evening Francis had been strolling on the Piazza with Matteo, and
+had remained out later than he had done since the night of his last
+visit to San Nicolo. He took his seat in the gondola, and when Giuseppi
+asked him if he would go home, said he would first take a turn or two
+on the Grand Canal as the night was close and sultry.
+
+There was no moon now, and most of the gondolas carried torches.
+Giuseppi was paddling quietly, when a pair-oared gondola shot past
+them, and by the light of the torch it carried, Francis recognized the
+ladies sitting in it to be Maria and Giulia Polani with their duenna;
+two armed retainers sat behind them. They were, Francis supposed,
+returning from spending the evening at the house of some of their
+friends. There were but few boats now passing along the canal.
+
+Polani's gondola was a considerable distance ahead, when Francis heard
+a sudden shout of, "Mind where you are going!"
+
+Then there was a crash of two gondolas striking each other, followed by
+an outburst of shouts and cries of alarm, with, Francis thought, the
+clash of swords.
+
+"Row, Giuseppi!" he exclaimed, leaping from his seat and catching up
+the other oar; and with swift and powerful strokes the two lads drove
+the gondola towards the scene of what was either an accident, or an
+attempt at crime.
+
+They had no doubt which it was when they arrived at the spot. A
+four-oared gondola lay alongside that of the Polanis, and the
+gondoliers with their oars, and the two retainers with their swords,
+had offered a stout resistance to an armed party who were trying to
+board her from the other craft, but their resistance was well nigh over
+by the time Francis brought his gondola alongside.
+
+One of the retainers had fallen with a sword thrust through his body,
+and a gondolier had been knocked overboard by a blow from an oar. The
+two girls were standing up screaming, and the surviving retainer was
+being borne backwards by three or four armed men, who were slashing
+furiously at him.
+
+"Quick, ladies, jump into my boat!" Francis exclaimed as he came
+alongside, and, leaning over, he dragged them one after the other into
+his boat, just as their last defender fell.
+
+With a fierce oath the leader of the assailants was about to spring
+into the gondola, when Francis, snatching up his oar, smote him with
+all his strength on the head as he was in the act of springing, and he
+fell with a heavy splash into the water between the boats.
+
+A shout of alarm and rage rose from his followers, but the gondolas
+were now separated, and in another moment that of Francis was flying
+along the canal at the top of its speed.
+
+"Calm yourselves, ladies," Francis said. "There is no fear of pursuit.
+They will stop to pick up the man I knocked into the canal, and by the
+time they get him on board we shall be out of their reach."
+
+"What will become of the signora?" the eldest girl asked, when they
+recovered a little from their agitation.
+
+"No harm will befall her, you may be sure," Francis said. "It was
+evidently an attempt to carry you off, and now that you have escaped
+they will care nothing for your duenna. She seemed to have lost her
+head altogether, for as I lifted you into the boat she clung so fast to
+your garments that I fancy a portion of them were left in her grasp."
+
+"Do you know where to take us? I see you are going in the right
+direction?" the girl asked.
+
+"To the Palazzo Polani," Francis said. "I have the honour of being a
+friend of your cousin, Matteo Giustiniani, and being with him one day
+when you passed in your gondola, he named you to me."
+
+"A friend of Matteo!" the girl repeated in surprise. "Pardon me,
+signor, I thought you were two passing gondoliers. It was so dark that
+I could not recognize you; and, you see, it is so unusual to see a
+gentleman rowing."
+
+"I am English, signora, and we are fond of strong exercise, and so
+after nightfall, when it cannot shock my friends, I often take an oar
+myself."
+
+"I thank you, sir, with all my heart, for my sister and myself, for the
+service you have rendered us. I can hardly understand what has passed,
+even now it seems like a dream. We were going quietly along home, when
+a large dark gondola dashed out from one of the side canals, and nearly
+ran us down. Our gondolier shouted to warn them, but they ran
+alongside, and then some men jumped on board, and there was a terrible
+fight, and every moment I expected that the gondola would have been
+upset. Beppo was knocked overboard, and I saw old Nicolini fall; and
+then, just as it seemed all over, you appeared suddenly by our side,
+and dragged us on board this boat before I had time to think."
+
+"I am afraid I was rather rough, signora, but there was no time to
+stand on ceremony. Here is the palazzo."
+
+The boat was brought up by the side of the steps. Francis leapt ashore
+and rang the bell, and then assisted the girls to land. In a minute the
+door was thrown open, and two servitors with torches appeared. There
+was an exclamation of astonishment as they saw the young ladies alone
+with a strange attendant.
+
+"I will do myself the honour of calling tomorrow to inquire if you are
+any the worse for your adventure, signora."
+
+"No, indeed," the eldest girl said. "You must come up with us and see
+our father. We must tell him what has happened; and he will be angry
+indeed, did we suffer our rescuer to depart without his having an
+opportunity of thanking him."
+
+Francis bowed and followed the girls upstairs. They entered a large,
+very handsomely furnished apartment where a tall man was sitting
+reading.
+
+"Why, girls," he exclaimed as he rose, "what has happened? you look
+strangely excited. Where is your duenna? and who is this young
+gentleman who accompanies you?"
+
+"We have been attacked, father, on our way home," both the girls
+exclaimed.
+
+"Attacked?" Signor Polani repeated. "Who has dared to venture on such
+an outrage?"
+
+"We don't know, father," Maria said. "It was a four-oared gondola that
+ran suddenly into us. We thought it was an accident till a number of
+men, with their swords drawn, leaped on board. Then Nicolini and
+Francia drew their swords and tried to defend us, and Beppo and Jacopo
+both fought bravely too with their oars; but Beppo was knocked
+overboard, and I am afraid Nicolini and Francia are killed, and in
+another moment they would have got at us, when this young gentleman
+came alongside in his gondola, and dragged us on board, for we were too
+bewildered and frightened to do anything. One of them--he seemed the
+leader of the party--tried to jump on board, but our protector struck
+him a terrible blow with his oar, and he fell into the water, and then
+the gondola made off, and, so far as we could see, they did not chase
+us."
+
+"It is a scandalous outrage, and I will demand justice at the hands of
+the council.
+
+"Young sir, you have laid me under an obligation I shall never forget.
+You have saved my daughter from the worst calamity that could befall
+her. Who is it to whom I am thus indebted?"
+
+"My name is Francis Hammond. My father is an English merchant who has,
+for the last four years, established himself here."
+
+"I know him well by repute," Polani said. "I trust I shall know more of
+him in the future.
+
+"But where is your duenna, girls?"
+
+"She remained behind in the gondola, father; she seemed too frightened
+to move."
+
+"The lady seemed to have lost her head altogether," Francis said. "As I
+was lifting your daughters into my gondola, in a very hasty and
+unceremonious way--for the resistance of your servitors was all but
+overcome, and there was no time to be lost--she held so tightly to
+their robes that they were rent in her hands."
+
+Signor Polani struck a gong.
+
+"Let a gondola be manned instantly," he said, "and let six of you take
+arms and go in search of our boat. Let another man at once summon a
+leech, for some of those on board are, I fear, grievously wounded, if
+not killed."
+
+But there was no occasion to carry out the order concerning the boat,
+for before it was ready to start the missing gondola arrived at the
+steps, rowed by the remaining gondolier. The duenna was lifted out
+sobbing hysterically, and the bodies of the two retainers were then
+landed. One was dead; the other expired a few minutes after being
+brought ashore.
+
+"You did not observe anything particular about the gondola, Maria, or
+you, Giulia?"
+
+"No, father, I saw no mark or escutcheon upon it, though they might
+have been there without my noticing them. I was too frightened to see
+anything; it came so suddenly upon us."
+
+"It was, as far as I noticed, a plain black gondola," Francis said.
+"The men concerned in the affair were all dressed in dark clothes,
+without any distinguishing badges."
+
+"How was it you came to interfere in the fray, young gentleman? Few of
+our people would have done so, holding it to be a dangerous thing, for
+a man to mix himself up in a quarrel in which he had no concern."
+
+"I should probably have mixed myself up in it, in any case, when I
+heard the cry of women," Francis replied; "but, in truth, I recognized
+the signoras as their gondola passed mine, and knew them to be cousins
+of my friend Matteo Giustiniani. Therefore when I heard the outcry
+ahead, I naturally hastened up to do what I could in the matter."
+
+"And well you did it," Polani said heartily. "I trust that the man you
+felled into the water is he who is the author of this outrage. I do not
+think I need seek far for him. My suspicions point very strongly in one
+direction, and tomorrow I will lay the matter before the council and
+demand reparation."
+
+"And now, signor, if you will permit me I will take my leave," Francis
+said. "The hour is late, and the signoras will require rest after their
+fright and emotion."
+
+"I will see you tomorrow, sir. I shall do myself the honour of calling
+early upon your father, to thank him for the great service you have
+rendered me."
+
+Signor Polani accompanied Francis to the steps, while two servants held
+torches while he took his seat in the gondola, and remained standing
+there until the barque had shot away beyond the circle of light.
+
+"We seem fated to have adventures, Giuseppi."
+
+"We do indeed, Messer Francisco, and this is more to my liking than the
+last. We arrived just at the nick of time; another half minute and
+those young ladies would have been carried off. That was a rare blow
+you dealt their leader. I fancy he never came up again, and that that
+is why we got away without being chased."
+
+"I am of that opinion myself, Giuseppi."
+
+"If that is the case we shall not have heard the last of it, Messer
+Francisco. Only someone of a powerful family would venture upon so bold
+a deed, as to try to carry off ladies of birth on the Grand Canal, and
+you may find that this adventure has created for you enemies not to be
+despised."
+
+"I can't help it if it has," Francis said carelessly. "On the other
+hand, it will gain for me an influential friend in Signor Polani, who
+is not only one of the richest merchants of Venice, but closely related
+to a number of the best families of the city."
+
+"His influence will not protect you against the point of a dagger,"
+Giuseppi said. "Your share in this business cannot but become public,
+and I think that it would be wise to give up our evening excursions at
+present."
+
+"I don't agree with you, Giuseppi. We don't go about with torches
+burning, so no one who meets us is likely to recognize us. One gondola
+in the dark is pretty much like another, and however many enemies I
+had, I should not be afraid of traversing the canals."
+
+The next morning, at breakfast time, Francis related to his father his
+adventure of the previous evening.
+
+"It is a mistake, my son, to mix yourself up in broils which do not
+concern you; but in the present instance it may be that your adventure
+will turn out to be advantageous to your prospects. Signor Polani is
+one of the most illustrious merchants of Venice. His name is known
+everywhere in the East, and there is not a port in the Levant where his
+galleys do not trade. The friendship of such a man cannot but be most
+useful to me.
+
+"Upon the other hand, you will probably make some enemies by your
+interference with the plans of some unscrupulous young noble, and
+Venice is not a healthy city for those who have powerful enemies; still
+I think that the advantages will more than balance the risk.
+
+"However, Francis, you must curb your spirit of adventure. You are not
+the son of a baron or count, and the winning of honour and glory by
+deeds of arms neither befits you, nor would be of advantage to you in
+any way. A trader of the city of London should be distinguished for his
+probity and his attention to business; and methinks that, ere long, it
+will be well to send you home to take your place in the counting house
+under the eye of my partner, John Pearson.
+
+"Hitherto I have not checked your love for arms, or your intercourse
+with youths of far higher rank than your own; but I have been for some
+time doubting the wisdom of my course in bringing you out here with me,
+and have regretted that I did not leave you in good hands at home. The
+events of last night show that the time is fast approaching when you
+can no longer be considered a boy, and it will be better for you to
+turn at once into the groove in which you are to travel, than to
+continue a mode of life which will unfit you for the career of a city
+trader."
+
+Francis knew too well his duty towards his father to make any reply,
+but his heart sank at the prospect of settling down in the
+establishment in London. His life there had not been an unpleasant one,
+but he knew that he should find it terribly dull, after the freedom and
+liberty he had enjoyed in Venice. He had never, however, even to
+himself, indulged the idea that any other career, save that of his
+father, could be his; and had regarded it as a matter of course that,
+some day, he would take his place in the shop in Cheapside.
+
+Now that it was suddenly presented to him as something which would
+shortly take place, a feeling of repugnance towards the life came over
+him. Not that he dreamt for a moment of trying to induce his father to
+allow him to seek some other calling. He had been always taught to
+consider the position of a trader of good standing, of the city of
+London, as one of the most desirable possible. The line between the
+noble and the citizen was so strongly marked that no one thought of
+overstepping it. The citizens of London were as proud of their position
+and as tenacious of their rights as were the nobles themselves. They
+were ready enough to take up arms to defend their privileges and to
+resist oppression, whether it came from king or noble; but few indeed,
+even of the wilder spirits of the city, ever thought of taking to arms
+as a profession.
+
+It was true that honour and rank were to be gained, by those who rode
+in the train of great nobles to the wars, but the nobles drew their
+following from their own estates, and not from among the dwellers in
+the cities; and, although the bodies of men-at-arms and archers,
+furnished by the city to the king in his wars, always did their duty
+stoutly in the field, they had no opportunity of distinguishing
+themselves singly. The deeds which attracted attention, and led to
+honour and rank, were performed by the esquires and candidates for the
+rank of knighthood, who rode behind the barons into the thick of the
+French chivalry.
+
+Therefore Francis Hammond had never thought of taking to the profession
+of arms in his own country; though, when the news arrived in Venice of
+desperate fighting at sea with the Genoese, he had thought, to himself,
+that the most glorious thing in life must be to command a well-manned
+galley, as she advanced to the encounter of an enemy superior in
+numbers. He had never dreamed that such an aspiration could ever be
+satisfied--it was merely one of the fancies in which lads so often
+indulge.
+
+Still, the thought that he was soon to return and take his place in the
+shop in Chepe was exceedingly unpleasant to him.
+
+Soon after breakfast the bell at the water gate rang loudly, and a
+minute later the servant entered with the news that Signor Polani was
+below, and begged an interview. Mr. Hammond at once went down to the
+steps to receive his visitor, whom he saluted with all ceremony, and
+conducted upstairs.
+
+"I am known to you by name, no doubt, Signor Hammond, as you are to
+me," the Venetian said, when the first formal greetings were over. "I
+am not a man of ceremony, nor, I judge, are you; but even if I were,
+the present is not an occasion for it. Your son has doubtless told you
+of the inestimable service, which he rendered to me last night, by
+saving my daughters, or rather my eldest daughter--for it was doubtless
+she whom the villains sought--from being borne off by one of the worst
+and most disreputable of the many bad and disreputable young men of
+this city."
+
+"I am indeed glad, Signor Polani, that my son was able to be of service
+to you. I have somewhat blamed myself that I have let him have his own
+way so much, and permitted him to give himself up to exercises of arms,
+more befitting the son of a warlike noble than of a peaceful trader;
+but the quickness and boldness, which the mastery of arms gives, was
+yesterday of service, and I no longer regret the time he has spent,
+since it has enabled him to be of aid to the daughters of Signor
+Polani."
+
+"A mastery of arms is always useful, whether a man be a peace-loving
+citizen, or one who would carve his way to fame by means of his
+weapons. We merchants of the Mediterranean might give up our trade, if
+we were not prepared to defend our ships against the corsairs of
+Barbary, and the pirates who haunt every inlet and islet of the Levant
+now, as they have ever done since the days of Rome. Besides, it is the
+duty of every citizen to defend his native city when attacked. And
+lastly, there are the private enemies, that every man who rises but in
+the smallest degree above his fellows is sure to create for himself.
+
+"Moreover, a training in arms, as you say, gives readiness and
+quickness, it enables the mind to remain calm and steadfast amidst
+dangers of all sorts, and, methinks, it adds not a little to a man's
+dignity and self respect to know that he is equal, man to man, to any
+with whom he may come in contact. Here in Venice we are all soldiers
+and sailors, and your son will make no worse merchant, but rather the
+better, for being able to wield sword and dagger.
+
+"Even now," he said with a smile, "he has proved the advantage of his
+training; for, though I say it not boastfully, Nicholas Polani has it
+in his power to be of some use to his friends, and foremost among them
+he will henceforward count your brave son, and, if you will permit him,
+yourself.
+
+"But you will, I trust, excuse my paying you but a short visit this
+morning, for I am on my way to lay a complaint before the council. I
+have already been round to several of my friends, and Phillipo
+Giustiniani and some six others, nearest related to me, will go with
+me, being all aggrieved at this outrage to a family nearly connected. I
+crave you to permit me to take your son with me, in order that he may
+be at hand, if called upon, to say what he knows of the affair."
+
+"Assuredly it is his duty to go with you if you desire it; although I
+own I am not sorry that he could see, as he tells me, no badge or
+cognizance which would enable him to say aught which can lead to the
+identification of those who would have abducted your daughter. It is
+but too well known a fact that it is dangerous to make enemies in
+Venice, for even the most powerful protection does not avail against
+the stab of a dagger."
+
+"That is true enough," the merchant said. "The frequency of
+assassinations is a disgrace to our city; nor will it ever be put down
+until some men of high rank are executed, and the seignory show that
+they are as jealous of the lives of private citizens, as they are of
+the honour and well being of the republic."
+
+Francis gladly threw aside his books when he was told that Signor
+Polani desired him to accompany him, and was soon seated by the side of
+the merchant in his gondola.
+
+"How old are you, my friend?" the merchant asked him, as the boat
+threaded the mazes of the canals.
+
+"I am just sixteen, signor."
+
+"No more!" the merchant said in surprise. "I had taken you for
+well-nigh two years older. I have but just come from the Palazzo
+Giustiniani, and my young kinsman, Matteo, tells me that in the School
+of Arms there are none of our young nobles who are your match with
+rapier or battleaxe."
+
+"I fear, sir," Francis said modestly, "that I have given up more time
+to the study of arms than befits the son of a sober trader."
+
+"Not at all," the Venetian replied. "We traders have to defend our
+rights and our liberties, our goods and our ships, just as much as the
+nobles have to defend their privileges and their castles. Here in
+Venice there are no such distinctions of rank as there are elsewhere.
+Certain families, distinguished among the rest by their long standing,
+wealth, influence, or the services they have rendered to the state, are
+of senatorial rank, and constitute our nobility; but there are no
+titles among us. We are all citizens of the republic, with our rights
+and privileges, which cannot be infringed even by the most powerful;
+and the poorest citizen has an equal right to make himself as
+proficient in the arms, which he may be called upon to wield in defence
+of the state, as the Doge himself. In your country also, I believe, all
+men are obliged to learn the use of arms, to practise shooting at the
+butts, and to make themselves efficient, if called upon to take part in
+the wars of the country. And I have heard that at the jousts, the
+champions of the city of London have ere now held their own against
+those of the court."
+
+"They have done so," Francis said; "and yet, I know not why, it is
+considered unseemly for the sons of well-to-do citizens to be too fond
+of military exercises."
+
+"The idea is a foolish one," the Venetian said hotly. "I myself have, a
+score of times, defended my ships against corsairs and pirates,
+Genoese, and other enemies. I have fought against the Greeks, and been
+forced to busy myself in more than one serious fray in the streets of
+Constantinople, Alexandria, and other ports, and have served in the
+galleys of the state. All men who live by trade must be in favour of
+peace; but they must also be prepared to defend their goods, and the
+better able they are to do it, the more the honour to them.
+
+"But here we are at the Piazzetta."
+
+A group of nobles were standing near the landing place, and Signor
+Polani at once went up to them, and introduced Francis to them as the
+gentleman who had done his daughter and their kinswoman such good
+service. Francis was warmly thanked and congratulated by them all.
+
+"Will you wait near the entrance?" Signor Polani said. "I see that my
+young cousin, Matteo, has accompanied his father, and you will, no
+doubt, find enough to say to each other while we are with the council."
+
+The gentlemen entered the palace, and Matteo, who had remained
+respectfully at a short distance from the seniors, at once joined his
+friend.
+
+"Well, Francis, I congratulate you heartily, though I feel quite
+jealous of you. It was splendid to think of your dashing up in your
+gondola, and carrying off my pretty cousins from the clutches of that
+villain, Ruggiero Mocenigo, just as he was about to lay his hands on
+them."
+
+"Are you sure it was Ruggiero, Matteo?"
+
+"Oh, there can't be any doubt about it. You know, he had asked for
+Maria's hand, and when Polani refused him, had gone off muttering
+threats. You know what his character is. He is capable of any evil
+action; besides, they say that he has dissipated his patrimony, in
+gaming and other extravagances at Constantinople, and is deep in the
+hands of the Jews. If he could have succeeded in carrying off Maria it
+would more than have mended his fortunes, for she and her sister are
+acknowledged to be the richest heiresses in Venice. Oh, there is not a
+shadow of doubt that it's he.
+
+"You won't hear me saying anything against your love of prowling about
+in that gondola of yours, since it has brought you such a piece of good
+fortune--for it is a piece of good fortune, Francis, to have rendered
+such a service to Polani, to say nothing of all the rest of us who are
+connected with his family. I can tell you that there are scores of
+young men of good birth in Venice, who would give their right hand to
+have done what you did."
+
+"I should have considered myself fortunate to have been of service to
+any girls threatened by violence, though they had only been fishermen's
+daughters," Francis said; "but I am specially pleased because they are
+relatives of yours, Matteo."
+
+"To say nothing to their being two of the prettiest girls in Venice,"
+Matteo added slyly.
+
+"That counts for something too, no doubt," Francis said laughing,
+"though I didn't think of it.
+
+"I wonder," he went on gravely, "whether that was Ruggiero whom I
+struck down, and whether he came up again to the surface. He has very
+powerful connections, you know, Matteo; and if I have gained friends, I
+shall also have gained enemies by the night's work."
+
+"That is so," Matteo agreed. "For your sake, I own that I hope that
+Ruggiero is at present at the bottom of the canal. He was certainly no
+credit to his friends; and although they would of course have stood by
+him, I do not think they will feel, at heart, in any way displeased to
+know that he will trouble them no longer. But if his men got him out
+again, I should say you had best be careful, for Ruggiero is about the
+last man in Venice I should care to have as an enemy. However, we won't
+look at the unpleasant side of the matter, and will hope that his
+career has been brought to a close."
+
+"I don't know which way to hope," Francis said gravely. "He will
+certainly be a dangerous enemy if he is alive; and yet the thought of
+having killed a man troubles me much."
+
+"It would not trouble me at all if I were in your place," Matteo said.
+"If you had not killed him, you may be very sure that he would have
+killed you, and that the deed would have caused him no compunction
+whatever. It was a fair fight, just as if it had been a hostile galley
+in mid-sea; and I don't see why the thought of having rid Venice of one
+of her worst citizens need trouble you in any way."
+
+"You see I have been brought up with rather different ideas to yours,
+Matteo. My father, as a trader, is adverse to fighting of all
+kinds--save, of course, in defence of one's country; and although he
+has not blamed me in any way for the part I took, I can see that he is
+much disquieted, and indeed speaks of sending me back to England at
+once."
+
+"Oh, I hope not!" Matteo said earnestly. "Hitherto you and I have been
+great friends, Francis, but we shall be more in future. All Polani's
+friends will regard you as one of themselves; and I was even thinking,
+on my way here, that perhaps you and I might enter the service of the
+state together, and get appointed to a war galley in a few years."
+
+"My father's hair would stand up at the thought, Matteo; though, for
+myself, I should like nothing so well. However, that could never have
+been. Still I am sorry, indeed, at the thought of leaving Venice. I
+have been very happy here, and I have made friends, and there is always
+something to do or talk about; and the life in London would be so dull
+in comparison. But here comes one of the ushers from the palace."
+
+The official came up to them, and asked if either of them was Messer
+Francisco Hammond, and, finding that he had come to the right person,
+requested Francis to follow him.
+
+
+
+Chapter 4: Carried Off.
+
+
+It was with a feeling of considerable discomfort, and some awe, that
+Francis Hammond followed his conductor to the chamber of the Council.
+It was a large and stately apartment. The decorations were magnificent,
+and large pictures, representing events in the wars of Venice, hung
+round the walls. The ceiling was also superbly painted. The cornices
+were heavily gilded. Curtains of worked tapestry hung by the windows,
+and fell behind him as he entered the door.
+
+At a table of horseshoe shape eleven councillors, clad in the long
+scarlet robes, trimmed with ermine, which were the distinguishing dress
+of Venetian senators, were seated--the doge himself acting as
+president. On their heads they wore black velvet caps, flat at the top,
+and in shape somewhat resembling the flat Scotch bonnet. Signor Polani
+and his companions were seated in chairs, facing the table.
+
+When Francis entered the gondolier was giving evidence as to the attack
+upon his boat. Several questions were asked him when he had finished,
+and he was then told to retire. The usher then brought Francis forward.
+
+"This is Messer Francisco Hammond," he said.
+
+"Tell your story your own way," the doge said.
+
+Francis related the story of the attack on the gondola, and the escape
+of the ladies in his boat.
+
+"How came you, a foreigner and a youth, to interfere in a fray of this
+kind?" one of the councillors asked.
+
+"I did not stop to think of my being a stranger, or a youth," Francis
+replied quietly. "I heard the screams of women in distress, and felt
+naturally bound to render them what aid I could."
+
+"Did you know who the ladies were?"
+
+"I knew them only by sight. My friend Matteo Giustiniani had pointed
+them out to me, on one occasion, as being the daughters of Signor
+Polani, and connections of his. When their gondola had passed mine, a
+few minutes previously, I recognized their faces by the light of the
+torches in their boat."
+
+"Were the torches burning brightly?" another of the council asked;
+"because it may be that this attack was not intended against them, but
+against some others."
+
+"The light was bright enough for me to recognize their faces at a
+glance," Francis said, "and also the yellow and white sashes of their
+gondoliers."
+
+"Did you see any badge or cognizance, either on the gondola or on the
+persons of the assailants?"
+
+"I did not," Francis said. "They certainly wore none. One of the
+torches in the Polani gondola had been extinguished in the fray, but
+the other was still burning, and, had the gondoliers worn coloured
+sashes or other distinguishing marks, I should have noticed them."
+
+"Should you recognize, were you to see them again, any of the
+assailants?"
+
+"I should not," Francis said. "They were all masked."
+
+"You say you struck down the one who appeared to be their leader with
+an oar, as he was about to leap into your boat. How was it the oar was
+in your hand instead of that of your gondolier?"
+
+"I was myself rowing," Francis said. "In London, rowing is an amusement
+of which boys of all classes are fond, and since I have been out here
+with my father I have learned to row a gondola; and sometimes, when I
+am out of an evening, I take an oar as well as my gondolier, enjoying
+the exercise and the speed at which the boat goes along. I was not
+rowing when the signora's boat passed me, but upon hearing the screams,
+I stood up and took the second oar, to arrive as quickly as possible at
+the spot. That was how it was that I had it in my hand, when the man
+was about to leap into the boat."
+
+"Then there is nothing at all, so far as you know, to direct your
+suspicion against anyone as the author of this attack?"
+
+"There was nothing," Francis said, "either in the gondola itself, or in
+the attire or persons of those concerned in the fray, which could give
+me the slightest clue as to their identity."
+
+"At any rate, young gentleman," the doge said, "you appear to have
+behaved with a promptness, presence of mind, and courage--for it needs
+courage to interfere in a fray of this sort--beyond your years; and, in
+the name of the republic, I thank you for having prevented the
+commission of a grievous crime. You will please to remain here for the
+present. It may be that, when the person accused of this crime appears
+before us, you may be able to recognize his figure."
+
+It was with mixed feelings that Francis heard, a minute or two later,
+the usher announce that Signor Ruggiero Mocenigo was without, awaiting
+the pleasure of their excellencies.
+
+"Let him enter," the doge said.
+
+The curtains fell back, and Ruggiero Mocenigo entered with a haughty
+air. He bowed to the council, and stood as if expecting to be
+questioned.
+
+"You are charged, Ruggiero Mocenigo," the doge said, "with being
+concerned in an attempt to carry off the daughters of Signor Polani,
+and of taking part in the killing of three servitors of that
+gentleman."
+
+"On what grounds am I accused?" Ruggiero said haughtily.
+
+"On the ground that you are a rejected suitor for the elder lady's
+hand, and that you had uttered threats against her father, who, so far
+as he knows, has no other enemies."
+
+"This seems somewhat scanty ground for an accusation of such gravity,"
+Ruggiero said sneeringly. "If every suitor who grumbles, when his offer
+is refused, is to be held responsible for every accident which may take
+place in the lady's family, methinks that the time of this reverend and
+illustrious council will be largely occupied."
+
+"You will remember," the doge said sternly, "that your previous conduct
+gives good ground for suspicion against you. You have already been
+banished from the state for two years for assassination, and such
+reports as reached us of your conduct in Constantinople, during your
+exile, were the reverse of satisfactory. Had it not been so, the
+prayers of your friends, that your term of banishment might be
+shortened, would doubtless have produced their effect."
+
+"At any rate," Ruggiero said, "I can, with little difficulty, prove
+that I had no hand in any attempt upon Signor Polani's daughters last
+night, seeing that I had friends spending the evening with me, and that
+we indulged in play until three o'clock this morning--an hour at which,
+I should imagine, the Signoras Polani would scarcely be abroad."
+
+"At what time did your friends assemble?"
+
+"At nine o'clock," Ruggiero said. "We met by agreement in the Piazza,
+somewhat before that hour, and proceeded together on foot to my house."
+
+"Who were your companions?"
+
+Ruggiero gave the names of six young men, all connections of his
+family, and summonses were immediately sent for them to attend before
+the council.
+
+"In the meantime, Messer Francisco Hammond, you can tell us whether you
+recognize in the accused one of the assailants last night."
+
+"I cannot recognize him, your excellency," Francis said; "but I can say
+certainly that he was not the leader of the party, whom I struck with
+my oar. The blow fell on the temple, and assuredly there would be marks
+of such a blow remaining today."
+
+As Francis was speaking, Ruggiero looked at him with a cold piercing
+glance, which expressed the reverse of gratitude for the evidence which
+he was giving in his favour, and something like a chill ran through him
+as he resumed his seat behind Signor Polani and his friends.
+
+There was silence for a quarter of an hour. Occasionally the members of
+the council spoke in low tones to each other, but no word was spoken
+aloud, until the appearance of the first of the young men who had been
+summoned. One after another they gave their evidence, and all were
+unanimous in declaring that they had spent the evening with Ruggiero
+Mocenigo, and that he did not leave the room, from the moment of his
+arrival there soon after nine o'clock, until they left him at two in
+the morning.
+
+"You have heard my witnesses," Ruggiero said, when the last had given
+his testimony; "and I now ask your excellencies, whether it is right
+that a gentleman, of good family, should be exposed to a villainous
+accusation of this kind, on the barest grounds of suspicion?"
+
+"You have heard the evidence which has been given, Signor Polani," the
+doge said. "Do you withdraw your accusation against Signor Mocenigo?"
+
+"I acknowledge, your excellency," Signor Polani said, rising, "that
+Ruggiero Mocenigo has proved that he took no personal part in the
+affair, but I will submit to you that this in no way proves that he is
+not the author of the attempt. He would know that my first suspicion
+would fall upon him, and would, therefore, naturally leave the matter
+to be carried out by others, and would take precautions to enable him
+to prove, as he has done, that he was not present. I still maintain
+that the circumstances of the case, his threats to me, and the fact
+that my daughter will naturally inherit a portion of what wealth I
+might possess, and that, as I know and can prove, Ruggiero Mocenigo has
+been lately reduced to borrowing money of the Jews, all point to his
+being the author of this attempt, which would at once satisfy his anger
+against me, for having declined the honour of his alliance, and repair
+his damaged fortunes."
+
+There were a few words of whispered consultation between the
+councillors, and the doge then said:
+
+"All present will now retire while the council deliberates. Our
+decision will be made known to the parties concerned, in due time."
+
+On leaving the palace, Signor Polani and his friends walked together
+across the Piazza, discussing the turn of events.
+
+"He will escape," Polani said. "He has two near relations on the
+council, and however strong our suspicions may be, there is really no
+proof against him. I fear that he will go free. I feel as certain as
+ever that he is the contriver of the attempt; but the precautions he
+has taken seem to render it impossible to bring the crime home to him.
+However, it is no use talking about it any more, at present.
+
+"You will, I hope, accompany me home, Signor Francisco, and allow me to
+present you formally to my daughters. They were too much agitated, last
+night, to be able to thank you fully for the service you had rendered
+them.
+
+"Matteo, do you come with us."
+
+Three days passed, and no decision of the council had been announced,
+when, early in the morning, one of the state messengers brought an
+order that Francis should be in readiness, at nine o'clock, to
+accompany him. At that hour a gondola drew up at the steps. It was a
+covered gondola, with hangings, which prevented any from seeing who
+were within. Francis took his seat by the side of the official, and the
+gondola started at once.
+
+"It looks very much as if I was being taken as a prisoner," Francis
+said to himself. "However, that can hardly be, for even if Ruggiero
+convinced the council that he was wholly innocent of this affair, no
+blame could fall on me, for I neither accused nor identified him.
+However, it is certainly towards the prisons we are going."
+
+The boat, indeed, was passing the Piazzetta without stopping, and
+turned down the canal behind, to the prisons in rear of the palace.
+They stopped at the water gate, close to the Bridge of Sighs, and
+Francis and his conductor entered. They proceeded along two or three
+passages, until they came to a door where an official was standing. A
+word was spoken, and they passed in.
+
+The chamber they entered was bare and vaulted, and contained no
+furniture whatever, but at one end was a low stone slab, upon which
+something was lying covered with a cloak. Four of the members of the
+council were standing in a group, talking, when Francis entered. Signor
+Polani, with two of his friends, stood apart at one side of the
+chamber. Ruggiero Mocenigo also, with two of his companions, stood on
+the other side.
+
+Francis thought that the demeanour of Ruggiero was somewhat altered
+from that which he had assumed at the previous investigation, and that
+he looked sullen and anxious.
+
+"We have sent for you, Francisco Hammond, in order that you may, if you
+can, identify a body which was found last night, floating in the Grand
+Canal."
+
+One of the officials stepped forward and removed the cloak, showing on
+the stone slab the body of a young man. On the left temple there was an
+extensive bruise, and the skin was broken.
+
+"Do you recognize that body?"
+
+"I do not recognize the face," Francis said, "and do not know that I
+ever saw it before."
+
+"The wound upon the temple which you see, is it such as, you would
+suppose, would be caused by the blow you struck an unknown person,
+while he was engaged in attacking the gondola of Signor Polani?"
+
+"I cannot say whether it is such a wound as would be caused by a blow
+with an oar," Francis said; "but it is certainly, as nearly as
+possible, on the spot where I struck the man, just as he was leaping,
+sword in hand, into my gondola."
+
+"You stated, at your examination the other day, that it was on the left
+temple you struck the blow."
+
+"I did so. I said at once that Signor Ruggiero Mocenigo could not have
+been the man who led the assailants, because had he been so he would
+assuredly have borne a mark from the blow on the left temple."
+
+"Look at the clothes. Do you see anything there which could lead you to
+identify him with your assailant?"
+
+"My assailant was dressed in dark clothes, as this one was. There was
+but one distinguishing mark that I noticed, and this is wanting here.
+The light of the torch fell upon the handle of a dagger in his girdle.
+I saw it but for a moment, but I caught the gleam of gems. It was only
+a passing impression, but I could swear that he carried a small gold or
+yellow metal-handled dagger, and I believe that it was set with gems,
+but to this I should not like to swear."
+
+"Produce the dagger found upon the dead man," one of the council said
+to an official.
+
+And the officer produced a small dagger with a fine steel blade and
+gold handle, thickly encrusted with gems.
+
+"Is this the dagger?" the senator asked Francis.
+
+"I cannot say that it is the dagger," Francis replied; "but it closely
+resembles it, if it is not the same."
+
+"You have no doubt, I suppose, seeing that wound on the temple, the
+dagger found in the girdle, and the fact that the body has evidently
+only been a few days in the water, that this is the man whom you struck
+down in the fray on the canal?"
+
+"No, signor, I have no doubt whatever that it is the same person."
+
+"That will do," the council said. "You can retire; and we thank you, in
+the name of justice, for the evidence you have given."
+
+Francis was led back to the gondola, and conveyed to his father's
+house. An hour later Signor Polani arrived.
+
+"The matter is finished," he said, "I cannot say satisfactorily to me,
+for the punishment is wholly inadequate to the offence, but at any rate
+he has not got off altogether unpunished. After you left, we passed
+from the prison into the palace, and then the whole council assembled,
+as before, in the council chamber. I may tell you that the body which
+was found was that of a cousin and intimate of Ruggiero Mocenigo. The
+two have been constantly together since the return of the latter from
+Constantinople. It was found, by inquiry at the house of the young
+man's father, that he left home on the evening upon which the attack
+was committed, saying that he was going to the mainland, and might not
+be expected to return for some days.
+
+"The council took it for granted, from the wound in his head, and the
+fact that a leech has testified that the body had probably been in the
+water about three days, that he was the man that was stunned by your
+blow, and drowned in the canal. Ruggiero urged that the discovery in no
+way affected him; and that his cousin had, no doubt, attempted to carry
+off my daughter on his own account. There was eventually a division
+among the council on this point, but Maria was sent for, and on being
+questioned, testified that the young man had never spoken to her, and
+that, indeed, she did not know him even by sight; and the majority
+thereupon came to the conclusion that he could only have been acting as
+an instrument of Ruggiero's.
+
+"We were not in the apartment while the deliberation was going on, but
+when we returned the president announced that, although there was no
+absolute proof of Ruggiero's complicity in the affair, yet that,
+considering his application for my daughter's hand, his threats on my
+refusal to his request, his previous character, and his intimacy with
+his cousin, the council had no doubt that the attempt had been made at
+his instigation, and therefore sentenced him to banishment from Venice
+and the islands for three years."
+
+"I should be better pleased if they had sent him back to
+Constantinople, or one of the islands of the Levant," Mr. Hammond said.
+"If he is allowed to take up his abode on the mainland, he may be only
+two or three miles away, which, in the case of a man of his
+description, is much too near to be pleasant for those who have
+incurred his enmity."
+
+"That is true," Signor Polani agreed, "and I myself, and my friends,
+are indignant that he should not have been banished to a distance,
+where he at least would have been powerless for fresh mischief. On the
+other hand, his friends will doubtless consider that he has been hardly
+treated. However, as far as my daughters are concerned, I will take
+good care that he shall have no opportunity of repeating his attempt;
+for I have ordered them, on no account whatever, to be absent from the
+palazzo after the shades of evening begin to fall, unless I myself am
+with them; and I shall increase the number of armed retainers in the
+house, by bringing some of my men on shore from a ship which arrived
+last night in port. I cannot believe that even Ruggiero would have the
+insolence to attempt to carry them off from the house by force; but
+when one has to deal with a man like this, one cannot take too great
+precautions."
+
+"I have already ordered my son, on no account, to be out after
+nightfall in the streets. In his gondola I do not mind, for unless the
+gondoliers wear badges, it is impossible to tell one boat from another
+after dark. Besides, as he tells me, his boat is so fast that he has no
+fear whatever of being overtaken, even if recognized and chased. But I
+shall not feel comfortable so long as he is here, and shall send him
+back to England on the very first occasion that offers."
+
+"I trust that no such occasion may occur just yet, Signor Hammond. I
+should be sorry, indeed, for your son to be separated so soon from us.
+We must talk the matter over together, and perhaps between us we may
+hit on some plan by which, while he may be out of the reach of the
+peril he has incurred on behalf of my family, he may yet be neither
+wasting his time, nor altogether separated from us."
+
+For the next fortnight Francis spent most of his time at the Palazzo
+Polani. The merchant was evidently sincere in his invitation to him to
+make his house his home; and if a day passed without the lad paying a
+visit, would chide him gently for deserting them. He himself was
+frequently present in the balcony, where the four young people--for
+Matteo Giustiniani was generally of the party--sat and chatted
+together, the gouvernante sitting austerely by, with at times a strong
+expression of disapproval on her countenance at their laughter and
+merriment, although--as her charges' father approved of the intimacy of
+the girls with their young cousin and this English lad--she could offer
+no open objections. In the afternoon, the party generally went for a
+long row in a four-oared gondola, always returning home upon the
+approach of evening.
+
+To Francis this time was delightful. He had had no sister of his own;
+and although he had made the acquaintance of a number of lads in
+Venice, and had accompanied his father to formal entertainments at the
+houses of his friends, he had never before been intimate in any of
+their families. The gaiety and high spirits of the two girls, when they
+were in the house, amused and pleased him, especially as it was in
+contrast to the somewhat stiff and dignified demeanour which they
+assumed when passing through the frequented canals in the gondola.
+
+"I do not like that woman Castaldi," Francis said one evening as, after
+leaving the palazzo, Giuseppi rowed them towards the Palazzo
+Giustiniani, where Matteo was to be landed.
+
+"Gouvernantes are not popular, as a class, with young men," Matteo
+laughed.
+
+"But seriously, Matteo, I don't like her; and I am quite sure that, for
+some reason or other, she does not like me. I have seen her watching
+me, as a cat would watch a mouse she is going to spring on."
+
+"Perhaps she has not forgiven you, Francisco, for saving her two
+charges, and leaving her to the mercy of their assailants."
+
+"I don't know, Matteo. Her conduct appeared to me, at the time, to be
+very strange. Of course, she might have been paralysed with fright, but
+it was certainly curious the way she clung to their dresses, and tried
+to prevent them from leaving the boat."
+
+"You don't really think, Francis, that she wanted them to be captured?"
+
+"I don't know whether I should be justified in saying as much as that,
+Matteo, and I certainly should not say so to anyone else, but I can't
+help thinking that such was the case. I don't like her face, and I
+don't like the woman. She strikes me as being deceitful. She certainly
+did try to prevent my carrying the girls off and, had not their dresses
+given way in her hands, she would have done so. Anyhow, it strikes me
+that Ruggiero must have had some accomplice in the house. How else
+could he have known of the exact time at which they would be passing
+along the Grand Canal? For, that the gondola was in waiting to dash out
+and surprise them, there is no doubt.
+
+"I was asking Signora Giulia, the other day, how it was they were so
+late, for she says that her father never liked their being out after
+dusk in Venice, though at Corfu he did not care how late they were upon
+the water. She replied that she did not quite know how it happened. Her
+sister had said, some time before, that she thought it was time to be
+going, but the gouvernante--who was generally very particular--had said
+that there was no occasion to hurry, as their father knew where they
+were, and would not be uneasy. She thought the woman must have mistaken
+the time, and did not know how late it was.
+
+"Of course, this proves nothing. Still I own that, putting all the
+things together, I have my suspicions."
+
+"It is certainly curious, Francisco, though I can hardly believe it
+possible that the woman could be treacherous. She has been for some
+years in the service of the family, and my cousin has every confidence
+in her."
+
+"That may be, Matteo; but Ruggiero may have promised so highly that he
+may have persuaded her to aid him. He could have afforded to be
+generous, if he had been successful."
+
+"There is another thing, by the bye, Francisco, which did not strike me
+at the time; but now you speak of it, may be another link in the chain.
+I was laughing at Maria about their screaming, and saying what a noise
+the three of them must have made, and she said, 'Oh, no! there were
+only two of us--Giulia and I screamed for aid at the top of our voices;
+but the signora was as quiet and brave as possible, and did not utter a
+sound.'"
+
+"That doesn't agree, Matteo, with her being so frightened as to hold
+the girls tightly, and almost prevent their escape, or with the row she
+made, sobbing and crying, when she came back. Of course there is not
+enough to go upon; and I could hardly venture to speak of it to Signor
+Polani, or to accuse a woman, in whom he has perfect confidence, of
+such frightful treachery on such vague grounds of suspicion. Still I do
+suspect her; and I hope, when I go away from Venice, you will, as far
+as you can, keep an eye upon her."
+
+"I do not know how to do that," Matteo said, laughing; "but I will tell
+my cousins that we don't like her, and advise them, in future, not on
+any account to stay out after dusk, even if she gives them permission
+to do so; and if I learn anything more to justify our suspicions, I
+will tell my cousin what you and I think, though it won't be a pleasant
+thing to do. However, Ruggiero is gone now, and I hope we sha'n't hear
+anything more about him."
+
+"I hope not, Matteo; but I am sure he is not the man to give up the
+plan he has once formed easily, any more than he is to forgive an
+injury.
+
+"However, here we are at your steps. We will talk the other matter over
+another time. Anyhow, I am glad I have told you what I thought, for it
+has been worrying me. Now that I find you don't think my ideas about
+her are altogether absurd, I will keep my eyes more open than ever in
+future. I am convinced she is a bad one, and I only hope we may be able
+to prove it."
+
+"You have made me very uncomfortable, Francisco," Matteo said as he
+stepped ashore; "but we will talk about it again tomorrow."
+
+"We shall meet at your cousin's in the evening. Before that time, we
+had better both think over whether we ought to tell anyone our
+suspicions, and we can hold a council in the gondola on the way back."
+
+Francis did think the matter over that night. He felt that the fact
+told him by Giulia, that the gouvernante had herself been the means of
+their staying out later than usual on the evening of the attack, added
+great weight to the vague suspicions he had previously entertained; and
+he determined to let the matter rest no longer, but that the next day
+he would speak to Signor Polani, even at the risk of offending him by
+his suspicions of a person who had been, for some years, in his
+confidence. Accordingly, he went in the morning to the palazzo, but
+found that Signor Polani was absent, and would not be in until two or
+three o'clock in the afternoon. He did not see the girls, who, he knew,
+were going out to spend the day with some friends.
+
+At three o'clock he returned, and found that Polani had just come in.
+
+"Why, Francisco," the merchant said when he entered, "have you
+forgotten that my daughters will be out all day?"
+
+"No, signor, I have not forgotten that, but I wish to speak to you. I
+dare say you will laugh at me, but I hope you will not think me
+meddlesome, or impertinent, for touching upon a subject which concerns
+you nearly."
+
+"I am sure you will not be meddlesome or impertinent, Francisco,"
+Signor Polani said reassuringly, for he saw that the lad was nervous
+and anxious. "Tell me what you have to say, and I can promise you
+beforehand that, whether I agree with you or not in what you may have
+to say, I shall be in no way vexed, for I shall know you have said it
+with the best intentions."
+
+"What I have to say, sir, concerns the Signora Castaldi, your
+daughters' gouvernante. I know, sir, that you repose implicit
+confidence in her; and your judgment, formed after years of intimate
+knowledge, is hardly likely to be shaken by what I have to tell you. I
+spoke to Matteo about it, and, as he is somewhat of my opinion, I have
+decided that it is, at least, my duty to tell you all the
+circumstances, and you can then form your own conclusions."
+
+Francis then related the facts known to him. First, that the assailants
+of the gondola must have had accurate information as to the hour at
+which they would come along; secondly, that it was at the gouvernante's
+suggestion that the return had been delayed much later than usual;
+lastly, that when the attack took place, the gouvernante did not raise
+her voice to cry for assistance, and that she had, at the last moment,
+so firmly seized their dresses, that it was only by tearing the girls
+from her grasp that he had been enabled to get them into the boat.
+
+"There may be nothing in all this," he said when he had concluded. "But
+at least, sir, I thought that it was right you should know it; and you
+will believe me, that it is only anxiety as to the safety of your
+daughters that has led me to speak to you."
+
+"Of that I am quite sure," Signor Polani said cordially, "and you were
+perfectly right in speaking to me. I own, however, that I do not for a
+moment think that the circumstances are more than mere coincidences.
+Signora Castaldi has been with me for upwards of ten years. She has
+instructed and trained my daughters entirely to my satisfaction. I do
+not say that she is everything that one could wish, but, then, no one
+is perfect, and I have every confidence in her fidelity and
+trustworthiness. I own that the chain you have put together is a strong
+one, and had she but lately entered my service, and were she a person
+of whom I knew but little, I should attach great weight to the facts,
+although taken in themselves they do not amount to much. Doubtless she
+saw that my daughters were enjoying themselves in the society of my
+friends, and in her kindness of heart erred, as she certainly did err,
+in allowing them to stay longer than she should have done.
+
+"Then, as to her not crying out when attacked, women behave differently
+in cases of danger. Some scream loudly, others are silent, as if
+paralysed by fear. This would seem to have been her case. Doubtless she
+instinctively grasped the girls for their protection, and in her fright
+did not even perceive that a boat had come alongside, or know that you
+were a friend trying to save them. That someone informed their
+assailants of the whereabouts of my daughters, and the time they were
+coming home, is clear; but they might have been seen going to the
+house, and a swift gondola have been placed on the watch. Had this boat
+started as soon as they took their seat in the gondola on their return,
+and hastened, by the narrow canals, to the spot where their accomplices
+were waiting, they could have warned them in ample time of the approach
+of the gondola with my daughters.
+
+"I have, as you may believe, thought the matter deeply over, for it was
+evident to me that the news of my daughters' coming must have reached
+their assailants beforehand. I was most unwilling to suspect treachery
+on the part of any of my household, and came to the conclusion that the
+warning was given in the way I have suggested.
+
+"At the same time, Francisco, I thank you deeply for having mentioned
+to me the suspicions you have formed, and although I think that you are
+wholly mistaken, I certainly shall not neglect the warning, but shall
+watch very closely the conduct of my daughters' gouvernante, and shall
+take every precaution to put it out of her power to play me false, even
+while I cannot, for a moment, believe she would be so base and
+treacherous as to attempt to do so."
+
+"In that case, signor, I shall feel that my mission has not been
+unsuccessful, however mistaken I may be, and I trust sincerely that I
+am wholly wrong. I thank you much for the kind way in which you have
+heard me express suspicions of a person in your confidence."
+
+The gravity with which the merchant had heard Francis' story vanished
+immediately he left the room, and a smile came over his face.
+
+"Boys are boys all the world over," he said to himself, "and though my
+young friend has almost the stature of a man, as well as the quickness
+and courage of one, and has plenty of sense in other matters, he has at
+once the prejudices and the romantic ideas of a boy. Had Signora
+Castaldi been young and pretty, no idea that she was treacherous would
+have ever entered his mind; but what young fellow yet ever liked a
+gouvernante, who sits by and works at her tambour frame, with a
+disapproving expression on her face, while he is laughing and talking
+with a girl of his own age. I should have felt the same when I was a
+boy. Still, to picture the poor signora as a traitoress, in the pay of
+that villain Mocenigo, is too absurd. I had the greatest difficulty in
+keeping my gravity when he was unfolding his story. But he is an
+excellent lad, nevertheless. A true, honest, brave lad, with a little
+of the bluffness that they say all his nation possess, but with a heart
+of gold, unless I am greatly mistaken."
+
+At seven o'clock, Francis was just getting into his gondola to go round
+again to Signor Polani's, when another gondola came along the canal at
+the top of its speed, and he recognized at once the badge of the
+Giustiniani. It stopped suddenly as it came abreast of his own boat,
+and Matteo, in a state of the highest excitement, jumped from his own
+boat into that of Francis.
+
+"What is the matter, Matteo? What has happened?"
+
+"I have terrible news, Francisco. My cousins have both disappeared."
+
+"Disappeared!" Francis repeated in astonishment "How have they
+disappeared?"
+
+"Their father has just been round to see mine. He is half mad with
+grief and anger. You know they had gone to spend the day at the
+Persanis?"
+
+"Yes, yes," Francis exclaimed; "but do go on, Matteo. Tell me all about
+it, quickly."
+
+"Well, it seems that Polani, for some reason or other, thought he would
+go and fetch them himself, and at five o'clock he arrived there in his
+gondola, only to find that they had left two hours before. You were
+right, Francisco, it was that beldam Castaldi. She went with them there
+in the morning, and left them there, and was to have come in the
+gondola for them at six. At three o'clock she arrived, saying that
+their father had met with a serious accident, having fallen down the
+steps of one of the bridges and broken his leg, and that he had sent
+her to fetch them at once.
+
+"Of course, they left with her instantly. Polani questioned the
+lackeys, who had aided them to embark. They said that the gondola was
+not one of his boats, but was apparently a hired gondola, with a closed
+cabin. The girls had stopped in surprise as they came down the steps,
+and Maria said, 'Why, this is not our gondola!'
+
+"Castaldi replied, 'No, no; our own gondolas had both gone off to find
+and bring a leech, and as your father was urgently wanting you, I
+hailed the first passing boat. Make haste, dears, your father is
+longing for you.'
+
+"So they got on board at once, and the gondola rowed swiftly away. That
+is all I know about it, except that the story was a lie, that their
+father never sent for them, and that up to a quarter of an hour ago
+they had not reached home."
+
+
+
+Chapter 5: Finding A Clue.
+
+
+"This is awful, Matteo," Francis said, when his friend had finished his
+story. "What is to be done?"
+
+"That is just the thing, Francisco. What is to be done? My cousin has
+been already to the city magistrates, to tell them what has taken
+place, and to request their aid in discovering where the girls have
+been carried to. I believe that he is going to put up a proclamation,
+announcing that he will give a thousand ducats to whomsoever will bring
+information which will enable him to recover the girls. That will set
+every gondolier on the canals on the alert, and some of them must
+surely have noticed a closed gondola rowed by two men, for at this time
+of year very few gondolas have their covers on. It seems to be terrible
+not to be able to do anything, so I came straight off to tell you."
+
+"You had better send your gondola home, Matteo. It may be wanted. We
+will paddle out to the lagoon and talk it over. Surely there must be
+something to be done, if we could but think of it.
+
+"This is terrible, indeed, Matteo," he repeated, after they had sat
+without speaking for some minutes. "One feels quite helpless and
+bewildered. To think that only yesterday evening we were laughing and
+chatting with them, and that now they are lost, and in the power of
+that villain Mocenigo, who you may be sure is at the bottom of it.
+
+"By the way," he said suddenly, "do you know where he has taken up his
+abode?"
+
+"I heard that he was at Botonda, near Chioggia, a week ago, but whether
+he is there still I have not the least idea."
+
+"It seems to me that the thing to do is to find him, and keep him in
+sight. He will probably have them hidden away somewhere, and will not
+go near them for some time, for he will know that he will be suspected,
+and perhaps watched."
+
+"But why should he not force Maria to marry him at once?" Matteo said.
+"You see, when he has once made her his wife he will be safe, for my
+cousin would be driven then to make terms with him for her sake."
+
+"He may try that," Francis said; "but he must know that Maria has
+plenty of spirit, and may refuse to marry him, threaten her as he will.
+He may think that, after she has been kept confined for some time, and
+finds that there is no hope of escape, except by consenting to be his
+wife, she may give way. But in any case, it seems to me that the thing
+to be done is to find Ruggiero, and to watch his movements."
+
+"I have no doubt my cousin has already taken steps in that direction,"
+Matteo said, "and I feel sure that, in this case, he will receive the
+support of every influential man in Venice, outside the Mocenigo family
+and their connections. The carrying off of ladies, in broad daylight,
+will be regarded as a personal injury in every family. The last attempt
+was different. I do not say it was not bad enough, but it is not like
+decoying girls from home by a false message. No one could feel safe, if
+such a deed as this were not severely punished."
+
+"Let us go back again, Matteo. It is no use our thinking of anything
+until we know what has really been done, and you are sure to be able to
+learn, at home, what steps have been taken."
+
+On reaching home Matteo learned that Polani, accompanied by two members
+of the council, had already started in one of the swiftest of the state
+galleys for the mainland. A council had been hastily summoned, and,
+upon hearing Polani's narrative, had dispatched two of their number,
+with an official of the republic, to Botonda. If Ruggiero was found to
+be still there, he was to be kept a prisoner in the house in which he
+was staying, under the strictest watch. If he had left, orders were to
+be sent, to every town in the Venetian dominions on the mainland, for
+his arrest when discovered, and in that case he was to be sent a
+prisoner, strongly guarded, to Venice.
+
+Other galleys had been simultaneously dispatched to the various ports,
+ordering a strict search of every boat arriving or leaving, and
+directing a minute investigation to be made as to the occupants of
+every boat that had arrived during the evening or night. The fact that
+a thousand ducats were offered, for information which would lead to the
+recovery of the girls, was also to be published far and wide.
+
+The news of the abduction had spread, and the greatest indignation was
+excited in the city. The sailors from the port of Malamocco came over
+in great numbers. They regarded this outrage on the family of the great
+merchant as almost a personal insult. Stones were thrown at the windows
+of the Palazzo Mocenigo, and an attack would have been made upon it,
+had not the authorities sent down strong guards to protect it. Persons
+belonging to that house, and the families connected with it, were
+assaulted in the streets, and all Venice was in an uproar.
+
+"There is one comfort," Giuseppi said, when he heard from Francis what
+had taken place. "Just at present, Mocenigo will have enough to think
+about his own affairs without troubling about you. I have been in a
+tremble ever since that day, and have dreamed bad dreams every night."
+
+"You are more nervous for me than I am for myself, Giuseppi; but I have
+been careful too, for although Ruggiero himself was away his friends
+are here, and active, too, as you see by this successful attempt. But I
+think that at present they are likely to let matters sleep. Public
+opinion is greatly excited over the affair, and as, if I were found
+with a stab in my back, it would, after what has passed, be put down to
+them, I think they will leave me alone."
+
+"I do hope, father," Francis said at breakfast the next morning, "that
+there may be no opportunity of sending me back to England, until
+something is heard of the Polanis."
+
+"I have somewhat changed my mind, Francis, as to that matter. After
+what Signor Polani said the other day, I feel that it would be foolish
+for me to adhere to that plan. With his immense trade and business
+connections he can do almost anything for you, and such an introduction
+into business is so vastly better than your entering my shop in the
+city, that it is best, in every way, that you should stay here for the
+present. Of course, for the time he will be able to think of nothing
+but his missing daughters; but at any rate, you can remain here until
+he has leisure to pursue the subject, and to state, further than he did
+the other day, what he proposes for you. My own business is a good one
+for a London trader, but it is nothing by the side of the transactions
+of the merchant princes at Venice, among the very first of whom Signor
+Polani is reckoned."
+
+Francis was greatly pleased at his father's words. He had, ever since
+Polani had spoken to him, been pondering the matter in his mind. He
+knew that to enter business under his protection would be one of the
+best openings that even Venice could afford; but his father was slow to
+change his plans, and Francis greatly feared that he would adhere to
+his original plan.
+
+"I was hoping, father, that you would think favourably of what Signor
+Polani said, although, of course, I kept silence, knowing that you
+would do what was best for me. And now I would ask you if you will,
+until this matter is cleared up, excuse me from my tasks. I should
+learn nothing did I continue at them, for my mind would be ever running
+upon Signor Polani's daughters, and I should be altogether too restless
+to apply myself. It seems to me, too, that I might, as I row here and
+there in my gondola, obtain some clue as to their place of
+concealment."
+
+"I do not see how you could do that, Francis, when so many others, far
+better qualified than yourself, will be on the lookout. Still, as I
+agree with you that you are not likely to apply your mind diligently to
+your tasks, and as, indeed, you will shortly be giving them up
+altogether, I grant your request."
+
+Polani returned in the evening to Venice. Ruggiero Mocenigo had been
+found. He professed great indignation at the accusation brought against
+him, of being concerned in the abduction of the ladies, and protested
+furiously when he heard that, until they were found, he was to consider
+himself a prisoner. Signor Polani considered that his indignation was
+feigned, but he had no doubt as to the reality of his anger at finding
+that he was to be confined to his house under a guard.
+
+Immediately after his return, Polani sent his gondola for Francis. He
+was pacing up and down the room when the lad arrived.
+
+"Your suspicions have turned out correct, as you see, Francis. Would to
+Heaven I had acted upon them at once, and then this would not have
+happened. It seemed to me altogether absurd, when you spoke to me, that
+the woman I have for years treated as a friend should thus betray me.
+And yet your warning made me uneasy, so much so that I set off myself
+to fetch them home at five o'clock, only to find that I was too late. I
+scarcely know why I have sent for you, Francis, except that as I have
+found, to my cost, that you were more clear sighted in this matter than
+I, I want to know what you think now, and whether any plan offering
+even a chance of success has occurred to you. That they have been
+carried off by the friends of Mocenigo I have no doubt whatever."
+
+"I fear, signor," Francis said, "that there is little hope of my
+thinking of anything that has not already occurred to you. It seems to
+me hardly likely that they can be in the city, although, of course,
+they may be confined in the house of Mocenigo's agents. Still, they
+would be sure that you would offer large rewards for their discovery,
+and would be more likely to take them right away. Besides, I should
+think that it was Mocenigo's intention to join them, wherever they may
+be, as soon as he learned that they were in the hands of his
+accomplices. Your fortunate discovery that they had gone, so soon after
+they had been carried off, and your going straight to him armed with
+the order of the council, probably upset his calculations, for it is
+likely enough that his agents had not arrived at the house, and that he
+learned from you, for the first time, that his plans had succeeded. Had
+you arrived two or three hours later, you might have found him gone."
+
+"That is what I calculated, Francisco. His agents had but four hours'
+start of me. They would, no doubt, carry the girls to the place of
+concealment chosen, and would then bear the news to him; whereas I,
+going direct in one of the state gondolas, might reach him before they
+did, and I feel assured that I did so.
+
+"It was nigh midnight when I arrived, but he was still up, and I doubt
+not awaiting the arrival of the villains he had employed. My first step
+was to set a watch round the house, with the order to arrest any who
+might come and inquire for him. No one, however, came.
+
+"The news, indeed, of the sudden arrival of a state galley, at that
+hour, had caused some excitement in the place, and his agents might
+well have heard of it upon their arrival. I agree with you in thinking
+they are not in the town, but this makes the search all the more
+difficult. The question is, what ought we to do next?"
+
+"The reward that you have offered will certainly bring you news,
+signor, if any, save those absolutely concerned, have observed anything
+suspicious; but I should send to all the fishing villages, on the
+islets and on the mainland, to publish the news of the reward you have
+offered. Beyond that, I do not see that anything can be done; and I,
+too, have thought of nothing else since Matteo brought me the news of
+their being carried off. It will be of no use, that I can see, going
+among the fishermen and questioning them, because, with such a reward
+in view, it is certain that anyone who has anything to tell will come,
+of his own accord, to do so."
+
+"I know that is the case already, Francisco. The authorities have been
+busy all day with the matter, and a score of reports as to closed
+gondolas being seen have reached them; but so far nothing has come of
+it. Many of these gondolas have been traced to their destinations, but
+in no case was there anything to justify suspicion. Happily, as long as
+Mocenigo is in confinement, I feel that no actual harm will happen to
+the girls; but the villain is as crafty as a fox, and may elude the
+vigilance of the officer in charge of him. I am going to the council,
+presently, to urge that he should be brought here as a prisoner; but
+from what I hear there is little chance of the request being complied
+with. His friends are already declaiming on the injustice of a man
+being treated as a criminal, when there is no shadow of proof
+forthcoming against him; and the disturbances last night have angered
+many who have no great friendship for him, but who are indignant at the
+attack of the populace upon the house of a noble. So you see that there
+is but faint chance that they would bring him hither a prisoner."
+
+"I think, sir, that were I in your case, I should put some trusty men
+to watch round the house where he is confined; so that in case he
+should escape the vigilance of his guards they might seize upon him.
+Everything depends, as you say, upon his being kept in durance."
+
+"I will do so, Francisco, at once. I will send to two of my officers at
+the port, and tell them to pick out a dozen men on whom they can rely,
+to proceed to Botonda, and to watch closely everyone who enters or
+leaves the house, without at the same time making themselves
+conspicuous. At any rate, they will be handy there in case Mocenigo's
+friends attempt to rescue him by force, which might be done with
+success, for the house he occupies stands at a short distance out of
+the town, and the official in charge of Mocenigo has only eight men
+with him.
+
+"Yes, your advice is excellent, and I will follow it at once. Should
+any other idea occur to you, pray let me know it immediately. You saved
+my daughters once, and although I know there is no reason why it should
+be so, still, I feel a sort of belief that you may, somehow, be
+instrumental in their again being brought back to me."
+
+"I will do my best, sir, you may depend upon it," Francis said
+earnestly. "Were they my own sisters, I could not feel more strongly
+interested in their behalf."
+
+Francis spent the next week almost entirely in his gondola. Starting
+soon after daybreak with Giuseppi, he would row across to the villages
+on the mainland, and make inquiries of all sorts there; or would visit
+the little groups of fishermen's huts, built here and there on posts
+among the shallows. He would scan every house as he passed it, with the
+vague hope that a face might appear at the window, or a hand be waved
+for assistance. But, during all that time, he had found nothing which
+seemed to offer the slightest clue, nor were the inquiries set on foot
+by Signor Polani more successful. Every piece of information which
+seemed to bear, in the slightest degree, upon the affair was
+investigated, but in no case was it found of the slightest utility.
+
+One evening he was returning late, tired by the long day's work, and
+discouraged with his utter want of success, when, just as he had passed
+under the Ponto Maggiore, the lights on the bridge fell on the faces of
+the sitters in a gondola coming the other way. They were a man and a
+woman. The latter was closely veiled. But the night was close and
+oppressive, and, just at the moment when Francis' eyes fell upon her,
+she lifted her veil for air. Francis recognized her instantly. For a
+moment he stopped rowing, and then dipped his oar in as before.
+Directly the other gondola passed through the bridge behind him, and
+his own had got beyond the circle of light, he swept it suddenly round.
+
+Giuseppi gave an exclamation of surprise.
+
+"Giuseppi, we have luck at last. Did you notice that gondola we met
+just now? The woman sitting in it is Castaldi, the woman who betrayed
+the signoras."
+
+"What shall we do, Messer Francisco?" Giuseppi, who had become almost
+as interested in the search as his master, asked. "There was only a
+single gondolier and one other man. If we take them by surprise we can
+master them."
+
+"That will not do, Giuseppi. The woman would refuse to speak, and
+though they could force her to do so in the dungeons, the girls would
+be sure to be removed the moment it was known she was captured. We must
+follow them, and see where they go to. Let us get well behind them, so
+that we can just make them out in the distance. If they have a
+suspicion that they are being followed, they will land her at the first
+steps and slip away from us."
+
+"They are landing now, signor," Giuseppi exclaimed directly afterwards.
+"Shall we push on and overtake them on shore?"
+
+"It is too late, Giuseppi. They are a hundred and fifty yards away, and
+would have mixed in the crowd, and be lost, long before we should get
+ashore and follow them. Row on fast, but not over towards that side. If
+the gondola moves off, we will make straight for the steps and try to
+follow them, though our chance of hitting upon them in the narrow lanes
+and turnings is slight indeed.
+
+"But if, as I hope, the gondola stops at the steps, most likely they
+will return to it in time. So we will row in to the bank a hundred
+yards farther up the canal and wait."
+
+The persons who had been seen in the gondola had disappeared when they
+came abreast of it, and the gondolier had seated himself in the boat,
+with the evident intention of waiting. Francis steered his gondola at a
+distance of a few yards from it as he shot past, but did not abate his
+speed, and continued to row till they were three or four hundred yards
+farther up the canal. Then he turned the gondola, and paddled
+noiselessly back until he could see the outline of the boat he was
+watching.
+
+An hour elapsed before any movement was visible. Then Francis heard the
+sound of footsteps, and could just make out the figures of persons
+descending the steps and entering the gondola. Then the boat moved out
+into the middle of the canal, where a few boats were still passing to
+and fro. Francis kept his gondola close by the bank, so as to be in the
+deep shade of the houses. The boat they were following again passed
+under the Ponto Maggiore, and for some distance followed the line of
+the Grand Canal.
+
+"Keep your eye upon it, Giuseppi. It is sure to turn off one way or the
+other soon, and if it is too far ahead of us when it does so, then it
+may give us the slip altogether."
+
+But the gondola continued its course the whole length of the canal, and
+then straight on until, nearly opposite Saint Mark's, it passed close
+to a larger gondola, with four rowers, coming slowly in the other
+direction; and it seemed to Francis that the two boats paused when
+opposite each other, and that a few words were exchanged.
+
+Then the boat they were watching turned out straight into the lagoon.
+It was rather lighter here than in the canal, bordered on each side by
+houses, and Francis did not turn the head of his gondola for a minute
+or two.
+
+"It will be very difficult to keep them in sight out here without their
+making us out," Giuseppi said.
+
+"Yes, and it is likely enough that they are only going out there in
+order that they may be quite sure that they are not followed, before
+striking off to the place they want to go to. They may possibly have
+made us out, and guess that we are tracking them. They would be sure to
+keep their eyes and ears open."
+
+"I can only just make them out now, Messer Francisco, and as we shall
+have the buildings behind us, they will not be able to see us as well
+as we can see them. I think we can go now."
+
+"We will risk it, at any rate, Giuseppi. I have lost sight of them
+already, and it will never do to let them give us the slip."
+
+They dipped their oars in the water, and the gondola darted out from
+the shore. They had not gone fifty strokes when they heard the sound of
+oars close at hand.
+
+"To the right, Giuseppi, hard!" Francis cried as he glanced over his
+shoulder.
+
+A sweep with both oars brought the gondola's head, in a moment, almost
+at right angles to the course that she had been pursuing; and the next
+sent her dancing on a new line, just as a four-oared gondola swept down
+upon them, missing their stern by only three or four feet. Had they
+been less quick in turning, the iron prow would have cut right through
+their light boat.
+
+Giuseppi burst into a torrent of vituperation at the carelessness of
+the gondoliers who had so nearly run into them, but Francis silenced
+him at once.
+
+"Row, Giuseppi. It was done on purpose. It is the gondola the other
+spoke to."
+
+Their assailant was turning also, and in a few seconds was in pursuit.
+Francis understood it now. The gondola they had been following had
+noticed them, and had informed their friends, waiting off Saint Mark's,
+of the fact. Intent upon watching the receding boat, he had paid no
+further attention to the four-oared craft, which had made a turn, and
+lay waiting in readiness to run them down, should they follow in the
+track of the other boat.
+
+Francis soon saw that the craft behind them was a fast one, and rowed
+by men who were first-rate gondoliers. Fast as his own boat was flying
+through the water, the other gained upon them steadily. He was heading
+now for the entrance to the Grand Canal, for their pursuer, in the
+wider sweep he had made in turning, was nearer to the Piazza than they
+were, and cut off their flight in that direction.
+
+"Keep cool, Giuseppi," he said. "They will be up to us in a minute or
+two. When their bow is within a yard or two of us, and I say, 'Now!'
+sweep her head straight round towards the lagoon. We can turn quicker
+than they can. Then let them gain upon us, and we will then turn
+again."
+
+The gondola in pursuit came up hand over hand. Francis kept looking
+over his shoulder, and when he saw its bow gliding up within a few feet
+of her stern he exclaimed "Now!" and, with a sudden turn, the gondola
+again swept out seaward.
+
+Their pursuer rushed on for a length or two before she could sweep
+round, while a volley of imprecations and threats burst from three men
+who were standing up in her with drawn swords. Francis and Giuseppi
+were now rowing less strongly, and gaining breath for their next
+effort. When the gondola again came up to them they swept round to the
+left, and as their pursuers followed they headed for the Grand Canal.
+
+"Make for the steps of Santa Maria church. We will jump out there and
+trust to our feet."
+
+The two lads put out all their strength now. They were some three
+boats' lengths ahead before their pursuers were fairly on their track.
+They were now rowing for life, for they knew that they could hardly
+succeed in doubling again, and that the gondola behind them was so well
+handled, that they could not gain on it at the turnings were they to
+venture into the narrow channels. It was a question of speed alone, and
+so hard did they row that the gondola in pursuit gained but slowly on
+them, and they were still two lengths ahead when they dashed up to the
+steps of the church.
+
+Simultaneously they sprang on shore, leaped up the steps, and dashed
+off at the top of their speed, hearing, as they did so, a crash as the
+gondola ran into their light craft. There was a moment's delay, as the
+men had to step across their boat to gain the shore, and they were
+fifty yards ahead before they heard the sound of their pursuers' feet
+on the stone steps; but they were lightly clad and shoeless, and
+carried nothing to impede their movements, and they had therefore
+little fear of being overtaken.
+
+After racing on at the top of their speed for a few minutes, they
+stopped and listened. The sound of their pursuers' footsteps died away
+in the distance; and, after taking a few turns to put them off their
+track, they pursued their way at a more leisurely pace.
+
+"They have smashed the gondola," Giuseppi said with a sob, for he was
+very proud of the light craft.
+
+"Never mind the gondola," Francis said cheerfully. "If they had smashed
+a hundred it would not matter."
+
+"But the woman has got away and we have learned nothing," Giuseppi
+said, surprised at his master's cheerfulness.
+
+"I think we have learned something, Giuseppi. I think we have learned
+everything. I have no doubt the girls are confined in that hut on San
+Nicolo. I wonder I never thought of it before; but I made so sure that
+they would be taken somewhere close to where Mocenigo was staying, that
+it never occurred to me that they might hide them out there. I ought to
+have known that that was just the thing they would do, for while the
+search would be keen among the islets near the land, and the villages
+there, no one would think of looking for them on the seaward islands.
+
+"I have no doubt they are there now. That woman came ashore to report
+to his friends, and that four-oared boat which has chased us was in
+waiting off Saint Mark's, to attack any boat that might be following
+them.
+
+"We will go to Signor Polani at once and tell him what has happened. I
+suppose it is about one o'clock now, but I have not noticed the hour.
+It was past eleven before we first met the gondola, and we must have
+been a good deal more than an hour lying there waiting for them."
+
+A quarter of an hour's walking took them to the palazzo of Polani. They
+rang twice at the bell at the land entrance, before a face appeared at
+the little window of the door, and asked who was there.
+
+"I wish to see Signor Polani at once," Francis said.
+
+"The signor retired to rest an hour ago," the man said.
+
+"Never mind that," Francis replied. "I am Francis Hammond, and I have
+important news to give him."
+
+As soon as the servitor recognized Francis' voice, he unbarred the
+door.
+
+"Have you news of the ladies?" he asked eagerly.
+
+"I have news which will, I hope, lead to something," Francis replied.
+
+A moment later the voice of Polani himself, who, although he had
+retired to his room, had not yet gone to sleep, was heard at the top of
+the grand stairs, inquiring who it was who had come so late; for
+although men had been arriving all day, with reports from the various
+islands and villages, he thought that no one would come at this hour
+unless his news were important.
+
+Francis at once answered:
+
+"It is I, Signor Polani, Francis Hammond. I have news which I think may
+be of importance, although I may be mistaken. Still, it is certainly
+news that may lead to something."
+
+The merchant hurried down.
+
+"What is it, Francisco? What have you learned?"
+
+"I have seen the woman Castaldi, and have followed her. I do not know
+for certain where she was going, for we have been chased by a large
+gondola, and have narrowly escaped with our lives. Still, I have a clue
+to their whereabouts."
+
+Francis then related the events of the evening.
+
+"But why did you not run into the boat and give the alarm at once,
+Francisco? Any gondolas passing would have given their assistance, when
+you declared who she was, for the affair is the talk of the city. If
+that woman were in our power we should soon find means to make her
+speak."
+
+"Yes, signor; but the moment she was known to be in your power, you may
+be sure that they would remove your daughters from the place where they
+have been hiding them. I thought, therefore, the best plan would be to
+track them. No doubt we should have succeeded in doing so, had it not
+been for the attack upon us by another gondola."
+
+"You are right, no doubt, Francisco. Still, it is unfortunate, for I do
+not see that we are now any nearer than we were before, except that we
+know that this woman is in the habit of coming into the city."
+
+"I think we are nearer, sir, for I had an adventure some time ago that
+may afford a clue to their hiding place."
+
+He then told the merchant how he had, one evening, taken a man out to
+San Nicolo, and had discovered that a hut in that island was used as a
+meeting place by various persons, among whom was Ruggiero Mocenigo.
+
+"I might have thought of the place before, signor; but, in fact, it
+never entered my mind. From the first, we considered it so certain that
+the men who carried off your daughters would take them to some hiding
+place where Mocenigo could speedily join them, that San Nicolo never
+entered my mind. I own that it was very stupid, for it seems now to me
+that the natural thing for them to do, would be to take them in the
+very opposite direction to that in which the search for them would be
+made."
+
+The story had been frequently interrupted by exclamations of surprise
+by Polani. At its conclusion, he laid his hand on Francis' shoulder.
+
+"My dear boy," he said, "How can I thank you! You seem to me to be born
+to be the preserver of my daughters. I cannot doubt that your suspicion
+is correct, and that they are confined in this hut at San Nicolo. How
+fortunate that you did not denounce this conspiracy--for conspiracy no
+doubt it is--that you discovered, for, had you done so, some other
+place would have been selected for the girls' prison."
+
+"I would not be too sanguine, sir. The girls may not be in this hut,
+still we may come on some clue there which may lead us to them. If not,
+we will search the islands on that side as closely as we have done
+those on the mainland."
+
+"Now, shall I send for the gondoliers and set out at once? There are
+ten or twelve men in the house, and it is hardly likely that they will
+place a guard over them of anything like this strength, as of course
+they will be anxious to avoid observation by the islanders."
+
+"I do not think I would do anything tonight, sir," Francis said. "The
+gondola that chased us will be on the alert. They cannot, of course,
+suspect in the slightest that we have any clue to the hiding place of
+your daughters. Still, they might think that, if we were really
+pursuing the other gondola, and had recognized the woman Castaldi, we
+might bring the news to you, and that a stir might be made. They may
+therefore be watching to see if anything comes of it; and if they saw a
+bustle and gondolas setting out taking the direction of the island,
+they might set off and get there first, for it is a very fast craft,
+and remove your daughters before we reach the hut.
+
+"I should say wait till morning. They may be watching your house now,
+and if, in an hour or two, they see all is quiet, they will no doubt
+retire with the belief that all danger is at an end. Then, in the
+morning, I would embark the men in two or three gondolas, but I would
+not start from your own steps, for no doubt your house is watched. Let
+the men go out singly, and embark at a distance from here, and not at
+the same place. Once out upon the lagoon, they should row quietly
+towards San Nicolo, keeping a considerable distance apart, the men
+lying down in the bottom as the boats approach the island, so that if
+anyone is on watch he will have no suspicion.
+
+"As I am the only one that knows the position of the hut, I will be
+with you in the first gondola. We will not land near the hut, but pass
+by, and land at the other end of the island. The other gondolas will
+slowly follow us, and land at the same spot. Then three or four men can
+go along by the sea face, with orders to watch any boats hauled up upon
+the shore there, and stop any party making down towards them. The rest
+of us will walk straight to the hut, and, as it lies among sand hills,
+I hope we shall be able to get quite close to it before our approach is
+discovered."
+
+"An excellent plan, Francisco, though I am so impatient that the night
+will seem endless to me; but certainly your plan is the best. Even if
+the house is watched, and you were seen to enter, if all remains
+perfectly quiet they will naturally suppose that the news you brought
+was not considered of sufficient importance to lead to any action. You
+will, of course, remain here till morning?"
+
+"I cannot do that, sir, though I will return the first thing. There is,
+lying on my table, a paper with the particulars and names of the
+persons I saw meet in this hut, and a request to my father that, if I
+do not return in the morning, he will at once lay this before the
+council. I place it there every day when I go out, in order that, if I
+should be seized and carried off by Mocenigo's people, I should have
+some means of forcing them to let me go.
+
+"Although I know absolutely nothing of the nature of the conspiracy,
+they will not know how much I am aware of, or what particulars I may
+have given in the document; and as I could name to them those present,
+and among them is the envoy of the King of Hungary, now in the city,
+they would hardly dare harm me, when they knew that if they did so this
+affair would be brought before the council."
+
+"It was an excellent precaution, Francisco. Why, you are as prudent and
+thoughtful as you are courageous!"
+
+"It was not likely to be of much use, sir," Francis said modestly. "I
+was very much more likely to get a stab in the back than to be carried
+off. Still, it was just possible that Mocenigo might himself like to
+see his vengeance carried out, and it was therefore worth my while
+guarding against it. But, as you see, it will be necessary for me to be
+back sometime before morning."
+
+"At any rate, Francisco, you had better wait here until morning breaks.
+Your room is not likely to be entered for some hours after that; so
+while I am preparing for our expedition, you can go out and make your
+way to the Grand Canal, hail an early gondola, and be put down at your
+own steps, when, as you have told me, you can enter the house without
+disturbing anyone. Then you can remove that paper, and return here in
+the gondola. We will start at seven. There will be plenty of boats
+about by that time, and the lagoon will be dotted by the fishermen's
+craft, so that our gondolas will attract no attention."
+
+"Perhaps that will be the best plan, signor; and, indeed, I should not
+be sorry for a few hours' sleep, for Giuseppi and I have been in our
+boat since a very early hour in the morning, and were pretty well tired
+out before this last adventure began."
+
+
+
+Chapter 6: The Hut On San Nicolo.
+
+
+At seven o'clock all was in readiness for a start. Signor Polani set
+out alone in his gondola, and picked up Francis, and four men, at a
+secluded spot some distance from the house. A messenger had been sent,
+two hours before, to the captain of one of the merchant ships lying in
+the port. He at once put ten men into a large boat, and rowed down to
+within half a mile of the island. Here a grapnel was thrown overboard,
+most of the men lay down in the bottom, and the captain, according to
+his instructions, kept a sharp lookout to see that no boat left San
+Nicolo--his instructions being to overhaul any boat coming out, and to
+see that no one was concealed on board it.
+
+There he remained until Polani's gondola rowed past him. After it had
+gone a few hundred yards, the grapnel was got up, the men took to their
+oars and followed the gondola, keeping so far behind that it would not
+seem there was any connection between them.
+
+Francis made for the narrow channel which separated San Nicolo from the
+next island, and then directed the gondola to be run ashore, where a
+low sand hill, close by, hid them from the sight of anyone on the
+lookout. A few minutes later the ship's boat arrived.
+
+Francis now led the way direct for the hut, accompanied by Polani and
+six men, while four sailors advanced, at a distance of a hundred yards
+on either flank, to cut off anyone making for the water.
+
+"We may as well go fast," he said, "for we can scarcely get there
+without being seen by a lookout, should there be one on the sand hills,
+and the distance is so short that there will be no possibility of their
+carrying your daughters off, before we get there."
+
+"The faster the better," the merchant said. "This suspense is
+terrible."
+
+Accordingly, the party started at a brisk run. Francis kept his eyes on
+the spot where he believed the hut lay.
+
+"I see no one anywhere near there," he said, as they came over one of
+the sand ridges. "Had there been anyone on the watch I think we should
+see him now."
+
+On they ran, until, passing over one of the sand hills, Francis came to
+a standstill. The hut lay in the hollow below them.
+
+"There is the house, signor. Now we shall soon know."
+
+They dashed down the short slope, and gathered round the door.
+
+"Within there, open!" the merchant shouted, hammering with the hilt of
+his sword on the door.
+
+All was silent within.
+
+"Break it down!" he said; and two of the sailors, who had brought axes
+with them, began to hew away at the door.
+
+A few blows, and it suddenly opened, and two men dressed as fishermen
+appeared in the doorway.
+
+"What means this attack upon the house of quiet people?" they demanded.
+
+"Bind them securely," Polani said, as he rushed in, followed closely by
+Francis, while those who followed seized the men.
+
+Polani paused as he crossed the threshold, with a cry of
+disappointment--the hut was empty. Francis was almost equally
+disappointed.
+
+"If they are not here, they are near by," Francis said to Polani. "Do
+not give up hope. I am convinced they are not far off; and if we search
+we may find a clue. Better keep your men outside. We can search more
+thoroughly by ourselves."
+
+The merchant told his men, who had seized and were binding the two
+occupants of the hut, to remain outside. The inside of the hut differed
+in no way from the ordinary dwelling of fishermen, except that a large
+table stood in the middle of it, and there were some benches against
+the walls. Some oars stood in one corner, and some nets were piled
+close to them. A fire burned in the open hearth, and a pot hung over
+it, and two others stood on the hearth.
+
+"Let us see what they have got here," Francis said, while the merchant
+leaned against the table with an air of profound depression, paying no
+attention to what he was doing.
+
+"A soup," Francis said, lifting the lid from the pot over the fire,
+"and, by the smell, a good one."
+
+Then he lifted the other pots simmering among the burning brands.
+
+"A ragout of kid and a boiled fish. Signor Polani, this is no
+fisherman's meal. Either these men expect visitors of a much higher
+degree than themselves, or your daughters are somewhere close.
+
+"Oh! there is a door."
+
+"It can lead nowhere," Polani said. "The sand is piled up to the roof
+on that side of the house."
+
+"It is," Francis agreed; "but there may be a lower room there,
+completely covered with the sand. At any rate, we will see."
+
+He pushed against the door, but it did not give in the slightest.
+
+"It may be the sand," he said. "It may be bolts."
+
+He went to the outside door, and called in the sailors with the
+hatchets.
+
+"Break open that door," he said.
+
+"There is a space behind," he exclaimed, as the first blow was given.
+"It is hollow, I swear. It would be a different sound altogether if
+sand was piled up against it."
+
+A dozen blows and the fastenings gave, and, sword in hand, the merchant
+and Francis rushed through.
+
+Both gave a shout of delight. They were in a room built out at the back
+of the hut. It was richly furnished, and hangings of Eastern stuffs
+covered the walls. A burning lamp hung from the ceiling. Two men stood
+irresolute with drawn swords, having apparently turned round just as
+the door gave way; for as it did so, two figures struggled to their
+feet from a couch behind them, for some shawls had been wrapped round
+their heads, and with a cry of delight rushed forward to meet their
+rescuers. Seated at the end of the couch, with bowed down head, was
+another female figure.
+
+"Maria--Giulia!" the merchant exclaimed, as, dropping his sword, he
+clasped his daughters in his arms.
+
+Francis, followed by the two sailors with hatchets, advanced towards
+the men.
+
+"Drop your swords and surrender," he said. "Resistance is useless.
+There are a dozen men outside."
+
+The men threw their swords down on the ground.
+
+"Lead them outside, and bind them securely," Francis said.
+
+For the next minute or two, few words were spoken. The girls sobbed
+with delight on their father's breast, while he himself was too moved
+to do more than murmur words of love and thankfulness. Francis went
+quietly out and spoke to the captain, who went in to the inner room,
+touched the sitting figure on the shoulder, and, taking her by the arm,
+led her outside.
+
+"Come in, Francis," Polani called a minute later.
+
+"My dears, it is not me you must thank for your rescue. It is your
+English friend here who has again restored you to me. It is to him we
+owe our happiness, and that you, my child, are saved from the dreadful
+fate of being forced to be the wife of that villain Mocenigo.
+
+"Embrace him, my dears, as a brother, for he has done more than a
+brother for you. And now tell me all that has happened since I last saw
+you."
+
+"You know, father, the message that was brought us, that you had been
+hurt and wanted us home?"
+
+"Yes, my dears, that I learned soon afterwards. I went at five o'clock
+to fetch you home, and found that you had gone, and why."
+
+"Well, father, directly we had taken our seats in the cabin of the
+gondola, our gouvernante closed the doors, and soon afterwards she slid
+to the two shutters before the windows. We cried out in surprise at
+finding ourselves in the dark, but she bade us be quiet, in a tone
+quite different to any in which she had ever spoken to us before. We
+were both frightened, and tried to push back the shutters and open the
+door, but they were fastened firmly. I suppose there was some spring
+which held them. Then we screamed; but I could feel that the inside was
+all thickly padded. I suppose our voices could not be heard outside. I
+thought so, because once I thought I heard the gondoliers singing, but
+it was so faint that I could not be sure. Then the air seemed
+stiflingly close, and I fainted; and when I came to myself one of the
+windows was open, and Giulia said she had promised we would not scream,
+but I think we were beyond the canals then, for I could see nothing but
+the sky as we passed along. When I was better the windows were almost
+shut again, so that we could not see out, though a little air could get
+in; then the gondola went on for a long time.
+
+"At last it stopped, and she said we must be blindfolded. We said we
+would not submit to it, and she told us unless we let her do it, the
+men would do it. So we submitted, and she wrapped shawls closely over
+our heads. Then we were helped ashore, and walked some distance. At
+last the shawls were taken off our heads, and we found ourselves here,
+and here we have been ever since."
+
+"You have not been ill treated in any way, my children?" the merchant
+asked anxiously.
+
+"Not at all, father. Until today, nobody has been into this room
+besides ourselves and that woman. The door was generally left a little
+open for air, for you see there are no windows here. She used to go
+into the next room and come back with our food. We could see men moving
+about in there, but they were very quiet, and all spoke in low tones.
+
+"You may think how we upbraided our gouvernante for her treachery, and
+threatened her with your anger. She told us we should never be found,
+and that I might as well make up my mind to marry Ruggiero Mocenigo,
+for if I did not consent quietly, means would be found to compel me to
+do so. I said I would die first, but she used to laugh a cruel laugh,
+and say he would soon be here with the priest, and that it mattered not
+whether I said yes or no. The ceremony would be performed, and then
+Ruggiero would sail away with me to the East, and I should be glad
+enough then to make peace between him and you. But he never came. I
+think she became anxious, for she went away twice for three or four
+hours, and locked us in here when she went.
+
+"That, father, is all we know about it. Where are we?"
+
+"You are at San Nicolo."
+
+"On the island!" Maria exclaimed in surprise. "She told us we were on
+the mainland. And now, how did you find us?"
+
+"I will tell you as we go home, Maria."
+
+"Yes, that will be better, father. Giulia and I long for a breath of
+fresh air, and the sight of the blue sky."
+
+"Giulia has not had so much to frighten her as you have," her father
+said.
+
+"Yes, I have, father; for she said I was to go across the seas with
+Maria, and that Ruggiero would soon find a husband for me among his
+friends. I told her she was a wicked woman, over and over again, and we
+told her that we were sure you would forgive, and even reward her, if
+she would take us back again to you. When she was away, we thought we
+would try to make our escape behind, and we made a little hole in the
+boards; but the sand came pouring in, and we found we were underground,
+though how we got there we didn't know, for we had not come down any
+steps. So we had to give up the idea of escape."
+
+"You are partly underground," her father said, "for, as you will see
+when you get out, the sand has drifted up at the back of the hut to the
+roof, and has altogether hidden this part of the hut; so that we did
+not know that there was more than one room, and I should never have
+thought of breaking into that door, had it not been for Francisco. And
+now come along, my dears. Let us wait here no longer."
+
+The sailors and servitors broke into a cheer as the girls came out of
+the hut.
+
+"Shall we put a torch to this place?" Francis asked Polani.
+
+"No, Francisco. It must be searched thoroughly first.
+
+"Captain Lontano, do you order four of your men to remain here, until
+some of the officials of the state arrive. If anyone comes before that,
+they must seize them and detain them as prisoners. The state will
+investigate the matter to the bottom."
+
+Now that they were in the open air, the merchant could see that the
+close confinement and anxiety had told greatly upon his daughters. Both
+were pale and hollow eyed, and looked as if they had suffered a long
+illness. Seeing how shaken they were, he ordered one of the retainers
+to go to the gondola, and tell the men to row it round to the nearest
+point to the hut. The party then walked along down to the shore.
+
+In a few minutes the gondola arrived. Polani, his two daughters, and
+Francis took their places in it. The four men, bound hand and foot,
+were laid in the bottom of the ship's boat; the gouvernante was made to
+take her place there also, and the sailors were told to follow closely
+behind the gondola, which was rowed at a very slow pace.
+
+On the way, Polani told his daughters of the manner in which Francis
+had discovered the place of concealment.
+
+"Had it not been for him, my dears, we should certainly not have found
+you, and that villain would have carried out his plans, sooner or
+later. He would either have given his guards the slip, or, when no
+evidence was forthcoming against him, they would have been removed. He
+would then have gone outside the jurisdiction of the republic, obtained
+a ship with a crew of desperadoes, sailed round to the seaward side of
+San Nicolo, and carried you off. Nothing could have saved you, and your
+resistance would, as that woman told you, have been futile."
+
+"We shall be grateful to you all our lives, Francisco," Maria said. "We
+shall pray for you always, night and morning.
+
+"Shall we not, Giulia?"
+
+"Yes, indeed," the young girl said simply. "We shall love him all our
+lives."
+
+"Answer for yourself, Giulia," Maria said with a laugh, her spirits
+returning in the bright sunshine and fresh air. "When Francisco asks
+for my love, it will be quite soon enough to say what I think about
+it."
+
+"I should never have courage enough to do that, signora. I know what
+you would say too well."
+
+"What should I say?" Maria asked.
+
+"You would say I was an impudent boy."
+
+Maria laughed.
+
+"I cannot think of you as a boy any longer, Francisco," she said more
+gravely. "I have, perhaps, regarded you as a boy till now, though you
+did save us so bravely before; but you see you are only my own age, and
+a girl always looks upon a boy of her own age as ever so much younger
+than she is herself. Besides, too, you have none of the airs of being a
+man, which some of my cousins have; and never pay compliments or say
+pretty things, but seem altogether like a younger brother. But I shall
+think you a boy no more. I know you better now."
+
+"But I am a boy," Francis said, "and I don't want to be thought
+anything else. In England we keep young longer than they do here, and a
+boy of my age would not think of speaking to his elders, unless he was
+first addressed.
+
+"What are you going to do with your prisoners, signor?"
+
+"I shall take them direct to my house, and then go and report the
+recovery of my daughters, and their capture. Officials will at once be
+sent, with a gondola, to take them off to the prison. There can be no
+question now as to the part Mocenigo has played in this business, and
+no doubt he will be brought here a prisoner at once. Even his nearest
+connections will not dare to defend conduct so outrageous, especially
+when public indignation has been so excited.
+
+"You do not know, girls, what a stir has been caused in the city on
+your account. If it had not been for the citizen guard, I believe the
+Mocenigo Palace would have been burned down; and Ruggiero's connections
+have scarcely dared to show their faces in the streets, since you have
+been missing. You see, every father of a family felt personally
+grieved, for if the nobles were permitted, with impunity, to carry off
+the daughters of citizens, who could feel safe?
+
+"When this is all over I shall take you, for a time, back to our home
+in Corfu. It is not good for girls to be the subject of public talk and
+attention."
+
+"I shall be very glad, father," Giulia said. "I love our home at Corfu,
+with its gardens and flowers, far better than the palazzo here. The air
+is always soft and balmy, while here it is so hot sometimes by day, and
+so damp and foggy in the evening. I shall be glad to go back again."
+
+"And you, Maria?"
+
+"I shall be very happy there, father, but I like Venice best."
+
+"You are getting to an age to enjoy gaiety, Maria; and it is natural
+you should do so. However, it will not be necessary for you to be long
+absent. In a city like Venice there are always fresh subjects for talk,
+and the most exciting piece of scandal is but a three days' wonder. A
+few weeks at Corfu will restore your nerves, which cannot but have been
+shaken by what you have gone through, and you will come back here more
+disposed than ever to appreciate the gaieties of Venice."
+
+"As long as it is for only a few weeks, father, I shall not care; for
+you know I am very fond, too, of our beautiful home there. Still, I do
+like Venice."
+
+They had now reached the steps of the Palazzo Polani. They had not
+proceeded by way of the Grand Canal, as the merchant was anxious that
+his daughters should reach their home unrecognized, as, had they been
+noticed, it would have given rise to no little excitement, and they had
+had more than enough of this, and needed quiet and repose. Besides,
+until the prisoners were in the safe custody of the officials of the
+state, it was in every way desirable that the events of the morning
+should remain unknown.
+
+Their return home created quite a tumult of joy in the house. The
+preparations that had been made had been kept a profound secret, as the
+merchant could not be sure but that some other member of his household
+was in the pay of Mocenigo. Thus, until the girls alighted at the
+steps, none in the house were aware that any clue had been obtained as
+to their hiding place. The women ran down with cries of joy. The men
+would have shouted and cheered, had not Polani held up his hand.
+
+"The signoras have had more than enough excitement," he said. "They are
+grateful to you for your goodwill and affection, but for the present
+they need quiet. They may have more to go through today. I pray you
+that no word, as to their return, be said outside the house. I would
+not that the news were whispered in the city, till the seignory decide
+what is to be done in the matter."
+
+As soon as the girls had gone upstairs to their rooms, the ship's boat
+came alongside, and the prisoners were carried into the house, glances
+of indignation and anger being cast at the gouvernante, who had, as
+soon as she was placed on board the boat, closely veiled herself; and
+some of the women broke out into threats and imprecations.
+
+"Captain Lontano, the servants will show you a room where your men can
+guard the prisoners. You had better remain with them yourself. Let no
+one, except your own men, enter the room."
+
+Giuseppi was on the steps, and Francis stepped up to him and eagerly
+asked, "What news of the gondola?"
+
+"I found her, stove in and full of water, behind the piles close to the
+steps. Someone must have pushed her there, to be out of the way of the
+traffic. She has several holes in her bottom, besides being stove in at
+the gunwale where the other boat struck her. They must have thrust the
+ends of their oars through her planks, out of sheer spite, when they
+found that we had escaped them. Father and I have towed her round to
+your steps, but I doubt whether she is worth repairing."
+
+"Well, we can't help it, Giuseppi. She has done her work; and if every
+two ducats I lay out were to bring in as good a harvest, I should have
+no reason to complain."
+
+Having seen the prisoners safely placed, the merchant returned.
+
+"I think, Francisco, you must go with me. They will be sure to want to
+question you."
+
+"I shall have to say what were my reasons for thinking your daughters
+were hid in that hut, signor," Francis said as the gondola rowed
+towards Saint Mark's; "and I can only do that by telling of that secret
+meeting. I do not want to denounce a number of people, besides
+Ruggiero. I have no evidence against them, and do not know what they
+were plotting, nor have I any wish to create for myself more enemies.
+It is quite enough to have incurred the enmity of all the connections
+of the house of Mocenigo."
+
+"That is true enough, Francisco, but I do not see how it is to be
+avoided. Unfortunately, you did recognize others besides Ruggiero."
+
+"Quite so, signor, and I am not going to tell a lie about it, whatever
+the consequences may be. Still, I wish I could get out of it."
+
+"I wish you could, Francis, but I do not see any escape for it,
+especially as you say you did not recognize Ruggiero as the passenger
+you carried."
+
+"No, signor, I did not. It might have been he, but I cannot say. He was
+wrapped in a cloak, and I did not see his features."
+
+"It is a pity, Francisco, for had you known him, the statement that,
+moved by curiosity, you followed him and saw him into that hut, would
+have been sufficient without your entering into the other matter. Most
+of my countrymen would not hesitate about telling a lie, to avoid
+mixing themselves up further in such a matter, for the dangers of
+making enemies are thoroughly appreciated here; but you are perfectly
+right, and I like your steady love of the truth, whatever the
+consequences to yourself; but certainly as soon as the matter is
+concluded, it will be better for you to quit Venice for a time."
+
+"Are you going to the council direct, signor?"
+
+"No. I am going first to the magistrates, to tell them that I have in
+my hands five persons, who have been engaged in carrying off my
+daughters, and beg them to send at once to take them into their
+custody. Then I shall go before the council, and demand justice upon
+Mocenigo, against whom we have now conclusive evidence. You will not be
+wanted at the magistracy. My own evidence, that I found them keeping
+guard over my daughters, will be quite sufficient for the present, and
+after that the girls' evidence will be sufficient to convict them,
+without your name appearing in the affair at all.
+
+"I will try whether I cannot keep your name from appearing before the
+council also. Yes, I think I might do that; and as a first step, I give
+you my promise not to name you, unless I find it absolutely necessary.
+You may as well remain here in the gondola until I return."
+
+It was upwards of an hour before Signor Polani came back to the boat.
+
+"I have succeeded," he said, "in keeping your name out of it. I first
+of all told my daughters' story, and then said that, having obtained
+information that Ruggiero, before he was banished from Venice, was in
+the habit of going sometimes at night to a hut on San Nicolo, I
+proceeded thither, and found my daughters concealed in the hut whose
+position had been described to me. Of course, they inquired where I had
+obtained the information; but I replied that, as they knew, I had
+offered a large reward which would lead to my daughters' discovery, and
+that this reward had attracted one in the secret of Mocenigo, but that,
+for the man's own safety, I had been compelled to promise that I would
+not divulge his name.
+
+"Some of the council were inclined to insist, but others pointed out
+that, for the ends of justice, it mattered in no way how I obtained the
+information. I had, at any rate, gone to the island and found my
+daughters there; and their evidence, if it was in accordance with what
+I had stated, was amply sufficient to bring the guilt of the abduction
+of my daughters home to Ruggiero, against whom other circumstances had
+already excited suspicion. A galley has already started for the
+mainland, with orders to bring him back a prisoner, and the girls are
+to appear to give evidence tomorrow. The woman, Castaldi, is to be
+interrogated by the council this afternoon, and I have no doubt she
+will make a full confession, seeing that my daughters' evidence is, in
+itself, sufficient to prove her guilt, and that it can be proved, from
+other sources, that it was she who inveigled them away by a false
+message from me."
+
+"I am glad indeed, signor, that I am not to be called, and that this
+affair of the conspiracy is not to be brought up. I would, with your
+permission, now return home. Giuseppi took a message to my father from
+me, the first thing, explaining my absence; and I told him, when we
+left your house, to go at once to tell him that your daughters had been
+recovered, and that I should return before long. Still, he will want to
+hear from me as to the events of the night."
+
+"Will you also tell him, Francisco, that I will call upon him this
+afternoon. I have much to say to him."
+
+"I am glad Signor Polani is coming," Mr. Hammond said, when his son
+gave him the message. "I am quite resolved that you shall quit Venice
+at once. I do not wish to blame you for what you have done, which,
+indeed, is likely to have a favourable effect upon your fortunes; but
+that, at your age, you have mixed yourself up in adventures of this
+kind, taken part in the affairs of great houses, and drawn upon
+yourself the enmity of one of the most powerful families of Venice, is
+altogether strange and improper for a lad of your years, and belonging
+to the family of a quiet trader. I have been thinking about it all this
+morning, and am quite resolved that the sooner you are out of Venice
+the better. If I saw any way of sending you off before nightfall I
+would do so.
+
+"Signor Polani has, you say, so far concealed from the council the fact
+that you have been mixed up in this business; but there is no saying
+how soon it may come out. You know that Venice swarms with spies, and
+these are likely, before many hours, to learn the fact of your midnight
+arrival at Polani's house; and as no orders were given for the
+preparation of this expedition to the island before that time, it will
+not need much penetration to conclude that you were the bearer of the
+news that led to the discovery of the maidens. Besides which, you
+accompanied the expedition, and acted as its guide to the hut. Part of
+this they will learn from the servants of the house, part of it they
+may get out from the sailors, who, over their wine cups, are not given
+to reticence. The council may not have pressed Polani on this point,
+but, take my word for it, some of them, at least, will endeavour to get
+to the bottom of it, especially Mocenigo's connections, who will
+naturally be alarmed at the thought that there is somewhere a traitor
+among their own ranks.
+
+"The affair has become very serious, Francis, and far beyond the
+compass of a boyish scrape, and no time must be lost in getting you out
+of Venice. I have no doubt Polani will see the matter in the same
+light, for he knows the ways of his countrymen even better than I do."
+
+The interview between the two traders was a long one. At its conclusion
+Francis was sent for.
+
+"Francis," his father said, "Signor Polani has had the kindness to make
+me offers of a most generous nature."
+
+"Not at all, Messer Hammond," the Venetian interrupted. "Let there be
+no mistake upon that score. Your son has rendered me services
+impossible for me ever to repay adequately. He has laid me under an
+obligation greater than I can ever discharge. At the same time,
+fortunately, I am in a position to be able to further his interests in
+life.
+
+"I have proposed, Francisco, that you shall enter my house at once. You
+will, of course, for some years learn the business, but you will do so
+in the position which a son of mine would occupy, and when you come of
+age, you will take your place as a partner with me.
+
+"Your father will return to England. He informs me that he is now
+longing to return to his own country, and has for some time been
+thinking of doing so. I have proposed to him that he shall act as my
+agent there. Hitherto I have not traded direct with England; in future
+I shall do so largely. Your father has explained to me somewhat of his
+transactions, and I see there is good profit to be made on trade with
+London, by a merchant who has the advantage of the advice and
+assistance of one, like your father, thoroughly conversant in the
+trade. Thus, I hope that the arrangement will be largely to our mutual
+advantage. As to yourself, you will probably be reluctant to establish
+yourself for life in this country; but there is no reason why, in time,
+when your father wishes to retire from business, you should not
+establish yourself in London, in charge of the English branch of our
+house."
+
+"I am most grateful to you for your offer, signor, which is vastly
+beyond anything that my ambition could ever have aspired to. I can only
+say that I will try my best to do justice to your kindness to me."
+
+"I have no fear as to that, Francisco," the merchant said. "You have
+shown so much thoughtfulness, in this business, that I shall have no
+fear of entrusting even weighty affairs of business in your hands; and
+you must remember always that I shall still consider myself your
+debtor. I thoroughly agree with your father's views as to the necessity
+for your leaving Venice, as soon as possible. In a few months this
+matter will have blown over, the angry feelings excited will calm down,
+and you will then be able to come and go in safety; but at present you
+were best out of the town, and I have, therefore, arranged with your
+father that you shall embark tonight on board the Bonito, which sails
+tomorrow. You will have much to say to your father now, but I hope you
+will find time to come round, and say goodbye to my daughters, this
+evening."
+
+"Your adventures, Francis," Mr. Hammond said when the merchant had left
+them, "have turned out fortunate, indeed. You have an opening now
+beyond anything we could have hoped for. Signor Polani has expressed
+himself most warmly. He told me that I need concern myself no further
+with your future, for that would now be his affair. The arrangement
+that he has made with me, will enable me to hold my head as high as any
+in the City, for it will give me almost a monopoly of the Venetian
+trade; and although he said that he had long been thinking of entering
+into trade direct with England, there is no doubt that it is his
+feeling towards you, which has influenced him now in the matter.
+
+"My business here has more than answered my expectations, in one
+respect, but has fallen short in another. I have bought cheaply, and
+the business should have been a very profitable one; but my partner in
+London is either not acting fairly by me, or he is mismanaging matters
+altogether. This offer, then, of Signor Polani is in every respect
+acceptable. I shall give up my own business and start anew, and
+selling, as I shall, on commission, shall run no risk, while the
+profits will be far larger than I could myself make, for Polani will
+carry it on on a great scale.
+
+"As for you, you will soon learn the ways of trade, and will be able to
+come home and join me, and eventually succeed me in the business.
+
+"No fairer prospect could well open to a young man, and if you show
+yourself as keen in business, as you have been energetic in the
+pursuits you have adopted, assuredly a great future is open to you, and
+you may look to be one of the greatest merchants in the city of London.
+I know not yet what offers Polani may make you here, but I hope that
+you will not settle in Venice permanently, but will always remember
+that you are an Englishman, and the son of a London citizen, and that
+you will never lose your love for your native land.
+
+"And yet, do not hurry home for my sake. Your two brothers will soon
+have finished their schooling, and will, of course, be apprenticed to
+me as soon as I return; and if, as I hope, they turn out steady and
+industrious; they will, by the time they come to man's estate, be of
+great assistance to me in the business.
+
+"And now, you will be wanting to say goodbye to your friends. Be
+careful this last evening, for it is just when you are thinking most of
+other matters, that sudden misfortune is likely to come upon you."
+
+Delighted with his good fortune--rather because it opened up a life of
+activity, instead of the confinement to business that he had dreaded,
+than for the pecuniary advantages it offered--Francis ran downstairs
+and, leaping into his father's gondola, told Beppo to take him to the
+Palazzo Giustiniani. On the way he told Beppo and his son that the next
+day he was leaving Venice, and was going to enter the service of Signor
+Polani.
+
+Giuseppi ceased rowing, and, throwing himself down at the bottom of the
+gondola, began to sob violently, with the abandonment to his emotions
+common to his race. Then he suddenly sat up.
+
+"If you are going, I will go too, Messer Francisco. You will want a
+servant who will be faithful to you. I will ask the padrone to let me
+go with you.
+
+"You will let me go, will you not, father? I cannot leave our young
+master, and should pine away, were I obliged to stop here to work a
+gondola; while he may be wanting my help, for Messer Francisco is sure
+to get into adventures and dangers. Has he not done it here in Venice?
+and is he not sure to do it at sea, where there are Genoese and
+pirates, and perils of all kinds?
+
+"You will take me with you, will you not, Messer Francisco? You will
+never be so hard hearted as to go away and leave me behind?"
+
+"I shall be very glad to have you with me, Giuseppi, if your father
+will give you leave to go. I am quite sure that Signor Polani will make
+no objection. In the first place, he would do it to oblige me, and in
+the second, I know that it is his intention to do something to your
+advantage. He has spoken to me about it several times, for you had your
+share of the danger when we first rescued his daughters, and again when
+we were chased by that four-oared gondola. He has been too busy with
+the search for his daughters to give the matter his attention, but I
+know that he is conscious of his obligation to you, and that he intends
+to reward you largely. Therefore, I am sure that he will offer no
+objection to your accompanying me.
+
+"What do you say, Beppo?"
+
+"I do not like to stand in the way of the lad's wishes, Messer
+Francisco; but, you see, he is of an age now to be very useful to me.
+If Giuseppi leaves me, I shall have to hire another hand for the
+gondola, or to take a partner."
+
+"Well, we will talk it over presently," Francis said. "Here we are at
+the steps of the palazzo, and here comes Matteo himself. It is lucky I
+was not five minutes later, or I should have missed him."
+
+
+
+Chapter 7: On Board A Trader.
+
+
+"Have you heard the news, Francisco? My cousins are rescued! I have
+been out this morning and have only just heard it, and I was on the
+point of starting to tell you."
+
+"Your news is old, Matteo. I knew it hours ago."
+
+"And I hear," Matteo went on, "that Polani found them in a hut on San
+Nicolo. My father cannot think how he came to hear of their hiding
+place. He says Polani would not say how he learned the news. My father
+supposes he heard it from some member of Ruggiero's household."
+
+Francis hesitated for a moment. He had at first been on the point of
+telling Matteo of the share he had had in the recovery of the girls;
+but he thought that although his friend could be trusted not to repeat
+the news wilfully, he might accidentally say something which would lead
+to the fact being known, and that as Polani had strongly enjoined the
+necessity of keeping the secret, and had himself declined to mention,
+even to the council, the source from which he obtained his information,
+he would look upon him as a babbler, and unworthy of trust, did he find
+that Matteo had been let into the secret.
+
+"It does not much matter who it is Polani learned the news from. The
+great point is, he has found his daughters safe from all injury, and I
+hear has brought back with him the woman who betrayed them. It is
+fortunate indeed that he took such prompt measures with Ruggiero, and
+thus prevented his escaping from the mainland, and making off with the
+girls, as of course he intended to do."
+
+"My father tells me," Matteo said, "that a state gondola has already
+been dispatched to bring Ruggiero a prisoner here, and that even his
+powerful connections will not save him from severe punishment, for
+public indignation is so great at the attempt, that his friends will
+not venture to plead on his behalf."
+
+"And now I have my bit of news to tell you, Matteo. Signor Polani has
+most generously offered me a position in his house, and I am to sail
+tomorrow in one of his ships for the East."
+
+"I congratulate you, Francisco, for I know, from what you have often
+said, that you would like this much better than going back to England.
+But it seems very sudden. You did not know anything about it yesterday,
+and now you are going to start at once. Why, when can it have been
+settled? Polani has been absent since daybreak, engaged in this matter
+of the girls, and has been occupied ever since with the council."
+
+"I have seen him since he returned," Francis replied; "and though it
+was only absolutely settled this morning, he has had several interviews
+with my father on the subject. I believe he and my father thought that
+it was better to get me away as soon as possible, as Ruggiero's friends
+may put down the disgrace which has befallen him to my interference in
+his first attempt to carry off the girls."
+
+"Well, I think you are a lucky fellow anyhow, Francisco, and I hope
+that I may be soon doing something also. I shall speak to my father
+about it, and ask him to get Polani to let me take some voyages in his
+vessels, so that I may be fit to become an officer in one of the state
+galleys, as soon as I am of age. Where are you going now?"
+
+"I am going round to the School of Arms, to say goodbye to our
+comrades. After that I am going to Signor Polani's to pay my respects
+to the signoras. Then I shall be at home with my father till it is time
+to go on board. He will have left here before I return from my voyage,
+as he is going to wind up his affairs at once and return to England."
+
+"Well, I will accompany you to the school and to my cousin's," Matteo
+said. "I shall miss you terribly here, and shall certainly do all I can
+to follow your example, and get afloat. You may have all sorts of
+adventures, for we shall certainly be at war with Genoa before many
+weeks are over, and you will have to keep a sharp lookout for their war
+galleys. Polani's ships are prizes worth taking, and you may have the
+chance of seeing the inside of a Genoese prison before you return."
+
+After a visit to the School of Arms, the two friends were rowed to
+Signor Polani's. The merchant himself was out, but they were at once
+shown up to the room where the girls were sitting.
+
+"My dear cousins," Matteo said as he entered, "I am delighted to see
+you back safe and well. All Venice is talking of your return. You are
+the heroines of the day. You do not know what an excitement there has
+been over your adventure."
+
+"The sooner people get to talk about something else the better,
+Matteo," Maria said, "for we shall have to be prisoners all day till
+something else occupies their attention. We have not the least desire
+to be pointed at, whenever we go out, as the maidens who were carried
+away. If the Venetians were so interested in us, they had much better
+have set about discovering where we were hidden away before."
+
+"But everyone did try, I can assure you, Maria. Every place has been
+ransacked, high and low. Every gondolier has been questioned and cross
+questioned as to his doings on that day. Every fishing village has been
+visited. Never was such a search, I do believe. But who could have
+thought of your being hidden away all the time at San Nicolo! As for
+me, I have spent most of my time in a gondola, going out and staring up
+at every house I passed, in hopes of seeing a handkerchief waved from a
+casement. And so has Francisco; he has been just as busy in the search
+as anyone, I can assure you."
+
+"Francisco is different," Maria said, not observing the signs Francis
+was making for her to be silent. "Francisco has got eyes in his head,
+and a brain in his skull, which is more, it seems, than any of the
+Venetians have; and had he not brought father to our hiding place,
+there we should have remained until Ruggiero Mocenigo came and carried
+us away."
+
+"Francisco brought your father the news!" Matteo exclaimed in
+astonishment. "Why, was it he who found you out, after all?"
+
+"Did you not know that, Matteo? Of course it was Francisco! As I told
+you, he has got brains; and if it had not been for him, we should
+certainly never have been rescued. Giulia and I owe him
+everything--don't we, Giulia?"
+
+"Forgive me for not telling you, Matteo," Francis said to his
+astonished friend; "but Signor Polani, and my father, both impressed
+upon me so strongly that I should keep silent as to my share in the
+business, that I thought it better not even to mention it to you at
+present. It was purely the result of an accident."
+
+"It was nothing of the sort," Maria said. "It was the result of your
+keeping your eyes open and knowing how to put two and two together. I
+did not know, Francisco, that it was a secret. We have not seen our
+father since we have returned, and I suppose he thought we should see
+nobody until he saw us again, and so did not tell us that we were not
+to mention your name in the affair; but we will be careful in future."
+
+"But how was it, Francisco?" Matteo asked. "Now I know so much as this,
+I suppose I can be told the rest. I can understand well enough why it
+was to be kept a secret, and why my cousin is anxious to get you out of
+Venice at once."
+
+Francis related the manner in which he first became acquainted with the
+existence of the hut on the island, and the fact of its being
+frequented by Ruggiero Mocenigo; and how, on catching sight of the
+gouvernante in a gondola, and seeing her make out across the lagoons,
+the idea struck him that the girls were confined in the hut.
+
+"It is all very simple, you see, Matteo," he concluded.
+
+"I will never say anything against learning to row a gondola in
+future," Matteo said, "for it seems to lead to all sorts of adventures;
+and unless you could have rowed well, you would never have got back to
+tell the story. But it is certain that it is a good thing you are
+leaving Venice for a time, for Ruggiero's friends may find out the
+share you had in it from some of my cousin's servants. You may be sure
+that they will do their best to discover how he came to be informed of
+the hiding place, and he is quite right to send you off at once."
+
+"What! are you going away, Francisco?" the two girls exclaimed
+together.
+
+"I am sailing tomorrow in one of your father's ships, signoras."
+
+"And you are not coming back again?" Maria exclaimed.
+
+"I hope to have the pleasure of seeing you again before very long,
+signora. I am entering your father's service for good, and shall be
+backwards and forwards to Venice as the ship comes and goes. My father
+is returning to England, and Signor Polani has most kindly requested me
+to make my home with him whenever I am in port."
+
+"That is better," Maria said. "We should have a pretty quarrel with
+papa if he had let you go away altogether, after what you have done for
+us--
+
+"Shouldn't we, Giulia?"
+
+But Giulia had walked away to the window, and did not seem to hear the
+question.
+
+"That will be very pleasant," Maria went on; "for you will be back
+every two or three months, and I shall take good care that papa does
+not send the ship off in a hurry again. It will be almost as good as
+having a brother; and I look upon you almost as a brother now,
+Francisco--and a very good brother, too. I don't think that man will
+molest us any more. If I thought there was any chance of it, I should
+ask papa to keep you for a time, because I should feel confident that
+you would manage to protect us somehow."
+
+"I do not think there is the slightest chance of more trouble from
+him," Francis said. "He is sure of a long term of imprisonment for
+carrying you off."
+
+"That is the least they can do to him, I should think," Maria said
+indignantly. "I certainly shall not feel comfortable while he is at
+large."
+
+After half an hour's talk Francis and his friend took their leave.
+
+"You certainly were born with a silver spoon in your mouth," Matteo
+said as they took their seats in the gondola, "and my cousin does well
+to get you out of Venice at once, for I can tell you there are scores
+of young fellows who would feel jealous at your position with my
+cousins."
+
+"Nonsense!" Francis said, colouring. "How can you talk so absurdly,
+Matteo? I am only a boy, and it will be years before I could think of
+marriage. Besides, your cousins are said to be the richest heiresses in
+Venice; and it is not because I have been able to be of some slight
+service to them, that I should venture to think of either of them in
+that way."
+
+"We shall see," Matteo laughed. "Maria is a little too old for you, I
+grant, but Giulia will do very well; and as you have already come, as
+Maria says, to be looked upon by them as a brother and protector, there
+is no saying as to how she may regard you in another two or three
+years."
+
+"The thing is absurd, Matteo," Francis said impatiently. "Do not talk
+such nonsense any more."
+
+Matteo lay back in his seat and whistled.
+
+"I will say no more about it at present, Francisco," he said, after a
+pause; "but I must own that I should be well content to stand as high
+in the good graces of my pretty cousins as you do."
+
+The next morning Francis spent some time with his father talking over
+future arrangements.
+
+"I have no doubt that I shall see you sometimes, Francis; for Polani
+will be sure to give you an opportunity of making a trip to England,
+from time to time, in one of his ships trading thither. Unless anything
+unexpected happens, your future appears assured. Polani tells me he
+shall always regard you in the light of a son; and I have no fear of
+your doing anything to cause him to forfeit his good opinion of you. Do
+not be over adventurous, for even in a merchant ship there are many
+perils to be met with. Pirates swarm in the Mediterranean, in spite of
+the efforts of Venice to suppress them; and when war is going on, both
+Venice and Genoa send out numbers of ships whose doings savour strongly
+of piracy. Remember that the first duty of the captain of a merchant
+ship is to save his vessel and cargo, and that he should not think of
+fighting unless he sees no other method of escape open to him.
+
+"It is possible that, after a time, I may send one of your brothers out
+here, but that will depend upon what I find of their disposition when I
+get home; for it will be worse than useless to send a lad of a
+headstrong disposition out to the care of one but a few years older
+than himself. But this we can talk about when you come over to England,
+and we see what position you are occupying here.
+
+"I fear that Venice is about to enter upon a period of great difficulty
+and danger. There can be little doubt that Genoa, Padua, and Hungary
+are leagued against her; and powerful as she is, and great as are her
+resources, they will be taxed to the utmost to carry her through the
+dangers that threaten her. However, I have faith in her future, and
+believe that she will weather the storm, as she has done many that have
+preceded it.
+
+"Venice has the rare virtue of endurance--the greatest dangers, the
+most disastrous defeats, fail to shake her courage, and only arouse her
+to greater efforts. In this respect she is in the greatest contrast to
+her rival, Genoa, who always loses heart the moment the tide turns
+against her. No doubt this is due, in no slight extent, to her
+oligarchic form of government. The people see the nobles, who rule
+them, calm and self possessed, however great the danger, and remain
+confident and tranquil; while in Genoa each misfortune is the signal
+for a struggle between contending factions. The occasion is seized to
+throw blame and contumely upon those in power, and the people give way
+to alternate outbursts of rage and depression.
+
+"I do not say there are no faults in the government of Venice, but
+taking her altogether there is no government in Europe to compare with
+it. During the last three hundred years, the history of every other
+city in Italy, I may say of every other nation in Europe, is one long
+record of intestine struggle and bloodshed, while in Venice there has
+not been a single popular tumult worthy of the name. It is to the
+strength, the firmness, and the moderation of her government that
+Venice owes her advancement, the respect in which she is held among
+nations, as much as to the commercial industry of her people.
+
+"She alone among nations could for years have withstood the interdict
+of the pope, or the misfortunes that have sometimes befallen her. She
+alone has never felt the foot of the invader, or bent her neck beneath
+a foreign yoke to preserve her existence. Here, save only in matters of
+government, all opinions are free, strangers of all nationalities are
+welcome. It is a grand city and a grand people, Francis, and though I
+shall be glad to return to England I cannot but feel regret at leaving
+it.
+
+"And now, my boy, it is time to be going off to your ship. Polani said
+she would sail at ten o'clock. It is now nine, and it will take you
+half an hour to get there. I am glad to hear that Giuseppi is going
+with you. The lad is faithful and attached to you, and may be of
+service. Your trunk has already been sent on board, so let us be
+going."
+
+On arriving at the ship, which was lying in the port of Malamocco, they
+found that she was just ready for sailing. The last bales of goods were
+being hoisted on board, and the sailors were preparing to loosen the
+sails.
+
+The Bonito was a large vessel, built for stowage rather than speed. She
+carried two masts with large square sails, and before the wind would
+probably proceed at a fair rate; but the art of sailing close hauled
+was then unknown, and in the event of the wind being unfavourable she
+would be forced either to anchor or to depend upon her oars, of which
+she rowed fifteen on either side. As they mounted on to the deck they
+were greeted by Polani himself.
+
+"I have come off to see the last of your son, Messer Hammond, and to
+make sure that my orders for his comfort have been carried out.
+
+"Captain Corpadio, this is the young gentleman of whom I have spoken to
+you, and who is to be treated in all respects as if he were my son. You
+will instruct him in all matters connected with the navigation of the
+ship, as well as in the mercantile portion of the business, the best
+methods of buying and selling, the prices of goods, and the methods of
+payment.
+
+"This is your cabin, Francisco."
+
+He opened the door of a roomy cabin in the poop of the ship. It was
+fitted up with every luxury.
+
+"Thank you very much indeed, Signor Polani," Francis said. "The only
+fault is that it is too comfortable. I would as lief have roughed it as
+other aspirants have to do."
+
+"There was no occasion, Francisco. When there is rough work to be done,
+you will, I have no doubt, do it; but as you are going to be a trader,
+and not a sailor, there is no occasion that you should do so more than
+is necessary. You will learn to command a ship just as well as if you
+began by dipping your hands in tar. And it is well that you should
+learn to do this, for unless a man can sail a vessel himself, he is not
+well qualified to judge of the merits of men he appoints to be
+captains; but you must remember that you are going as a representative
+of my house, and must, therefore, travel in accordance with that
+condition.
+
+"You will be sorry to hear that bad news has just been received from
+the mainland. The state galley sent to fetch Ruggiero Mocenigo has
+arrived with the news that, on the previous night, a strong party of
+men who are believed to have come from Padua, fell upon the guard and
+carried off Ruggiero. My sailors came up and fought stoutly, but they
+were overpowered, and several of them were killed; so Ruggiero is again
+at large.
+
+"This is a great disappointment to me. Though the villain is not likely
+to show his face in the Venetian territory again, I shall be anxious
+until Maria is safely married, and shall lose no time in choosing a
+husband for her. Unless I am mistaken, her liking is turned in the
+direction of Rufino, brother of your friend Matteo Giustiniani, and as
+I like none better among the suitors for her hand, methinks that by the
+time you return you will find that they are betrothed.
+
+"And now I hear the sailors are heaving the anchor, and therefore,
+Messer Hammond, it is time we took to our boats."
+
+There was a parting embrace between Francis and his father. Then the
+merchants descended into their gondolas, and lay waiting alongside
+until the anchor was up, the great sails shaken out, and the Bonito
+began to move slowly through the water towards the entrance of the
+port. Then, with a final wave of the hand, the gondolas rowed off and
+Francis turned to look at his surroundings. The first object that met
+his eye was Giuseppi, who was standing near him waving his cap to his
+father.
+
+"Well, Giuseppi, what do you think of this?"
+
+"I don't know what to think yet, Messer Francisco. It all seems so big
+and solid one does not feel as if one was on the water. It's more like
+living in a house. It does not seem as if anything could move her."
+
+"You will find the waves can move her about when we get fairly to sea,
+Giuseppi, and the time will come when you will think our fast gondola
+was a steady craft in comparison. How long have you been on board?"
+
+"I came off three hours ago, signor, with the boat that brought the
+furniture for your cabin. I have been putting that to rights since. A
+supply of the best wine has been sent off, and extra stores of all
+sorts, so you need not be afraid of being starved on the voyage."
+
+"I wish he hadn't sent so much," Francis said. "It makes one feel like
+a milksop. Whose cabin is it I have got?"
+
+"I believe that it is the cabin usually used by the supercargo, who is
+in charge of the goods and does the trading, but the men say the
+captain of this ship has been a great many years in Polani's
+employment, and often sails without a supercargo, being able to manage
+the trading perfectly well by himself. But the usual cabin is only half
+the size of yours, and two have been thrown into one to make it light
+and airy."
+
+"And where do you sleep, Giuseppi?"
+
+"I am going to sleep in the passage outside your door, Messer
+Francisco."
+
+"Oh, but I sha'n't like that!" Francis said. "You ought to have a
+better place than that."
+
+Giuseppi laughed.
+
+"Why, Messer Francisco, considering that half my time I slept in the
+gondola, and the other half on some straw in our kitchen, I shall do
+capitally. Of course I could sleep in the fo'castle with the crew if I
+liked, but I should find it hot and stifling there. I chose the place
+myself, and asked the captain if I could sleep there, and he has given
+me leave."
+
+In an hour the Bonito had passed through the Malamocco Channel, and was
+out on the broad sea. The wind was very light, and but just sufficient
+to keep the great sails bellied out. The sailors were all at work,
+coiling down ropes, washing the decks, and making everything clean and
+tidy.
+
+"This is a good start, Messer Hammond," the captain said, coming up to
+him. "If this wind holds, we shall be able to make our course round the
+southern point of Greece, and then on to Candia, which is our first
+port. I always like a light breeze when I first go out of port, it
+gives time for everyone to get at home and have things shipshape before
+we begin to get lively."
+
+"She does not look as if she would ever get lively," Francis said,
+looking at the heavy vessel.
+
+"She is lively enough in a storm, I can tell you," the captain said,
+laughing. "When she once begins to roll she does it in earnest, but she
+is a fine sea boat, and I have no fear of gales. I wish I could say as
+much of pirates. However, she has always been fortunate, and as we
+carry a stout crew she could give a good account of herself against any
+of the small piratical vessels that swarm among the islands, although,
+of course, if she fell in with two or three of them together it would
+be awkward."
+
+"How many men do you carry altogether, captain?"
+
+"Just seventy. You see she rows thirty oars, and in case of need we put
+two men to each oar, and though she doesn't look fast she can get along
+at a fine rate when the oars are double banked. We have shown them our
+heels many a time. Our orders are strict. We are never to fight if we
+can get away by running."
+
+"But I suppose you have to fight sometimes?" Francis asked.
+
+"Yes, I have been in some tough fights several times, though not in the
+Bonito, which was only built last year. Once in the Lion we were
+attacked by three pirates. We were at anchor in a bay, and the wind was
+blowing on the shore, when they suddenly came round the headland, so
+there was no chance of running, and we had to fight it out. We fought
+for five hours before they sheered off, pretty well crippled, and one
+of them in flames, for we carried Greek fire.
+
+"Three or four times they nearly got a footing on deck, but we managed
+to beat them off somehow. We lost a third of our crew. I don't think
+there was a man escaped without a wound. I was laid up for three
+months, after I got home, with a slash on the shoulder, which pretty
+nigh took off my left arm. However, we saved the ship and the cargo,
+which was a valuable one, and Messer Polani saw that no one was the
+worse for his share in the business. There's no more liberal-hearted
+man in the trade than he is, and whatever may be the scarcity of hands
+in the port, there is never any difficulty in getting a good crew
+together for his vessels.
+
+"Of course there are the roughs with the smooths. Some years ago I was
+in prison for six months, with all my crew, in Azoff. It was the work
+of those rascally Genoese, who are always doing us a bad turn when they
+have the chance, even when we are at peace with them. They set the mind
+of the native khan--that is the prince of the country--against us by
+some lying stories that we had been engaged in smuggling goods in at
+another port. And suddenly, in the middle of the night, in marched his
+soldiers on board my ship, and two other Venetian craft lying in the
+harbour, and took possession of them, and shut us all up in prison.
+There we were till Messer Polani got news, and sent out another ship to
+pay the fine demanded. That was no joke, I can tell you, for the prison
+was so hot and crowded, and the food so bad, that we got fever, and
+pretty near half of us died before our ransom came. Then at
+Constantinople the Genoese stirred the people up against us once or
+twice, and all the sailors ashore had to fight for their lives. Those
+Genoese are always doing us mischief."
+
+"But I suppose you do them mischief sometimes, captain. I imagine it
+isn't all one side."
+
+"Of course, we pay them out when we get a chance," the captain replied.
+"It isn't likely we are going to stand being always put upon, and not
+take our chance when it comes. We only want fair trade and no favour,
+while those rascals want it all to themselves. They know they have no
+chance with us when it comes to fair trading."
+
+"You know, captain, that the Genoese say just the same things about the
+Venetians, that the Venetians do about them. So I expect that there are
+faults on both sides."
+
+The captain laughed.
+
+"I suppose each want to have matters their own way, Messer Hammond, but
+I don't consider the Genoese have any right to come interfering with
+us, to the eastward of Italy. They have got France and Spain to trade
+with, and all the western parts of Italy. Why don't they keep there?
+Besides, I look upon them as landsmen. Why, we can always lick them at
+sea in a fair fight."
+
+"Generally, captain. I admit you generally thrash them. Still, you know
+they have sometimes got the better of you, even when the force was
+equal."
+
+The captain grunted. He could not deny the fact.
+
+"Sometimes our captains don't do their duty," he said. "They put a lot
+of young patricians in command of the galleys, men that don't know one
+end of a ship from the other, and then, of course, we get the worst of
+it. But I maintain that, properly fought, a Venetian ship is always
+more than a match for a Genoese."
+
+"I think she generally is, captain, and I hope it will always prove so
+in the future. You see, though I am English, I have lived long enough
+in Venice to feel like a Venetian."
+
+"I have never been to England," the captain said, "though a good many
+Venetian ships go there every year. They tell me it's an island, like
+Venice, only a deal bigger than any we have got in the Mediterranean.
+Those who have been there say the sea is mighty stormy, and that,
+sailing up from Spain, you get tremendous tempests sometimes, with the
+waves ever so much bigger than we have here, and longer and more
+regular, but not so trying to the ships as the short sharp gales of
+these seas."
+
+"I believe that is so, captain, though I don't know anything about it
+myself. It is some years since I came out, and our voyage was a very
+calm one."
+
+Three days of quiet sailing, and the Bonito rounded the headlands of
+the Morea, and shaped her course to Candia. The voyage was a very
+pleasant one to Francis. Each day the captain brought out the list of
+cargo, and instructed him in the prices of each description of goods,
+told him of the various descriptions of merchandise which they would be
+likely to purchase at the different ports at which they were to touch,
+and the prices which they would probably have to pay for them. A
+certain time, too, was devoted each day to the examination of the
+charts of the various ports and islands, the captain pointing out the
+marks which were to be observed on entering and leaving the harbours,
+the best places for anchorage, and the points where shelter could be
+obtained should high winds come on.
+
+After losing sight of the Morea the weather changed, clouds banked up
+rapidly in the southwest, and the captain ordered the great sails to be
+furled.
+
+"We are going to have a serious gale," he said to Francis, "which is
+unusual at this period of the year. I have thought, for the last two
+days, we were going to have a change, but I hoped to have reached
+Candia before the gale burst upon us. I fear that this will drive us
+off our course."
+
+By evening it was blowing hard, and the sea got up rapidly. The ship
+speedily justified the remarks of the captain on her power of rolling,
+and the oars, at which the men had been labouring since the sails were
+furled, were laid in.
+
+"It is impossible to keep our course," the captain said, "and we must
+run up among the islands, and anchor under the lee of one of them. I
+should recommend you to get into your bed as soon as possible. You have
+not learned to keep your legs in a storm. I see that lad of yours is
+very ill already, but as you show no signs of suffering thus far, you
+will probably escape."
+
+It was some time, however, before Francis went below. The scene was
+novel to him, and he was astonished at the sight of the waves, and at
+the manner in which they tossed the great ship about, as if she were an
+eggshell. But when it became quite dark, and he could see nothing but
+the white crests of the waves and the foam that flew high in the air
+every time the bluff bows of the ship plunged down into a hollow, he
+took the captain's advice and retired to his cabin.
+
+He was on deck again early. A gray mist overhung the water. The sea was
+of a leaden colour, crested with white heads. The waves were far higher
+than they had been on the previous evening, and as they came racing
+along behind the Bonito each crest seemed as if it would rise over her
+stern and overwhelm her. But this apprehension was soon dispelled, as
+he saw how lightly the vessel rose each time. Although showing but a
+very small breadth of sail, she was running along at a great rate,
+leaving a white streak of foam behind her. The captain was standing
+near the helm, and Francis made his way to him.
+
+"Well, captain, and how are you getting on, and where are we?" he
+asked, cheerfully.
+
+"We are getting on well enough, Messer Francisco, as you can see for
+yourself. The Bonito is as good a sea boat as ever floated, and would
+not care for the wind were it twice as strong as it is. It is not the
+storm I am thinking about, but the islands. If we were down in the
+Mediterranean I could turn into my cot and sleep soundly; but here it
+is another matter. We are somewhere up among the islands, but where, no
+man can say. The wind has shifted a bit two or three times during the
+night, and, as we are obliged to run straight before it, there is no
+calculating to within a few miles where we are. I have tried to edge
+out to the westward as much as I could, but with this wind blowing and
+the height of the ship out of water, we sag away to leeward so fast
+that nothing is gained by it.
+
+"According to my calculation, we cannot be very far from the west coast
+of Mitylene. If the clouds would but lift, and give us a look round for
+two minutes, we should know all about it, as I know the outline of
+every island in the Aegean; and as over on this side you are always in
+sight of two or three of them, I should know all about it if I could
+get a view of the land. Now, for aught we know, we may be running
+straight down upon some rocky coast."
+
+The idea was not a pleasant one, and Francis strained his eyes, gazing
+through the mist.
+
+"What should we do if we saw land, captain?" he asked presently.
+
+"Get out the oars, row her head round, and try to work either to the
+right or left, whichever point of land seemed easiest to weather. Of
+course, if it was the mainland we were being driven on there would be
+no use, and we should try and row into the teeth of the gale, so as to
+keep her off land as long as possible, in the hope of the wind
+dropping. When we got into shallow water we should drop our anchors,
+and still keep on rowing to lessen the strain upon them. If they gave,
+there would be an end to the Bonito. But if, as I think, we are driving
+towards Mitylene, there is a safe harbour on this side of the island,
+and I shall certainly run into it. It is well sheltered and
+landlocked."
+
+Two more hours passed, and then there was a startling transformation.
+The clouds broke suddenly and cleared off, as if by magic, and the sun
+streamed brightly out. The wind was blowing as strong as ever, but the
+change in the hue of sky and sea would at once have raised the spirits
+of the tired crew, had not a long line of land been seen stretching
+ahead of them at a distance of four or five miles.
+
+"Just as I thought," the captain exclaimed as he saw it. "That is
+Mitylene, sure enough, and the entrance to the harbour I spoke of lies
+away there on that beam."
+
+The oars were at once got out, the sail braced up a little, and the
+Bonito made for the point indicated by the captain, who himself took
+the helm.
+
+Another half hour and they were close to land. Francis could see no
+sign of a port, but in a few minutes the Bonito rounded the end of a
+low island, and a passage opened before her. She passed through this
+and found herself in still water, in a harbour large enough to hold the
+fleet of Venice. The anchor was speedily let drop.
+
+"It seems almost bewildering," Francis said, "the hush and quiet here
+after the turmoil of the storm outside. To whom does Mitylene belong?"
+
+"The Genoese have a trading station and a castle at the other side of
+the island, but it belongs to Constantinople. The other side of the
+island is rich and fertile, but this, as you see, is mountainous and
+barren. The people have not a very good reputation, and if we had been
+wrecked we should have been plundered, if not murdered.
+
+"You see those two vessels lying close to the shore, near the village?
+They are pirates when they get a chance, you may be quite sure. In
+fact, these islands swarm with them. Venice does all she can to keep
+them down, but the Genoese, and the Hungarians, and the rest of them,
+keep her so busy that she has no time to take the matter properly in
+hand, and make a clean sweep of them."
+
+
+
+Chapter 8: An Attack By Pirates.
+
+
+A boat was lowered, and the captain went ashore with a strong crew, all
+armed to the teeth. Francis accompanied him. The natives were sullen in
+their manner, but expressed a willingness to trade, and to exchange
+hides and wine for cloth.
+
+"We may as well do a little barter," the captain said, as they rowed
+back towards the ship. "The port is not often visited, and the road
+across the island is hilly and rough, so they ought to be willing to
+sell their goods cheaply."
+
+"They did not seem pleased to see us, nevertheless," Francis said.
+
+"No; you see the Genoese have got a footing in the island, and of
+course they represent us to the natives as being robbers, who would
+take their island if we got the chance. All round these coasts and
+islands the people are partisans either of Venice or Genoa. They care
+very little for Constantinople, although they form part of the empire.
+Constantinople taxes them heavily, and is too weak to afford them
+protection. Of course they are Greeks, but the Greeks of the islands
+have very little in common, beyond their language, with the Greeks of
+Constantinople. They see, too, that the Turks are increasing in power,
+and they know that, if they are to be saved from falling into the hands
+of the Moslem, it is Venice or Genoa who will protect them, and not
+Constantinople, who will have enough to do to defend herself.
+
+"As to themselves, they would naturally prefer Venice, because Venice
+is a far better mistress than Genoa; but of course, when the Genoese
+get a footing, they spread lies as to our tyranny and greed, and so it
+comes that the people of the islands are divided in their wishes, and
+that while we are gladly received in some of them, we are regarded with
+hate and suspicion in others."
+
+Trade at once began, and continued until evening.
+
+"How long do you expect to stay here, captain?" Francis asked.
+
+"That must depend upon the wind. It may go down tomorrow, it may
+continue to blow strong for days, and it is no use our attempting to
+work down to Candia until it changes its direction. I should hope,
+however, that in a day or two we may be off. We are doing little more
+than wasting our time here."
+
+A strong watch was placed on deck at nightfall.
+
+"Why, surely, captain, there is no fear of an attack! War has not yet
+been proclaimed with Genoa, although there is little doubt it will be
+so in a few weeks, or perhaps a few days."
+
+"There is never a real peace between Venice and Genoa in these seas,"
+the captain said, "and as war is now imminent, one cannot be too
+watchful. State galleys would not be attacked, but merchant vessels are
+different. Who is to inquire about a merchant ship! Why, if we were
+attacked and plundered here, who would be any the wiser? We should
+either have our throats cut, or be sent to rot in the dungeons of
+Genoa. And not till there was an exchange of prisoners, perhaps years
+hence, would any in Venice know what had befallen us. When weeks
+passed, and no news came to Venice of our having reached Candia, it
+would be supposed that we had been lost in the storm.
+
+"Signor Polani would run his pen through the name of the Bonito, and
+put her down as a total loss, and there would be an end of it, till
+those of us who were alive, when the prison doors were opened, made
+their way back to Venice. No, no, Messer Francisco. In these eastern
+waters one must always act as if the republic were at war. Why, did not
+Antonio Doria, in a time of profound peace, attack and seize eight
+Venetian ships laden with goods, killing two of the merchants on board,
+and putting the ships at a ransom? As to single vessels missing, and
+never heard of, their number is innumerable.
+
+"It is all put down to pirates; but trust me, the Genoese are often at
+the bottom of it. They are robbers, the Genoese. In fair trade we can
+always beat them, and they know it, and so they are always seeking a
+pretext for a quarrel with us."
+
+Francis smiled quietly at the bigoted hatred which the captain bore the
+Genoese, but thought it useless to argue with him. The next morning he
+came up on deck soon after daybreak.
+
+"I see one of those vessels has taken her departure," he said, as he
+glanced towards the spot where they had been lying.
+
+"So she has," the captain said. "I had not noticed that before. I
+wonder what that fellow has gone for? No good, you may be sure. Why, it
+is blowing hard outside still, as you may see by the rate those light
+clouds travel. He would never have put to sea without having a motive,
+and he must have had a strong crew on board, to row out in the teeth of
+the gale far enough to make off the land. That fellow is up to mischief
+of some sort."
+
+A few minutes later the captain ordered a boat to be lowered, and rowed
+out to the rocky islet at the mouth of the harbour, and landing,
+climbed up the rocks and looked out to sea. In half an hour he returned
+to the ship.
+
+"It is no use," he said to Francis. "The wind is blowing straight into
+the passage, and we could not row the Bonito out against it. It was
+different with that craft that went out yesterday evening, for I have
+no doubt she started as soon as it became dark. She was low in the
+water, and would not hold the wind; besides, no doubt they lowered the
+masts, and with a strong crew might well have swept her out. But with
+the Bonito, with her high sides and heavy tonnage, it could not be
+done."
+
+"What do you think she went out for, captain?"
+
+"It is likely enough that she may have gone to one of the other
+islands, and may return with a dozen other craft, pirates like herself.
+The news that a Venetian merchant ship, without consorts, is weather
+bound here, would bring them upon us like bees.
+
+"It is a dangerous thing, this sailing alone. I have talked it over
+several times with the master. Other merchants generally send their
+ships in companies of eight or ten, and they are then strong enough to
+beat off any attack of pirates. Messer Polani always sends his vessels
+out singly. What he says is this: 'A single ship always travels faster
+than a convoy, because these must go at the rate of the slowest among
+them. Then the captain is free to go where he will, without consulting
+others, according as he gets news where trade is to be done, and when
+he gets there he can drive his own bargains without the competition of
+other ships.
+
+"So you see there are advantages both ways. The padrone's ships run
+greater risks, but, if they get through them safely, they bring home
+much larger profits than do those of others. As a rule, I prefer
+sailing singly; but just at the present time I should be well pleased
+to see half a dozen consorts lying alongside."
+
+Three times during the day the captain paid a visit to the rocky
+island. On his return for the last time before nightfall he said to
+Francis:
+
+"The wind is certainly falling. I hope that tomorrow morning we shall
+be able to get out of this trap. I am convinced that there is danger."
+
+"You see nothing else, do you, captain, beyond the departure of that
+craft, to make you think that there is danger?"
+
+"Yes, I have seen two things," the captain said. "In the first place,
+the demeanour of the people has changed. They do not seem more
+unfriendly than they were before, but as I moved about the place today,
+it seemed to me that there was a suppressed excitement--people gathered
+together and talked earnestly, and separated if any of our crew
+happened to go near them; even laughed when they thought that none of
+us were looking, and looked serious and sullen if we turned round. I am
+convinced that they are expecting something to happen.
+
+"I have another reason for suspecting it. I have kept a sharp watch on
+that high hill behind the village; they tell me there is nothing at the
+top except some curious stones, that look as if they had once been
+trees, so there is nothing they can want to go up for. Several times
+today I have made out the figures of men climbing that hill. When they
+got to the top they stood for some time as if they were looking out
+over the sea, and then came down again without doing anything. Now, men
+do not climb such a hill as that merely for exercise. They went up
+because they expected to see something, and that something could only
+be a fleet of pirate boats from the other islands. I would give a
+year's pay if we could get out of this place this evening, but it
+cannot be done, and we must wait till tomorrow morning. I will try
+then, even though I risk being driven on the rocks. However, if they do
+come tonight they will not catch us asleep."
+
+Orders were issued that the whole crew were to remain in readiness for
+attack, and that those whose watch was below were to sleep with their
+arms beside them. The lower ports were all closed, a strong watch was
+kept on deck, and it was certain that, whatever happened, the Bonito
+would not be taken by surprise.
+
+Being assured by the captain that it was not probable that any attack
+would be made before morning, as the pirates, not knowing their exact
+position, would wait until the first gleam of daylight enabled them to
+make out where she was lying, and to advance in order against her,
+Francis lay down on his couch, leaving orders that, if asleep, he was
+to be called two hours before daybreak. He slept but little, however,
+getting up frequently and going out to ascertain if any sounds
+indicated the presence of an enemy.
+
+Upon one of these occasions he found that the person leaning next to
+him against the bulwark, and gazing towards the mouth of the harbour,
+was Giuseppi.
+
+"Have you been here long, Giuseppi?"
+
+"Since you were out last, Messer Francisco. I thought I would wait a
+bit, and listen."
+
+"And have you heard anything?"
+
+"I have heard sounds several times."
+
+"What sort of sounds, Giuseppi?"
+
+"Such a sound as is made when the sails and yards are lowered. I have
+heard it over and over again when out at night on the lagoons near the
+port. There is no mistake in the creaking of the blocks as the halyards
+run through them. I am sure, that since I have been here several
+vessels have brought up inside the mouth of the harbour. Some of the
+sailors have heard the same noises, so there cannot be any mistake
+about it. If the captain likes, I will take a small boat and row out,
+and find out all about them."
+
+"I will ask the captain, Giuseppi."
+
+The captain, however, said that there would be no use in this being
+done.
+
+"Whether there are few or whether there are many of them, we must wait
+till morning before we go out. There will be no working out that
+channel in the dark, even if we were unopposed."
+
+"But they must have managed to come in," Francis said.
+
+"No doubt some of their comrades in the other barque, or people from
+the village, show a light out there to guide them in. Besides, the wind
+is favourable to them and against us. No, young sir, there is nothing
+to do but to wait. In the morning, if there are but few of them, we
+will try to break through and gain the sea. If there are many we will
+fight here, as then all hands will be available for the combat, while
+if we were rowing, half of them would be occupied with the oars. If
+your lad were to go as he proposes he might fall into the hands of the
+enemy, and as the information he could gather would be in any case of
+no use, it is best he should remain where he is."
+
+The hours seemed long until the first tinge of daylight appeared in the
+sky. All hands were on deck now, for the news that vessels had been
+arriving in the port had convinced all that danger really threatened
+them. It was not until half an hour later that they were able to make
+out some dark objects, lying in under the shadow of the islet across
+the mouth of the harbour.
+
+"There they are, Messer Francisco," the captain said. "Ten of them, as
+far as I can make out; but there may be more, for likely enough some of
+them are lying side by side. There may, too, be some round a corner,
+where we cannot see them. Another half hour we shall know all about
+it."
+
+Francis was half surprised that the captain did not order the oars to
+be put out and lashed in that position, for it was a recognized plan
+for preventing a ship from being boarded by an enemy, who could thus
+only approach her at the lofty poop and forecastle.
+
+"Are you not going to get out the oars to keep them off?"
+
+"No, Messer Francisco. In the first place, our sides are so high out of
+water that the pirates will have a difficulty in boarding us in any
+case. In the second place, if we get the oars out and they row full at
+them, sooner or later they will break them off; and it is all important
+that we should be able to row. I have been thinking the matter over,
+and my idea is, as soon as they advance, to get three or four oars at
+work on either side, so as to move her gradually through the water
+towards the harbour mouth. The rowers will be charged to let their oars
+swing alongside whenever any of their craft dash at them. We shall want
+every oar, as well as our sails, to get away when we are once outside.
+I do not think we have much chance of finally beating them off if we
+stop and fight here. But if we can do so for a time, and can manage to
+creep out of the harbour, all may be well."
+
+When daylight fairly broke they were able to make out their enemy. The
+vessels were of all sizes, from long, low craft, carrying great sails
+and long banks of oars, down to boats of a few tons burden. All seemed
+crowded with men.
+
+"None of them are anything like as high out of the water as the
+Bonito," the captain said, "and they will find it very difficult to
+climb up our sides. Still the odds against us are serious, but we shall
+give them a warmer reception than they expect. They will hardly
+calculate either on our being so strong handed, or so well prepared for
+them."
+
+Everything was indeed ready for the combat. Two or three barrels of the
+compound known as Greek fire had been brought up from the hold, and the
+cooks had heated cauldrons full of pitch. Thirty men with bows and
+arrows were on the poop, and the rest, with spears, axes, and swords,
+stood along the bulwarks.
+
+"We may as well get as near the entrance as we can before the fight
+begins," the captain said. "Get up the anchor, and as soon as it is
+aboard, get out four oars on each side."
+
+The anchor had already been hove short, and was soon in its place. Then
+the oars dipped into the water, and slowly the Bonito moved towards the
+mouth of the harbour. Scarcely had the oars touched the water, than a
+bustle was perceived on board the piratical ships. Oars were put out,
+and in two or three minutes the pirates were under way, advancing at a
+rapid pace towards the Bonito.
+
+The crew made no reply to the shouts and yells of the pirates, but, in
+accordance with the orders of the captain, remained in a stooping
+position, so that the figure of the captain, as he hauled up the flag
+with the lion of Venice to the masthead, was alone visible to the
+pirates. As these approached volleys of arrows were shot at the Bonito,
+but not a shot replied until they were within fifty yards of the ship.
+
+Then the captain gave the word. The archers sprang to their feet, and
+from their eminence poured their arrows thick and fast on to the
+crowded decks of the pirates. The captain gave the word to the rowers,
+and they relinquished their oars, which swung in by the side of the
+vessel.
+
+A moment later two of the largest craft of the pirates dashed
+alongside. The instant they did so they were saluted with showers of
+boiling pitch, while pots full of Greek fire were thrown down upon
+them. Those who tried to climb up the side of the Bonito were speared
+with lances or cut down with battleaxes.
+
+The combat was of short duration. Many of those on whom the boiling
+pitch had fallen jumped overboard in their agony, while others did the
+same to escape the Greek fire, which they in vain endeavoured to
+extinguish. The fire quickly spread to the woodwork, and in five
+minutes after the beginning of the fight, the two craft dropped astern
+from the Bonito, with the flames already rising fiercely from them.
+
+In the meantime the other vessels had not been idle, and a storm of
+missiles was poured upon the Bonito. The fate which befell their
+comrades, however, showed them how formidable was the vessel they had
+regarded as an easy prey, and when the first assailants of the Bonito
+dropped astern, none of the others cared to take their places.
+
+"Man the oars again!" the captain ordered, and the Bonito again moved
+forward, her crew stooping behind the bulwarks, while the archers only
+rose from time to time to discharge their shafts.
+
+"The thing I am most afraid of," the captain said to Francis, who was
+standing beside him, "is, that they will ram us with their prows. The
+Bonito is strongly built, but the chances are that they would knock a
+hole in her."
+
+"I should think, captain, that if we were to get up some of those bales
+of cloth, and fasten ropes to them, we might lower them over the side
+and so break the shock."
+
+"It is worth trying, anyhow," the captain said.
+
+And a score of the sailors were at once sent down to fetch up the
+bales. Ropes were fastened round these, and they were laid along by the
+bulwarks in readiness for being lowered instantly. Ten bales were
+placed on each side, and three men told off to each bale.
+
+By this time they were halfway to the mouth of the harbour, and the
+preparations were completed just in time, for the small boats suddenly
+drew aside, and two of the largest of the pirates' craft, each rowed by
+twenty-four oars, dashed at her, one on each side. The captain shouted
+the order, and the men all sprang to their feet. It was seen at once
+that the vessels would both strike about midships. Three bales on
+either side were raised to the bulwarks, and lowered down with the
+ropes until close to the water's edge and closely touching each other.
+Francis sprang on to the bulwark and superintended the operations on
+one side, while the captain did the same on the other.
+
+"A few feet more astern, lads. That is right. Now, keep the bales
+touching. You are just in the line."
+
+An instant later the Bonito reeled from the shock of two tremendous
+blows. The bows of the pirates were stove in, but the thick bales
+enabled the Bonito to withstand the shock, although her sides creaked,
+the seams started, and the water flowed in freely. But of this the crew
+thought little. They were occupied in hurling darts, arrows, and
+combustibles into the pirates as these backed off, in an already
+sinking condition.
+
+"Now I think we can go," the captain said, and ordered the whole of the
+oars to be manned.
+
+They were speedily got out, and the Bonito made her way out through the
+mouth of the harbour. The pirates, in their lighter boats, rowed round
+and round her, shooting clouds of arrows, but not venturing to come to
+close quarters, after the fate which had befallen the four largest
+vessels of their fleet.
+
+As soon as they were clear of the islet the sails were hoisted. The
+wind had fallen much during the night, and had worked round to the
+east, and under sails and oars the Bonito left the island, none of the
+pirates venturing to follow in pursuit. The oars were soon laid in, and
+the men, with mallets and chisels, set to work to caulk the seams
+through which the water was making its way. The casualties were now
+inquired into, and it was found that six men had been shot dead, and
+that nine-and-twenty had received wounds more or less severe from the
+arrows of the pirates.
+
+Francis had been twice wounded while superintending the placing of the
+bales. One arrow had gone through his right leg, another had struck him
+in the side and glanced off a rib.
+
+"This won't do, Messer Francisco," the captain said as he assisted
+Giuseppi to bandage the wounds. "Signor Polani placed you on board to
+learn something of seamanship and commerce, not to make yourself a
+target for the arrows of pirates. However, we have to thank you for the
+saving of the Bonito, for assuredly she would have been stove in, had
+not the happy thought of hanging those bales overboard struck you. It
+would be of no use against war galleys, whose beaks are often below the
+waterline, but against craft like these pirates it acts splendidly, and
+there is no doubt that you saved the ship from destruction, and us from
+death, for after the burning of the two first vessels that attacked us,
+you may be sure they would have shown but little mercy. I can't think
+how you came to think of it."
+
+"Why, I have read in books, captain, of defenders of walls hanging over
+trusses of straw, to break the blows of battering rams and machines of
+the besiegers. Directly you said they were going to ram us it struck me
+we might do the same, and then I thought that bales of cloth, similar
+to those you got up on deck to trade with the islanders would be just
+the thing."
+
+"It was a close shave," the captain said. "I was leaning over, and saw
+the whole side of the ship bend beneath the blow, and expected to hear
+the ribs crack beneath me. Fortunately the Bonito was stronger built
+than her assailants, and their bows crumpled in before her side gave;
+but my heart was in my mouth for a time, I can tell you."
+
+"So was mine, captain. I hardly felt these two arrows strike me. They
+must have been shot from one of the other boats. Then I could not help
+laughing to see the way in which the men at the oars tumbled backwards
+at the moment when their vessel struck us. It was as if an invisible
+giant had swept them all off their seats together."
+
+The wind continued favourable until they arrived at Candia, where the
+captain reported, to the commander of a Venetian war galley lying in
+the port, the attack that had been made upon him; and the galley at
+once started for the scene of the action, to destroy any pirates she
+might find there or among the neighbouring islands, or in the various
+inlets and bays of the mainland.
+
+Having delivered their letters and landed a portion of their cargo for
+the use of Polani's agents in the islands, the Bonito proceeded to
+Cyprus. For some weeks she cruised along the coast of Syria, trading in
+the various Turkish ports, for Venice, although she had shared in some
+of the crusades, was now, as she had often been before, on friendly
+terms with the Turks. Her interests all lay in that direction. She
+carried on a large trade with them; and in the days when she lay under
+the interdict of the pope, and all Europe stood aloof from her, she
+drew her stores of provisions from the Moslem ports, and was thus
+enabled successfully to resist the pressure which she suffered from the
+interdict. She foresaw, too, the growing power of the Turks, and
+perceived that in the future they would triumph over the degenerate
+Greek empire at Constantinople. She had spent her blood and treasure
+freely in maintaining that empire; but the weakness and profligacy of
+its emperors, the intestine quarrels and disturbances which were
+forever going on, and the ingratitude with which she had always treated
+Venice, had completely alienated the Venetians from her. Genoa had,
+indeed, for many years exercised a far more preponderating influence at
+Constantinople than Venice had done.
+
+Having completed the tour of the Syrian ports, the Bonito sailed north,
+with the intention of passing the Dardanelles and Bosphorus, and
+proceeding to Azoph.
+
+When she reached the little island of Tenedos, a few miles from the
+entrance to the strait, she heard news which compelled the captain to
+alter his intentions. A revolution had broken out in Constantinople,
+aided by the Genoese of Pera. The cruel tyrant Calojohannes the 5th had
+been deposed, and his heir Andronicus, whom he had deprived of sight
+and thrown into a dungeon, released and placed on the throne.
+
+As a reward for the services she had rendered him, Andronicus issued a
+decree conferring Tenedos upon Genoa. The news had just arrived when
+the Bonito entered the port, and the town was in a ferment. There were
+two or three Venetian warships in the harbour; but the Venetian
+admiral, being without orders from home as to what part to take in such
+an emergency, remained neutral. The matter was, however, an important
+one, for the possession of Tenedos gave its owners the command of the
+Dardanelles, and a fleet lying there could effectually block the
+passage.
+
+The people thronged up to the governor's house with shouts of "Down
+with Genoa!" The governor, being unsupported by any Greek or Genoese
+troops, bowed to the popular will, and declared that he did not
+recognize the revolution that had taken place in Constantinople, and
+refused to submit to the decree of Andronicus. Donato Trono, a Venetian
+merchant resident in the island, and other Venetians, harangued the
+people, and pointed out to them that alone they could not hope to
+resist the united forces of Greece and Genoa, and that their only hope
+of safety lay in placing themselves under the protection of Venice. The
+people, seeing the justice of the arguments of the Venetians, and
+preferring the Venetian rule to that of Genoa, agreed to the proposal.
+The banner of St. Mark was raised amid great enthusiasm, and the island
+declared subject to Venice.
+
+A Genoese galley in port immediately set sail, and quickly carried the
+news to Constantinople, where the emperor at once threw the whole of
+the Venetian residents into prison. As soon as the news of this reached
+Tenedos the captain of the Bonito held a consultation with Francis.
+
+"It is evident, Messer Francisco, that we cannot proceed upon our
+northward voyage. We should be captured and held at Constantinople;
+and, even did we succeed in passing at night, we should fall into the
+hands of the Genoese--who are far stronger in the Black Sea than we
+are--for if Venice accepts the offer of the people of this place, and
+takes possession of the island, Genoa is sure to declare war.
+
+"I think, then, that we had better make our way back to Venice with
+what cargo we have on board, and there get fresh orders from the
+padrone. We have not done badly so far, and it is better to make sure
+of what we have got than to risk its loss, for at any day we may fall
+in with the Genoese fleet sailing hither."
+
+Francis quite agreed with the captain's opinion, and the Bonito sailed
+for the south. They touched, on their way, at several islands, and the
+news that an early outbreak of hostilities between Genoa and Venice was
+probable--in which case there would be an almost complete cessation of
+trade--produced so strong a desire, on the part of the islanders, to
+lay in a store of goods, that the captain was able to dispose of the
+rest of his cargo on good terms, and to fill up his ship with the
+produce of the islands.
+
+Thus the Bonito was deep in the water when she re-entered the port of
+Venice after an absence of about three months. As soon as the anchor
+was dropped the captain, accompanied by Francis, hired a gondola, and
+rowed into the city to give an account to Signor Polani of the success
+of his voyage, and to lay before him a list of the cargo with which the
+Bonito was laden. The merchant received them with great cordiality, and
+embraced Francis with the affection of a father.
+
+"Do you go at once into the salon, Francisco. You will find my
+daughters expecting you there, for the news came an hour ago that the
+Bonito was entering port. Of course, we heard from the letters from
+Candia of your adventures with the pirates, and the gallant way in
+which the Bonito defeated them.
+
+"You will find, captain, that I have ordered an extra month's pay to be
+given to all on board.
+
+"The captain did full justice, Francisco, in his account of the matter,
+to your quickness in suggesting a method by which the effort of the
+ramming of the enemy was neutralized, and for the courage you showed in
+carrying out your idea; but we will talk of that afterwards. He and I
+have business to transact which will occupy us for some time, so the
+sooner you go the better."
+
+Francis at once took himself off and joined the girls, who received him
+with the heartiest greeting.
+
+"We were glad indeed, Francis," Maria said, "when our father told us
+that the Bonito was signalled as entering the port. No letters have
+come for some time, and we feared that you must have entered the
+Dardanelles, and reached Constantinople, before the news arrived there
+of that affair at Tenedos, in which case you would no doubt have been
+seized and thrown into the dungeons."
+
+"We were at Tenedos when the affair took place," Francis said, "and
+have had no opportunity since of sending a letter by any ship likely to
+be here before us. The outbreak made us alter our plans, for, of
+course, it would not have been safe to have sailed farther when the
+emperor was so enraged against Venice. I need hardly tell you I was not
+sorry when we turned our faces again towards Venice. I have enjoyed the
+voyage very much, and have had plenty to occupy me. Still, three months
+at a time is long enough, and I was beginning to long for a sight of
+Venice."
+
+"For a sight of Venice and--" Maria repeated, holding up her finger
+reprovingly.
+
+"And of you both," Francis said smiling. "I did not think it necessary
+to put that in, because you must know that you are Venice to me."
+
+"That is much better," Maria said approvingly. "I think you have
+improved since you have been away. Do you not think so, Giulia?"
+
+"I don't think that sort of nonsense is an improvement," Giulia said
+gravely. "Any of the young Venetian gallants can say that sort of
+thing. We do not want flattery from Francisco."
+
+"You should say you do not want it, Giulia," Maria said, laughing. "I
+like it, I own, even from Francisco. It may not mean anything, but it
+is pleasant nevertheless; besides, one likes to think that there is
+just a little truth in it, not much, perhaps, but just a little in what
+Francisco said, for instance. Of course we are not all Venice to him.
+Still, just as we are pleased to see him, he is pleased to see us; and
+why shouldn't he say so in a pretty way? It's all very well for you to
+set up as being above flattery, Giulia, but you are young yet. I have
+no doubt you will like it when you get as old as I am."
+
+Giulia shook her head decidedly.
+
+"I always think," she said, "when I hear a man saying flattering things
+to a girl, that it is the least complimentary thing he can do, for it
+is treating her as if he considers that she is a fool, otherwise he
+would never say such outrageous nonsense to her."
+
+"There, Francisco," Maria laughed, "you are fairly warned now. Beware
+how you venture to pay any compliment to Giulia in future.
+
+"It would be a dull world if every one were to think as you do, Giulia,
+and to say exactly as they meant. Fancy a young man saying to you: 'I
+think you are a nice sort of girl, no prettier than the rest, but good
+tempered and pleasant, and to be desired because your father is rich!'
+A nice sort of way that would be to be made love to!"
+
+"There is no occasion for them to say anything at all," Giulia said
+indignantly. "We don't go about saying to them, 'I think you are good
+looking, and well mannered, and witty;' or, 'I like you because they
+say you are a brave soldier and a good swordsman.' Why should they say
+such things to us? I suppose we can tell if anyone likes us without all
+that nonsense."
+
+"Perhaps so," the elder girl assented; "and yet I maintain it's
+pleasant, and at any rate it's the custom, and as it's the custom, we
+must put up with it.
+
+"What do you say, Francisco?"
+
+"I don't know anything about it," Francis said. "Certainly some of the
+compliments I have heard paid were barefaced falsehoods, and I have
+wondered how men could make them, and how women could even affect to
+believe in them; but, on the other hand, I suppose that when people are
+in love, they really do think the person they are in love with is
+prettier and more charming, or braver and more handsome, than anyone
+else in the world, and that though it may be flattery, it is really
+true in the opinion of the person who utters it."
+
+"And now let us leave the matter alone for the present, Francisco. We
+are dying to hear all about your adventures, and especially that fight
+with the pirates. The captain, in his letter, merely said that you were
+attacked and beat the pirates off, and that you would have been sunk if
+it hadn't been that, at your suggestion, they lowered bales of cloth
+over to break the shock; and that so many men were killed and so many
+wounded; and that you were hit twice by arrows, but the wounds were
+healing. That's all he said, for papa read that portion of his letter
+out to us. Now we want a full and particular account of the affair."
+
+Francis gave a full account of the fight, and then related the other
+incidents of the voyage.
+
+"We know many of the ports you touched at," Maria said when he had
+finished, "for when we were little girls, papa took us sometimes for
+voyages in his ships, when the times were peaceful and there was no
+danger. Now let us order a gondola, and go for a row. Papa is sure to
+be occupied for ever so long with your captain."
+
+
+
+Chapter 9: The Capture Of The Lido.
+
+
+Signor Polani told Francis, that evening, that he was much pleased with
+the report that the captain had given of his eagerness to acquire
+information both in mercantile and nautical matters, and of the manner
+in which he had kept the ship's books, and the entries of the sales,
+and purchases of goods.
+
+"Many young fellows at your age, Francis, when there was no compulsion
+for them to have taken these matters into their charge, would have
+thought only of amusement and gaiety when they were in port, and I am
+glad to see that you have a real interest in them. Whatever the line in
+life a young man takes up, he will never excel in it unless he goes
+into it with all his heart, and I am very glad to see that you have
+thrown yourself so heartily into your new profession. The Bonito made a
+most satisfactory voyage, far more so than I anticipated, when I found
+that she would not be able to carry out the programme I had laid down
+for her; but the rise in the prices in the latter part of your voyage
+have more than made up for the loss of the trade in the Black Sea; and
+you have done as much in the three months you were absent, as I should
+have expected had you been, as I anticipated, six months away.
+
+"You will be some little time before you start again, as I wish to see
+how matters are going before I send the Bonito out upon another
+adventure. At present nothing is settled here. That there will be war
+with Genoa before long is certain, but we would rather postpone it as
+long as possible, and the senate has not yet arrived at the decision to
+accept the offer of Tenedos. Negotiations are going on with Genoa and
+Constantinople, but I have little hope that anything will come of them.
+
+"It is getting late in the season now, and the war will hardly break
+out until next spring; but I have no doubt the struggle will then
+begin, and preparations are going on with all speed in the dockyards.
+We are endeavouring to obtain allies, but the combination is so strong
+against Venice that we are meeting with little success, and Ferrara is
+really the only friend on whom we can rely, and she is not in a
+position to aid us materially, in such a struggle as this will be.
+
+"I am glad to tell you that the affair in which you were concerned,
+before you sailed, has now completely dropped. Nothing has been heard
+of Mocenigo since he made his escape.
+
+"A decree of banishment was passed against him, but where he is we know
+not. That wretched woman was sentenced to four years' imprisonment, but
+upon my petition she will be released at the end of six months, on her
+promise that she will not again set foot in the territory of the
+republic. As Mocenigo has not been brought to trial, there will be no
+further official inquiry into the matter, and I have not been further
+questioned as to the source from which I obtained my information as to
+the girls' hiding place. Your share in the matter is therefore
+altogether unsuspected, and I do not think that there is any further
+danger to you from Mocenigo's partisans."
+
+"I should be glad enough to remain in Venice a fortnight or so, sir,"
+Francis said. "But if, at the end of that time, you have any vessel
+going out, I shall prefer to go in her. Now that my studies are over, I
+shall very soon get tired of doing nothing. Perhaps in a few years I
+may care more for the gaieties of Venice, but certainly at present I
+have no interest in them, and would rather be at sea. Matteo tells me
+that you have promised he shall make a few voyages in your ships, and
+that you have told him he shall go in one of them shortly. If so, it
+would be very pleasant to us both if we can sail together."
+
+"I will arrange it so, Francisco. It would be for the benefit of my
+cousin--who is a good lad, but harebrained, and without ballast--for
+you to go with him. I should indeed have proposed it, but the vessel in
+which I have decided he shall sail will be ready for sea in another ten
+days or so, and I thought that you would prefer a longer stay in Venice
+before you again set sail. If, however, it is your wish to be off again
+so soon, I will arrange for you both to sail together.
+
+"This time you will go officially as my supercargo, since you now
+understand the duties. The captain of the vessel in which you will sail
+is a good sailor and a brave man, but he has no aptitude for trade, and
+I must have sent a supercargo with him. Your decision to go relieves me
+of this, for which I am not sorry, for men who are at once good
+supercargos, and honest men, are difficult to get."
+
+The fortnight passed rapidly, and Francis enjoyed his stay at the
+merchant's greatly, but he was not sorry when, at the end of ten days,
+Polani told him that the lading of the vessel would begin the next day,
+and that he had best go on board early and see the cargo shipped, so
+that he might check off the bales and casks as they were sent on board,
+and see where each description of goods was stowed away.
+
+"I think, papa, it is too bad of you, sending Francisco away so soon,"
+Maria said, when at their evening meal she learned the news of his
+early departure.
+
+"It is his own doing," her father said. "It is he who wants to go, not
+I who send him. I consider that it is entirely your fault."
+
+"Our fault!" the two girls repeated in surprise.
+
+"Certainly. If you had made Venice sufficiently pleasant to him, he
+would not wish to leave. I am too busy to see about such things, and I
+left it to you to entertain him. As he is in such a hurry to get away
+again, it is evident that you have not succeeded in doing so."
+
+"Indeed, Signor Polani, your daughters have been everything that is
+kind, but I have no taste for assemblies and entertainments. I feel out
+of place there, amid all the gaily dressed nobles and ladies, and no
+sooner do I get there, than I begin to wonder how anyone can prefer the
+heated rooms, and clatter of tongues, to the quiet pleasure of a walk
+backwards and forwards on the deck of a good ship. Besides, I want to
+learn my profession, and there is so much to learn in it that I feel I
+have no time to lose."
+
+"I am right glad to see your eagerness in that direction, Francisco,
+and I did but jest with my daughters. You have not yet asked me what is
+the destination of the Lido, for that is the name of your new vessel.
+This time you are going quite in a new direction. In the spring we are
+certain to have war with Genoa, and as Parma and Hungary will probably
+both take side against us, we may find ourselves cut off from the
+mainland, and, in case of a disaster happening to our fleet, in sore
+straits for food. I am, therefore, going to gather into my warehouses
+as much grain as they will hold. This will both be a benefit to the
+state, and will bring me good profit, for the price of wheat will be
+high in the city if we are leaguered on the land side.
+
+"The Lido will go down to Sicily, and fill up there with corn. You will
+have to use care before entering port, for with war now certain, both
+parties will begin to snap up prizes when they get the chance. So you
+must keep a sharp lookout for Genoese galleys. If you find the coast is
+too closely watched, you will go to the Moorish ports. We are friends
+with them at present, though doubtless, as soon as Genoa and ourselves
+get to blows, they will be resuming their piratical work. Thus you
+will, this time, take in a much smaller amount of cargo, as you will
+have to pay for the most part in gold."
+
+It mattered little to Francis where he voyaged; but Matteo, who had
+been greatly delighted at the thought of sailing with his friend, was
+much disappointed when he heard that they were only going to fetch
+grain from Sicily.
+
+"Why, it is nothing to call a voyage," he said in tones of disgust,
+when Francis told him the destination of the Lido. "I had hoped we were
+going to make a long voyage, and touch at all sorts of places, just as
+you did last time."
+
+"I do not see that it matters much, Matteo; and we shall learn
+navigation just as well from one course as another. The voyage will not
+be a long one, unless we meet with unfavourable winds; but there's no
+saying what may happen, and you may meet with adventure, even on a
+voyage to Sicily and back."
+
+The trip down to Sicily was quickly made. Francis had worked hard on
+his first voyage, and was now able to make daily calculations as to the
+run made, the course steered, and the position of the ship, and found
+that these tallied closely with those of the captain. Matteo and he
+shared a large and handsome cabin, and the time passed pleasantly as
+the vessel ran down the coast of Italy. Once out of the Adriatic a
+sharp lookout was kept, but the coast of Sicily was made without seeing
+any sails of a suspicious character.
+
+The lads were struck with surprise and admiration when, on coming on
+deck in the morning, they saw the great cone of Etna lying ahead of
+them. Neither of them had ever seen a mountain of any size, and their
+interest in the scene was heightened by a slight wreath of smoke, which
+curled up from the summit of the hill.
+
+"It is well worth a voyage, if it were only to see that mountain,"
+Francis said. "What an immense height it is, and how regular in its
+shape!"
+
+"And yet," Matteo said, "those who have journeyed from Italy into
+France tell me that there are mountains there beside which Etna is as
+nothing. These mountains are a continuation of the range of hills which
+we can see from Venice. Their tops are always covered with snow, and
+cannot be ascended by man; whereas it is easy, they say, to reach the
+top of Etna."
+
+"Yes, that looks easy enough," Francis agreed. "It seems such a regular
+slope, that one could almost ride up; but I dare say, when you are
+close you would find all sorts of difficult places."
+
+"I should like to try," Matteo said. "What a grand view there would be
+from the top!
+
+"Is the port we are going to try first, captain, anywhere near the foot
+of the mountain?"
+
+"No, I am going round the southern part of the island. On this side the
+ground is less fertile, and we should have difficulty in obtaining a
+cargo. But even were we to put into a port on this side, you would not
+be able to climb Mount Etna.
+
+"Sicily has been an unfortunate country. Its great natural wealth has
+rendered it an object of desire, to all its neighbours. It was the
+battleground of the Romans and Carthaginians. Pisa, Genoa, and Naples
+have all contended for its possession; and the Moors frequently make
+descents upon its coasts. It has seldom enjoyed a peaceful and settled
+government. The consequence is that general lawlessness prevails in the
+districts remote from the towns; while in the forests that clothe the
+side of Mount Etna, there are numerous hordes of bandits who set the
+authorities at defiance, levy blackmail throughout the surrounding
+villages, and carry off wealthy inhabitants, and put them to ransom. No
+one in his senses would think of ascending that mountain, unless he had
+something like an army with him."
+
+"I should like to try it, all the same," Matteo asserted. "If there are
+woods all over it, it is not likely one would happen to meet with any
+of these people. I should like, above all things, to get to the top of
+that hill."
+
+"It would be harder work than you think, young sir," the captain said.
+"You have no idea from this distance what the height is, or what a long
+journey it is to ascend to the top. I have been told that it is a
+hundred and twenty miles round its foot."
+
+"I don't think you would like it, Matteo, if you were to try it,"
+Francis said laughing. "You know you are as lazy as you can be, and
+hate exerting yourself. I am sure that, before you got a quarter the
+distance up that mountain, you would have only one wish, and that would
+be to be at the bottom again."
+
+"I don't know," Matteo said. "I hate exerting myself uselessly--wasting
+my strength, as you do, in rowing at an oar, or anything of that sort;
+but to do anything great, I would not mind exertion, and would go on
+until I dropped."
+
+"That is all very well, Matteo; but to do anything great, you have got
+to do small things first. You could never wield a sword for five
+minutes unless you had practised with it; and you will never succeed in
+accomplishing any feats requiring great strength and endurance, if you
+do not practise your muscles on every occasion. You used to grumble at
+the height when you came up to my room in the old house, and I suppose
+Etna is something like two hundred times as high."
+
+"That does sound a serious undertaking," Matteo said, laughing; "and I
+am afraid that I shall never see the view from the top of Etna.
+Certainly I shall not, if it will be necessary beforehand to be always
+exercising my muscles by running up the stairs of high houses."
+
+The next day they were off Girgenti, the port at which they hoped to
+obtain a cargo. They steered in until they encountered a fishing boat,
+and learned from those on board that there was no Genoese vessel in
+port, nor, as far as the men knew, any state galleys anywhere in the
+neighbourhood. Obtaining this news, they sailed boldly into the port
+and dropped anchor.
+
+Francis, who had received before starting a list of houses with whom
+Signor Polani was in the habit of doing business, at once rowed ashore,
+Matteo and Giuseppi accompanying him. His business arrangements were
+soon completed. The harvest had been a good one, and there was an
+abundance of corn to be had at a cheap rate. In half an hour he
+arranged for as large a quantity as the Lido would carry.
+
+The work of loading soon commenced, and in four days the ship was full
+up to the hatches. Francis went on shore to settle the various
+accounts, and was just making the last payment when Matteo ran into the
+office.
+
+"Four Genoese galleys are entering the bay!"
+
+Francis ran out, and saw four Genoese galleys rowing in.
+
+"It is too late to escape. Even were we empty we could not get away;
+but laden as the Lido is, they could row three feet to her one."
+
+"What shall we do, Francisco?"
+
+Francis stood for half a minute thinking.
+
+"You had better stay here, Matteo. I will row out to the ship, and send
+most of the men on shore. If they seize the ship, they may not take
+those on board prisoners; but if they do, there is no reason why they
+should take us all."
+
+"You had better come on shore too, Francisco, and leave the captain in
+charge. You can do no good by staying there; and Polani would be more
+concerned at your capture than he would at the loss of a dozen ships.
+If you could do any good, it would be different; but as it is, it would
+be foolish to risk capture."
+
+"I will see," Francis said. "At any rate, do you stop here."
+
+Jumping into a boat, he rowed towards the Lido, which was lying but a
+cable's length from the shore. As he neared her, he shouted to the men
+to lower the boats.
+
+"Captain," he said, "I do not know whether there is any danger of being
+captured by the Genoese. But it is useless to run any unnecessary risk.
+Therefore send all the crew but three or four men on shore. If the
+Genoese board us, we have our papers as peaceful traders buying wheat;
+but if, in spite of that, they capture us, we must take our chance."
+
+"Surely you are not thinking of stopping, Messer Francisco. The padrone
+would be terribly vexed if you were taken. He specially ordered me,
+before we started, to see that no unnecessary risk was run, and to
+prevent you from thrusting yourself into danger. Therefore, as captain
+of the ship, I must insist that you go on shore."
+
+"I think I ought to stay here," Francis said.
+
+"I do not think so," the captain said firmly, "and I will not suffer
+it. I have to answer for your safety to the padrone; and if you do not
+go by yourself, I shall order the men to put you into one of the boats
+by force. I mean no disrespect; but I know my duty, and that is to
+prevent you from falling into the hands of the Genoese."
+
+"I will not oblige you to use force, captain," Francis said, smiling,
+"and will do as you wish me."
+
+In five minutes the men were all--save four, whom the captain had
+selected--in the boat, and rowing towards shore. Matteo was awaiting
+them when they landed.
+
+"That is right, Francisco. I was half afraid you would stay on board. I
+know how obstinate you are whenever you take a thing into your head."
+
+"The captain was more obstinate still, Matteo, and said that unless I
+came away he would send me on shore by force; but I don't like
+deserting the ship."
+
+"That is nonsense, Francisco. If the Genoese take her, they take her,
+and your remaining on board could not do any good. What are you going
+to do now?"
+
+"We will at once leave the place with the men, Matteo, and retire into
+the country behind. It is not likely the Genoese would land and seize
+us here, but they might do so, or the inhabitants, to please Genoa,
+might seize us and send us on board. At any rate, we shall be safer in
+the country."
+
+The men had, by the captain's orders, brought their arms ashore on
+leaving the ship. This was the suggestion of Francis, who said that,
+were they unarmed, the people might seize them and hand them over to
+the Genoese. At the head of this party, which was about fifty strong,
+Francis marched up through the little town and out into the country. He
+had really but little fear, either that the Genoese would arrest them
+on shore, or that the people would interfere with them, for they would
+not care to risk the anger of Venice by interfering in such a matter.
+He thought it probable, however, that if his men remained in the town,
+broils would arise between them and any of the Genoese sailors who
+might land.
+
+As soon as the Genoese galleys came up to the head of the bay, a boat
+was lowered and rowed to the Lido, at whose masthead the Venetian flag
+was flying. An officer, followed by six men, climbed up on to the deck.
+
+"Are you the captain of this ship?" the officer asked as the captain
+approached him.
+
+"I am," the captain said.
+
+"What ship is it?"
+
+"It is the Lido, the property of Messer Polani, a merchant of Venice,
+and laden with a cargo of wheat."
+
+"Then you are my prisoner," the Genoese said. "I seize this vessel as
+lawful prize."
+
+"There is peace between the republics," the captain said. "I protest
+against the seizure of this ship, as an act of piracy."
+
+"We have news that several of our ships have been seized by the
+Venetians," the officer said; "and we therefore capture this vessel in
+reprisal. Where are your crew?"
+
+"There are only four on board," the captain said. "We have filled up
+our cargo, and were going to sail tomorrow, and therefore the rest of
+the crew were allowed to go on shore; and I do not think it is likely
+that they will return now," for one of the Genoese sailors had hauled
+down the flag of Venice, and had replaced it with that of Genoa.
+
+The Genoese officer briefly examined the vessel.
+
+"Whom have you here on board with you?" he asked, struck with the
+furniture and fittings of Francis' cabin.
+
+"This is the cabin of Matteo Giustiniani, a young noble of Venice, who
+is making his first voyage, in order to fit himself for entering the
+service of the state: and of Francisco Hammond, who stands high in the
+affections of my patron."
+
+The Genoese uttered an angry exclamation. The name of Polani was well
+known in Genoa as one of the chief merchants of Venice and as belonging
+to a ducal house, while the family of Giustiniani was even more
+illustrious; and had these passengers fallen into his hands, a ransom
+might have been obtained greatly exceeding the value of the Lido and
+her cargo. Leaving four of his men on board he went off to the galley
+of the officer commanding the fleet, and presently returned with a
+large boat full of sailors.
+
+"You and your men can go ashore," he said to the captain. "The admiral
+does not deem you worth the trouble of carrying to Genoa; but be quick,
+or you will have to swim to shore."
+
+As the Lido's boats had all gone ashore, the captain hailed a fishing
+boat which was passing, and with the four sailors was rowed to shore,
+well content that he had escaped the dungeons of Genoa. He rightly
+imagined that he and his men were released solely on account of the
+paucity of their numbers. Had the whole crew been captured, they would
+have been carried to Genoa; but the admiral did not care to bring in
+five prisoners only, and preferred taking the ship alone.
+
+Francis, with his party, followed the line of the coast, ascending the
+hills which rose steeply from the edge of the sea at a short distance
+from the town. He had brought with him from the town a supply of food
+sufficient for four or five days, and encamped in a little wood near
+the edge of the cliff. From this they had a view of the port, and could
+watch the doings of the Genoese galleys. Fires were lit and meat cooked
+over them; and just as the meal was prepared the captain and the four
+sailors joined them, amid a hearty cheer from the crew.
+
+"I have made my protest," the captain said as he took his seat by the
+side of Francis, "and the padrone can make a complaint before the
+council if he thinks fit to do so; but there is small chance that he
+will ever recover the Lido, or the value of her cargo."
+
+"I don't like losing the ship," Francis said. "Of course, it is only a
+stroke of bad fortune, and we could neither fly nor defend ourselves.
+Still one hates arriving home with the story that one has lost the
+ship."
+
+"Yes," the captain agreed. "Messer Polani is a just man, yet no one
+cares to employ men who are unlucky; and the worst of it is that the
+last ship I commanded was wrecked. Many men would not have employed me
+again, although it wasn't my fault. But after this second affair, in a
+few months' time, I shall get the name of being an unlucky man, and no
+one in his senses would employ a man who is always losing his ships."
+
+"Do you think that there is any chance of our recapturing it, captain?"
+
+"Not the least in the world," the captain replied. "Even supposing that
+we could get on board, and overpower the Genoese without being heard,
+and get her out of the port without being seen, we should not get away.
+Laden as she is with grain, she will sail very slowly, and the Genoese
+would overtake her in a few hours; and I needn't tell you that then
+there would be very little mercy shown to any on board."
+
+"That is true enough," Francis said. "Still, I do not like the idea of
+losing the Lido."
+
+After the meal was over Francis rose, and asked Matteo to accompany him
+on a stroll along the cliffs, Giuseppi as usual following them. They
+walked along until they rounded the head of the bay, and were able to
+look along the coast for some distance. It was steep and rocky, and
+worn into a number of slight indentations. In one of these rose a ledge
+of rocks at a very short distance from the shore.
+
+"How much further are we going, Francis?" Matteo said when they had
+walked a couple of miles.
+
+"About a quarter of a mile, Matteo. I want to examine that ledge of
+rocks we saw from the first point."
+
+"What on earth do you want to look at them for, Francis? You certainly
+are the most curious fellow I ever met. You scoffed at me when I said I
+should like to go up Mount Etna, and now here you are, dragging me
+along this cliff, just to look at some rocks of no possible interest to
+any one."
+
+"That is the point to be inquired into, Matteo. I think it's possible
+they may prove very interesting."
+
+Matteo shrugged his shoulders, as he often did when he felt too lazy to
+combat the eccentric ideas of his English friend.
+
+"There we are," Francis said at last, standing on the edge of the cliff
+and looking down. "Nothing could be better."
+
+"I am glad you think so, Francisco," Matteo said, seating himself on
+the grass. "I hope you intend to stay some little time to admire them,
+for I own that I should like a rest before I go back."
+
+Francis stood looking at the rocks. The bay was a shallow one, and was
+but five or six hundred yards from point to point, the rocks rising
+nearly in a line between the points, and showing for about two hundred
+yards above water, and at about the same distance from the cliffs
+behind them.
+
+"What height do you think those rocks are above the water, Giuseppi?"
+
+"It is difficult to judge, signor, we are so high above them; but I
+should think in the middle they must be ten or twelve feet."
+
+"I should think it likely they were more than double that, Giuseppi;
+but we shall see better when we get down to the bottom. I daresay we
+shall find a place where we can clamber down somewhere."
+
+"My dear Francisco," Matteo said earnestly, "is anything the matter
+with you? I begin to have doubts of your sanity. What on earth do these
+rocks matter to you, one way or the other? or what can you care whether
+they are thirty inches or thirty feet above the water?
+
+"They do not differ from other rocks, as far as I can see. They are
+very rugged and very rough, and would be very awkward if they lay out
+at sea instead of in this little bay, where they are in nobody's way.
+Is it not enough that you have tramped two miles to have a look at
+them, which means four miles, as we have got to return somehow? And now
+you talk about climbing down that break-neck cliff to have a look at
+them close!"
+
+But Francis paid no attention to Matteo's words. He was gazing down
+into the clear smooth water, which was so transparent that every stone
+and pebble at the bottom could be seen.
+
+"The water looks extremely shallow, Giuseppi. What do you think?"
+
+"It seems to me, signor, that there is not a foot of water between the
+rocks and the shore."
+
+"It does look so, Giuseppi; but it is possible that the transparency of
+the water deceives us, and that there may be ten or twelve feet of
+water there. However, that is what we must go down and find out. Now
+the first thing is to look about, and find some point at which we can
+get down to the beach."
+
+"Well, I will lie down and take a nap till you come back," Matteo said
+in a tone of resignation. "I have no interest either in these rocks or
+in the water; and as far as I can protest, I do so against the whole
+proceeding, which to me savours of madness."
+
+"Don't you understand, you silly fellow, what I am thinking about?"
+Francis said impatiently.
+
+"Not in the smallest degree, Francisco; but do not trouble to tell
+me--it makes no matter. You have some idea in your head. Carry it out
+by all means; only don't ask me to cut my hands, tear my clothes, and
+put myself into a perspiration by climbing down that cliff."
+
+"My idea is this, Matteo. There is no chance of carrying off the Lido
+by speed from the Genoese; but if we could get her out of the bay we
+might bring her round here and lay her behind those rocks, and the
+Genoese would pass by without dreaming she was there. Half a mile out
+those rocks would look as if they form part of the cliff, and none
+would suspect there was a passage behind them."
+
+"That is something like an idea!" Matteo said, jumping to his feet.
+"Why did you not tell me of it before? You have quite alarmed me.
+Seriously, I began to think that you had become a little mad, and was
+wondering whether I had not better go back and fetch the captain and
+some of his men to look after you.
+
+"Now let us look at your rocks again. Why, man, there is not water
+enough to float a boat between them and the shore, much less the Lido,
+which draws nine foot of water now she is loaded."
+
+"I don't know, Matteo. Looking down on water from a height is very
+deceiving. If it is clear and transparent, there is nothing to enable
+you to judge its depth. At any rate it is worth trying. Before we go
+down, we will cut some long stiff rods with which we can measure the
+depth. But we have first to find a place where we can get down to the
+water."
+
+After a quarter of an hour's search, they found a point where the
+descent seemed practicable. A little stream had worn a deep fissure in
+the face of the rock. Shrubs and bushes had grown up in the crevices
+and afforded a hold for the hands, and there appeared no great
+difficulty in getting down. Before starting they cut three stiff
+slender rods twelve feet in length. They then set to work to make the
+descent. It was by no means difficult, and in a few minutes they stood
+by the edge of the water.
+
+"It is a great advantage, the path being so easy," Francis said, "for
+in case they did discover the ship we could land and climb to the top
+before they had time to come to shore, and once there we could keep the
+whole force in those galleys at bay. Now for the main point, the depth
+of the water."
+
+Matteo shook his head.
+
+"It is useless to take the trouble to undress, Francis," he said, as
+the latter threw off his jacket. "Giuseppi can wade out to the rocks
+without wetting his knees."
+
+"Giuseppi can try if he likes," Francis said, "but I will wager he will
+not get far."
+
+Giuseppi, as convinced as Matteo of the shallowness of the water,
+stepped into it, but was surprised to find that, before he had gone
+many paces, the water was up to his waist.
+
+"Well, I wouldn't have believed it if I hadn't seen it," Matteo said
+when he returned, "but I think he must have got into a deep hole among
+the rocks. However, we shall soon see," and he too began to undress.
+
+In a few minutes the three lads were swimming out towards the rocks
+which, as Francis had anticipated, rose from twenty to thirty feet
+above the level of the sea. The water deepened fast, and for the last
+thirty or forty yards, they were unable to touch the bottom, even when
+thrusting down their rods to the fullest depth. They then tried the
+depth in the passages at the end of the rocks, and found that there was
+ample water for the Lido. When they ascertained this to their
+satisfaction they swam back to the shore.
+
+"I shall believe you in future, Francis, even if you assert that the
+moon is made of cheese. I could have taken an oath that there was not a
+foot of water between those rocks and the shore."
+
+"I hardly ventured to hope that it was as deep as it is," Francis said,
+"but I know how deceiving clear water is, when you look down upon it
+from a height. However, that point is settled."
+
+"But they would see our masts above the rocks, Francisco. They are sure
+to keep a sharp lookout as they go along."
+
+"We must take the masts out of her," Francis said. "I don't know how it
+is to be done, but the captain will know, and if that can't be managed
+we must cut them down. There is no difficulty about that.
+
+"Now we will make our way back again, it will be dark in a couple of
+hours' time. Everything depends upon whether they have towed the Lido
+out and anchored her among their galleys. If they have, I fear the
+scheme is impracticable, but if they let her remain where she is lying,
+we might get her out without being noticed, for there is no moon."
+
+As they began to ascend the cliff, Francis stopped suddenly.
+
+"We should never be able to find this place in the dark," he said.
+
+"Giuseppi, you must stay here. Do you collect a quantity of dried
+sticks, and lay them in readiness at that point opposite the ledge. We
+will show a light as we come along, that is if we succeed in getting
+the Lido out, and directly you see it set fire to the sticks. The fire
+will be a guide to us as to the position of the rocks."
+
+"Perhaps I had better take the sticks off to the ledge, Messer
+Francisco, and light my fire on the rock at the end. The water is deep
+a few yards out, as we found, so you could sail close to the fire and
+then round behind the rocks without danger."
+
+"That will be the best way, Giuseppi; but how will you get the sticks
+off without wetting them?"
+
+"I will make a bundle three or four times as big as I want," Giuseppi
+said, "and then half of them will be dry. I can put my clothes on them
+and the tinder. I will answer for the fire, but I would rather have
+been with you in your adventure."
+
+"There will be no danger there, Giuseppi, so you need not be anxious
+about us. It has to be done quietly and secretly, and there will be no
+fighting. These Genoese are too strong to think of that; and if we are
+discovered in the attempt, or as we make off, we shall take to our
+boats again and row straight on shore.
+
+"Keep a sharp lookout for us, we will hoist two lights, one above the
+other, to prevent your mistaking any fishing boat which may be coming
+along for us.
+
+"Now, Matteo, for a climb. We have no time to lose."
+
+The two lads climbed to the top of the cliff, and then started at a
+brisk pace along the top, and in half an hour reached the wood.
+
+"We were beginning to wonder what had become of you," the captain said
+as they joined him.
+
+"We have been settling how to carry off the Lido," Francis said, "and
+have arranged everything."
+
+The captain laughed.
+
+"If we could fly with her through the air, you might get her away, but
+I see no other way. I have been thinking it over since you left. With
+luck we might get her safely out of the bay, but the galleys row four
+feet to our one, and as they would be sure to send some one way, and
+some the other, along the coast; they would pick us up again in two or
+three hours after daylight."
+
+"Nevertheless we have settled it, captain. We have found a place where
+we can hide her, and the Genoese might search the coast for a month
+without finding her."
+
+"If that be so it is possible," the captain said eagerly, "and you may
+be sure you will not find us backward in doing our best."
+
+Francis described the nature and position of the rock which would
+afford a shelter, and the means by which they had ascertained that
+there was plenty of water for the Lido behind it.
+
+"It seems plausible," the captain said when he had concluded, "and I am
+quite ready to make the attempt, if, in your opinion, it can be done.
+You are Messer Polani's representative, and for my own sake as well as
+his, I would do anything which promises a chance of recapturing the
+ship. Besides, as you say, there is little danger in it, for we can
+take to the boats and make for the shore if discovered.
+
+"The Lido is still lying where we anchored her. They can have no fear
+of a recapture, for they would know that they could overtake us easily
+enough. I daresay they intend to sail tomorrow morning, and did not
+think it worth the trouble to get up the anchor and tow her out to
+where they are lying."
+
+The details of the expedition were now discussed and arranged, and the
+men told off to their various duties, and at eleven o'clock at night,
+when all in the town were fast asleep, the party quitted the bivouac
+and marched down again to the port.
+
+
+
+Chapter 10: Recaptured.
+
+
+No one was astir in the streets as the band marched through, and they
+reached the port without encountering a single person. A small boat was
+chosen, and in this the captain, Francis, Matteo, and two of the
+strongest and most powerful of the sailors embarked. It was thought
+unlikely that, lying, as the Lido did, within a couple of hundred yards
+of the Genoese galleys, any very vigilant watch would be kept, and not
+more than two sailors would probably be on deck.
+
+The dark mass of the ship could just be made out from the shore, and
+when all was ready the two sailors with their oars pushed her off with
+all their strength, and then stood perfectly quiet.
+
+The impetus was sufficient. The boat moved so slowly through the water,
+indeed, before they reached the ship, that Francis thought it would be
+necessary for the men to row a stroke or two; but the boat still moved
+on, until at last it touched the side of the ship. All had removed
+their boots before starting, and they now clambered up the sides
+without making the slightest noise.
+
+Once on deck they stood perfectly quiet, listening. Presently they
+heard a murmur of voices on the other side of the vessel. Very quietly
+they crept towards the sound, and at length made out two figures
+leaning over the bulwarks, talking.
+
+Each man's work had been settled, and there was no confusion. One of
+the sailors and Francis stole towards one of the men, while the other
+and Matteo approached the second. The captain stood with his sword
+bared, in readiness to cut down any other man who might be on deck.
+
+The Genoese did not look round. Francis gave the word, "Now," and in a
+moment the two sailors seized them from behind with a grasp of iron,
+while the lads at the same moment passed bandages tightly round their
+mouths, and before the Genoese were quite aware of what had happened,
+they were lying, bound hand and foot, gagged upon the deck.
+
+The party now made a search, but found no one else about. They then
+secured and fastened down the hatch of the forecastle by coiling ropes
+upon it, quietly opened the door leading to the poop cabins, and
+entering, seized and bound two officers sleeping there without the
+slightest noise or resistance.
+
+Then they took a light from the cabin and showed it towards the shore.
+At the signal the sailors, who had already taken their places in the
+boats, at once rowed out to the vessel. When all were on board, the
+boats were fastened alongside, in case it should be necessary to
+abandon the ship again.
+
+The cable was then cut. One of the sailors had already ascended the
+shrouds, and poured oil over the blocks through which the halyards ran,
+so that the sails should ascend noiselessly. The wind was very light,
+scarcely enough to belly out the sails, but it was fortunately in the
+right direction, and the Lido began to steal through the water.
+
+Not a word had been spoken since they first started, but Francis now
+whispered to the captain, "I think I can make out the Genoese ships."
+
+"So can I," the captain said, "but they cannot see us. They are against
+the skyline, while we are in the shadow of the shore. So far all is
+perfectly safe, and if this breath of wind will but carry us far enough
+out to be able to use our oars without their hearing us, we shall
+certainly get away."
+
+The progress of the Lido was so slow, that it was nearly an hour before
+the captain said that he thought they were now fairly round the point
+of the bay, and could use their oars.
+
+"We had better tow," he said; "the sweeps make a noise that can be
+heard miles away on a calm night like this, whereas, if they are
+careful, men in a boat can row almost noiselessly."
+
+Ten of the men accordingly took their places in one of the large boats
+in which they had come on board, and a rope being passed down to them
+they began rowing at the head of the ship.
+
+"We may as well lower the sails," the captain said, "they are doing no
+good now. Indeed I think it is a current rather than the wind that has
+helped us so far."
+
+"I will put two lanterns over the side," Francis said. "We may have
+gone farther than we think, and it would never do to pass our hiding
+place."
+
+The men in the boat rowed vigorously, but it was slow work towing the
+deeply-laden vessel. At last, however, a light burst suddenly up from
+the shore.
+
+"There is Giuseppi," Francis exclaimed. "We are further out than we
+thought we were. He must be fully a mile and a half away."
+
+The men in the boat were told to row direct for the light, and some of
+the sweeps were got out and helped the vessel through the water. As
+they drew near, they could make out Giuseppi throwing fresh wood on the
+fire.
+
+"You can steer within ten yards of where he is standing, captain, and
+directly you are abreast of him, put your helm hard to port. You had
+better get the sweeps in now, the less way she has on her the better."
+
+"All well?" Giuseppi hailed, as they came within fifty yards of it.
+
+"All well, Giuseppi! There has been no fighting, so you have lost
+nothing. Put all your wood on the fire, we want as much light as we can
+to get in."
+
+The flames shot up high, and the captain had no difficulty in rounding
+the corner of the rocks, and bringing up his vessel behind them. A
+kedge was dropped, and the men in the boat rowed to the end of the
+rocks, and brought off Giuseppi.
+
+"I was beginning to be anxious," the lad said, as he joined them on
+deck, "and when I first saw your signal I took you for a fishing boat.
+You were so far off that the two lights looked like one, but by dint of
+gazing I made them out at last, and then lit the fire."
+
+"Now, captain," Francis said, "we have a good deal to do before
+morning, for I take it it will be no easy matter to get out the masts."
+
+"There would be no difficulty in getting the masts out," the captain
+answered. "I have only to knock out the wedges, and loosen the stays,
+and get up a tripod made of three spars to lift them out; but I don't
+see how they are to be got in again."
+
+"How is that, captain? I should have thought it no more difficult to
+get a mast in than to take it out."
+
+"Nor would it be so, under ordinary circumstances," the captain
+replied; "but you see, our hold is full of grain, and as the mast comes
+out, the hole it leaves will fill up, and there will be no getting it
+down again to step it on the keel without discharging the cargo."
+
+"Yes, I see that, captain. Then you think we had better cut down the
+masts; but in that case how are we to raise them?"
+
+"We will cut them off about six feet above the deck, Messer Francisco;
+then when we want to set sail again, we have only to rear the masts up
+by the side of the stumps, and lash them securely. Of course they will
+be six feet shorter than before, but that is of little consequence."
+
+"Then so let it be," Francis said, "the sooner we begin the better."
+
+Just at this moment there was a violent knocking against the hatch of
+the forecastle.
+
+"I had forgotten all about the sailors," the captain said, laughing. "I
+suppose the men who were to relieve the watch have woke up, and finding
+they could not get out, have aroused their comrades."
+
+"Shall we leave them there, or take them out and bind them?" Matteo
+asked.
+
+"We had better have them up," the captain said. "I don't suppose there
+are more than twenty of them, and it would be best to bind them, and
+put them down in the hold with the corn, otherwise they may manage to
+break out when we are not expecting it, and might give us some
+trouble."
+
+Accordingly, the sailors gathered round the hatch. The ropes were then
+removed, and the hatch taken off.
+
+"What fooling are you up to?" one of the Genoese exclaimed, angrily, as
+they rushed up on deck. "You have nearly stifled us down below putting
+on the hatch and fastening it."
+
+He stopped abruptly as, on gaining the deck, he saw a crowd of armed
+figures round him, for a lantern had been placed so as to throw a light
+upon the spot.
+
+"You are prisoners," the captain said. "It is useless to attempt
+resistance."
+
+"Help, help, treachery!" one of the Genoese shouted at the top of his
+voice.
+
+"It is useless for you to shout," the captain said, "you are miles away
+from your fleet. Now, do you surrender, or are we to attack you?"
+
+Taken by surprise, and unarmed, the Genoese who had gained the deck
+sullenly replied that they surrendered. They were bound and led away,
+and the others ordered to come up on deck. There were found to be
+four-and-twenty in all, and these were soon laid side by side on the
+grain in the hold, the hatch being left off to give them air. The masts
+were then cut through, and were with some trouble lowered to the deck.
+
+"There is nothing more to be done now," the captain said, "and I think
+we can all safely turn in till morning."
+
+He then ordered the under officer to place two men on watch on the
+rocks, and two men on deck, two men to stand as sentinels over the
+prisoners, and the rest to lie down. He directed that he should be
+roused at the earliest streak of daylight.
+
+The lads were soon fast asleep, and could hardly believe that the night
+was over, when Giuseppi awakened them with the news that day was
+breaking. They were soon on deck, and found that the crew were already
+astir. The sentinels on the rock were at once ordered to lie down, so
+that they could command a view of the sea, without exposing themselves
+to sight. The boats were drawn up alongside, and everything put in
+readiness for instant debarkation, and then the party waited for the
+appearance of the Genoese galleys.
+
+"They will be along in less than an hour," the captain said. "It is
+light enough now for the watch to have discovered that the Lido is
+missing, and it will not be many minutes before they are under way.
+They will calculate that we can have but five or six hours' start at
+the utmost, and that three hours' rowing will bring them up to us."
+
+"I have no fear whatever of their discovering us as they go along,"
+Francis said. "The only fear is that, after rowing for three or four
+hours and seeing no sign of us, they will guess that we are hidden
+somewhere under the cliffs, and will come back along the shore,
+searching every bay."
+
+"There is a chance of that," the captain agreed, "but I should think
+only a chance. When the party who come this way find they do not
+overtake us, they will suppose that we have sailed to the west, and
+that on their return they will find us in the hands of their comrades;
+and when these also come back empty handed they will conclude that we
+have sailed straight out to sea. Of course they may have sent a galley
+southward also, but will conclude that that has somehow missed us when
+it returns without news. I hardly think that the idea, that we may be
+hidden so close to them, will enter their minds, and the only fear I
+entertain is that some peasant may happen to come to the edge of the
+cliff and see us lying here, and may take the news back to Girgenti."
+
+"Yes, there is certainly a danger of that," Francis said. "I think,
+captain, it would be the best plan to land twenty men at once. Giuseppi
+will show them the way up the cliff, and then they must take their
+station, at short distances apart, along the edge of the cliff, from
+point to point of this little bay, with orders to seize any one who may
+approach and bring him down here. They must, of course, be told to lie
+down, as a line of sentries along the top of the cliff might attract
+the attention of somebody on the galleys, and lead to a search."
+
+"Yes, I think that will be a wise precaution," the captain agreed.
+
+"Thomaso, do you take twenty men and post them as you hear Messer
+Francisco say. Tell them to lie in the bushes and keep out of sight,
+and on no account to show themselves, unless someone comes along
+sufficiently near to look over the edge of the cliff."
+
+"Giuseppi," Francis said, "do you act as guide to the party. You will
+have plenty of time to get to the top and to return before the galleys
+come along."
+
+A quarter of an hour later the captain, with Matteo and Francis, landed
+on the ledge, and took the place of the sentries, and in twenty minutes
+a simultaneous exclamation burst from them, as a Genoese galley was
+seen rowing rapidly along.
+
+"They have sent only one galley," Francis said. "Of course, they would
+know that it was sufficiently strong to overpower us without
+difficulty. I suppose one has gone west, and the others have put out to
+sea in different directions. That certainly was the best course they
+could have adopted, and it is very lucky that we did not attempt to
+escape seaward, for they would assuredly have had us. I suppose,
+captain, you intend to sail tonight."
+
+"Certainly," the captain replied. "We will get everything in readiness
+for hoisting the masts as soon as the galley has passed us on its way
+back. There is no fear of their coming along again later on, for the
+men will have had an eight hours' row of it; the first part, at any
+rate, at full speed. Besides, they will not know, until all the galleys
+return, that we have not been found, so I think it will be quite safe
+to get up the masts as soon as they have passed. Then directly it is
+dark we will man our oars and row to the southwest. We shall be far
+away before morning, even if they look further for us, which they are
+hardly likely to do."
+
+"How about the prisoners, captain?"
+
+"We have no choice but to take them with us, Messer Francisco. I am
+sure I do not want to be bothered with them, but we cannot land them
+before we leave, or they would carry the news to Girgenti in an hour,
+and we should be caught the first thing in the morning."
+
+It was late in the afternoon before the galley was seen returning,
+rowing slowly and heavily.
+
+"I expect," the captain said, "they kept up the racing pace at which
+they started for some four hours. By that time they must have been
+completely worn out, and no doubt they anchored and waited for some
+hours for the men to feed and rest themselves, for from the hurry with
+which they started you may be sure that they did not wait to break
+their fast.
+
+"I would give a month's pay to be in that harbour this evening. What
+tempers they must be in when they find, after all their toil, that we
+have slipped through their fingers, How they will talk the matter over,
+and discuss which way we went. How the men in each ship will say that
+the others cannot have used their eyes or exerted themselves, else we
+must have been overtaken. Messer Francisco, I am indebted to you, not
+only for having saved the ship, but for giving me a joke, which I shall
+laugh over whenever I think of it. It will be a grand story to tell
+over the wine cups, how we cheated a whole Genoese fleet, and carried
+off the Lido from under their noses. What a tale it will be to relate
+to a Genoese, when we meet in some port after the war is over; it will
+be enough to make him dance with rage.
+
+"Now, lads," he went on, turning to the men, "stand to your tackle. The
+moment that galley gets out of sight round the point, up with the
+mast."
+
+Ten minutes later the masts were up, stout ropes were lashed round them
+and the stumps, and wedges driven in to tighten the cords to the
+utmost. The rigging was of the simplest description, and before dark
+everything was in readiness for hoisting the sails.
+
+"I don't think they can make us out now," the captain said.
+
+"I don't think they could," Francis agreed; "but we had better wait
+another quarter of an hour. It would be absurd to run any risk after
+everything has turned out so well; but the men can get into the boats
+and tow us out through the channel, then we can hoist the boats on
+board, and by that time it should be nearly dark enough."
+
+"I think there will be a breeze presently," the captain said, "and from
+the right direction. However, the men won't mind working hard for a
+bit. They have had an easy time for the last two days."
+
+The oars were all manned, and the men set to work with hearty goodwill.
+They were delighted at their escape from the island, for they might
+have been there some time before they got a passage back; and still
+more pleased at having tricked the Genoese; and the Lido, heavy laden
+as she was, moved at a steady pace through the water, under the
+impulsion of the oars.
+
+For an hour they rowed parallel with the shore, as, had they made out
+to sea, they might possibly have been seen by one of the galleys,
+returning late from the search for them. At the end of that time the
+captain turned her head from shore. As soon as they got well out from
+under the shelter of the land the breeze made itself felt, and the
+sails were hoisted.
+
+For a time the men kept on rowing, but the breeze increased rapidly,
+and the captain ordered the oars to be laid in. A double allowance of
+wine was served out, and an hour or two spent in song and hilarity;
+then the watch below was sent down, and Francis and Matteo turned into
+their cots.
+
+In the morning the breeze was blowing strong. The sails had been taken
+off the mainmast, but that on the foremast was dragging the Lido
+through the water at a good rate of speed, and before night they were
+off Cape Spartivento. The wind held till next morning, when they were
+abreast of the Gulf of Taranto. Then came a long spell of calms or
+baffling winds, and it was a fortnight before the campaniles of Venice
+were seen rising apparently from the water.
+
+"I have been anxious about you," Signor Polani said when Francis
+arrived. "One of our galleys brought the report that a Genoese fleet
+was cruising on the coast of Sicily, and as, although war had not yet
+been openly declared, both parties were making prizes, I was afraid
+that they might have snapped you up."
+
+"They did snap us up," Francis said smiling. "They caught us in the
+port of Girgenti, and the standard of Genoa waved over the Lido."
+
+"But how can that be," Polani said, "when you have returned in her? For
+she was signalled as approaching the port hours ago. You could hardly
+have persuaded the Genoese by fair words to release a prize that they
+had once taken.
+
+"Eh, captain?"
+
+"No, that is not the Genoese way, nor ours either," the captain said.
+"We did better than that, signor. We recaptured her, and carried her
+off from under their noses."
+
+"You are joking," Polani said, "for they signalled the Lido as
+returning laden, and a laden ship could never get away from state
+galleys, however long her start. A fat pig might as soon try to escape
+from a hunting dog."
+
+"That is so, Messer Polani, and we did not trust to our speed. We
+tricked them famously, sir. At least, when I say we did, Messer
+Francisco here did, for the credit is due solely to him. If it had not
+been for this young gentleman, I and the crew would now have been
+camping out in the forests of Sicily, without the slightest prospect of
+being able to make our way home, and the Lido would now be moored in
+the port of Genoa."
+
+"That is so, Cousin Polani," Matteo said. "It is to Francisco that we
+owe our escape, and you owe the safety of the Lido and her cargo."
+
+"It was just a happy idea that occurred to me," Francis said, "as it
+would assuredly have occurred to Captain Pesoro, if he had been with
+us, or to anyone else, and after I had first suggested it the captain
+carried out all the arrangements."
+
+"Not at all, Messer Francisco," the captain said obstinately. "I had no
+part or hand in the business, beyond doing what you suggested, and you
+would have got the Lido off just as well if I hadn't been there."
+
+"Well, I will judge for myself when I hear," Polani said. "But, as it
+must be an interesting story, my daughters would like to hear it also.
+So, come into the next room and tell the tale, and I will order up a
+flagon of Cyprus wine to moisten your throats."
+
+"First of all," the captain began, after the girls had greeted Francis,
+and all had taken their seats, "I must tell how the Lido was captured."
+
+And he then related how the Genoese fleet had suddenly appeared before
+them, and how, seeing the impossibility of escape, he had sent all on
+shore with the exception of four sailors, and how he had, with them,
+been released and sent on shore.
+
+"That's the Genoese all over," Polani said. "If they could have sent
+forty prisoners home they would have done so; but the fact that there
+were only five on board, when they took the vessel, would seem to them
+to detract from the credit of the capture."
+
+The captain then told how, fearing that the people of Girgenti might
+give them all up to the Genoese, or that fights might ensue among the
+Genoese sailors who landed, he had marched the crew away out of the
+town.
+
+"Now, captain," Matteo broke in, "I will tell the next bit, because I
+was with Francis when he found a hiding place."
+
+He then related how Francis had seen the ledge of rocks in the
+distance, and had dragged him along the cliff two miles to observe them
+more closely; and how he had come to the conclusion that his companion
+had lost his senses. Then he described the exact position, and the
+clearness of the water, and how he had been convinced that there was
+not depth to float a rowboat inside the rocks; and how they had gone
+down, swum out, fathomed the water, and then returned to the wood.
+
+The captain then took up the tale again, and completed it to the end.
+
+"There is no doubt you were right, captain," Polani said, "and that it
+is entirely Francisco's quickness of observation, readiness of plan,
+and determination to see if his ideas could be carried into effect,
+which saved the Lido. That he possessed these qualities is not new to
+me, for I have already greatly benefited by them. If he had not been
+born a peaceful trader, he would have made a great captain some day;
+but the qualities which would distinguish a man in war are also useful
+in peace, and I think it fully as honourable to be a successful
+merchant, as a successful soldier.
+
+"Henceforth, Francisco, I shall no longer consider you as in leading
+strings, and shall feel that I can confide important business to you,
+young as you are."
+
+The next voyage that Francis made was to Jaffa, and this was
+accomplished without adventure. On his return, he found that Venice was
+in a state of excitement--war had at last been declared, and every
+effort was being made to fit out a fleet which could cope with that of
+Genoa.
+
+The command was entrusted to Vettore Pisani, who was invested in the
+church of Saint Mark with the supreme command of the fleet by the doge
+himself, who handed to the admiral the great banner of Venice, with the
+words:
+
+"You are destined by God to defend with your valour this republic, and
+to retaliate upon those who have dared to insult her and to rob her of
+that security which she owes to the virtue of her ancestors. Wherefore,
+we confide to you this victorious and great standard, which it will be
+your duty to restore to us unsullied and triumphant."
+
+Carlo Zeno, a noble, who had gained a high reputation in various
+capacities, was appointed commissioner and captain general of
+Negropont. The three first divisions of those inscribed in the
+register, as liable to serve in the navy, were called out, and on the
+24th of April Pisani sailed from Venice with fourteen war galleys.
+
+Pisani enjoyed the highest popularity among the people of Venice. His
+manner was that of a bluff hearty sailor. He was always ready to share
+in the hardships of his men, and to set them an example of good temper
+and cheerfulness, as well as of bravery. He was quick tempered, and
+when in a passion cared nothing whom he struck.
+
+When governor of Candia, he had got into a serious scrape, by striking
+Pietro Cornaro, an officer of the republic, from whom he happened to
+differ on some point of routine. He was a relative of the Doge Andrea
+Contarini, and had been employed not only as an officer in the navy,
+but as a military engineer and as a diplomatist, and in each capacity
+had shown equal talent.
+
+He was connected with the Polani family, and was at their house several
+times before he sailed. Here he heard from his kinsman an account of
+the manner in which Francisco had saved the Bonito from being rammed by
+the pirates, and how he had succeeded in getting the Lido out of the
+hands of the Genoese; and he was so much pleased that he offered to
+take him with him in his galley, but Polani advised Francis not to
+accept the offer.
+
+"It is quite true," he said, "that most of our noble families are, like
+myself, engaged in commerce; and that one day they are trading as
+merchants and the next fighting under the state; but at present, if you
+take my advice, you will stick to the peaceful side of the profession;
+especially as, being an Englishman, you are in no way called upon to
+serve the state. In another five or six years, if we are then at war,
+it will be different. I have frequently offered galleys for the service
+of the state, and you can then take the command of one, and will, I
+have no doubt, distinguish yourself; but were you to enter now, you
+might remain in the service of the state for some years, and would be
+losing your time as a merchant.
+
+"There are countries in which, when a man once takes up the profession
+of arms, he remains a soldier all his life, and may not only achieve
+honour but wealth and wide possessions. It is not so in Venice. Here we
+are all citizens as well as all soldiers if need be. We fight for the
+state while a war lasts, and then return to our peaceful avocations.
+Even my kinsman, Pisani, may be admiral of the fleet today, and a week
+hence may be a private citizen. Therefore, my lad, I think it would be
+very foolish of you to give up commerce at present to take military
+service."
+
+"I quite agree with you, signor," Francis said, although, in truth, for
+a moment he had felt a strong mind to accept the offer of Pisani. "I am
+just beginning to learn a little of trade, and desire nothing better
+than to be a successful merchant; though I confess that I should like
+to take part in such a glorious sea fight as that which is likely to
+take place soon."
+
+"Yes, and perhaps be killed in the first engagement, Francis, for
+neither skill nor bravery avail against a bolt from a Genoese crossbow.
+No, my lad, be content with trade, especially since you have seen
+already that even the life of a trader has plenty of incident and
+excitement. What with storms, what with pirates, what with the enemies
+of the state and the treachery of the native peoples with whom we
+trade, there is no lack of adventure in the life of a Venetian
+merchant."
+
+Francis felt that this was true, and that he had in the past six months
+had fully his share in adventures. His stay on shore this time extended
+over a month, and it was not until three weeks after Pisani sailed that
+he again set out.
+
+The notice was a short one. Polani had been sent for to attend the
+council early in the morning, and on his return he said to Francis:
+
+"You must go down to the port at once, Francis. News has been received
+from Pisani that he has sailed almost into the port of Genoa, without
+finding the fleet of Fieschi. The Genoese have been in a terrible state
+of panic. The Lord of Fiesole, who is our ally, is menacing the city by
+land; the Stella Company of Condottieri, which is in our pay, is also
+marching against them; and the news that Pisani was close at hand seems
+to have frightened them out of their senses. Their first step, as
+usual, has been to depose their doge and choose another.
+
+"However, that is not the point. Pisani has written asking that some
+ships with provisions and stores shall be sent out to him. They are to
+go through the Straits of Messina and up the coast of Italy until he
+meets them. His force is far too small for him to think of making an
+attack upon Genoa. He will wait in the neighbourhood of the city for a
+short time in hopes of Fieschi's fleet returning. If it does not do so
+he will come down the coast searching for it, and as he does not wish
+to put in port, he desires the stores mentioned to be sent out to him.
+
+"I have placed the Bonito at their service, and have promised that she
+shall be ready to sail tomorrow morning, if they will send the stores
+on board today. Three other merchants placed ships at their disposal,
+but these may not sail for a day or two. They are particularly anxious
+that the Bonito shall start at once, as, in addition to provisions, she
+will carry a store of javelins, arrows, and other missiles of which
+there was not a sufficiency in the arsenal when Pisani sailed.
+
+"You will have a strong party on board, as speed is required, and the
+oars must be kept going until you join the fleet. Therefore I shall
+place the crew of the Lido on board as well as the Bonito's own
+complement, and this will bring the number up to a hundred men. The
+captain has had an accident, and will not be able to go in charge,
+therefore the Lido's captain will command. This time I shall appoint
+you specifically second in command, as well as my representative. Now
+get off on board as quickly as you can, for there is enough to keep you
+at work, till tomorrow morning, to get everything in readiness for a
+start. You had best run in and say goodbye to my daughters, as it may
+be that you will not find time to return before sailing. You can send
+your boy ashore for what things you require. Matteo will accompany
+you."
+
+A few minutes later, Francis was on his way to the port, leaving
+Giuseppi to charter a gondola and follow with his trunks. As Polani had
+said, he was occupied without intermission until the time for sailing
+next morning. The barges of the state kept coming alongside with stores
+and provisions from the arsenal; while other boats brought out the
+ship's stores; and Francis had to take a note of all that came on
+board.
+
+The captain superintended the setting up of the rigging, and the
+getting of the ship into working order; while the under officers saw to
+the hoisting in and storing of the cargo. Gangs of men were at work
+tarring the sides of the ship, for she had only two days before
+returned from a trip to Spain; and a number of sailors were unloading
+the cargo from one hatchway, while her fresh freight was being taken in
+at the other.
+
+It seemed well nigh impossible that she could be ready to sail at the
+hour named, but everyone worked with a will, and by daybreak things
+were almost in order. Polani himself came down to the port as soon as
+it was light, and expressed satisfaction at the work which had been
+done; and half an hour afterwards the anchor was weighed.
+
+Just as the sails had been hoisted, Matteo arrived.
+
+"You are only just in time, Matteo," Polani said. "Why did you not come
+off yesterday and help?"
+
+"I was out," Matteo said, "when your message came, and only returned
+just in time to go to the entertainment at the ducal palace. I knew I
+could be of no use on board while they were only getting in the cargo."
+
+"You will never be of any use on board, Matteo, if you go to
+entertainments when there's work to be done. You could have taken the
+marks on the bales as they came on board, just as well as another. I
+suppose you thought that the dirt and dust wouldn't suit a fine
+gentleman like you! Another time, unless you come on board when sent
+for, and make yourself as useful as you can, while the ship is fitting
+out and loading, you will not sail in her. One part of the duty is just
+as important as the other, and seamanship does not consist solely in
+strolling up and down the deck, and watching a vessel sail for her
+destination."
+
+Matteo was abashed at the reproach, but soon recovered his usual
+spirits after Polani had left, when the vessel was under way.
+
+"My cousin was rather in a sharp mood this morning," he said with a
+laugh to Francis; "but really I did not think I could be of any good,
+and the entertainment was a grand one. Everyone was there, and I should
+have been very sorry to have missed it."
+
+"Everyone to his taste, Matteo. For my part, I would very much rather
+have been at work here all night watching the cargo got in and checking
+it off, than have been standing about doing nothing in the palace."
+
+"Doing nothing!" Matteo repeated indignantly. "Why, I was talking to
+someone the whole time I was there."
+
+"Talking about what, Matteo?"
+
+"The heat, and the music, and the costumes, and the last bit of scandal
+at the Piazza."
+
+"I don't call that talk. I call it chatter. And now, Matteo, I shall
+leave you to your own devices, for I am going to turn in and get a
+sleep for a few hours."
+
+"You look as if you wanted it," Matteo said; "but I think that you
+stand in even more need of a wash. You are grimy with dust. It is just
+as well that my cousin Giulia did not come on board with her father
+this morning, for the sight of your face would have given her quite a
+shock, and would have dissipated any illusions she may have had that
+you were a good-looking fellow."
+
+Francis went off to his cabin with a laugh, and took Matteo's advice as
+to the wash before he turned in. In a few minutes he was asleep, and
+did not wake until Giuseppi came to say that the midday meal was just
+ready.
+
+The Bonito made a rapid voyage. The winds were light, and for the most
+part favourable, and the twenty-four oars were kept going night and
+day, the men relieving each other every two hours, so that they had six
+hours' rest between the spells of rowing.
+
+When they rounded the southern point of Italy a sharp lookout was kept
+for the fleet of Fieschi, but they passed through the straits without
+catching sight of a single vessel carrying the Genoese flag. The most
+vigilant watch was now kept for Pisani's galleys, and they always
+anchored at the close of day, lest they should pass him in the dark.
+
+Occasionally they overhauled a fishing boat, and endeavoured to obtain
+news of the two squadrons; but beyond the fact that Fieschi had been
+seen steering north some days before, and that no signs had been seen
+of Pisani's returning fleet, they could learn nothing.
+
+
+
+Chapter 11: The Battle Of Antium.
+
+
+"We are running very far north," the captain said on the 29th of May.
+"We are near Antium now, and are getting into what we may call Genoese
+waters. If anything has occurred to prevent Pisani carrying out his
+intention of sailing back along this coast, or if he has passed us on
+the way up, our position would be a hazardous one, for as soon as he
+has rowed away the Genoese galleys will be on the move again, and even
+if we do not fall in with Fieschi, we may be snapped up by one of their
+cruisers."
+
+"It is rather risky, captain," Francis agreed; "but our orders are
+distinct. We were to sail north till we met Pisani, and we must do so
+till we are within sight of the walls of Genoa. If we then see he is
+not lying off the port, we shall put about and make our way back
+again."
+
+"Yes, if they give us the chance, Messer Francisco; but long before we
+are sufficiently near to Genoa to make out whether Pisani is lying off
+the port, they will see us from the hills, and will send off a galley
+to bring us in. However, we must take our chance, and if we get into a
+scrape I shall look to you confidently to get us out again."
+
+"I should advise you not to count on that," Francis said, laughing. "It
+is not always one gets such a lucky combination of circumstances as we
+did at Girgenti."
+
+At last, they obtained news from a fishing boat that Fieschi's fleet
+had passed, going northward, on the previous day, and was now lying in
+the bay of Antium. As Antium lay but a few miles north, they held a
+consultation as to the best method to pursue. If they sailed on there
+was a risk of capture; but that risk did not appear to be very great.
+The Genoese admiral would not expect to find a Venetian merchant ship
+so near to Genoa, and they might be able to pass without being
+interfered with. On the other hand, news might possibly have come of
+the departure of store ships from Venice for Pisani's fleet, and in
+that case a strict lookout would certainly be kept, and it would be
+necessary to keep so far to sea as to be out of sight of the Genoese;
+but in that case there would be a risk of their missing Pisani's fleet
+on the way down.
+
+"I think," the captain said, after a long debate, "that we had better
+anchor here close under the shore tonight. If I am not mistaken, we
+shall have a gale in the morning. I do not like the look of the sky.
+Tomorrow we shall see how the weather is, and can then come to a
+decision."
+
+By morning, as the captain had predicted, the wind was blowing
+strongly, and a heavy sea was running, and it was agreed to keep along
+under the lee of the shore until they could obtain a view of the Bay of
+Antium, and see if the fleet of Fieschi was still there. If so, they
+would tack and run back some distance, and make straight out to sea, so
+as to pass along four or five miles from the shore, as it would be
+unlikely in the extreme that the Genoese admiral would send a galley
+out to overhaul a passing ship in such weather.
+
+They sailed along till they neared the slight depression known as the
+Bay of Antium, and then bore farther out to sea. Suddenly a fleet was
+seen running down the coast at some distance away.
+
+"'Bout ship," the captain cried. "The Genoese have been cruising
+further north, and are coming down the coast. In such weather as this,
+the Bonito ought to be able to get away from them."
+
+"It may be Pisani's fleet," Francis said, as the ship was put round.
+
+"It is possible," the captain agreed; "but we cannot run the risk of
+stopping until we make inquiries."
+
+"No, captain; but, at least, if we run a mile or so out to sea, we
+should be able to see round the point, and discover whether Fieschi's
+galleys are there."
+
+The captain assented. The vessel's head was turned from the land. In
+ten minutes there was a joyous shout on board the Bonito, for the
+Genoese fleet was seen lying in the bay. The distant fleet must then
+form that of Pisani.
+
+"See!" Francis exclaimed. "The Genoese have just caught sight of them,
+and are hoisting sail. They are either going to meet them or to run
+away. Our vessels are the most numerous; but no, there is not much
+difference. Pisani has fourteen ships, but some must be lagging behind,
+or have been lost. How many do you make them out to be, captain?"
+
+"I think there are only nine," the captain answered, "and that is just
+the number of the Genoese."
+
+"Then Fieschi will fight, if he is not a coward," Matteo said; "but, in
+that case, why are they making out to sea?"
+
+"Fieschi may not care to be attacked at anchor," the captain replied.
+"That would give all the advantage to us. Besides, if they were beaten
+there would be but little chance of any of them escaping. No, he is
+right to make out to sea, but blowing as it is, it will be next to
+impossible for him to fight there. Two vessels could hardly get
+alongside to board in such a sea as this. I expect Fieschi thinks that
+we shall never attack him in such a storm; but Pisani would fight if it
+were a hurricane."
+
+It did indeed seem almost impossible to fight in such a sea. The Bonito
+was rolling, gunwale under. Her sail had been reduced to its smallest
+proportions, and yet, when the squalls struck her she was laid
+completely over on her side. But the rival admirals were too anxious to
+fight to be deterred by the difficulty, and both were bent upon
+bringing on an action at once.
+
+"I would give anything to be on board one of our galleys," Matteo said.
+"It is horrible standing here doing nothing, when such a fight as this
+is going to begin."
+
+"Cannot we edge down towards them, captain?" Francis asked. "I do not
+mean that we should take part in the fight, for we have but a hundred
+men, and the galleys must each carry at least three times as many.
+Still, we might be near enough to see something, and perhaps to give
+succour to any disabled ship that drops out of the fight."
+
+"I will do so if you like, Messer Francisco," the captain said. "If you
+will take the responsibility. But if our side gets the worst of it, you
+must remember that the Bonito may be captured."
+
+"I don't think there's much chance of Pisani being beaten by an enemy
+no stronger than himself," Francis said; "and even if they should be
+victorious, the Genoese will certainly have enough on their hands, with
+repairing damages and securing prisoners, to think of setting off in
+chase of a ship like ours."
+
+"That is true enough," the captain agreed, for he was indeed as anxious
+as Francis and Matteo to witness the struggle.
+
+The vessels on both sides were under canvas, for it was impossible to
+row in such a sea. As soon as they approached each other, both fleets
+broke up, and the vessels each singling an opponent out, the combat
+began. It was a singular one, and differed widely from ordinary sea
+fights of the time, in which the combatants always tried to grapple
+with their enemies and carry them by boarding. This was almost
+impossible now, for it seemed that the vessels would be dashed in
+pieces like eggshells were they to strike each other. Clouds of
+missiles were poured from one to the other. The archers plied their
+bows. Great machines hurled javelins and big stones, and the crash of
+the blows of the latter, against the sides of the ships, sounded even
+above the noise of the wind and waves, and the shouting of the
+combatants. As for the cannon with which all the galleys were armed,
+they were far too cumbrous and unmanageable to be worked in such
+weather. Sometimes one vessel, lifted on the crest of a wave while its
+opponent lay in a hollow, swept its decks with terrible effect; while a
+few seconds later the advantage was on the other side.
+
+For a long time, neither party seemed to gain any advantage. Great
+numbers were killed on both sides, but victory did not incline either
+way, until the mast of one of the Venetian galleys was struck by a
+heavy stone and went over the side. She at once fell out of the line of
+the battle, her opponent keeping close to her, pouring in volumes of
+missiles, while the sea, taking her on the broad side, washed numbers
+of her crew overboard. Her opponent, seeing that she was altogether
+helpless, left her to be taken possession of afterwards, and made for
+Pisani's galley, which was distinguished by its flag at the masthead,
+and was maintaining a desperate conflict with the galley of Fieschi.
+
+The admiral's ship was now swept with missiles from both sides, and
+when his adversaries saw that his crew was greatly weakened, they
+prepared to close, in spite of the state of the sea. If Pisani himself
+could be captured, there would remain but seven Venetian ships to the
+nine Genoese, and victory was certain.
+
+The captain of the Bonito had lashed together some heavy spars and
+thrown them overboard, having fastened a strong rope to them, and was
+riding head to the waves by means of this sea anchor, at a distance of
+about half a mile from the conflict. A cry of grief and rage had arisen
+when the crew saw that one of their galleys was disabled, and their
+excitement became intense when they saw the unequal struggle which
+Pisani was maintaining.
+
+"They are preparing to board, captain," Francis said. "We must go to
+the admiral's aid. If his ship is captured, the battle is lost."
+
+"I am ready, Messer Francisco, if you authorize me."
+
+"Certainly I do," Francis said. "The loss or capture of the Bonito is
+as nothing in comparison to the importance of saving Pisani."
+
+The captain gave the order for the hawser to be cut, and the sail
+hoisted. A cheer broke from the crew as they saw what was to be done.
+Their arms had been served out at the beginning of the contest, and
+they now seized them, and gathered in readiness to take part in the
+fight.
+
+The two Genoese galleys had thrown their grapnels and made fast, one on
+each side of Pisani's galley. The bulwarks were stove in and splintered
+as the vessels rolled, and the rigging of the three ships became
+entangled. The Genoese sprang on to the deck of Pisani's galley, with
+shouts of triumph, but they were met by the admiral himself, wielding a
+mighty battleaxe, and the survivors of his crew.
+
+The combat was still raging when the Bonito sailed swiftly up. Her
+sails were lowered as she came alongside, and she was lashed to one of
+the galleys. But this manoeuvre was not performed without loss. As she
+approached, with the Venetian flag flying at her masthead, the Genoese
+archers on the poop of the galley, who had hitherto been pouring their
+missiles among Pisani's men, turned round and opened fire upon this new
+foe. Their arrows did far more execution here than they had done among
+the armour clad soldiers of the state. The captain fell dead with an
+arrow which struck him full in the throat, and ten or twelve of the
+sailors fell on the deck beside him.
+
+"Pour in one volley," Francis shouted; "then throw down your bows, and
+take to your axes and follow me."
+
+The instant the vessel was lashed, Francis sprang on to the deck of the
+galley. Matteo was by his side, Giuseppi just behind, and the whole
+crew followed. Climbing first upon the poop, they fell upon the
+archers, who, after a short struggle, were cut down; then, descending
+again to the waist of the galley, they leaped on to the deck of
+Pisani's ship, and fell upon the rear of the Genoese.
+
+These were taken completely by surprise. Absorbed in the struggle in
+which they were engaged, they had noticed neither the approach of the
+Bonito, nor the struggle on board their own galley, and supposed that
+another of the Venetian warships had come up to the assistance of their
+admiral.
+
+Taken then by surprise, and finding themselves thus between two bands
+of foes, they fought irresolutely, and the crew of the Bonito, with
+their heavy axes, cut down numbers of them, and fighting their way
+through the mass, joined the diminished force of Pisani.
+
+The admiral shouted the battle cry of "Saint Mark!" His followers, who
+had begun to give way to despair, rallied at the arrival of this
+unlooked-for reinforcement, and the whole fell upon the Genoese with
+fury. The latter fought stoutly and steadily now, animated by the voice
+and example of Fieschi himself; but their assurance of victory was
+gone, and they were gradually beaten back to the deck of their
+admiral's ship. Here they made desperate efforts to cut the lashings
+and free the vessel; but the yards had got interlocked and the rigging
+entangled, and the Venetians sprang on to the deck of the ship, and
+renewed the conflict there.
+
+For some time the struggle was doubtful. The Genoese had still the
+advantage in numbers, but they were disheartened at the success, which
+they had deemed certain, having been so suddenly and unexpectedly
+snatched from their grasp.
+
+The presence of Pisani, in itself, doubled the strength of the
+Venetians. He was the most popular of their commanders, and each strove
+to imitate the example which he set them.
+
+After ten minutes' hard fighting, the result was no longer doubtful.
+Many of the Genoese ran below. Others threw down their arms, and their
+admiral, at last, seeing further resistance was hopeless, lowered his
+sword and surrendered.
+
+No sooner had resistance ceased than Pisani turned to Francis, who had
+been fighting by his side:
+
+"I thank you, in the name of myself and the republic," he said. "Where
+you have sprung from, or how you came here, I know not. You seemed to
+me to have fallen from heaven to our assistance, just at the moment
+when all was lost. Who are you? I seem to know your face, though I
+cannot recall where I have seen it."
+
+"I am Francis Hammond, Messer Pisani. I had the honour of seeing you at
+the house of my patron, Signor Polani, and you were good enough to
+offer to take me with you to sea."
+
+"Oh, I remember now!" Pisani said. "But how came you here?"
+
+"I came in the Bonito, one of Polani's ships. She is lying outside the
+farther of the Venetian galleys. We bring from Venice some of the
+stores for which you sent. We were lying off, watching the battle,
+until we saw that you were sore beset and in need of help, and could
+then no longer remain inactive. Our captain was killed by an arrow as
+we ranged up alongside of the galley, and I am now in command. This is
+my friend, Matteo Giustiniani, a volunteer on board the Bonito."
+
+"I remember you, Master Matteo," Pisani said, as he shook him by the
+hand. "I have seen you often at your father's house. I shall have to
+give him a good account of you, for I saw you fighting bravely.
+
+"But we will talk more of this afterwards. We must set to work to
+separate the galleys, or we shall have them grinding each other to
+pieces. Then we must hasten to the assistance of our friends."
+
+The Genoese prisoners were all fastened below, and the Venetians then
+set to work to cut the lashings and free the rigging of the ships.
+Francis kept only twenty men on board the Bonito. The remainder were
+distributed between the two captured Genoese galleys, and the admiral
+turned his attention to the battle.
+
+But it was already almost over. The sight of the Venetian flag, at the
+mastheads of the admiral's ship and the other galley, struck dismay
+into the Genoese. Five of their ships immediately hoisted all canvas
+and made off, while the other two, surrounded by the Venetian galleys,
+hauled down their flags.
+
+The battle had been a sanguinary one, and but eight hundred men were
+found alive on board the four galleys captured. The fight is known in
+history as the battle of Porto d'Anzo. The struggle had lasted nearly
+the whole day, and it was growing dark when the Venetian fleet, with
+their prizes, anchored under shelter of the land.
+
+All night long the work of attending upon the wounded went on, and it
+was daybreak before the wearied crews lay down for repose. In the
+afternoon, Pisani hoisted a signal for the captains of the galleys to
+come on board; and in their presence he formally thanked Francis, in
+the name of the republic, for the aid he had afforded him at the most
+critical moment. Had it not been for that aid, he acknowledged that he
+and his crew must have succumbed, and the victory would assuredly have
+fallen to the Genoese.
+
+After the meeting was over he took Francis into his cabin, and again
+offered him a post in his own ship.
+
+"Were your merit properly rewarded," he said, "I would appoint you at
+once to the command of a galley; but to do so would do you no service,
+for it would excite against you the jealousy of all the young nobles in
+the fleet. Besides, you are so young, that although the council at home
+cannot but acknowledge the vastness of the service you have rendered,
+they might make your age an excuse for refusing to confirm the
+appointment; but if you like to come as my third officer, I can promise
+you that you shall have rapid promotion, and speedily be in command of
+a galley. We Venetians have no prejudice against foreigners. They hold
+very high commands, and, indeed, our armies in the field are frequently
+commanded by foreign captains."
+
+Francis thanked the admiral heartily for his offer, but said that his
+father's wishes, and his own, led him to adopt the life of a merchant,
+and that, under the patronage of Messer Polani, his prospects were so
+good that he would not exchange them, even for a command under the
+state of Venice.
+
+"You are quite right, lad," the admiral said. "All governments are
+ungrateful, and republics most of all. Where all are supposed to be
+equal, there is ever envy and jealousy against one who rises above the
+rest. The multitude is fickle and easily led; and the first change of
+fortune, however slight, is seized upon by enemies as a cause of
+complaint, and the popular hero of today may be an exile tomorrow. Like
+enough I shall see the inside of a Venetian prison some day."
+
+"Impossible, signor!" Francis exclaimed. "The people would tear to
+pieces anyone who ventured to malign you."
+
+"Just at present, my lad; just at present. But I know my countrymen.
+They are not as light hearted and fickle as those of Genoa; but they
+are easily led, and will shout 'Abasso!' as easily as 'Viva!' Time will
+show. I was within an ace of being defeated today; and you may not be
+close at hand to come to my rescue next time. And now to business.
+
+"Tomorrow morning I will set the crews to get out your stores, and
+distribute them as required, and will place four hundred prisoners in
+your hold, and you shall carry them to Venice with my despatches
+announcing the victory. The other four hundred Genoese I shall send, in
+the galley that was dismasted yesterday, to Candia, to be imprisoned
+there. I shall send prize crews home in the galleys we have captured;
+and as soon as they are refitted and manned, and rejoin me, I shall
+sail in search of Doria and his fleet. I shall first cruise up the
+Adriatic, in case he may have gone that way to threaten Venice, and I
+can the more easily receive such reinforcements as may have been
+prepared for me."
+
+The following day was spent in unloading the vessel. This was
+accomplished by nightfall. The prisoners were then put on board.
+Francis at once ordered sail to be set, and the Bonito was started on
+her homeward voyage.
+
+As soon as the Bonito was signalled in sight, Signor Polani went down
+to the port to meet her, to ascertain where she had fallen in with the
+fleet, for there was great anxiety in Venice, as no news had been
+received from Pisani for more than ten days. The vessel had just passed
+through the entrance between the islands, when the gondola, with her
+owner, was seen approaching. Francis went to the gangway to receive
+him.
+
+"Why, what has happened, Francisco?" Polani asked, as the boat neared
+the side of the ship. "Half your bulwark is carried away, and the whole
+side of the ship is scraped and scored. She looks as if she had been
+rubbing against a rock."
+
+"Not quite so bad as that, Messer Polani. She has been grinding against
+a Genoese galley."
+
+"Against a Genoese galley!" the merchant repeated in surprise, stopping
+in his passage up the rope ladder, which had been lowered for him.
+"Why, how is that? But never mind that now. First tell me what is the
+news from the fleet?"
+
+"There is great news," Francis replied. "The admiral fell in with
+Fieschi off Antium. There were nine ships on each side, and the battle
+took place in a storm. We were victorious, and captured four of the
+Genoese galleys, with Fieschi himself and eight hundred prisoners. The
+rest fled. Fieschi is now in my cabin, and four hundred prisoners in
+the hold."
+
+"This is indeed great news," the merchant said, "and will be an immense
+relief to Venice. We were getting very anxious, for had Pisani been
+defeated, there was nothing to prevent the Genoese ravaging our coasts,
+and even assailing Venice itself. But where is the captain?"
+
+"I regret to say, sir, that he has been killed, as well as twenty-seven
+of the sailors, and many of the others are more or less severely
+wounded. I am the bearer of despatches from the admiral to the
+council."
+
+"Then get into my gondola, and come along at once," Polani said. "I
+deeply regret the death of the captain and sailors. You shall tell me
+all about it as we come along. We must not delay a moment in carrying
+this great news ashore. Have you got the despatches?"
+
+"Yes, signor. I put them into my doublet when I saw you approaching,
+thinking that you would probably wish me to take them on shore at
+once."
+
+"And now tell me all about the battle," the merchant said as soon as
+they had taken their seats in the gondola. "You say there were nine
+ships on either side. Pisani sailed away with fourteen. Has he lost the
+remainder?"
+
+"They came up next day," Francis replied. "The fleet was in a port
+north of Antium when the news came that Fieschi's fleet was there. Five
+of the galleys had been dismantled, and were under repair, and Pisani
+would not wait for them to be got into fighting order, as he was afraid
+lest Fieschi might weigh anchor and escape if he delayed an hour. He
+learned that the Genoese had nine ships with him, and as he had himself
+this number ready for sea, he sailed at once.
+
+"The weather was stormy, and the sea very high, when he appeared within
+sight of Antium. Fieschi sailed boldly out to meet him. The battle
+lasted all day, for it was next to impossible to board; but in the end,
+as I say, four Genoese galleys surrendered and the rest fled. It was a
+terrible sight; for it seemed at every moment as if the waves would
+hurl the vessels against each other, and so break them into fragments;
+but in no case did such an accident happen."
+
+"Why, you speak as if you saw it, Francisco! Had you joined the admiral
+before the battle took place?"
+
+"No, signor. We arrived near Antium on the evening before the fight,
+and heard of Fieschi's presence there. Therefore we anchored south of
+the promontory. In the morning we put out, intending to sail well out
+to sea and so pass the Genoese, who were not likely, in such weather,
+to put out to question a sail passing in the distance; but as we made
+off from land we saw Pisani's fleet approaching. Then, as Fieschi put
+to sea and we saw that the battle was imminent, there was nothing for
+us to do but to lie to, and wait for the battle to be over, before we
+delivered our stores, having little doubt that Pisani would be
+victorious."
+
+"Then had the battle gone the other way," the merchant said, "the
+Bonito at the present moment would probably be lying a prize in the
+harbour of Genoa!"
+
+"We did not lose sight of the probability of that, signor, but thought
+that, if the Genoese should gain a victory, they would be too busy with
+their prizes and prisoners, if not too crippled, to pursue us, and we
+reckoned that in such weather the Bonito would be able to sail quite as
+fast as any of the Genoese."
+
+"And now, tell me about your affairs, Francisco. Where was it you fell
+in with the Genoese galley, and by what miracle did you get off?"
+
+"It was in the battle, sir. One of the Venetian galleys had dropped out
+of the fight disabled, and its opponent went to the assistance of their
+admiral's ship, which was engaged with Pisani. They attempted to board
+him on both sides, and, seeing that he was in great peril, and that if
+his ship was taken the battle would be as bad as lost, we thought that
+you yourself would approve of our going to his assistance. This we did,
+and engaged one of their galleys; and, as her crew were occupied with
+the admiral, we took them by surprise, and created such a diversion
+that he succeeded, with what assistance we could give him, in capturing
+both his opponents."
+
+"That was done well indeed," Polani said warmly. "It was a risky
+matter, indeed, for you, with sailors unprotected by armour, to enter
+into a combat with the iron-clad soldiers of Genoa.
+
+"And so the captain and twenty-seven of the men were killed! You must
+have had some brisk fighting!"
+
+"The captain, and many of the men, were shot by the Genoese archers as
+we ranged up alongside their vessel. The others were killed in
+hand-to-hand fighting."
+
+"And my cousin Matteo, what has become of him?" Polani asked suddenly.
+"I trust he is not among the killed!"
+
+"He is unharmed," Francis replied. "He fought gallantly, and the
+admiral, the next day, offered to take him on board his own ship, many
+of the volunteers serving on board having been killed. Matteo, of
+course, accepted the offer."
+
+"He would have done better to have stayed on board my ship for another
+two years," Polani said, "and learned his business. He would have made
+a far better sailor than he can ever become on board a state galley;
+but I never expected him to stick to it. He has no earnestness of
+purpose, and is too particular about his dress to care about the rough
+life of a real seaman."
+
+"He has plenty of courage, sir, and I have always found him a staunch
+friend."
+
+"No doubt he has courage," the merchant said. "He comes of good blood
+and could hardly be a coward. I think he is a good-hearted lad, too,
+and will, I have no doubt, make a brave commander of a galley; but more
+than that Matteo is never likely to become."
+
+"Your daughters are well, I hope?" Francis asked.
+
+"Quite well; but you will not find them at home--they sailed three days
+ago, in the Lido, for Corfu. They are going to stay for a time at my
+villa there. That affair of last year shook them both, and I thought it
+better that they should go away for a change--the hot months here are
+trying, and often unhealthy. I will go over myself next week to be with
+them."
+
+They were now approaching the Piazzetta, and Polani shouted out, to
+various acquaintances he met in passing gondolas, the news that Pisani
+had gained a great victory, and had captured the Genoese admiral with
+four of his galleys. The gondolas at once changed their course, and
+accompanied them, to gather further details of the fight. The news was
+shouted to other passing boats, and by the time they reached the steps
+of the Piazzetta, a throng was round them.
+
+Those on shore shouted out the news, and it spread rapidly from mouth
+to mouth. The shopkeepers left their stores, and the loungers on the
+Piazzetta ran up, and it was with difficulty that Polani and Francis
+could make their way, through the shouting and excited crowd, to the
+entrance of the ducal palace.
+
+Polani at once led Francis to the doge, to whom he gave an account of
+the action. Messengers were immediately despatched to some of the
+members of the council, for it was to them that the despatches had to
+be delivered. As soon as a sufficient number to transact the business
+had arrived at the palace, the doge himself led Francis to the council
+chamber.
+
+"Is the news that we heard, shouted in the streets as we came thither,
+true, your highness?" one of the councillors asked as they entered.
+"That our fleet has gained a victory over the Genoese?"
+
+"I am happy to say that it is quite true; but this young gentleman is
+the bearer of despatches from the admiral, and these will doubtless
+give us all particulars."
+
+"Admiral Pisani has chosen a strange messenger for so important a
+despatch," one of the party hostile to the admiral said. "It is usual
+to send despatches of this kind by a trusted officer, and I do not
+think it respectful, either to the council or the republic, to send
+home the news of a victory by a lad like this."
+
+"The admiral apparently chose this young gentleman because, owing to
+the death of his captain, he was in command of the ship which Messer
+Polani placed at the service of the republic, and which was present at
+the fight. The admiral intended, as I hear, to set out at once in
+search of the fleet of Doria, and doubtless did not wish to weaken
+himself by despatching a state galley with the news. But perhaps he may
+explain the matter in his despatches."
+
+Several other councillors had by this time arrived, and the despatches
+were opened. The admiral's account of the engagement was brief, for he
+was fonder of the sword than the pen. He stated that, having obtained
+news that Fieschi's fleet was at anchor under the promontory of Antium,
+he sailed thither with nine ships, these being all that were at the
+moment fit to take to sea; that Fieschi had sailed out to meet him, and
+that an engagement had taken place in the storm, which prevented the
+ships from pursuing their usual tactics, and compelled them to fight
+with missiles at a distance. The despatch then went on:
+
+"We fought all day, and the upshot of it was, we captured four of their
+galleys, the admiral himself, and eight hundred prisoners. Fortunately
+it is unnecessary for me to give your seignory the details of the
+fighting, as these can be furnished you by Messer Francisco Hammond,
+who will hand you these despatches. He was a witness of the action on
+the Bonito, which had that morning arrived at Antium with some of the
+stores you despatched me. I have selected this young gentleman as the
+bearer of these despatches, because it is to him I entirely owe it that
+I am not at the present moment a prisoner in Genoa, and to him the
+republic owes that we yesterday won a victory.
+
+"I was attacked by Fieschi and by another galley, and, in spite of the
+weather, they cast grapnels on to my ship and boarded me. I had already
+lost half of my crew by their missiles, and things were going very
+badly with us, when the Bonito came up to our assistance, and grappled
+with one of the galleys. Her captain was killed, but Messer Hammond--of
+whom Polani has so high an opinion that he had appointed him second in
+command--led his men to my rescue. They boarded the galley and slew
+those who remained on board, and then, crossing on to my ship, fell
+upon the rear of the Genoese who were pressing us backwards. His
+sailors, undefended as they were by armour, fought like demons with
+their axes, and, led by Messer Hammond, cut their way through the enemy
+and joined me.
+
+"This reinforcement gave fresh strength and spirit to my men, who had a
+minute before thought that all was lost. Together we fell upon the
+Genoese, before they could recover from their surprise, beat them back
+into their admiral's ship, and following them there forced them to
+surrender. Messer Hammond fought by my side, and although but a lad in
+years, he showed himself a sturdy man-at-arms, and behaved with a
+coolness and bravery beyond praise. I hereby recommend him to your
+gracious consideration, for assuredly to him it is due that it is I,
+and not Fieschi, who is writing to announce a victory."
+
+A murmur of surprise from the councillors greeted the reading of this
+portion of the letter. When it was concluded, the doge was the first to
+speak.
+
+"You have indeed deserved well of the republic, Messer Hammond, for we
+know that Admiral Pisani is not one to give undue praise, or to
+exaggerate in aught.
+
+"This is news to me, signors, as well as to you, for in his narrative
+to me of the events of the fight, he passed over his own share in it,
+though Messer Polani, who accompanied him, did say that his ship had
+taken some part in the fight, and that the captain and twenty-seven men
+had been killed.
+
+"Now, young sir, as the admiral has referred us to you for a detailed
+narrative of the battle, we will thank you to tell us all you
+witnessed, omitting no detail of the occurrences."
+
+Francis accordingly gave a full account of the action, and gave great
+praise to his crew for the valour with which they had fought against
+the heavy armed Genoese. When he had concluded the doge said:
+
+"We thank you for your narrative, Messer Hammond, as well as for the
+great service you have rendered the state. Will you now leave us, as we
+have much to debate on regarding this and other matters, and to arrange
+for the reinforcements for which, I see by his letter, the admiral
+asks.
+
+"Will you ask Messer Polani to remain in attendance for a while, as we
+wish to consult with him as to ships and other matters? As to yourself,
+we shall ask you to come before us again shortly."
+
+After Francis had left, the council first voted that five ducats should
+be given to every man of the crew of the Bonito, and that the widows of
+those who had been slain should be provided for, at the expense of the
+state. They deferred the question as to the honours which should be
+conferred upon Francis, until they had consulted Polani.
+
+State barges were at once sent off to bring in the prisoners from the
+ship, and preparations made for their accommodation, for Venice always
+treated prisoners taken in war with the greatest kindness, an example
+which Genoa was very far from following.
+
+Then Polani was sent for, and the question of stores and ships gone
+into. Orders were issued for redoubled activity in the arsenal, and it
+was arranged that several ships, belonging to Polani and others, should
+be at once purchased for the service of the state.
+
+Then they asked him for his opinion as to the reward which should be
+given to Francis. Upon the merchant expressing his ignorance of any
+special service his young friend had rendered, the passage from
+Pisani's letter relating to him was read out.
+
+"The lad is as modest as he is brave," the merchant said, "for
+although, of course, he told me that the ship had taken some part in
+the fight, and had done what it could to assist the admiral, in which
+service the captain and twenty-seven men had lost their lives, I had no
+idea of the real nature of the encounter. I feel very proud of the
+service he has rendered the state, for he has rendered me as a private
+individual no less important service, and I regard him as my adopted
+son, and my future partner in my business. Such being the case,
+signors, he needs no gift of money from the state."
+
+"He has not, of course, being still a minor, taken up his papers of
+naturalization as a citizen?" the doge said.
+
+"No, your highness, nor is it his intention to do so. I spoke to him on
+the subject once, and he said that, although he regarded Venice with
+affection, and would at all times do everything in his power for the
+state, he could not renounce his birthplace, as an Englishman, by
+taking an oath of allegiance to another state, and that probably he
+should after a time return to his native country. I pointed out to him
+that, although foreigners were given every facility for trade in
+Venice, it would be a grievous disadvantage to him in the islands, and
+especially with countries such as Egypt, the Turks, and the Eastern
+empire, with whom we had treaties; as, unless he were a Venetian, he
+would be unable to trade with them.
+
+"He fully saw the force of my argument, but persisted in his
+determination. If you ask my opinion, therefore, signors, and you do
+not think the honour too great, I would suggest that the highest and
+most acceptable honour that could be bestowed upon him, would be that
+which you have at various times conferred upon foreign personages of
+distinction, namely, to grant him the freedom of Venice, and inscribe
+his name upon the list of her citizens, without requiring of him the
+renunciation of his own country, or the taking the oath of allegiance."
+
+"The honour is assuredly a great and exceptional one," the doge said,
+"but so is the service that he has rendered. He has converted what
+would have been a defeat into a victory, and has saved Venice from a
+grave peril.
+
+"Will you retire for a few minutes, signor, and we will then announce
+to you the result of our deliberations on the matter."
+
+
+
+Chapter 12: In Mocenigo's Power.
+
+
+It was fully an hour before Polani was recalled to the council chamber.
+He saw at once, by the flushed and angry faces of some of the council,
+that the debate had been a hot one. At this he was not surprised, for
+he knew that the friends and connections of Ruggiero Mocenigo would
+vehemently oppose the suggestion he had made.
+
+The doge announced the decision.
+
+"The council thank you for your suggestion, Signor Polani, and have
+resolved, by a majority, to confer upon Messer Francisco Hammond the
+high honour of placing his name upon the list of the citizens of
+Venice, without requiring from him the oaths of allegiance to the
+state. As such an honour has never before been conferred, save upon
+personages of the highest rank, it will be a proof of the gratitude
+which Venice feels towards one who has done her such distinguished
+service. The decree to that effect will be published tomorrow."
+
+The merchant retired, highly gratified. The honour was a great and
+signal one, and the material advantages considerable. The fact that
+Francis was a foreigner had been the sole obstacle which had presented
+itself to him, in associating him with his business, for it would
+prevent Francis from trading personally with any of the countries in
+which Venetian citizens enjoyed special advantages.
+
+Francis was immensely gratified, when he heard from the merchant of the
+honour to be conferred upon him. It was of all others the reward he
+would have selected, had a free choice been given him, but it was so
+great and unusual an honour, that he could indeed scarcely credit it
+when the merchant told him the result of his interviews with the
+council. The difficulty which his being a foreigner would throw in the
+way of his career as a merchant in Eastern waters, had been frequently
+in his mind, and would, he foresaw, greatly lessen his usefulness, but
+that he should be able to obtain naturalization, without renouncing his
+allegiance to England, he had never even hoped.
+
+"It is a very high honour, doubtless," Polani said, "but no whit higher
+than you deserve. Besides, after all, it costs Venice nothing, and
+money is scarce at present. At any rate, I can congratulate myself as
+well as you, for I foresaw many difficulties in our way. Although the
+ships carrying the Venetian flag could enter the ports of all countries
+trading with us, you would personally be liable to arrest, at any time,
+on being denounced as not being a native of Venice, which you assuredly
+would be by my rivals in trade."
+
+The next day a bulletin was published, giving the substance of Pisani's
+despatch, and announcing that, in token of the gratitude of the
+republic for the great service he had rendered, Messer Hammond would be
+at once granted the freedom of Venice, and his name inserted on the
+list of her citizens.
+
+During these two days the delight of Venice at the news of the victory
+had been extreme. The houses had been decorated with flags, and the
+bells of all the churches had peeled out joyously. Crowds assembled
+round the Polani Palace, and insisted upon Francis making his
+appearance, when they greeted him with tremendous shouts of applause.
+Upon the evening of the second day he said to Polani:
+
+"Have you any ship fit for sea, signor, because if so, I pray you to
+send me away, no matter where. I cannot stand this. Since the decree
+was published, this morning, I have not had a moment's peace, and it is
+too absurd, when I did no more than any sailor on board the ship. If it
+went on, I should very soon be heartily sorry I ever interfered on
+behalf of the admiral."
+
+The merchant smiled.
+
+"I have half promised to take you with me to the reception at the
+Persanis' this evening, and have had a dozen requests of a similar
+nature for every night this week and next."
+
+"Then, if you have no ship ready, signor, I will charter a fishing
+boat, engage a couple of men, and go off for a fortnight. By the end of
+that time something fresh will have happened."
+
+"I can send you off, if you really wish it, Francisco, the first thing
+tomorrow morning. I am despatching a small craft with a message to my
+agent in Corfu, and with letters for my daughters. They will be
+delighted to see you, and indeed, I shall be glad to know that you are
+with them, until I can wind up several affairs which I have in hand,
+and join them myself. She is fast, and you should be at Corfu in
+eight-and-forty hours after sailing."
+
+Francis gladly embraced the offer, and started the next morning. The
+vessel was a small one, designed either to sail or row. Her crew
+consisted of twenty men, who rowed sixteen sweeps when the wind was
+light or unfavourable. She was an open boat, except that she was decked
+at each end, a small cabin being formed aft for the captain, and any
+passengers there might be on board, while the crew stowed themselves in
+the little forecastle.
+
+When the boat was halfway across, a sail was seen approaching, and the
+captain recognized her as one of Polani's vessels.
+
+"In that case," Francis said, "we may as well direct our course so as
+to pass them within hailing distance. When you approach them, hoist the
+Polani flag, and signal to them to lay to."
+
+This was done, and the two craft brought up within thirty yards of each
+other. The captain appeared at the side of the vessel, and doffed his
+cap when he recognized Francis.
+
+"Have you any news from the East?" the latter asked.
+
+"But little, signor. A few Genoese pirates are among the islands, and
+are reported to have made some captures, but I have seen none. There is
+nothing new from Constantinople. No fresh attempt has been made by the
+emperor to recapture Tenedos."
+
+"Did you touch at Corfu on your way back?"
+
+"I left there yesterday, signor. A strange craft has been reported as
+having been seen on the coast. She carries no flag, but from her
+appearance she is judged to be a Moor."
+
+"But we are at peace with the Moors," Francis said, "and it is years
+since they ventured on any depredations, excepting on their own
+waters."
+
+"That is so, signor, and I only tell you what was the report at Corfu.
+She appeared to be a swift craft, rowing a great many oars. Her
+movements certainly seem mysterious, as she has several times appeared
+off the coast. Two vessels which sailed from Cyprus, and were to have
+touched at Corfu, had not arrived there when I left, and they say that
+several others are overdue. I do not say that has anything to do with
+the strange galley, but it is the general opinion in Corfu that it has
+something to do with it, and I am the bearer of letters from the
+governor to the seignory, praying that two or three war ships may at
+once be sent down to the island."
+
+"It looks strange, certainly," Francis said; "but I cannot believe that
+any Moorish pirates would be so daring as to come up into Venetian
+waters."
+
+"I should not have thought so either, signor; but it may be that,
+knowing there is war between Venice and Genoa, and that the state
+galleys of the republics, instead of being scattered over the seas, are
+now collected in fleets, and thinking only of fighting each other, they
+might consider it a good opportunity for picking prizes."
+
+"It is a good opportunity, certainly," Francis said; "but they would
+know that Venice would, sooner or later, reckon with them; and would
+demand a four-fold indemnity for any losses her merchants may have
+suffered.
+
+"However, I will not detain you longer. Will you tell Signor Polani
+that you met us, and that we were making good progress, and hoped to
+reach Corfu some time tomorrow?"
+
+"This is a curious thing about this galley," the captain of the boat
+said to Francis, as the men again dipped their oars into the water, and
+the boat once more proceeded on the way.
+
+"It is much more likely to be a Genoese pirate than a Moor," Francis
+said. "They may have purposely altered their rig a little, in order to
+deceive vessels who may sight them. It is very many years since any
+Moorish craft have been bold enough to commit acts of piracy on this
+side of Sicily. However, we must hope that we shall not fall in with
+her, and if we see anything answering to her description we will give
+it a wide berth. Besides, it is hardly likely they would interfere with
+so small a craft as ours, for they would be sure we should be carrying
+no cargo of any great value."
+
+"Twenty Christian slaves would fetch money among the Moors," the
+captain said. "Let us hope we shall see nothing of them; for we should
+have no chance of resistance against such a craft, and she would go two
+feet to our one."
+
+The next morning Francis was aroused by a hurried summons from the
+captain. Half awake, and wondering what could be the cause of the call,
+for the boat lay motionless on the water, he hurried out from the
+little cabin. Day had just broken, the sky was aglow with ruddy light
+in the east.
+
+"Look there, signor!" the captain said, pointing to the south. "The
+watch made them out a quarter of an hour since, but, thinking nothing
+of it, they did not call me. What do you think of that?"
+
+Two vessels were lying in close proximity to each other, at a distance
+of about two miles from the boat. One of them was a large trader, the
+other was a long galley rigged quite differently to those of either
+Venice or Genoa.
+
+"That is the craft they were speaking of," the captain said. "There is
+no mistaking her. She may be an Egyptian or a Moor, but certainly she
+comes from the African coast."
+
+"Or is got up in African fashion," Francis said. "She may be, as we
+agreed yesterday, a Genoese masquerading in that fashion, in order to
+be able to approach our traders without their suspicions being aroused.
+She looks as if she has made a captive of that vessel. I imagine she
+must have come up to her late yesterday evening, and has been at work
+all night stripping her. I hope she is too busy to attend to us."
+
+The sail had been lowered the instant the captain caught sight of the
+vessels, for there was scarcely enough wind to fill it, and the men
+were now rowing steadily.
+
+"I do not think she could have taken much of her cargo out. She is very
+deep in the water."
+
+"Very deep," Francis agreed. "She seems to me to be deeper than she did
+three minutes ago."
+
+"She is a great deal deeper than when we first caught sight of her,"
+one of the sailors said. "She stood much higher in the water than the
+galley did, and now, if anything, the galley stands highest."
+
+"See!" the captain exclaimed suddenly, "the galley is rowing her oars
+on the port bow, and bringing her head round. She has noticed us, and
+is going to chase us! We have seen too much.
+
+"Row, men--it is for life! If they overtake us it is a question between
+death, and slavery among the Moors."
+
+A sudden exclamation from one of the men caused the captain to glance
+round again at the galley. She was alone now on the water--the trader
+had sunk!
+
+"Do you take the helm, signor," the captain said. "All hands will help
+at the oars."
+
+Some of the oars were double banked, and beneath the strength of the
+twenty men, the boat moved fast through the water. The galley was now
+rowing all her oars, and in full pursuit. For a quarter of an hour not
+a word was spoken. Every man on board was doing his utmost. Francis had
+glanced backwards several times, and at the end of a quarter of an
+hour, he could see that the distance between the boat and her pursuer
+had distinctly lessened.
+
+"Is she gaining on us?" the captain asked, for the cabin in the stern
+hid the galley from the sight of the oarsmen.
+
+"She is gaining," Francis said quietly, "but not rapidly. Row steadily,
+my lads, and do not despair. When they find how slowly they gain, they
+may give up the chase and think us not worth the trouble.
+
+"Jacopo," he said to an old sailor who was rowing in the bow, and who
+already was getting exhausted from the exertion, "do you lay in your
+oar and come aft. I will take your place."
+
+At the end of an hour the galley was little more than a quarter of a
+mile away.
+
+"We had better stop," the captain said. "We have no chance of getting
+away, and the longer the chase the more furious they will be. What do
+you think, signor?"
+
+"I agree with you," Francis replied. "We have done all that we could.
+There is no use in rowing longer."
+
+The oars fell motionless in the water, and a few minutes later the long
+galley came rushing up by their side.
+
+"A fine row you have given us, you dogs!" a man shouted angrily as she
+came alongside. "If you haven't something on board that will pay us for
+the chase we have had, it will be the worse for you. What boat is
+that?"
+
+"It is the Naxos, and belongs to Messer Polani of Venice. We are bound
+to Corfu, and bear letters from the padrone to his agent there. We have
+no cargo on board."
+
+"The letters, perhaps, may be worth more than any cargo such a boat
+would carry. So come on board, and let us see what the excellent Polani
+says to his agent. Now, make haste all of you, or it will be the worse
+for you."
+
+It was useless hesitating. The captain, Francis, and the crew stepped
+on board the galley.
+
+"Just look round her," the captain said to one of his sailors. "If
+there is anything worth taking, take it, and then knock a hole in her
+bottom with your axe."
+
+Francis, as he stepped on board the galley, looked round at the crew.
+They were not Genoese, as he had expected, but a mixture of ruffians
+from all the ports in the Mediterranean, as he saw at once by their
+costumes. Some were Greeks from the islands, some Smyrniots, Moors, and
+Spaniards; but the Moors predominated, nearly half the crew belonging
+to that race.
+
+Then he looked at the captain, who was eagerly perusing the documents
+the captain had handed him. As his eye fell upon him, Francis started,
+for he recognized at once the man whose designs he had twice thwarted,
+Ruggiero Mocenigo, and felt that he was in deadly peril.
+
+After reading the merchant's communication to his agent, Ruggiero
+opened the letter addressed to Maria. He had read but a few lines when
+he suddenly looked up, and then, with an expression of savage pleasure
+in his face, stepped up to Francis.
+
+"So, Messer Hammond, the good Polani sends you to stay for a while with
+his daughters! Truly, when I set out in chase this morning of that
+wretched rowboat, I little deemed that she carried a prize that I
+valued more than a loaded caravel! It is to you I owe it that I am an
+exile, instead of being the honoured son-in-law of the wealthy Polani.
+It was your accursed interference that brought all my misfortunes upon
+me; but thank Heaven my vengeance has come at last!
+
+"Take them all below," he said, turning to his men. "Put the heaviest
+irons you have got on this fellow, and fasten them with staples into
+the deck.
+
+"You thought I was going to hang you, or throw you overboard," he went
+on, turning to Francis. "Do not flatter yourself that your death will
+be so easy a one--you shall suffer a thousand torments before you die!"
+
+Francis had not spoken a word since Ruggiero first turned to him, but
+had stood with a tranquil and almost contemptuous expression upon his
+face; but every nerve and muscle of his body were strained, and in
+readiness to spring into action. He had expected that Ruggiero would at
+once attack him, and was determined to leap upon him, and to sell his
+life as dearly as possible.
+
+The sailors seized Francis and his companions, and thrust them down
+into the hold, which was already crowded with upwards of a hundred
+captives. He was chained with heavy manacles. In obedience to
+Ruggiero's orders, staples were driven through the links of his chain
+deep into the deck, so that he was forced to remain in a sitting or
+lying posture. The captain of the Naxos came and sat beside him.
+
+"Who is this pirate captain, Messer Francisco, who thus knows and has
+an enmity against you? By his speech he is surely a Venetian. And yet,
+how comes a Venetian in command of a pirate?"
+
+"That man is Ruggiero Mocenigo--the same who twice attempted to carry
+off Messer Polani's daughters. The second time he succeeded, and would
+have been tried for the offence by the state had he not, aided by a
+band of Paduans, escaped from the keeping of his guard."
+
+"Of course I heard of it, signor. I was away at sea at the time, but I
+heard how you came up at the moment when the padrone's gondoliers had
+been overcome, and rescued his daughters. And this is that villain
+Mocenigo, a disgrace to his name and family!"
+
+"Remember the name, captain, and tell it to each of your men, so that
+if they ever escape from this slavery, into which, no doubt, he intends
+to sell you, they may tell it in Venice that Ruggiero Mocenigo is a
+pirate, and an ally of the Moors. As for me, there is, I think, but
+small chance of escape; but at any rate, if you ever reach Venice, you
+will be able to tell the padrone how it was that we never arrived at
+Corfu, and how I fell into the hands of his old enemy. Still, I do not
+despair that I may carry the message myself. There is many a slip
+between the cup and the lip, and Mocenigo may have cause, yet, to
+regret that he did not make an end of me as soon as he got me into his
+hands."
+
+"It may be so," the captain said, "and indeed I cannot think that so
+brave a young gentleman is destined to die, miserably, at the hands of
+such a scoundrel as this man has shown himself to be. As for death, did
+it come but speedily and sharply, I would far sooner die than live a
+Moorish slave. Santa Maria, how they will wonder at home, when the days
+go on, and the Naxos does not return, and how at last they will give up
+all hope, thinking that she has gone down in a sudden squall, and never
+dreaming that we are sold as slaves to the Moors by a countryman!"
+
+"Keep up your heart, captain. Be sure that when the war with Genoa is
+over, Venice will take the matter in hand. As you know, a vessel has
+already carried tidings thither of the depredation of a Moorish
+cruiser, and she will take vengeance on the Moors, and may even force
+them to liberate the captives they have taken; and besides, you may be
+sure that the padrone, when he hears of the Moorish galley, and finds
+we never reached Corfu although the weather continued fine, will guess
+that we have fallen into her hands, and will never rest till he finds
+where we have been taken, and will ransom those who survive at whatever
+price they may put upon them."
+
+"He will do his best, I know. He is a good master to serve. But once a
+prisoner among the Moors, the hope of one's ever being heard of again
+is slight. Sometimes, of course, men have been ransomed; but most, as I
+have heard, can never be found by their friends, however ready they may
+be to pay any ransom that might be asked. It just depends whether they
+are sold to a Moor living in a seaport or not. If they are, there would
+be no great difficulty in hearing of them, but if they are sold into
+the interior, no inquiries are ever likely to discover them."
+
+"You must hope for the best," Francis said. "Chances of escape may
+occur, and I have heard that Christian captives, who have been
+released, say that the Moors are for the most part kind masters."
+
+"I have heard so, too," the captain said; "and anyhow, I would rather
+be a Moorish slave than lie in a Genoese dungeon. The Genoese are not
+like us. When we take prisoners we treat them fairly and honourably,
+while they treat their prisoners worse than dogs. I wish I could do
+something for you, Messer Francisco. Your case is a deal worse than
+ours.
+
+"Listen, they are quarrelling up on deck!"
+
+There was indeed a sound of men in hot dispute, a trampling of feet, a
+clash of steel, and the sound of bodies falling.
+
+"It is not possible that one of our cruisers can have come up, and is
+boarding the pirate," the captain said, "for no sail was in sight when
+we were brought here. I looked round the last thing before I left the
+deck. What can they be fighting about?"
+
+"Likely enough, as to their course. They have probably, from what we
+heard, taken and sunk several ships, and some may be in favour of
+returning to dispose of their booty, while others may be for cruising
+longer. I only hope that scoundrel Ruggiero is among those we heard
+fall. They are quiet now, and one party or the other has evidently got
+the best of it. There, they are taking to the oars again."
+
+Several days passed. Sometimes the oars were heard going, but generally
+the galley was under sail. The sailors brought down food and water,
+morning and evening, but paid no other attention to the captives.
+Francis discussed, with some of the other prisoners, the chances of
+making a sudden rush on to the deck, and overpowering the crew; but all
+their arms had been taken from them, and the galley, they calculated,
+contained fully a hundred and fifty men. They noticed, too, when the
+sailors brought down the food, a party armed and in readiness were
+assembled round the hatchway.
+
+At all other times the hatchway was nearly closed, being only left
+sufficiently open to allow a certain amount of air to pass down into
+the hold, and by the steady tramp of steps, up and down, they knew that
+two sentries were also on guard above. Most of the prisoners were so
+overcome with the misfortune which had befallen them, and the prospect
+of a life in hopeless slavery, that they had no spirit to attempt any
+enterprise whatever, and there was nothing to do but to wait the
+termination of the voyage.
+
+At the end of six days there was a bustle on deck, and the chain of the
+anchor was heard to run out. Two or three hours afterwards the hatchway
+was taken off. When the rest had ascended, two men came below with
+hammers, and drew the staples which fastened Francis to the deck.
+
+On going up, he was at first so blinded with the glare of the
+sunshine--after six days in almost total darkness--that he could scarce
+see where he was. The ship was lying at anchor in a bay. The shores
+were low, and a group of houses stood abreast of where the ship was
+anchored. By their appearance Francis saw at once that he was on the
+coast of Africa, or of some island near it.
+
+The prisoners were ordered to descend into the boats which lay
+alongside, some sailors taking their places with them. Ruggiero was not
+at first to be seen, but just as Francis was preparing to take his
+place in the boat, he came out from the cabin. One of his arms was in a
+sling, and his head bandaged.
+
+"Take special care of that prisoner," he said to the men. "Do not take
+off his chains, and place a sentinel at the door of the place of his
+confinement. I would rather lose my share of all the spoil we have
+taken, than he should escape me!"
+
+The shackles had been removed from the rest of the captives, and on
+landing they were driven into some huts which stood a little apart from
+the village. Francis was thrust into a small chamber with five or six
+companions. The next morning the other prisoners were called out, and
+Francis was left alone by himself all day. On their return in the
+evening, they told him that all the prisoners had been employed in
+assisting to get out the cargo, with which the vessel was crammed, and
+in carrying it to a large storehouse in the village.
+
+"They must have taken a rich booty, indeed," said one of the prisoners,
+who had already told Francis that he was the captain of the vessel they
+had seen founder. "I could tell pretty well what all the bales contain,
+by the manner of packing, and I should say that there were the pick of
+the cargoes of a dozen ships there. All of us here belong to three
+ships, except those taken with you; but from the talk of the sailors, I
+heard that they had already sent off two batches of captives, by
+another ship which was cruising in company of them. I also learned that
+the quarrel, which took place just after you were captured, arose from
+the fact that the captain wished a party to land, to carry off two
+women from somewhere in the island of Corfu; but the crew insisted on
+first returning with the booty, urging, that if surprised by a Venetian
+galley, they might lose all the result of their toil. This was the
+opinion of the majority, although a few sided with the captain, being
+induced to do so by the fact that he offered to give up all his share
+of the booty, if they would do so.
+
+"The captain lost his temper and drew his sword, but he and his party
+were quickly overpowered. He has kept to his cabin ever since,
+suffering, they say, more from rage than from his wounds. However, it
+seems that as soon as we and the cargo have been sold, they are to
+start for Corfu to carry out the enterprise. We are on an island not
+very far from Tunis, and a fast-rowing boat started early this morning
+to the merchants with whom they deal, for it seems that a certain
+amount of secrecy is observed, in order that if any complaints are made
+by Venice, the Moorish authorities may disclaim all knowledge of the
+matter."
+
+Two days later the prisoners captured were again led out, their guards
+telling them that the merchants who had been expected had arrived.
+Giuseppi, who had hitherto borne up bravely, was in an agony of grief
+at being separated from Francis. He threw himself upon the ground,
+wept, tore his hair, and besought the guards to let him share his
+master's fate, whatever that might be. He declared that he would kill
+himself were they separated; and the guards would have been obliged to
+use force, had not Francis begged Giuseppi not to struggle against
+fate, but to go quietly, promising again and again that, if he himself
+regained his freedom, he would not rest until Giuseppi was also set at
+liberty. At last the lad yielded, and suffered himself to be led away,
+in a heartbroken state, by the guards.
+
+None of the captives returned to the hut, and Francis now turned his
+whole thoughts to freeing himself from his chains. He had already
+revolved in his mind every possible mode of escape. He had tried the
+strong iron bars of the window, but found that they were so rigidly
+fixed and embedded in the stonework, that there was no hope of escape
+in this way; and even could he have got through the window, the weight
+of his shackles would have crippled him.
+
+He was fastened with two chains, each about two feet six inches long,
+going from the wrist of the right hand to the left ankle, and from the
+left hand to the right ankle. Thus he was unable to stand quite
+upright, and anything like rapid movement was almost impossible. The
+bottom of the window came within four feet of the ground, and it was
+only by standing on one leg, and lifting the other as high as he could,
+that he was able to grasp one of the bars to try its strength.
+
+The news he had heard from his fellow prisoner almost maddened him, and
+he thought far less of his own fate, than of that of the girls, who
+would be living in their quiet country retreat in ignorance of danger,
+until suddenly seized by Mocenigo and his band of pirates.
+
+He had, on the first day, tried whether it was possible to draw his
+hand through the iron band round his wrist, but had concluded it could
+not be done, for it was riveted so tightly as to press upon the flesh.
+Therefore there was no hope of freeing himself in that manner. The only
+possible means, then, would be to cut through the rivet or chain, and
+for this a tool would be required.
+
+Suddenly an idea struck him. The guard who brought in his food was a
+Sicilian, and was evidently of a talkative disposition, for he had
+several times entered into conversation with the captives. In addition
+to a long knife, he carried a small stiletto in his girdle, and Francis
+thought that, if he could obtain this, he might possibly free himself.
+Accordingly, at the hour when he expected his guard to enter, Francis
+placed himself at his window, with his face against the bars. When he
+heard the guard come in, and, as usual, close the door behind him, he
+turned round and said:
+
+"Who is that damsel there? She is very beautiful, and she passes here
+frequently. There she is, just going among those trees."
+
+The guard moved to the window and looked out.
+
+"Do you see her just going round that corner there? Ah! She is gone."
+
+The guard was pressing his face against the bars, to look in the
+direction indicated, and Francis, who was already standing on his left
+leg, with the right raised so as to give freedom to the hand next to
+the man, had no difficulty in drawing the stiletto from its sheath, and
+slipping it into his trousers.
+
+"You were just too late," he said, "but no doubt you often see her."
+
+"I don't see any beautiful damsels about in this wretched place," the
+man replied. "I suppose she is the daughter of the head man in the
+village. They say he has some good-looking ones, but he takes pretty
+good care that they are not about when we are here. I suppose she
+thought she wouldn't be seen along that path. I will keep a good
+lookout for her in future."
+
+"Don't frighten her away," Francis said, laughing. "She is the one
+pleasant thing I have in the day to look at."
+
+After some more talk the man retired, and Francis examined his prize.
+It was a thin blade of fine steel, and he at once hid it in the earth
+which formed the floor of the hut.
+
+An hour later the guard opened the door suddenly. It was now dusk, and
+Francis was sitting quietly in a corner.
+
+"Bring a light, Thomaso," the guard shouted to his comrade outside. "It
+is getting dark in here."
+
+The other brought a torch, and they carefully examined the floor of the
+cell.
+
+"What is it that you are searching for?" Francis asked.
+
+"I have dropped my dagger somewhere," the man replied. "I can't think
+how it fell out."
+
+"When did you see it last?"
+
+"Not since dinner time. I know I had it then. I thought possibly I
+might have dropped it here, and a dagger is not the sort of plaything
+one cares about giving to prisoners."
+
+"Chained as I am," Francis said, "a dagger would not be a formidable
+weapon in my hands."
+
+"No," the man agreed. "It would be useless to you, unless you wanted to
+stick it into your own ribs."
+
+"I should have to sit down to be able to do even that."
+
+"That is so, lad. It is not for me to question what the captain says, I
+just do as I am told. But I own it does seem hard, keeping a young
+fellow like you chained up as if you were a wild beast. If he had got
+Pisani or Zeno as a prisoner, and wanted to make doubly sure that they
+would not escape, it would be all well enough, but for a lad like you,
+with one man always at the door, and the window barred so that a lion
+couldn't break through, I do think it hard to keep you chained like
+this; and the worst of it is, we are going to have to stop here to look
+after you till the captain gets back, and that may be three weeks or a
+month, who knows!"
+
+"Why don't you keep your mouth shut, Philippo?" the other man growled.
+"It's always talk, talk with you. We are chosen because the captain can
+rely upon us."
+
+"He can rely upon anyone," Philippo retorted, "who knows that he will
+get his throat cut if he fails in his duty."
+
+"Well, come along," the other said, "I don't want to be staying here
+all night. Your dagger isn't here, that's certain, and as I am off
+guard at present, I want to be going."
+
+As soon as he was left alone, Francis unearthed the dagger, feeling
+sure that no fresh visit would be made him that evening. As he had
+hoped, his first attempt showed him that the iron of the rivet was
+soft, and the keen dagger at once notched off a small piece of the
+burred end. Again and again he tried, and each time a small piece of
+metal flew off. After each cut he examined the edge of the dagger, but
+it was well tempered, and seemed entirely unaffected.
+
+He now felt certain that, with patience, he should be able to cut off
+the projecting edges of the rivets, and so be able to free his hands.
+He, therefore, now examined the fastenings at the ankles. These were
+more heavy, and on trying them, the iron of the rivet appeared to be
+much harder than that which kept the manacles together. It was,
+however, now too dark to see what he was doing, and concealing the
+dagger again, he lay down with a lighter heart than he had from the
+moment of his capture.
+
+Even if he found that the lower fastenings of the chain defied all his
+efforts, he could cut the rivets at the wrists, and so free one end of
+each chain. He could then tie the chains round his legs, and their
+weight would not be sufficient to prevent his walking.
+
+
+
+Chapter 13: The Pirates' Raid.
+
+
+As soon as it was daylight next morning, Francis was up and at work.
+His experiments of the evening before were at once confirmed. Three or
+four hours' work would enable him to free his wrists, but he could make
+no impression on the rivets at his ankles. After a few trials he gave
+this up as hopeless, for he was afraid, if he continued, he would blunt
+the edge of the dagger.
+
+For an hour he sat still, thinking, and at last an idea occurred to
+him. Iron could be ground by rubbing it upon stone, and if he could not
+cut off the burr of the rivet with the dagger, he might perhaps be able
+to wear it down, by rubbing it with a stone.
+
+He at once turned to the walls of his cell. These were not built of the
+unbaked clay so largely used for houses of the poorer class in Northern
+Egypt, but had evidently been constructed either as a prison, or more
+probably as a strong room where some merchant kept valuable goods. It
+was therefore constructed of blocks of hard stone.
+
+It seemed to Francis that this was sandstone, and to test its quality,
+he sat down in the corner where the guard had, the night before, placed
+his supply of food and water. First he moistened a portion of the wall,
+then he took up a link of his chain, and rubbed for some time against
+it. At last, to his satisfaction, a bright patch showed that the stone
+was capable of wearing away iron. But in vain did he try to twist his
+legs so as to rub the rivet against the wall, and he gave up the
+attempt as impossible.
+
+It was clear, then, that he must have a bit of the stone to rub with.
+He at once began to dig with the dagger in the earth at the foot of the
+wall, to see if he could find any such pieces. For a long time he came
+across no chips, even of the smallest size. As he worked, he was most
+careful to stamp down the earth which he had moved, scattering over it
+the sand, of which there was an abundance in the corners of the room,
+to obliterate all traces of his work.
+
+When breakfast time approached he ceased for a while, but after the
+meal had been taken, he recommenced the task. He met with little
+success till he reached the door, but here he was more fortunate. A
+short distance below the surface were a number of pieces of stone of
+various sizes, which, he had no doubt, had been cut from the blocks to
+allow for the fixing of the lintel and doorpost. He chose half a dozen
+pieces of the handiest sizes, each having a flat surface. Then
+replacing the earth carefully, he took one of the pieces in his hand,
+and moistening it with water, set to work.
+
+He made little progress. Still the stone did wear the iron, and he felt
+sure that, by perseverance, he should succeed in wearing off the burrs.
+All day he worked without intermission, holding a rag wrapped round the
+stone to deaden the sound. He worked till his fingers ached so that he
+could no longer hold it, then rested for an hour or two, and resumed
+his work. When his guard brought his dinner he asked him when the
+galley was to sail again.
+
+"It was to have gone today," the man said, "but the captain has been
+laid up with fever. He has a leech from Tunis attending him, and, weak
+as he is, he is so bent on going that he would have had himself carried
+on board the ship, had not the leech said that, in that case, he would
+not answer for his life, as in the state his blood is in, his wounds
+would assuredly mortify did he not remain perfectly quiet. So he has
+agreed to delay for three days."
+
+Francis was unable to work with the stone at night, for in the
+stillness the sound might be heard; but for some hours he hacked away
+with the dagger at the rivets on his manacles. The next morning he was
+at work as soon as the chirrup of the cicadas began, as these, he knew,
+would completely deaden any sound he might make. By nighttime the rivet
+ends on the irons round his ankles were worn so thin, that he felt sure
+that another hour's work would bring them level with the iron, and
+before he went to sleep the rivets on the wrist were in the same
+condition.
+
+He learned from his guard, next morning, that the captain was better,
+that he was to be taken on board in the cool of the evening, and that
+the vessel would start as soon as the breeze sprang up in the morning.
+In the afternoon his two guards entered, and bade him follow them. He
+was conducted to the principal house in the village, and into a room
+where Ruggiero Mocenigo was lying on a couch.
+
+"I have sent for you," Ruggiero said, "to tell you that I have not
+forgotten you. My vengeance has been delayed from no fault of mine, but
+it will be all the sweeter when it comes. I am going to fetch Polani's
+daughters. I have heard that, since you thrust yourself between me and
+them, you have been a familiar in the house, that Polani treats you as
+a member of the family, and that you are in high favour with his
+daughters. I have kept myself informed of what happened in Venice, and
+I have noted each of these things down in the account of what I owe
+you. I am going to fetch Polani's daughters here, and to make Maria my
+wife, and then I will show her how I treat those who cross my path. It
+will be a lesson to her, as well as for you. You shall wish yourself
+dead a thousand times before death comes to you."
+
+"I always knew that you were a villain, Ruggiero Mocenigo," Francis
+said quietly, "although I hardly thought that a man who had once the
+honour of being a noble of Venice, would sink to become a pirate and
+renegade. You may carry Maria Polani off, but you will never succeed
+through her in obtaining a portion of her father's fortune, for I know
+that, the first moment her hands are free, she will stab herself to the
+heart, rather than remain in the power of such a wretch."
+
+Ruggiero snatched up a dagger from a table by his couch as Francis was
+speaking, but dropped it again.
+
+"Fool," he said. "Am I not going to carry off the two girls? and do you
+not see that it will tame Maria's spirit effectually, when she knows
+that if she lays hands on herself, she will but shift the honour of
+being my wife from herself to her sister?"
+
+As the laugh of anticipated triumph rang in Francis's ears, the latter,
+in his fury, made a spring forward to throw himself upon the villain,
+but he had forgotten his chains, and fell headlong on to the floor.
+
+"Guards," Ruggiero shouted, "take this fellow away, and I charge you
+watch over him securely, and remember that your lives shall answer for
+his escape."
+
+"There is no need for threats, signor," Philippo said. "You can rely on
+our vigilance, though, as far as I see, if he had but a child to watch
+him he would be safe in that cell of his, fettered as he is."
+
+Ruggiero waved his hand impatiently, and the two men withdrew with
+their prisoner.
+
+"If it were not that I have not touched my share of the booty of our
+last trip," Philippo said as they left the house, "I would not serve
+him another day. As it is, as soon as the galley returns, and we get
+our shares of the money, and of the sum he has promised if this
+expedition of his is successful, I will be off. I have had enough of
+this. It is bad enough to be consorting with Moors, without being
+abused and threatened as if one was a dog."
+
+As soon as he was alone again, Francis set to work, and by the
+afternoon the ends of the four rivets were worn down level with the
+iron, and it needed but a pressure to make the rings spring open. Then
+he waited for the evening before freeing himself, as by some chance he
+might again be visited, and even if free before nightfall he could not
+leave the house.
+
+Philippo was later than usual in bringing him his meal, and Francis
+heard angry words passing between him and his comrade, because he had
+not returned to relieve him sooner.
+
+"Is everything ready for the start?" Francis asked the man as he
+entered.
+
+"Yes, the crew are all on board. The boat is to be on shore for the
+captain at nine o'clock, and as there is a little breeze blowing, I
+expect they will get up sail and start at once."
+
+After a few minutes' talk the man left, and Francis waited until it
+became almost dark, then he inserted the dagger between the irons at
+the point of junction. At the first wrench they flew apart, and his
+left hand was free. A few minutes' more work and the chains lay on the
+ground.
+
+Taking them up, he rattled them together loudly. In a minute he heard
+the guard outside move and come to the door, then the key was inserted
+in the lock and the door opened.
+
+"What on earth are you doing now?" Philippo asked as he entered.
+
+Francis was standing close to the door, so that as his guard entered he
+had his back to him, and before the question was finished he sprang
+upon him, throwing him headlong to the ground with the shock, and
+before the astonished man could speak he was kneeling upon him, with
+the point of the dagger at his throat.
+
+"If you make a sound, or utter a cry," he exclaimed, "I will drive this
+dagger into your throat."
+
+Philippo could feel the point of the dagger against his skin, and
+remained perfectly quiet.
+
+"I do not want to kill you, Philippo. You have not been harsh to me,
+and I would spare your life if I could. Hold your hands back above your
+head, and put your wrists together that I may fasten them. Then I will
+let you get up."
+
+Philippo held up his hands as requested, and Francis bound them tightly
+together with a strip of twisted cloth. He then allowed him to rise.
+
+"Now, Philippo, I must gag you. Then I will fasten your hands to a bar
+well above your head, so that you can't get at the rope with your
+teeth. I will leave you here till your comrade comes in the morning."
+
+"I would rather that you killed me at once, signor," the man said.
+"Thomaso will be furious at your having made your escape, for he will
+certainly come in for a share of the fury of the captain. There are
+three or four of the crew remaining behind, and no doubt they will keep
+me locked up till the ship returns, and in that case the captain will
+be as good as his word. You had better kill me at once."
+
+"But what am I to do, Philippo? I must ensure my own safety. If you
+will suggest any way by which I can do that, I will."
+
+"I would swear any oath you like, signor, that I will not give the
+alarm. I will make straight across the island, and get hold of a boat
+there, so as to be well away before your escape is known in the
+morning."
+
+"Well, look here, Philippo. I believe you are sincere, and you shall
+take the oath you hold most sacred."
+
+"You can accompany me, signor, if you will. Keep my hands tied till we
+are on the other side of the island, and stab me if I give the alarm."
+
+"I will not do that, Philippo. I will trust you altogether; but first
+take the oath you spoke of."
+
+Philippo swore a terrible oath, that he would abstain from giving the
+alarm, and would cross the island and make straight for the mainland.
+Francis at once cut the bonds.
+
+"You will lose your share of the plunder, Philippo, and you will have
+to keep out of the way to avoid the captain's rage. Therefore I advise
+you, when you get to Tunis, to embark in the first ship that sails. If
+you come to Venice, ask for me, and I will make up to you for your loss
+of booty, and put you in the way of leading an honest life again. But
+before going, you must first change clothes with me. You can sell mine
+at Tunis for enough to buy you a dozen suits like yours; but you must
+divide with me what money you now have in your possession, for I cannot
+start penniless."
+
+"I thank you for your kindness," the man said. "You had it in your
+power, with a thrust of the dagger, to make yourself safe, and you
+abstained. Even were it not for my oath, I should be a treacherous dog,
+indeed, were I to betray you. I do not know what your plans are,
+signor, but I pray you to follow my example, and get away from this
+place before daylight. The people here will all aid in the search for
+you, and as the island is not large, you will assuredly be discovered.
+It has for many years been a rendezvous of pirates, a place to which
+they bring their booty to sell to the traders who come over from the
+mainland."
+
+"Thank you for your advice, Philippo, and be assured I shall be off the
+island before daybreak, but I have some work to do first, and cannot
+therefore accompany you."
+
+"May all the saints bless you, signor, and aid you to get safe away!
+Assuredly, if I live, I will ere long present myself to you at
+Venice--not for the money which you so generously promised me, but that
+I may, with your aid, earn an honest living among Christians."
+
+By this time the exchange of clothes was effected, the six ducats in
+Philippo's purse--the result of a little private plundering on one of
+the captured vessels--divided; and then they left the prison room, and
+Philippo locked the door after them.
+
+"Is there any chance of Thomaso returning speedily?" Francis asked.
+"Because, if so, he might notice your absence, and so give the alarm
+before the ship sets sail, in which case we should have the whole crew
+on our tracks."
+
+"I do not think that he will. He will be likely to be drinking in the
+wine shop for an hour or two before he returns. But I tell you what I
+will do, signor. I will resume my place here on guard until he has
+returned. He will relieve me at midnight, and in the darkness will not
+notice the change of clothes. There will still be plenty of time for me
+to cross the island, and get out of sight in the boat, before the alarm
+is given, which will not be until six o'clock, when I ought to relieve
+him again. As you say, if the alarm were to be given before the vessel
+sails, they might start at once to cut us off before we reach the
+mainland, for they would make sure that we should try to escape in that
+direction."
+
+"That will be the best plan, Philippo; and now goodbye."
+
+Francis walked down to the shore. There were no boats lying there of a
+size he could launch unaided, but presently he heard the sound of oars,
+and a small fishing boat rowed by two men approached.
+
+"Look here, lads," he said. "I want to be put on board the ship. I
+ought to have been on board three hours ago, but took too much wine,
+and lay down for an hour or two and overslept myself. Do you think you
+can row quietly up alongside so that I can slip on board unnoticed? If
+so I will give you a ducat for your trouble."
+
+"We can do that," the fishermen said. "We have just come from the ship
+now, and have sold them our catch of today. There were half a dozen
+other boats lying beside her, bargaining for their fish. Besides they
+are taking on board firewood and other stores that have been left till
+the last moment. So jump in and we will soon get you there."
+
+In a few minutes they approached the side of the ship.
+
+"I see you have got half a dozen fish left in your boat now," Francis
+said.
+
+"They are of no account," one of the men said. "They are good enough
+for our eating, but not such as they buy on board a ship where money is
+plentiful. You are heartily welcome to them if you have a fancy for
+them."
+
+"Thank you," Francis said. "I will take two or three of them, if you
+can spare them. I want to play a trick with a comrade."
+
+As the fishermen said, there were several boats lying near the vessel,
+and the men were leaning over the sides bargaining for fish. Handing
+the fishermen their promised reward, Francis sprang up the ladder to
+the deck. He was unnoticed, for other men had gone down into the boats
+for fish.
+
+Mingling with the sailors, he gradually made his way to the hatchway
+leading into the hold, descended the ladder, and stowed himself away
+among a quantity of casks, some filled with wine and some with water,
+at the farther end of the hold; and as he lay there devoutly thanked
+God that his enterprise had been so far successful.
+
+Men came down from time to time with lanterns, to stow away the
+lately-arrived stores, but none came near the place where Francis was
+hidden. The time seemed long before he heard the clank of the capstan,
+and knew the vessel was being hove up to her anchors. Then, after a
+while, he heard the creaking of cordage, and much trampling of feet on
+the deck above, and knew that she was under way. Then he made himself
+as comfortable as he could, in his cramped position, and went off to
+sleep.
+
+When he woke in the morning, the light was streaming down the hatch,
+which was only closed in rough weather, as it was necessary frequently
+to go down into it for water and stores. Francis had brought the fish
+with him as a means of subsistence during the voyage, in case he should
+be unable to obtain provisions, but for this there was no occasion, as
+there was an abundance of fruit hanging from the beams, while piles of
+bread were stowed in a partition at one end of the hold. During the
+day, however, he did not venture to move, and was heartily glad when it
+again became dark, and he could venture to get out and stretch himself.
+He appropriated a loaf and some bunches of grapes, took a long drink
+from a pail placed under the tap of a water butt, and made his way back
+to his corner. After a hearty meal he went out again for another drink,
+and then turned in to sleep.
+
+So passed six days. By the rush of water against the outside planks, he
+could always judge whether the vessel was making brisk way or whether
+she was lying becalmed. Once or twice, after nightfall, he ventured up
+on deck, feeling certain that in the darkness there was no fear of his
+being detected. From conversation he overheard on the seventh evening,
+he learned that Corfu had been sighted that day. For some hours the
+vessel's sails had been lowered, and she had remained motionless; but
+she was now again making for the land, and in the course of another two
+hours a landing was to be made.
+
+The boats had all been got in readiness, and the men were to muster
+fully armed. Although, as they understood, the carrying off of two
+girls was their special object, it was intended that they should gather
+as much plunder as could be obtained. The island was rich, for many
+wealthy Venetians had residences there. Therefore, with the exception
+of a few men left on board to take care of the galley, the whole were
+to land. A picked boat's crew were to accompany the captain, who was
+now completely convalescent. The rest were to divide in bands and
+scatter over the country, pillaging as they went, and setting fire to
+the houses. It was considered that such consternation would be caused
+that nothing like resistance could be offered for some time, and by
+daybreak all hands were to gather at the landing place.
+
+How far this spot was from the town, Francis had no means of learning.
+There was a store of spare arms in the hold, and Francis, furnishing
+himself with a sword and large dagger, waited until he heard a great
+movement overhead, and then went upon deck and joined a gang of men
+employed in lowering one of the boats. The boat was a large one, rowing
+sixteen oars and carrying some twenty men seated in the stern. Here
+Francis took his place with the others. The boat pushed off and waited
+until four others were launched and filled. Then the order was given,
+and the boats rowed in a body towards the shore. The men landed and
+formed under their respective officers, one man remaining in each boat
+to keep it afloat.
+
+Francis leaped ashore, and while the men were forming up, found no
+difficulty in slipping away unnoticed. As he did not know where the
+path was, and was afraid of making a noise, he lay down among the rocks
+until he heard the word of command to start given. Then he cautiously
+crept out, and, keeping far enough in the rear to be unseen, followed
+the sound of their footsteps. By the short time which had elapsed
+between the landing and the start, he had no doubt they were guided by
+some persons perfectly acquainted with the locality, probably by some
+natives of the island among the mixed crew.
+
+Francis had, during his voyage, thought over the course he should
+pursue on landing; and saw that, ignorant as he was of the country, his
+only hope was in obtaining a guide who would conduct him to Polani's
+villa before the arrival of Mocenigo and his band. The fact that the
+crew were divided into five parties, which were to proceed in different
+directions, and that he did not know which of them was commanded by the
+captain, added to the difficulty. Had they kept together he might,
+after seeing the direction in which they were going, make a detour and
+get ahead of them. But he might now follow a party going in an entirely
+wrong direction, and before he could obtain a guide, Mocenigo's band
+might have gone so far that they could not be overtaken before they
+reached the villa.
+
+There was nothing to do but to get ahead of all the parties, in the
+hope of coming upon a habitation before going far. As soon, therefore,
+as the last band had disappeared, he started at a run. The country was
+open, with few walls or fences; therefore on leaving the road he was
+able to run rapidly forwards, and in a few minutes knew that he must be
+ahead of the pirates. Then he again changed his course so as to strike
+the road he had left.
+
+After running for about a mile he saw a light ahead of him, and soon
+arrived at a cottage. He knocked at the door, and then entered. The
+occupants of the room--a man and woman, a lad, and several
+children--rose to their feet at the sudden entrance of the stranger.
+
+"Good people," Francis said. "I have just landed from a ship, and am
+the bearer of important messages to the Signoras Polani. I have lost my
+way, and it is necessary that I should go on without a moment's delay.
+Can you tell me how far the villa of Polani is distant?"
+
+"It is about three miles from here," the man said.
+
+"I will give a ducat to your son if he will run on with me at once."
+
+The man looked doubtful. The apparel and general appearance of Francis
+were not prepossessing. He had been six days a prisoner in the hold
+without means of washing.
+
+"See," he said, producing a ducat, "here is the money. I will give it
+you at once if you will order your son to go with me, and to hurry at
+the top of his speed."
+
+"It's a bargain," the man said.
+
+"Here, Rufo! start at once with the signor."
+
+"Come along, signor," the boy said; and without another word to the
+parents Francis followed him out, and both set off at a run along the
+road.
+
+Francis had said nothing about pirates to the peasants, for he knew
+that, did he do so, such alarm would be caused that they would think of
+nothing but flight, and he should not be able to obtain a guide. It was
+improbable that they would be molested. The pirates were bent upon
+pillaging the villas of the wealthy, and would not risk the raising of
+an alarm by entering cottages where there was no chance of plunder.
+
+After proceeding a few hundred yards, the lad struck off by a byroad at
+right angles to that which they had been following, and by the
+direction he took Francis felt that he must at first have gone far out
+of his way, and that the party going direct to the villa must have had
+a considerable start. Still, he reckoned that as he was running at the
+rate of three feet to every one they would march, he might hope to
+arrive at the house well before them.
+
+Not a word was spoken as they ran along. The lad was wondering, in his
+mind, as to what could be the urgent business that could necessitate
+its being carried at such speed; while Francis felt that every breath
+was needed for the work he had to do. Only once or twice he spoke, to
+ask how much further it was to their destination.
+
+The last answer was cheering:
+
+"A few hundred paces farther."
+
+"There are the lights, signor. They have not gone to bed. This is the
+door."
+
+Francis knocked with the pommel of his sword, keeping up a loud
+continuous knocking. A minute or two passed, and then a face appeared
+at the window above.
+
+"Who is it that knocks so loudly at this time of night?"
+
+"It is Francisco Hammond. Open instantly. Danger threatens the
+signoras. Quick, for your life!"
+
+The servant recognized the voice, and ran down without hesitation and
+unbarred the fastening; but for a moment he thought he must have been
+mistaken, as Francis ran into the lighted hall.
+
+"Where are the ladies?" he asked. "Lead me to them instantly."
+
+But as he spoke a door standing by was opened, and Signor Polani
+himself, with the two girls, appeared. They had been on the point of
+retiring to rest when the knocking began, and the merchant, with his
+drawn sword, was standing at the door, when he recognized Francis'
+voice.
+
+They were about to utter an exclamation of pleasure at seeing him, and
+of astonishment, not only at his sudden arrival, but at his appearance,
+when Francis burst out:
+
+"There is no time for a word. You must fly instantly. Ruggiero Mocenigo
+is close at my heels with a band of twenty pirates."
+
+The girls uttered a cry of alarm, and the merchant exclaimed:
+
+"Can we not defend the house, Francisco? I have eight men here, and we
+can hold it till assistance comes."
+
+"Ruggiero has a hundred," Francis said, "and all can be brought up in a
+short time--you must fly. For God's sake, do not delay, signor. They
+may be here at any moment."
+
+"Come, girls," Polani said.
+
+"And you, too," he went on, turning to the servants, whom the knocking
+had caused to assemble. "Do you follow us. Resistance would only cost
+you your lives.
+
+"Here, Maria, take my hand.
+
+"Francisco, do you see to Giulia.
+
+"Close the door after the last of you, and bolt it. It will give us a
+few minutes, before they break in and discover that we have all gone.
+
+"Which way are the scoundrels coming?"
+
+Francis pointed in the direction from which he had come, and the whole
+party started at a fast pace in the other direction. They had not been
+gone five minutes, when a loud and sudden knocking broke on the silence
+of the night.
+
+"It was a close thing, indeed, Francisco," the merchant said, as they
+ran along close to each other. "At present I feel as if I was in a
+dream; but you shall tell us all presently."
+
+They were, by this time, outside the grounds of the villa, and some of
+the servants, who knew the country, now took the lead. In a few minutes
+the merchant slackened his pace.
+
+"We are out of danger now," he said. "They will not know in which
+direction to search for us; and if they scatter in pursuit we could
+make very short work of any that might come up with us."
+
+"I do not know that you are out of danger," Francis said. "A hundred
+men landed. Mocenigo, with twenty, took the line to your house, but the
+rest have scattered over the country in smaller bands, bent on murder
+and pillage. Therefore, we had best keep on as fast as we can, until
+well beyond the circle they are likely to sweep--that is, unless the
+ladies are tired."
+
+"Tired!" Maria repeated. "Why, Giulia and I go for long walks every
+day, and could run for an hour, if necessary."
+
+"Then come on, my dears," the merchant said. "I am burning to know what
+this all means; and I am sure you are equally curious; but nothing can
+be said till you are in safety."
+
+Accordingly, the party again broke into a run. A few minutes later one
+of the servants, looking back, exclaimed:
+
+"They have fired the house, signor. There are flames issuing from one
+of the lower windows."
+
+"I expected that," the merchant said, without looking back. "That
+scoundrel would, in any case, light it in his fury at finding that we
+have escaped; but he has probably done so, now, in hopes that the light
+will enable him to discover us. It is well that we are so far ahead,
+for the blaze will light up the country for a long way round."
+
+"There is a wood a little way ahead, signor," the servant said. "Once
+through that we shall be hidden from sight, however great the light."
+
+Arrived at the wood, they again broke into a walk. A few hundred yards
+beyond the wood was some rising ground, from which they could see far
+over the country.
+
+"Let us stop here," the merchant said. "We are safe now. We have placed
+two miles between ourselves and those villains."
+
+The villa was now a mass of flames. Exclamations of fury broke from the
+men servants, while the women cried with anger at the sight of the
+destruction.
+
+"Do not concern yourselves," the merchant said. "The house can be
+rebuilt, and I will see that none of you are the poorer for the loss of
+your belongings.
+
+"Now, girls, let us sit down here and hear from Francisco how it is
+that he has once again been your saviour."
+
+"Before I begin, signor, tell me whether there are any ships of war in
+the port, and how far that is distant from us?"
+
+"It is not above six miles on the other side of the island. That is to
+say, we have been going towards it since we left the villa.
+
+"See," he broke off, "there are flames rising in three or four
+directions. The rest of those villains are at their work."
+
+"But are there any war galleys in the port?" Francis interrupted.
+
+"Yes. Three ships were sent here, on the report that a Moorish pirate
+had been cruising in these waters, and that several vessels were
+missing. When the story first came I did not credit it. The captain of
+the ship who brought the news told me he had met you about halfway
+across, and had told you about the supposed pirate. A vessel arrived
+four days later, and brought letters from my agent, but he said no word
+about your boat having arrived.
+
+"Then I became uneasy; and when later news came, and still no word of
+you, I felt sure that something must have befallen you; that possibly
+the report was true, and that you had fallen into the hands of the
+pirates. So I at once started, in one of the galleys which the council
+were despatching in answer to the request of the governor here."
+
+"In that case, signor, there is not a moment to lose. The governor
+should be informed that the pirate is lying on the opposite coast, and
+that his crew have landed, and are burning and pillaging. If orders are
+issued at once, the galleys could get round before morning, and so cut
+off the retreat of these miscreants."
+
+"You are quite right," Polani said, rising at once. "We will go on
+without a moment's delay! The girls can follow slowly under the escort
+of the servants."
+
+"Oh, papa," Maria exclaimed, "you are not going to take Francisco away
+till we have heard his story! Can you not send forward the servants
+with a message to the governor?"
+
+"No, my dear. The governor will have gone to bed, and the servants
+might not be able to obtain admittance to him. I must go myself. It is
+for your sakes, as well as for my own. We shall never feel a moment's
+safety, as long as this villain is at large. Francisco's story will
+keep till tomorrow.
+
+"As to your gratitude and mine, that needs no telling. He cannot but
+know what we are feeling, at the thought of the almost miraculous
+escape you have had from falling into the hands of your persecutor.
+
+"Now come along, Francisco.
+
+"One of you men who knows the road had better come with us. Do the rest
+of you all keep together.
+
+"Two miles further, girls, as you know, is a villa of Carlo Maffene. If
+you feel tired, you had best stop and ask for shelter there. There is
+no fear that the pirates will extend their ravages so far. They will
+keep on the side of the island where they landed, so as to be able to
+return with their booty before daybreak to the ship."
+
+
+
+Chapter 14: The End Of The Persecutor.
+
+
+Signor Polani was so well known, that upon his arrival at the
+governor's house the domestics, upon being aroused, did not hesitate to
+awaken the governor at once. The latter, as soon as he heard that the
+pirates had landed and were devastating the other side of the island,
+and that their ship was lying close in to the coast under the charge of
+a few sailors only, at once despatched a messenger to the commander of
+the galleys; ordering them to arouse the crews and make ready to put
+out to sea instantly. He added that he, himself, should follow his
+messenger on board in a few minutes, and should accompany them. He then
+issued orders that the bell should toll to summon the inhabitants to
+arms; and directed an officer to take the command, and to start with
+them at once across the island, and to fall upon the pirates while
+engaged in their work of pillage. They were to take a party with them
+with litters to carry Polani's daughters to the town, and an apartment
+was to be assigned to them in his palace, until his return.
+
+While he was issuing this order, refreshments had been placed upon the
+table, and he pressed Polani and his companions to partake of these
+before starting.
+
+Francis needed no second invitation. He had been too excited, at the
+news he had heard on board the ship, to think of eating; and he now
+remembered that it was a good many hours since he had taken his last
+meal. He was but a few minutes, however, in satisfying his hunger. By
+the time he had finished, the governor had seen that his orders had
+been carried out.
+
+Two hundred armed citizens had already mustered in companies, and were
+now on the point of setting out, burning with indignation at what they
+had heard of the depredations which the pirates had committed. After
+seeing his preparations complete the governor, accompanied by Polani
+and Francis, made his way down to the port, and was rowed out to the
+galleys.
+
+Here he found all on the alert. The sails were ready for hoisting, and
+the men were seated at the benches, ready to aid with oars the light
+wind which was blowing. The governor now informed the commander of the
+vessels the reason of the sudden orders for sailing. The news was
+passed to the captains of the other two vessels, and in a very few
+minutes the anchors were weighed, and the vessels started on their way.
+
+Francis was closely questioned as to the spot at which the pirate
+vessel was lying, but could only reply that, beyond the fact that it
+was some four miles from Polani's villa, he had no idea of the
+locality.
+
+"But can you not describe to us the nature of the coast?" the commander
+said.
+
+"That I cannot," Francis replied; "for I was hidden away in the hold of
+the vessel, and did not come on deck until after it was dark, at which
+time the land abreast of us was only a dark mass."
+
+"Signor Polani has informed me," the governor said, "that, although
+your attire does not betoken it, you are a dear friend of his; but he
+has not yet informed me how it comes that you were upon this pirate
+ship."
+
+"He has been telling me as we came along," Polani replied; "and a
+strange story it is. He was on his voyage hither in the Naxos, which,
+as you doubtless remember, was a little craft of mine, which should
+have arrived here a month since. As we supposed, it was captured by the
+pirates, the leader of whom is Ruggiero Mocenigo, who, as of course you
+know, made his escape from the custody of the officers of the state,
+they being overpowered by a party of Paduans. The sentence of
+banishment for life has been passed against him, and, until I heard
+from my friend here that he was captain of the pirate which has been
+seen off this island, I knew not what had become of him.
+
+"Those on board the Naxos were taken prisoners, and confined in the
+pirate's hold, which they found already filled with captives taken from
+other ships. The pirate at once sailed for Africa, where all the
+prisoners were sold as slaves to the Moors, my friend here alone
+excepted, Mocenigo having an old feud with him, and a design to keep
+him in his hands. Learning that a raid was intended upon Corfu, with
+the special design of carrying off my daughters, whom Mocenigo had
+twice previously tried to abduct, Francisco managed to get on board the
+vessel, and conceal himself in her hold, in order that he might
+frustrate the design. He managed, in the dark, to mingle with the
+landing party; and then, separating from them, made his way on ahead,
+and fortunately was able to obtain a guide to my house, which he
+reached five minutes only before the arrival of the pirates there."
+
+"Admirable, indeed! And we are all vastly indebted to him, for had it
+not been for him, we should not have known of the doings of these
+scoundrels until too late to cut off their retreat; and, once away in
+their ship again, they might long have preyed upon our commerce, before
+one of our cruisers happened to fall in with them.
+
+"As for Ruggiero Mocenigo, he is a disgrace to the name of a Venetian;
+and it is sad to think that one of our most noble families should have
+to bear the brand of being connected with a man so base and villainous.
+However, I trust that his power of ill doing has come to an end.
+
+"Is the vessel a fast one, signor?"
+
+"I cannot say whether she sails fast," Francis replied; "but she
+certainly rows fast."
+
+"I trust that we shall catch her before she gets under way," the
+commander of the galleys said. "Our vessels are not made for rowing,
+although we get out oars to help them along in calm weather."
+
+"What course do you propose to take?" the merchant asked.
+
+"When we approach the spot where she is likely to be lying, I shall
+order the captains of the other two ships to lie off the coast, a
+couple of miles distant and as far from each other, so that they can
+cut her off as she makes out to sea. We will follow the coast line,
+keeping in as close as the water will permit, and in this way we shall
+most likely come upon her. If we should miss her, I shall at the first
+dawn of morning join the others in the offing, and keep watch till she
+appears from under the shadow of the land."
+
+It was now three o'clock in the morning, and an hour later the three
+vessels parted company, and the galley with the governor and commander
+of the squadron rowed for the shore. When they came close to the land,
+the captain ordered the oars to be laid in.
+
+"The breeze is very light," he said; "but it is favourable, and will
+enable us to creep along the shore. If we continue rowing, those in
+charge of the ship may hear us coming, and may cut their cables, get up
+sail, and make out from the land without our seeing them. On a still
+night, like this, the sound of the sweeps can be heard a very long
+distance."
+
+Quietly the vessel made her way along the shore. Over the land, the sky
+was red with the reflection of numerous fires, but this only made the
+darkness more intense under its shadow, and the lead was kept going in
+order to prevent them from sailing into shallow water. By the captain's
+orders strict silence was observed on board the ship, and every eye was
+strained ahead on the lookout for the pirate vessel.
+
+Presently, all became aware of a confused noise, apparently coming from
+the land, but at some distance ahead. As they got further on, distant
+shouts and cries were heard.
+
+"I fancy," the governor said to the captain, "the band from the town
+have met the pirates, and the latter are retreating to their ship."
+
+"Then the ship can't be far off," the captain said. "Daylight is
+beginning to break in the east, and we shall soon be able to make her
+out against the sky--that is, if she is still lying at anchor."
+
+On getting round the next point, the vessel was distinctly visible. The
+shouting on the shore was now plainly heard, and there could be no
+doubt that a desperate fight was going on there. It seemed to be close
+to the water's edge.
+
+"There is a boat rowing off to the ship," one of the sailors said.
+
+"Then get out your oars again. She is not more than half a mile away,
+and she can hardly get under way before we reach her. Besides, judging
+from the sound of the fight, the pirates must have lost a good many
+men, and will not be able to man all the oars even if they gain their
+ship."
+
+The men sat down to their oars with alacrity. Every sailor on board
+felt it almost as a personal insult, that pirates should dare to enter
+the Venetian waters and carry on their depredations there. The glare of
+the burning houses, too, had fired their indignation to the utmost, and
+all were eager for the fight.
+
+Three boats were now seen rowing towards the ship.
+
+"Stretch to your oars, men," the captain said. "We must be alongside
+them, if we can, before they can take to their sweeps."
+
+The pirates had now seen them; and Francis, standing at the bow eagerly
+watching the vessel, could hear orders shouted to the boats. These
+pulled rapidly alongside, and he could see the men clambering up in the
+greatest haste. There was a din of voices. Some men tried to get up the
+sails, others got out oars, and the utmost confusion evidently
+prevailed. In obedience to the shouts of the officers, the sails were
+lowered again, and all betook themselves to the oars; but scarce a
+stroke had been pulled before the Venetian galley ran up alongside.
+Grapnels were thrown, and the crew, seizing their weapons, sprang on to
+the deck of the pirate.
+
+The crew of the latter knew that they had no mercy to expect, and
+although weakened by the loss of nearly a third of their number in the
+fighting on shore, sprang from their benches, and rushed to oppose
+their assailants, with the desperation of despair. They were led by
+Ruggiero Mocenigo, who, furious at the failure of his schemes, and
+preferring death to the shame of being carried to Venice as a pirate
+and a traitor, rushed upon the Venetians with a fury which, at first,
+carried all before it. Supported by his Moors and renegades he drove
+back the boarders, and almost succeeded in clearing the deck of his
+vessel.
+
+He himself engaged hand-to-hand with the commander of the Venetian
+galley, and at the third thrust ran him through the throat; but the
+Venetians, although they had yielded to the first onslaught, again
+poured over the bulwarks of the galley. Polani, burning to punish the
+man who had so repeatedly tried to injure him, accompanied them,
+Francis keeping close beside him.
+
+"Ruggiero Mocenigo, traitor and villain, your time has come!"
+
+Ruggiero started at hearing his name thus proclaimed, for on board his
+own ship he was simply known as the captain; but in the dim light he
+recognized Polani, and at once crossed swords with him.
+
+"Be not so sure, Polani. Perhaps it is your time that has come."
+
+The two engaged with fury. Polani was still strong and vigorous. His
+opponent had the advantage of youth and activity. But Polani's weight
+and strength told, and he was forcing his opponent back, when his foot
+slipped on the bloodstained deck. He fell forward; and in another
+moment Ruggiero would have run him through the body; had not the weapon
+been knocked up by Francis, who, watching every movement of the fight,
+sprang forward when he saw the merchant slip.
+
+"This time, Ruggiero, my hands are free. How about your vengeance now?"
+
+Ruggiero gave a cry of astonishment, at seeing the lad whom he believed
+to be lying in chains, five hundred miles away, facing him. For a
+moment he recoiled, and then with the cry, "I will take it now," sprang
+forward. But this time he had met an opponent as active and as capable
+as himself.
+
+For a minute or two they fought on even terms, and then Ruggiero fell
+suddenly backwards, a crossbow bolt, from one of the Venetians on the
+poop of the vessel, having struck him full in the forehead.
+
+Without their leader, the spirit of the pirates had fled. They still
+fought, steadily and desperately, but it was only to sell their lives
+as dearly as possible; and in five minutes after the fall of Ruggiero
+the last man was cut down, for no quarter was given to pirates.
+
+Just as the combat concluded, the sound of oars was heard, and the
+other two galleys came up to the assistance of their consort. They
+arrived too late to take part in the conflict, but cheered lustily when
+they heard that the pirate captain, and all his crew, had been killed.
+Upon learning that the commander of the galley was killed, the captain
+next in seniority assumed the command.
+
+In a few minutes, the bodies of the pirates were thrown overboard, the
+wounded were carried below to have their wounds attended to, while the
+bodies of those who had fallen--thirteen in number--were laid together
+on the deck, for burial on shore.
+
+"Thanks to you, Francisco, that I am not lying there beside them," the
+merchant said. "I did not know that you were so close at hand, and as I
+slipped I felt that my end had come."
+
+"You were getting the better of him up to that point," Francis said. "I
+was close at hand, in readiness to strike in should I see that my aid
+was wanted, but up to the moment you slipped, I believed that you would
+have avenged your wrongs yourself."
+
+"It is well that he fell as he did. It would have been dreadful,
+indeed, had he been carried to Venice, to bring shame and disgrace upon
+a noble family. Thank God, his power for mischief is at an end! I have
+had no peace of mind since the day when you first thwarted his attempt
+to carry off the girls; nor should I have ever had, until I obtained
+sure tidings that he was dead. The perseverance with which he has
+followed his resolve, to make my daughter his wife, is almost beyond
+belief. Had his mind been turned to other matters, he was capable of
+attaining greatness, for no obstacle would have barred his way.
+
+"It almost seems as if it were a duel between him and you to the
+death--his aim to injure me, and yours to defend us. And now it has
+ended. Maria will breathe more freely when she hears the news, for, gay
+and light hearted as she is, the dread of that man has weighed heavily
+upon her."
+
+The governor, who from the poop of the vessel had watched the conflict,
+now came up, and warmly congratulated Francis upon his bravery.
+
+"I saw you rush forward, just as my friend Polani fell, and engage his
+assailant. At first I thought you lost, for the villain was counted one
+of the best swordsmen in Venice, and you are still but a lad; but I saw
+you did not give way an inch, but held your own against him; and I
+believe you would have slain him unaided, for you were fighting with
+greater coolness than he was. Still, I was relieved when I saw him
+fall, for even then the combat was doubtful, and his men, to do them
+justice, fought like demons. How comes it that one so young as you
+should be so skilled with your weapon?"
+
+"This is not the first time that my young friend has done good service
+to the state," Polani said; "for it was he who led a crew of one of my
+ships to the aid of Pisani, when his galley was boarded by the Genoese,
+at the battle of Antium."
+
+"Is this he?" the governor said, in surprise. "I heard, of course, by
+the account of those who came from Venice a month since, how Pisani was
+aided, when hard pressed, by the crew of one of your ships, headed by a
+young Englishman, upon whom the state had conferred the rights of
+citizenship as a recognition of his services; but I did not dream that
+the Englishman was but a lad.
+
+"What is your age, young sir?"
+
+"I am just eighteen," Francis replied. "Our people are all fond of
+strong exercise, and thus it was that I became more skilled, perhaps,
+than many of my age, in the use of arms."
+
+At nine o'clock the squadron arrived in the port, bringing with them
+the captured galley. As soon as they were seen approaching, the church
+bells rang, flags were hung out from the houses, and the whole
+population assembled at the quay to welcome the victors and to hear the
+news.
+
+"Do you go on at once, directly we land, Francisco, and set the girls'
+minds at ease. I must come on with the governor, and he is sure to be
+detained, and will have much to say before he can make his way through
+the crowd."
+
+Francis was, on his arrival at the governor's, recognized by the
+domestics, and at once shown into the room where the girls were
+awaiting him. The fact that the pirate galley had been captured was
+already known to them, the news having been brought some hours before,
+by a horseman, from the other side of the island.
+
+"Where is our father?" Maria exclaimed, as Francis entered alone.
+
+"He is well, and sent me on to relieve your minds."
+
+"Saint Mark be praised!" Maria said. "We have been sorely anxious about
+you both. A messenger, who brought the news, said that it could be seen
+from the shore that there was a desperate fight on board the pirate
+ship, which was attacked by one galley only. We felt sure that it would
+be the ship that the governor was in, and we knew you were with him;
+and our father was so enraged at what had happened, that we felt sure
+he would take part in the fight."
+
+"He did so," Francis said, "and himself engaged hand-to-hand with
+Mocenigo, and would probably have killed him, had not his foot slipped
+on the deck. I was, of course, by his side, and occupied the villain
+until a cross bolt pierced his brain. So there is an end to all your
+trouble with him."
+
+"Is he really dead?" Maria said. "Oh, Francisco, how thankful I am! He
+seemed so determined, that I began to think he was sure some day to
+succeed in carrying me off. Not that I would ever have become his wife,
+for I had vowed to kill myself before that came about. I should have
+thought he might have known that he could never have forced me to be
+his wife."
+
+"I told him the same thing," Francis said, "and he replied that he was
+not afraid of that, for that he should have your sister in his power
+also, and that he should warn you that, if you laid hands on yourself,
+he should make her his wife instead of you."
+
+The girls both gave an exclamation of horror.
+
+"I never thought of that," Maria said; "but he would indeed have
+disarmed me with such a threat. It would have been horrible for me to
+have been the wife of such a man; but I think I could have borne it
+rather than have consigned Giulia to such a fate.
+
+"Oh, here is father!"
+
+"I have got away sooner than I expected," Polani said as he entered.
+"The governor was good enough to beg me to come on at once to you. You
+have heard all the news, I suppose, and know that our enemy will
+persecute you no more."
+
+"We have heard, papa, and also that you yourself fought with him, which
+was very wrong and very rash of you."
+
+"And did he tell you that had it not been for him I should not be here
+alive now, girls?"
+
+"No, father. He said that when you slipped he occupied Ruggiero's
+attention until the cross bolt struck him."
+
+"That is what he did, my dear; but had he not occupied his attention I
+should have been a dead man. The thrust was aimed at me as I fell, and
+would have pierced me had he not sprung forward and turned it aside,
+and then engaged in single combat with Mocenigo, who, with all his
+faults, was brave and a skillful swordsman; and yet, as the governor
+himself said, probably Francisco would have slain him, even had not the
+combat ended as it did.
+
+"And now we must have his story in full. I have not heard much about it
+yet, and you have heard nothing; and I want to know how he managed to
+get out of the hands of that man, when he had once fallen into them."
+
+"That is what we want to know, too, father. We know what a sharp watch
+was kept upon us, and I am sure they must have been much more severe
+with him."
+
+"They were certainly more severe," Francis said smiling, "for my right
+hand was chained to my left ankle, and the left hand to to my right
+ankle--not tightly, you know, but the chain was so short that I could
+not stand upright. But, on the other hand, I do not think my guards
+were as vigilant as yours. However, I will tell you the whole story."
+
+The girls listened with rapt attention to the story of the capture, the
+escape, and of his hiding in the hold of the pirate in order to be able
+to give them a warning in time.
+
+"Your escape was fortunate, indeed," the merchant said when he had
+finished. "Fortunate both for you and for us, for I have no doubt that
+Mocenigo had intended to put you to a lingering death, on his return.
+As for the girls, nothing could have saved them from the fate he
+designed for them, save the method which you took of arriving here
+before him."
+
+"What are we to do for him, father?" Maria exclaimed. "We are not tired
+of thanking him, but he hates being thanked. If he would only get into
+some terrible scrape, Giulia and I would set out to rescue him at once;
+but you see he gets out of his scrapes before we hear of them. It is
+quite disheartening not to be able to do anything."
+
+Francis laughed merrily.
+
+"It is terrible, is it not, signora? But if I manage to get into any
+scrape, and have time to summon you to my assistance, be sure I will do
+so. But, you see, one cannot get into a scrape when one chooses, and I
+must be content, while I am away, in knowing that I have the good
+wishes of you and your sister."
+
+"Do not trouble yourself, Maria," her father said. "Some day an
+opportunity may come for our paying our debts, and in the meantime
+Francis is content that we should be his debtors."
+
+"And now, what are you going to do, papa?"
+
+"I shall sail with you for Venice tomorrow. The governor will be
+sending one of the galleys with the news of the capture of the pirate,
+and doubtless he will give us all a passage in her. I shall order steps
+to be taken at once for rebuilding the villa, and will get it completed
+by the spring, before which time you will be off my hands, young lady;
+and I shall not be altogether sorry, for you have been a very
+troublesome child lately."
+
+"It has not been my fault," Maria pouted.
+
+"Not at all, my dear. It has been your misfortune, and I am not blaming
+you at all."
+
+"But the trouble is now over, father!"
+
+"So much the better for Rufino," the merchant said. "It will be good
+news to him that you are freed from the persecution of Ruggiero. And
+now, I must leave you, for I have arranged to ride over with the
+governor to the other side of the island. He has to investigate the
+damage which took place last evening. I hear that upwards of a score of
+villas were sacked and destroyed, and that many persons were killed;
+and while he is doing that I shall see what has to be done at our
+place. I don't know whether the walls are standing, or whether it will
+have to be entirely rebuilt, and I must arrange with some builder to to
+go over from here with me, and take my instructions as to what must be
+done."
+
+On the following day the party set sail for Venice, where they arrived
+without adventure. Preparations were at once begun for the marriage of
+Maria with Rufino Giustiniani, and six weeks later the wedding ceremony
+took place. Francis did not go to sea until this was over, for when he
+spoke of a fresh voyage, a short time after their return, Maria
+declared that she would not be married unless he remained to be
+present.
+
+"You have got me out of all my scrapes hitherto, Francisco, and you
+must see me safely through this."
+
+As Signor Polani also declared that it was not to be thought of, that
+Francis should leave until after the marriage, he was obliged to remain
+for it. He was glad, however, when it was over, for he found the time
+on shore more tedious than usual. The girls were taken up with the
+preparations for the ceremony, and visitors were constantly coming and
+going, and the house was not like itself.
+
+But even when the marriage was over, he was forced to remain some time
+longer in Venice. The Genoese fleets were keeping the sea, and Pisani
+had not, since the battle of Antium, succeeded in coming up with them.
+The consequence was that commerce was at a standstill, for the risk of
+capture was so great that the merchants ceased to send their ships to
+sea.
+
+"The profit would not repay us for the risk, Francisco," the merchant
+said one day when they were talking over it. "If only one cargo in ten
+fell into their hands the profit off the other nine would be swept
+away; but as I see that you are longing to be afloat again, you can, if
+you like, join one of the state galleys which start next week to
+reinforce Pisani's fleet.
+
+"The last time Pisani wrote to me he said how glad he should be to have
+you with him; and after your service at Antium, I have no doubt
+whatever that I could procure for you a post as second in command in
+one of the ships. What do you say?"
+
+"I should certainly like it, signor, greatly; but, as you said before,
+it would be a mere waste of time for me to take service with the state,
+when I am determined upon the vocation of a merchant."
+
+"I did say that, Francis, and meant it at the time; but at present
+trade is, as you see, at a standstill, so you would not be losing time,
+and, in the next place, it is always an advantage, even to a trader, to
+stand well with the state. Here in Venice all the great merchants are
+of noble family, and trade is no bar to occupying the highest offices
+of the state. Many of our doges have been merchants; while merchants
+are often soldiers, diplomatists, or governors, as the state requires
+their services.
+
+"You have already, you see, obtained considerable benefit by the action
+at Antium. I do not say that you would derive any direct benefit, even
+were you to distinguish yourself again as highly as on that occasion.
+Still, it is always well to gain the consideration of your fellows, and
+to be popular with the people. Therefore, if you would like to take
+service with the state until this affair is decided with Genoa, and the
+seas are again open to our ships, I think it will be advantageous to
+you rather than not."
+
+"Then, with your permission I will certainly do so, signor," Francis
+said. "Of course I should prefer to go as an officer on board one of
+the ships; but if not, I will go as a volunteer."
+
+"You need not fear about that, Francis. With my influence, and that of
+the Giustiniani, and the repute you have gained for yourself, you may
+be sure of an appointment. Rufino would have commanded one of the ships
+had it not been for his marriage."
+
+Rufino Giustiniani had indeed been most warm in his expressions of
+gratitude to Francis, to whom the whole family had shown the greatest
+attention, giving him many presents as a proof of their goodwill and
+gratitude.
+
+"I am quite jealous of your English friend," Rufino had said one day to
+Maria. "I do believe, Maria, that you care for him more than you do for
+me. It is lucky for me that he is not two or three years older."
+
+Maria laughed.
+
+"I do care for him dearly; and if he had been, as you say, older and
+had fallen in love with me, I can't say how it would have been. You
+must acknowledge, it would be very hard to say no to a man who keeps on
+saving you from frightful peril; but then, you see, a girl can't fall
+in love with a man who does not fall in love with her.
+
+"Francisco is so different from us Venetians. He always says just what
+he thinks, and never pays anyone even the least bit of a compliment.
+How can you fall in love with a man like that? Of course you can love
+him like a brother--and I do love Francisco as if he were my
+brother--but I don't think we should have got further than that, if he
+had been ever so old."
+
+"And does Francis never pay you compliments, Giulia?"
+
+"Never!" Giulia said decidedly. "It would be hateful of him if he did."
+
+"But Maria doesn't object to compliments, Giulia. She looks for them as
+if they were her daily bread--
+
+"Don't you, Maria--
+
+"You will have to learn to put up with them soon, Giulia, for you will
+be out in society now, and the young men will crowd round your chair,
+just as they have done round that of this little flirt, your sister."
+
+"I shall have to put up with it, I suppose," Giulia said quietly, "just
+as one puts up with other annoyances. But I should certainly never get
+to care for anyone who thinks so little of me, as to believe that I
+could be pleased by being addressed in such terms."
+
+"From which I gather," Giustiniani said, smiling, "that this English
+lad's bluntness of speech pleases you more than it does Maria?"
+
+"It pleases Maria, too," Giulia said, "though she may choose to say
+that it doesn't. And I don't think it quite right to discuss him at
+all, when we all owe him as much as we do."
+
+Giustiniani glanced at Maria and gave a little significant nod.
+
+"I do not think Giulia regards Francisco in quite the brotherly way
+that you do, Maria," he whispered presently to her.
+
+"Perhaps not," Maria answered. "You see, she had not fallen in love
+with you before she met him. But I do not know. Giulia seldom speaks of
+him when we are alone, and if she did, you don't suppose I should tell
+you my sister's secrets, sir?"
+
+The day after his conversation with Francis, Polani handed him his
+nomination as second in command of the Pluto, which he had obtained
+that morning from the seignory.
+
+"You will be glad to hear that it is in this ship that Matteo also
+sails," for Matteo had come home for his brother's wedding.
+
+"I am very glad of that," Francis said. "I wish that poor Giuseppi was
+also here to go with me. I shall miss him terribly. He was a most
+faithful and devoted follower."
+
+"I have already sent orders, to my agent in Tunis, to spare no pains in
+discovering to whom the crew of the Naxos were sold. It is unfortunate
+that so many other captives were sold at the same time, as it will make
+it so much more difficult to trace our men. Those purchasing are not
+likely to know more than their first names, and may not even take the
+trouble to find out those, but may give them the first appellation that
+comes to hand. Therefore he has to find out who are now the masters of
+the whole of the captives sold at the same time, and then to pursue his
+investigations until he discovers the identity of the men he is looking
+for. Once he has found this, I will promise you there will be no delay.
+I have ordered him to make the best bargain in each case he can, but
+that at any rate he is to buy every one of them, whatever it may cost.
+
+"I have sent him the personal descriptions of each man of the boat's
+crew, as given to me by their friends and relatives here, as this will
+be an assistance in his search. If, for instance, he hears of a
+Christian slave named Giuseppi living with a master some hundreds of
+miles in the interior, the fact that this man is middle aged will show
+at once that he was not the Giuseppi, age 20, of whom he is in search.
+I have particularly impressed upon him, in my letter, that we were
+especially anxious for the rescue of the captain, and the young man
+Giuseppi, so I hope that by the time you return from the voyage, I may
+have received some news of them."
+
+Matteo was greatly pleased when he heard that he was going to sail
+under Francis.
+
+"I would rather that we had both been volunteers," Francis said. "It
+seems absurd my being appointed second officer, while you as yet have
+no official position."
+
+"I am not in the least bit in the world jealous, Francisco. With the
+exception of taking part in the fight at Antium, I have had no
+experience whatever, while you have been going through all sorts of
+adventures for the last two years, and always have come out of them
+marvellously well."
+
+An hour after Matteo left him, a retainer of the family brought Francis
+a letter from Signor Giustiniani, inviting him to come to his house
+that evening, as many of Matteo's comrades on board the Pluto would be
+present. On Francis going to the palace he found assembled, not only
+the young men who would be Matteo's comrades as volunteers, but also
+the captain and other officers of the ship; and to them Signor
+Giustiniani personally presented Francis, while Rufino and Matteo did
+all they could to ensure the heartiest welcome for him, by telling
+everyone how greatly they were indebted to him, and how gallantly he
+had behaved on several occasions.
+
+Many of the young men he already knew as Matteo's friends, and by them
+he was received with the greatest cordiality; but his reception by the
+captain, and one or two of the other officers, was much more cool. The
+captain, whose name was Carlo Bottini, was a distant connection of the
+Mocenigo family, and was therefore already prejudiced against Francis.
+The coolness of the other officers was due to the fact that Francis, a
+foreigner and several years junior to themselves, had been placed in
+command over their heads.
+
+
+
+Chapter 15: The Battle Of Pola.
+
+
+The squadron, consisting of four galleys, sailed for Cyprus; where
+Pisani had just endeavoured, without success, to expel the Genoese from
+Famagosta. It was towards the end of August that they effected a
+junction with his fleet. Pisani received Francis with great warmth,
+and, in the presence of many officers, remarked that he was glad to see
+that the republic was, at last, appointing men for their merits, and
+not, as heretofore, allowing family connection and influence to be the
+chief passport to their favour.
+
+For two months the fleet sailed among the islands of the Levant, and
+along the shores of Greece, Istria, and Dalmatia; hoping to find the
+Genoese fleet, but altogether without success. In November, when they
+were on the coast of Istria, winter set in with extraordinary severity,
+and the frost was intense. Pisani wrote to his government asking
+permission to bring the fleet into Venice until the spring. The
+seignory, however, refused his request, for they feared that, were it
+known that their fleet had come into port for the winter, the Genoese
+would take advantage of its absence to seize upon some of the islands
+belonging to Venice, and to induce the inhabitants of the cities of
+Istria and Dalmatia, always ready for revolt, to declare against her.
+
+The first indications of the winter were more than verified. The cold
+was altogether extraordinary; and out of the nineteen galleys of
+Pisani, only six were fit to take the sea, with their full complement
+of men, when the spring of 1379 began. Many of the vessels had been
+disabled by storms. Numbers of the men had died, more had been sent
+home invalided, and it was only by transferring the men from the other
+vessels to the six in the best condition, that the crews of the latter
+were made up to their full strength.
+
+As soon as the terrible frost broke, Pisani received a reinforcement of
+twelve ships from Venice, these being, for the most part, built and
+equipped at the cost of his personal friends, Polani having contributed
+two of the number. With the eighteen sail, Pisani put to sea to
+prosecute a fresh search for the Genoese admiral, Doria, and his fleet.
+
+The Pluto was one of the six vessels which remained in good condition
+at the end of the winter, thanks, in no small degree, to the energy and
+care which Francis had bestowed in looking after the welfare of the
+crew. In the most bitter weather, he had himself landed with the boats,
+to see that firewood was cut and brought off in abundance, not only for
+the officers' cabins, but to warm that portion of the ship inhabited by
+the men. Knowing that Polani would not grudge any sum which might be
+required, he obtained from his agents ample supplies of warm clothing
+and bedding for the men, occupying himself incessantly for their
+welfare, while the captain and other officers passed their time in
+their warm and comfortable cabins. Francis induced Matteo, and several
+of his comrades, to brave the weather as he did, and to exert
+themselves for the benefit of the men; and the consequence was, that
+while but few of the other ships retained enough men to raise their
+sails in case of emergency, the strength of the crew of the Pluto was
+scarcely impaired at the termination of the winter.
+
+The admiral, on paying a visit of inspection to the ship, was greatly
+struck with the contrast which the appearance of the crew afforded to
+that of the other galleys, and warmly complimented the commander on the
+condition of his men. The captain received the praise as if it was
+entirely due to himself, and said not a single word of the share which
+Francis had had in bringing it about. Matteo was most indignant at this
+injustice towards his friend, and managed that, through a relative
+serving in the admiral's own ship, a true report of the case should
+come to Pisani's ears.
+
+Francis was in no way troubled at the captain's appropriation of the
+praise due to himself. There had not, from the time he sailed, been any
+cordiality between Francis and the other officers. These had been
+selected for the position solely from family influence, and none of
+them were acquainted with the working of a ship.
+
+In those days, not only in Venice but in other countries, naval battles
+were fought by soldiers rather than sailors. Nobles and knights, with
+their retainers, embarked on board a ship for the purpose of fighting,
+and of fighting only, the management of the vessel being carried on
+entirely by sailors under their own officers. Thus, neither the
+commander of the force on board the galley, nor any of his officers,
+with the exception of Francis, knew anything whatever about the
+management of the ship, nor were capable of giving orders to the crew.
+Among the latter were some who had sailed with Francis in his first two
+voyages, and these gave so excellent a report of him to the rest, that
+they were from the first ready to obey his orders as promptly as those
+of their own sub-officer.
+
+Francis concerned himself but little with the ill will that was shown
+him by the officers. He knew that it arose from jealousy, not only of
+the promotion he, a foreigner and a junior in years, had received over
+them, but of the fact that he had already received the thanks of the
+republic for the services he had rendered, and stood high in the favour
+of the admiral, who never lost an opportunity of showing the interest
+he had in him. Had the hostility shown itself in any offensive degree
+Francis would at once have resented it; but Matteo, and some of those
+on board, who had been his comrades in the fencing rooms, had given
+such reports of his powers with his weapons, that even those most
+opposed to him thought it prudent to observe a demeanour of outward
+politeness towards him.
+
+For three months the search for the Genoese fleet was ineffectual. A
+trip had been made along the coast of Apulia, and the fleet had
+returned to Pola with a large convoy of merchant ships loaded with
+grain, when on the 7th of May Doria appeared off the port, with
+twenty-five sail.
+
+But Pisani was now by no means anxious to fight. Zeno was away with a
+portion of the fleet, and although he had received reinforcements, he
+numbered but twenty-one vessels, and a number of his men were laid up
+with sickness. The admiral, however, was not free to follow out the
+dictates of his own opinions. The Venetians had a mischievous habit,
+which was afterwards adopted by the French republic, of fettering their
+commanders by sea and land by appointing civilian commissioners, or, as
+they were termed in Venice, proveditors, who had power to overrule the
+nominal commander. When, therefore, Pisani assembled a council of war,
+and informed them of his reasons for wishing to remain on the defensive
+until the return of Zeno, he was overruled by the proveditors, who not
+only announced themselves unanimously in favour of battle, but sneered
+at Pisani's prudence as being the result of cowardice. Pisani in his
+indignation drew his sword, and would have attacked the proveditors on
+the spot, had he not been restrained by his captains.
+
+However, the council decided upon instant battle, and Pisani was
+forced, by the rules of the service, at once to carry their decision
+into effect. Ascending the poop of his galley, he addressed in a loud
+voice the crews of the ships gathered around him.
+
+"Remember, my brethren, that those who will now face you, are the same
+whom you vanquished with so much glory on the Roman shore. Do not let
+the name of Luciano Doria terrify you. It is not the names of
+commanders that will decide the conflict, but Venetian hearts and
+Venetian hands. Let him that loves Saint Mark follow me."
+
+The men received the address with a shout, and as soon as the
+commanders had regained their galleys, the fleet moved out to attack
+the enemy. The fight was a furious one, each vessel singling out an
+opponent and engaging her hand to hand.
+
+Carlo Bottini was killed early in the fight, and Francis succeeded to
+the command. His galley had grappled with one of the largest of the
+Genoese vessels, and a desperate conflict went on. Sometimes the
+Venetians gained a footing on the deck of the Genoese, sometimes they
+were driven back, and the Genoese in turn poured on board, but no
+decisive advantage was gained on either side after an hour's fighting.
+The Genoese crew was numerically much stronger than that of the Pluto,
+and although Francis, with Matteo and his comrades, headed their men
+and cheered them on, they could make no impression on the ranks of the
+enemy.
+
+Suddenly, the Genoese threw off the grapnels that attached the two
+ships, and hoisting their sails, sheered off. Francis looked round to
+see the cause of this sudden manoeuvre, and perceived for the first
+time that the Genoese vessels were all in flight, with the Venetians
+pressing closely upon them. Sails were at once hoisted, and the Pluto
+joined in the chase.
+
+But the flight was a feigned one, and it was only designed to throw the
+Venetian rank into confusion. After sailing for two miles, the Genoese
+suddenly turned, and fell upon their pursuers as they came up in
+straggling order.
+
+The result was decisive. Many of the Venetian ships were captured
+before the rest came up to take part in the battle. Others were hemmed
+in by numerous foes. Pisani, after fighting until he saw that all was
+lost, made the signal for the ships to withdraw from the conflict, and
+he himself, with six galleys, succeeded in fighting his way through the
+enemy's fleet, and gained a refuge in the port of Parenzo.
+
+All the rest were taken. From seven to eight hundred Venetians perished
+in the fight, two thousand four hundred were taken prisoners, twelve
+commanders were killed, and five captured. The Genoese losses were also
+severe, and Doria himself was among the slain, having been killed by a
+spear thrust by Donato Zeno, commander of one of the galleys, almost at
+the moment of victory.
+
+The Pluto had defended herself, for a long time, against the attacks of
+three of the Genoese galleys, and had repeatedly endeavoured to force
+her way out of the throng, but the Genoese held her fast with their
+grapnels, and at last the greater part of her crew were driven down
+below, and Francis, seeing the uselessness of further resistance,
+ordered the little group, who were now completely pent in by the
+Genoese, to lower their weapons. All were more or less severely
+wounded, and were bleeding from sword cuts and thrusts.
+
+"This is an evil day for Venice," Matteo said, as, having been deprived
+of their weapons, the prisoners were thrust below. "I heard the Genoese
+say that only six of our galleys have escaped, all the rest have been
+taken. We were the last ship to surrender, that's a comfort anyhow."
+
+"Now, Matteo, before you do anything else, let me bind up your wounds.
+You are bleeding in two or three places."
+
+"And you are bleeding from something like a dozen, Francisco, so you
+had better let me play the doctor first."
+
+"The captain is always served last, so do as you are told, and strip
+off your doublet.
+
+"Now, gentlemen," he said, turning to the other officers, "let each of
+us do what we can to dress the wounds of others. We can expect no care
+from the Genoese leeches, who will have their hands full, for a long
+time to come, with their own men. There are some among us who will soon
+bleed to death, unless their wounds are staunched. Let us, therefore,
+take the most serious cases first, and so on in rotation until all have
+been attended to."
+
+It was fortunate for them that in the hold, in which they were
+confined, there were some casks of water; for, for hours the Genoese
+paid no attention whatever to their prisoners, and the wounded were
+beginning to suffer agonies of thirst, when the barrels were
+fortunately discovered. The head of one was knocked in, and some
+shallow tubs, used for serving the water to the crew, filled, and the
+men knelt down and drank by turns from these. Many were too enfeebled
+by their wounds to rise, and their thirst was assuaged by dipping
+articles of clothing into the water, and letting the fluid from these
+run into their mouths.
+
+It was not until next morning that the prisoners were ordered to come
+on deck. Many had died during the night. Others were too weak to obey
+the summons. The names of the rest were taken, and not a little
+surprise was expressed, by the Genoese officers, at the extreme youth
+of the officer in command of the Pluto.
+
+"I was only the second in command," Francis said in answer to their
+questions. "Carlo Bottini was in command of the ship, but he was killed
+at the commencement of the fight."
+
+"But how is it that one so young came to be second? You must belong to
+some great family to have been thus pushed forward above men so much
+your senior.
+
+"It was a wise choice nevertheless," the commander of one of the
+galleys which had been engaged with the Pluto said, "for it is but
+justice to own that no ship was better handled, or fought, in the
+Venetian fleet. They were engaged with us first, and for over an hour
+they fought us on fair terms, yielding no foot of ground, although we
+had far more men than they carried. I noticed this youth fighting
+always in the front line with the Venetians, and marvelled at the
+strength and dexterity with which he used his weapons, and afterwards,
+when there were three of us around him, he fought like a boar
+surrounded by hounds. I am sure he is a brave youth, and well worthy
+the position he held, to whatsoever he owed it."
+
+"I belong to no noble family of Venice," Francis said. "My name is
+Francis Hammond, and my parents are English."
+
+"You are not a mercenary, I trust?" the Genoese captain asked
+earnestly.
+
+"I am not," Francis replied. "I am a citizen of Venice, and my name is
+inscribed in her books, as my comrades will vouch."
+
+"Right glad am I that it is so," the Genoese said, "for Pietro Doria,
+who is now, by the death of his brother, in chief command, has ordered
+that every mercenary found among the prisoners shall today be slain."
+
+"It is a brutal order," Francis said fearlessly, "whosoever may have
+given it! A mercenary taken in fair fight has as much right to be held
+for ransom or fair exchange as any other prisoner; and if your admiral
+thus breaks the laws of war, there is not a free lance, from one end of
+Italy to the other, but will take it up as a personal quarrel."
+
+The Genoese frowned at the boldness with which Francis spoke, but at
+heart agreed in the sentiments he expressed; for among the Genoese
+officers, generally, there was a feeling that this brutal execution in
+cold blood was an impolitic, as well as a disgraceful deed.
+
+The officers were now placed in the fore hold of the ship, the crew
+being confined in the after hold. Soon afterwards, they knew by the
+motion of the vessel that sail had been put on her.
+
+"So we are on our way to a Genoese prison, Francisco," Matteo said. "We
+had a narrow escape of it before, but this time I suppose it is our
+fate."
+
+"There is certainly no hope of rescue, Matteo. It is too early, as yet,
+to say whether there is any hope of escape. The prospect looked darker
+when I was in the hands of Ruggiero, but I managed to get away. Then I
+was alone and closely guarded, now we have in the ship well nigh two
+hundred friends; prisoners like ourselves, it is true, but still to be
+counted on. Then, too, the Genoese are no doubt so elated with their
+triumph, that they are hardly likely to keep a very vigilant guard over
+us. Altogether, I should say that the chances are in our favour. Were I
+sure that the Pluto is sailing alone, I should be very confident that
+we might retake her, but probably the fifteen captured ships are
+sailing in company, and would at once come to the aid of their comrades
+here, directly they saw any signs of a conflict going on, and we could
+hardly hope to recapture the ship without making some noise over it."
+
+"I should think not," Matteo agreed.
+
+"Then again, Matteo, even if we find it impossible to get at the crew,
+and with them to recapture the ship, some chance may occur by which you
+and I may manage to make our escape."
+
+"If you say so, Francisco, I at once believe it. You got us all out of
+the scrape down at Girgenti. You got Polani's daughters out of a worse
+scrape when they were captives on San Nicolo; and got yourself out of
+the worst scrape of all when you escaped from the grip of Ruggiero
+Mocenigo. Therefore, when you say that there is a fair chance of escape
+out of this business, I look upon it as almost as good as done."
+
+"It is a long way from that, Matteo," Francis laughed. "Still, I hope
+we may manage it somehow. I have the greatest horror of a Genoese
+prison, for it is notorious that they treat their prisoners of war
+shamefully, and I certainly do not mean to enter one, if there is the
+slightest chance of avoiding it. But for today, Matteo, I shall not
+even begin to think about it. In the first place, my head aches with
+the various thumps it has had; in the second, I feel weak from loss of
+blood; and in the third, my wounds smart most amazingly."
+
+"So do mine," Matteo agreed. "In addition, I am hungry, for the bread
+they gave us this morning was not fit for dogs, although I had to eat
+it, as it was that or nothing."
+
+"And now, Matteo, I shall try to get a few hours' sleep. I did not
+close my eyes last night, from the pain of my wounds, but I think I
+might manage to drop off now."
+
+The motion of the vessel aided the effect of the bodily weakness that
+Francis was feeling, and in spite of the pain of his wounds he soon
+went off into a sound sleep. Once or twice he woke, but hearing no
+voices or movement, he supposed his companions were all asleep, and
+again went off, until a stream of light coming in from the opening of
+the hatchway thoroughly roused him. Matteo, who was lying by his side,
+also woke and stretched himself, and there was a general movement among
+the ten young men who were their comrades in misfortune.
+
+"Here is your breakfast," a voice from above the hatchway said, and a
+basket containing bread and a bucket of water was lowered by ropes.
+
+"Breakfast!" Matteo said. "Why, it is not two hours since we
+breakfasted last."
+
+"I suspect it is twenty-two, Matteo. We have had a very long sleep, and
+I feel all the better of it. Now, let us divide the liberal breakfast
+our captors have given us; fortunately there is just enough light
+coming down from those scuttles to enable us to do so fairly."
+
+There was a general laugh, from his comrades, at the cheerful way in
+which Francis spoke. Only one of them had been an officer on the Pluto.
+The rest were, like Matteo, volunteers of good families. There was a
+good deal of light-hearted jesting over their meal. When it was over,
+Francis said:
+
+"Now let us hold a council of war."
+
+"You are better off than Pisani was, anyhow," one of the young men
+said, "for you are not hampered with proveditors, and anything that
+your captaincy may suggest will, you may be sure, receive our assent."
+
+"I am your captain no longer," Francis replied. "We are all prisoners
+now, and equal, and each one has a free voice and a free vote."
+
+"Then I give my voice and vote at once, Francisco," Matteo said, "to
+the proposal that you remain our captain, and that we obey you, as
+cheerfully and willingly as we should if you were on the poop of the
+Pluto, instead of being in the hold. In the first place, at Carlo's
+death you became our captain by right, so long as we remain together;
+and in the second place you have more experience than all of us put
+together, and a very much better head than most of us, myself included.
+
+"Therefore, comrades, I vote that Messer Francisco Hammond be still
+regarded as our captain, and obeyed as such."
+
+There was a general chorus of assent, for the energy which Francis had
+displayed throughout the trying winter, and the manner in which he had
+led the crew during the desperate fighting, had won for him the regard
+and the respect of them all.
+
+"Very well, then," Francis said. "If you wish it so I will remain your
+leader, but we will nevertheless hold our council of war. The question
+which I shall first present to your consideration is, which is the best
+way to set about retaking the Pluto?"
+
+There was a burst of laughter among the young men. The matter of fact
+way in which Francis proposed, what seemed to them an impossibility,
+amused them immensely.
+
+"I am quite in earnest," Francis went on, when the laughter had
+subsided. "If it is possibly to be done, I mean to retake the Pluto,
+and I have very little doubt that it is possible, if we set about it in
+the right way. In the first place, we may take it as absolutely certain
+that we very considerably outnumber the Genoese on board. They must
+have suffered in the battle almost as much as we did, and have had
+nearly as many killed and wounded. In the second place, if Doria
+intends to profit by his victory, he must have retained a fair amount
+of fighting men on board each of his galleys, and, weakened as his
+force was by the losses of the action, he can spare but a comparatively
+small force on board each of the fifteen captured galleys. I should
+think it probable that there are not more than fifty men in charge of
+the Pluto, and we number fully three times that force. The mere fact
+that they let down our food to us by ropes, instead of bringing it
+down, showed a consciousness of weakness."
+
+"What you say is quite true," Paolo Parucchi, the other officer of the
+Pluto, said; "but they are fifty well-armed men, and we are a hundred
+and fifty without arms, and shut down in the hold, to which must be
+added the fact that we are cut off from our men, and our men from us.
+They are, as it were, without a head to plan, while we are without arms
+to strike."
+
+A murmur of approval was heard among some of the young men.
+
+"I do not suppose that there are no difficulties in our way," Francis
+said quietly; "or that we have only, next time the hatch is opened, to
+say to those above, 'Gentlemen of Genoa, we are more numerous than you
+are, and we therefore request you to change places with us
+immediately.' All I have asserted, so far, is that we are sufficiently
+strong to retake the ship, if we get the opportunity. What we have now
+to settle, is how that opportunity is to come about.
+
+"To begin with, has anyone a dagger or knife which has escaped the eye
+of our searchers?"
+
+No one replied.
+
+"I was afraid that nothing had escaped the vigilance of those who
+appropriated our belongings. As, however, we have no weapons or tools,
+the next thing is to see what there is, in the hold, which can be
+turned to account. It is fortunate we are on board the Pluto, instead
+of being transferred to another ship, as we already know all about her.
+There are some iron bolts driven in along a beam at the farther end.
+They have been used, I suppose, at some time or other for hanging the
+carcasses of animals from. Let us see whether there is any chance of
+getting some of them out."
+
+The iron pegs, however, were so firmly driven into the beam, that all
+their efforts failed to move them in the slightest.
+
+"We will give that up for the present," Francis said, "and look round
+for something more available."
+
+But with the exception of the water casks, the closest search failed to
+find anything in the hold.
+
+"I do not know whether the iron hoops of a cask would be of any use,"
+Matteo said.
+
+"Certainly they would be of use, if we get them off, Matteo."
+
+"There is no difficulty about that," one of the others said, examining
+the casks closely. "This is an empty one, and the hoops seem quite
+loose."
+
+In a few minutes, four iron hoops were taken off the cask.
+
+"After all," Matteo said, "they cannot be of much use. The iron is rust
+eaten, and they would break in our hands before going into any one."
+
+"They would certainly be useless as daggers, Matteo, but I think that
+with care they will act as saws. Break off a length of about a foot.
+
+"Now straighten it, and tear a piece off your doublet and wrap it round
+and round one end, so that you can hold it. Now just try it on the edge
+of a beam."
+
+"It certainly cuts," Matteo announced after a trial, "but not very
+fast."
+
+"So that it cuts at all, we may be very well content," Francis said
+cheerfully. "We have got a week, at least, to work in; and if the wind
+is not favourable, we may have a month. Let us therefore break the
+hoops up into pieces of the right length. We must use them carefully,
+for we may expect to have many breakages."
+
+"What next, captain?"
+
+"Our object will, of course, be to cut through into the main hold,
+which separates us from the crew. There we shall probably find plenty
+of weapons. But to use our saws, we must first find a hole in the
+bulkhead. First of all, then, let there be a strict search made for a
+knothole, or any other hole through the bulkhead."
+
+It was too dark for eyes to be of much use, but hands were run all over
+the bulkhead. But no hole, however small, was discovered.
+
+"It is clear, then," Francis said, "that the first thing to do is to
+cut out some of those iron bolts. Pick out those that are nearest to
+the lower side of the beam, say three of them. There are twelve of us.
+That will give four to each bolt, and we can relieve each other every
+few minutes. Remember, it is patience that is required, and not
+strength."
+
+The work was at once begun. The young men had, by this time, fully
+entered into the spirit of the attempt. The quiet and businesslike way,
+in which their leader set about it, convinced them that he at least had
+a firm belief that the work was possible; and there was a hope, even if
+but a remote one, of avoiding the dreaded dungeons of Genoa.
+
+The work was slow, and two or three of the strips of iron were at first
+broken, by the too great eagerness of their holders; but when it was
+found that, by using them lightly, the edges gradually cut their way
+into the wood, the work went on regularly. The Pluto had been hurriedly
+constructed, and any timbers that were available in the emergency were
+utilized. Consequently much soft wood, that at other times would never
+have been found in the state dockyards, was put into her. The beam at
+which they were working was of soft timber, and a fine dust fell
+steadily, as the rough iron was sawed backward and forward upon it.
+
+Two cuts were made under each bolt, wide at the base and converging
+towards it. The saws were kept going the whole day, and although the
+progress was slow, it was fast enough to encourage them; and just as
+the light, that came through the scuttle, faded away; three of the
+young men hung their weight upon one of the bolts, and the wood beneath
+it, already almost severed, gave; and a suppressed cry of satisfaction
+announced that one bolt was free.
+
+The pieces of iron were two feet long, and were intended for some other
+purpose, but had been driven in when, on loading the ship, some strong
+pegs on which to hang carcasses were required. They were driven about
+three inches into the beam, and could have been cut out with an
+ordinary saw in two or three minutes.
+
+"Try the others," Francis said. "As many of you get hold of them as can
+put your hands on."
+
+The effort was made, and the other two bolts were got out. They had
+been roughly sharpened at the end, and were fully an inch across.
+
+"They do not make bad weapons," Matteo said.
+
+"It is not as weapons that we want them, Matteo. They will be more
+useful to us than any weapons, except, indeed, a good axe. We shall
+want at least three more. Therefore, I propose that we continue our
+work at once. We will divide into watches now. It will be twelve hours
+before we get our allowance of bread again, therefore that will give
+three hours' work, and nine hours' sleep to each. They will be just
+setting the first watch on deck, and, as we shall hear them changed, it
+will give us a good idea how the time is passing."
+
+"I am ready to work all night, myself," Matteo said. "At first I had
+not much faith in what we were doing; but now that we have got three of
+these irons out, I am ready to go on working until I drop."
+
+"You will find, Matteo, that your arms will ache, so that you cannot
+hold them up, before the end of the three hours. Sawing like that, with
+your arms above your head, is most fatiguing; and even the short spells
+of work we have been having made my arms ache. However, each must do as
+much as he can in his three hours; and as we are working in the dark,
+we must work slowly and carefully, or we shall break our tools."
+
+"Fortunately, we can get more hoops off now if we want them," Matteo
+said. "With these irons we can wrench them off the sound casks, if
+necessary."
+
+"Yes; I did not think of that, Matteo. You see we are already getting a
+stock of tools. Another thing is, with the point of the irons we have
+got off, we can wrench the wood out as fast as we saw it, and the saws
+will not work so stiffly as they did before. But we must not do that
+till the morning, for any sound like the breaking of wood might be
+heard by the watch, when everything is quiet."
+
+Although all worked their best, they made but slight progress in the
+dark, and each worker was forced to take frequent rests, for the
+fatigue of working with their arms above their heads was excessive. As
+soon, however, as the light began to steal down, and the movement above
+head told them that the crew were at work washing the decks, the points
+of the irons were used to wrench away the wood between the saw cuts;
+and the work then proceeded briskly, as they relieved each other every
+few minutes.
+
+At last, to their intense satisfaction, three more irons were got out.
+
+"If anyone had told me," one of the party said, "that a man's arms
+could hurt as much as mine do, from working a few hours, I should have
+disbelieved him."
+
+There was a chorus of assent, for none were accustomed to hard manual
+labour, and the pain in their arms was excessive.
+
+"Let us have half an hour's rest, Francis, before you issue your next
+orders. I shall want that, at least, before I feel that I have any
+power in my arms at all."
+
+"We will have an hour's rest, Matteo, if you like. Before that time
+they will be sending us down our food, and after we have breakfasted we
+can set to work again."
+
+"Breakfast!" one of the young men groaned. "I cannot call that black
+bread and water breakfast. When I think of the breakfasts I have eaten,
+when I think of the dishes I have refused to eat, because they were not
+cooked to perfection, I groan over my folly in those days, and my
+enormous stupidity in ever volunteering to come to sea."
+
+"I should recommend you all," Francis said, "to spend the next hour in
+rubbing and squeezing the muscles of your neighbours' arms and
+shoulders. It is the best way for taking out stiffness, and Giuseppi
+used to give me relief that way, when I was stiff with fencing."
+
+The idea was adopted; and while the rest were at work in the manner he
+suggested, Francis, taking one of the irons, went to the bulkhead. One
+by one he tried the planks, from the floor boards to the beams above.
+
+"Well, captain, what is your report?" Matteo asked as he joined the
+rest.
+
+"My report is a most favourable one," Francis said. "By great good
+luck, the planks are nailed from the other side against the beams both
+above and below."
+
+"What difference does that make, Francisco?"
+
+"All the difference in the world. Had they been nailed on this side,
+there would have been nothing for it but to carry out our original
+plan--that is, to make holes through the planks with these irons, large
+enough for the saws to go through, and then to saw the wood out from
+hole to hole. As it is, I believe that with five minutes' work we could
+wrench a plank away. We have only to push the points of the irons up,
+between the beams and the planks, and use them as levers. The nails
+will be strong, indeed, if those irons, with two of us at each, would
+not wrench them out."
+
+The young men all leapt to their feet, pains and aches quite forgotten
+in the excitement of this unexpected news, and six of them seized hold
+of the irons.
+
+"Gently!" Francis said. "You must remember, there may be people going
+down there at present, getting up stores. Before we venture to disturb
+a plank, we must make the hole sufficiently large for us to spy
+through. This will be a very easy affair, in comparison with making a
+hole large enough for a saw to go through. Still, you will find it will
+take some time. However, we had better wait, as we agreed, till we have
+had our food."
+
+
+
+Chapter 16: The Recapture Of The Pluto.
+
+
+As soon as the hatch had been removed, and the bread and water lowered
+down, and they heard heavy weights again laid on the hatch, two of the
+party took one of the irons and began to bore a hole, while the others
+proceeded to eat their food. Several times, the workers had to be
+relieved. The iron penetrated comparatively easily for a short
+distance, but beyond that the difficulty greatly increased; and it was
+fully four hours before one of the workers, applying his eye to the
+hole, said that he could see a gleam of light through.
+
+In another quarter of an hour, the orifice was sufficiently enlarged to
+enable a view to be obtained of the central hold. It was comparatively
+light there, for the hatch was off, and they could see two men at work,
+opening a cask for some stores that were required.
+
+"We must wait till it gets dark now," Francis said. "I do not think
+that we shall make much noise, for the nails will be likely to draw
+quietly; but we had better choose the time between nightfall and the
+hour for the crew to turn in, as there will be a trampling of feet on
+deck, and talking and singing, which would prevent any slight noise we
+might make, being heard."
+
+"The difficulty will be to force the ends of the iron down, between the
+beams and the planks, so as to give us a purchase," Matteo said.
+
+"I think we shall be able to manage that," Francis replied. "The beams
+are put in in the rough, and if we hunt carefully, I think we shall
+find a plank where we can get the irons in far enough, between it and
+the beam, to give us a hold."
+
+After a careful examination, they fixed upon a plank to operate upon,
+and, leaving one of the irons there, so that they could find it in the
+dark, they lay down to sleep, or sat talking until it was dark. Before
+this, a glance, through the peephole, showed them that the hatch had
+been placed over the hatchway of the next hold, so that there was
+little fear of anyone coming down, unless something special was
+required.
+
+"Now I think we can begin," Francis said, at last. "Do you, Paolo
+Parucchi, take one of the irons, I will take another, Matteo a third.
+We cannot possibly work more than three at the foot of a plank, though
+perhaps, when we have fixed them and put on the strain, two or three
+more hands may get at the irons; but first we will try with three, and,
+unless the nails have got a wonderfully firm hold, we shall certainly
+be able to draw them."
+
+It took some time to fix the irons, to the best advantage, between the
+planks and the beam.
+
+"Are you both ready?" Francis asked at last. "Then pull."
+
+As Francis had anticipated, the levers did their work, and the nails
+yielded a little.
+
+"It has sprung half an inch," Francis said, feeling. "Now you keep your
+irons as they are, while I thrust mine down farther. I have got a fresh
+hold. Do you shift yours."
+
+Again the effort was made, and this time the nails drew fully two
+inches. Another effort, and the plank was completely free at the lower
+end.
+
+"Now do you push against it as hard as you can," Francis said, "while I
+get my iron in between it and the beam above."
+
+The upper nails yielded even more easily than those below.
+
+"No farther," Francis said, when they had fairly started them, "or the
+plank will be falling with a crash. We must push from the bottom now,
+until it gives sufficiently far for you to get an iron down each side,
+to prevent its closing again."
+
+"Now," he said, "push the irons higher up. That is right. Now I will
+loosen a bit farther at the top, and then you will be able to get your
+hands in at the bottom to steady it, and prevent its falling when the
+nails are quite drawn."
+
+Another effort, and the plank was free, and, being drawn in, was laid
+down. The delight of those who were standing in the dark, and could
+only judge how matters were going on from Francis's low spoken orders,
+was extreme.
+
+"Can we get through?"
+
+"No," Francis replied. "It will be necessary to remove another plank
+first, but perhaps one of the slighter among you might manage to
+squeeze through, and hold the plank at the back. We shall be able to
+work with more freedom, if we know that there is no danger of its
+falling."
+
+In a few minutes, the second plank was laid beside the first.
+
+"What is to be done next?" Matteo asked.
+
+"We must establish a communication with the sailors. I will take a
+working party of four. Paolo Parucchi, with four others, will relieve
+me. You, Matteo, will with the rest take the last spell. When we have
+entered the next compartment, we will put up the planks again, and
+press the nails in tightly enough to prevent their falling. Should, by
+some chance, anyone descend into the hold while we are working, we
+shall be hidden from their view. At the other end there are a number of
+sacks piled up, and we shall be working behind them."
+
+Francis, and the men he had chosen, made their way to the pile of arms
+they had observed through their peephole, moving with great precaution,
+so as to avoid falling over anything. Here, with some trouble, they
+succeeded in finding a dagger among the heap, and they then felt their
+way on, until they reached the pile of sacks. These were packed to
+within a foot of the deck beams, and there was but just room for them
+to crawl in at the top.
+
+"Whatever you do, do not bump against the beams," Francis said. "Any
+noise of that sort, from below, would at once excite attention. Now do
+you be quiet, while I find a spot to begin upon."
+
+Commencing at a junction of two planks, Francis began, with the dagger,
+to cut a hole of some three or four inches across, but tapering rapidly
+as it went in. After waiting for some ten minutes, he touched the man
+lying next to him, placed his hand on the hole he had begun, and then
+moved aside to allow him to continue the work.
+
+In an hour a hole was made in a two inch plank, and this was soon
+enlarged until it was an inch in diameter. Lying along the side of the
+bulkhead, so as to get his ear to the hole, Francis listened, but could
+hear no sound within. Then he put his mouth to the orifice and asked:
+
+"Are you all asleep there?"
+
+Then he listened again. Some of the men were speaking, and asking each
+other who it was that had suddenly spoken. No one replied; and some of
+them gave vent to angry threats, against whoever it might be who had
+just disturbed them from going off to sleep.
+
+Directly the voices ceased again, Francis said:
+
+"Let us have silence in there. Where is Rinaldo, the boatswain?"
+
+"I am here," a voice replied; "but who is speaking? It sounds like the
+voice of Messer Hammond."
+
+"It is my voice, Rinaldo. We have worked through from the hold at the
+other end of the ship, having removed some of the planks of the
+bulkhead. Now it is for you to do the same. We will pass you some
+daggers through, when we have made this hole a bit larger. You must
+choose one of the planks in the corner, as this will be less likely to
+be observed."
+
+"They will not observe us, Messer Hammond. They never come down here at
+all, but pass our food down in buckets."
+
+"Nevertheless, begin at the plank next to the side," Francis said.
+"Possibly someone may come down before you have finished. You will have
+to remove two planks to get through. I will pass a javelin through. You
+can set to work with it, and bore holes through the plank close to the
+floor; and then, with the dagger, cut away the wood between them. When
+you have done them, set to at the top, close to the beams, and cut the
+two planks through there. There are sacks of grain piled up against
+them on this side, so that there is no fear of your being observed from
+here. The work must be carried on perfectly noiselessly, the men
+relieving each other every few minutes.
+
+"When the planks are cut through, replace them in their former
+positions, and wedge some small pieces of wood in, so that there shall
+be no chance of their falling. You ought to finish the work by
+tomorrow. When you have done it, take no farther step until you get
+orders from me. It would not do to rise now, for we may be surrounded
+by other ships, and if we overpowered the crew, we should at once be
+attacked and recaptured by them. You will, therefore, remain quiet
+until you have orders, whether it be one day or ten. All the arms they
+have taken from us are lying piled here, and when the time comes, we
+shall have no difficulty in overpowering the Genoese, and shall, I
+hope, bring the Pluto safely to anchor in the port of Venice before
+long."
+
+There was a murmur of delight among the sailors, pent up in their close
+quarters. Francis listened a moment, and heard one of the men say:
+
+"What did I tell you? Didn't I tell you that Messer Hammond got us all
+out of a scrape before, when our ship was captured by the Genoese, and
+that I would be bound he would do the same again, if he had but the
+shadow of a chance."
+
+"You did, Pietro, and you have turned out right. That is the sort of
+fellow to have for a captain. He is not like one of those dainty young
+nobles, who don't know one rope's end from another, and who turn up
+their noses at the thought of dirtying their hands. See how he looked
+after us through the winter. I wish we could give a cheer for him, but
+that would never do. But when we are out of this, I will give him the
+loudest shout I ever gave yet.
+
+"Now then, Rinaldo, let us set to work without a moment's delay.
+There's a chance we aren't going to rot in the dungeons of Genoa, after
+all."
+
+Convinced that the work would be carried on in accordance with his
+orders, Francis withdrew his ear from the hole, and, crawling over the
+sacks again, made his way to the pile of arms, felt about until he
+found two javelins, and taking these back, passed them one after the
+other through the hole.
+
+"We have done our share now," he said to his comrades. "Paolo and his
+party will find it a comparatively easy task to enlarge the hole
+sufficiently to pass the daggers through."
+
+The party returned to the other end of the hold, removed the planks,
+and joined their friends. The next watch had arranged to lie down close
+to the planks, so that they could be aroused without waking the others.
+
+They were soon on their feet. Francis explained to Parucchi the
+progress they had made, and the orders that had been given to the
+sailors as to what they were to do.
+
+"When the hole is large enough, pass these five daggers in to the crew,
+and then come back again. I will guide you to the spot, and on my
+return will pick out half a dozen more daggers, in case we want them
+for further work."
+
+When daylight made its way into the hold, Matteo and his watch woke,
+and were astonished to find that all their comrades were quietly
+asleep, and that they had not been awakened. Matteo could not restrain
+his curiosity, but woke Francis:
+
+"Has anything gone wrong, Francis? It is daylight, and Parucchi's
+party, as well as yours, are all asleep, while we have not been
+roused!"
+
+"Everything is going on well, Matteo, and we did not wake you, because
+there was nothing for you to do. We have already passed in knives and
+javelins to the sailors, and they are at work cutting through two
+planks in their bulkhead; after which we shall be able to meet in the
+next hold, arm ourselves, and fall upon the Genoese when the
+opportunity offers."
+
+"That is excellent indeed, Francis; but I wish you had let us do our
+share of the work."
+
+"It did not take us more than two hours, Matteo, to make a hole big
+enough to pass the javelins through, and I should say Parucchi's party
+enlarged it sufficiently to hand in the daggers in another hour; so you
+see, it would have been useless to have aroused you, and the less
+movement we make after they get quiet at night, the better."
+
+"And how long will the sailors be cutting it through, do you think?"
+
+"I should say they would be ready by this time, Matteo, but certainly
+they will be finished some time today."
+
+"Then we shall soon be free!" Matteo exclaimed joyfully.
+
+"That will depend, Matteo. We must wait till there is a good
+opportunity, so that we can recapture the ship without an alarm being
+given to the other vessels, which are no doubt sailing in company with
+us. And now, if you have nothing to say, I will go off to sleep again,
+for there is time for another hour or two. I feel as if I had not quite
+finished my night's rest, and the days pass so slowly here that it is
+as well for us to sleep when we feel the least inclination.
+
+"By the way, Matteo, put something into that peephole we made. It is
+possible that they might see the light through it, and come to examine
+what it is. It is better to run no risk."
+
+That day the captives were far more restless than they had been since
+they were taken prisoners. At first there had been a feeling of
+depression, too great to admit even of conversation with each other.
+The defeat of their fleet, the danger that threatened Venice, and the
+prospect of imprisonment in the gloomy dungeons of Genoa, combined to
+depress them on the first day of their imprisonment. On the second,
+their success in getting out the bolts had cheered them, and they had
+something to look forward to and talk about; but still, few of them
+thought that there was any real prospect of their obtaining their
+freedom. Now, however, that success seemed to lie ready to hand; now
+that they could, that very evening, remove the sacks, effect a junction
+with their crew, arm themselves with the weapons lying in sight, and
+rush up and overpower the Genoese; it seemed hard to remain longer in
+confinement. Several of them urged Francis to make the attempt that
+night, but he refused.
+
+"You reckon only on the foe you see," he said. "The danger lies not
+from them, but from the foes we cannot see. We must wait for an
+opportunity."
+
+"But no opportunity may occur," one of them urged.
+
+"That is quite possible," Francis agreed; "but should no special
+opportunity occur, we shall be none the worse for having waited, for it
+will always be as open to us to make the attempt as it is tonight. It
+might succeed--possibly we could overpower the guard on deck before
+they could give the alarm--but the risk is too great to be run, until
+we are certain that no other way is open to us. In the daylight the
+hatch is open; but even could we free our comrades, and unite for a
+rush, unobserved--which we could hardly hope to do--we should find the
+whole of the Genoese on deck, and could not possibly overpower them
+before they had time to give the alarm to other vessels. At night, when
+we can unite, we cannot gain the deck, for the hatch is not only
+closed, but would almost certainly be fastened, so that men should not
+get down to pilfer among the stores."
+
+"But if we cannot attack in the daytime, Messer Hammond, without giving
+the alarm; and cannot attack at all at night, what are we to do?"
+
+"That is the next point to be seen to," Francis replied. "We must cut,
+either from this hold or from the other, a way up to the deck above. It
+may take us some days to do this, but that matters little. We have
+plenty of time for the work before reaching Genoa. The difficulty is
+not in the work itself, but in doing it unobserved."
+
+"That is difficult, indeed," Matteo said, "seeing that the Genoese
+sailors are quartered in the forecastle above the forehold, while the
+officers will be in the cabins in the poop over us."
+
+"That is so, Matteo, and for that reason, it is clear that it is we,
+not the sailors, who must cut through the planks above. There are no
+divisions in the forecastle, and it will be, therefore, absolutely
+impossible to cut through into it, without being perceived long before
+a hole is made of a sufficient size to enable us to get out. Here we
+may succeed better, for fortunately we know the exact plan of the
+cabins above us, and can choose a spot where we should not be likely to
+be noticed."
+
+"That is so," Matteo agreed, "and as they will not have as many
+officers as we had--that is, including the volunteers--some of the
+cabins will not be occupied. Perhaps, by listening to the footsteps
+above, we might find out which are vacant."
+
+"I thought of that, Matteo, but I doubt whether it would be well to
+rely upon that. Many on board ship wear soft shoes, which make but
+little noise, and it would be fatal to us were we to make a mistake.
+After thinking it over, I have decided that we had best try to cut a
+way up into the captain's cabin."
+
+"But that is sure to be occupied, Messer Hammond," Parucchi said.
+
+"Yes, it will be certainly be occupied; but it affords a good
+opportunity of success. As you know, Parucchi, Carlo Bottini had been a
+long time at Constantinople and the Eastern ports, and had a somewhat
+luxurious taste. Do you not remember that, against the stern windows,
+he had caused to be erected a low wide seat running across the cabin?
+This he called a divan, and spent no small proportion of his time
+lolling upon it. If I am right, its height was from ten inches to a
+foot above the deck, and it was fully four feet wide. It would
+therefore be quite possible to cut through the two planks at the back,
+without its being observed by anyone in the cabin."
+
+There was a chorus of assent.
+
+"Of course we must work most cautiously," Francis went on. "The wood
+must be cut out with clean cuts with the daggers. There must be no
+sawing or scraping. The beams are two feet apart, and we must cut
+through two planks close to them. In that way there will be no nails to
+remove. Of course, we shall not cut quite through until the time
+arrives for us to make the attempt, but just leave enough to hold the
+planks together. Half an hour's work will get through that, for if we
+were to cut through it at once, not only would there be risk of the
+hole being discovered by anyone sweeping the cabin, but we should be
+obliged to remain absolutely silent, or we should be heard
+immediately."
+
+"We can begin at once, can we not?" Matteo asked. "Anything is better
+than sitting quietly here."
+
+"Certainly, Matteo, if you wish. Two can work at once, one on each
+line. Choose the two sharpest edged of the daggers, and be sure to cut
+clean, and not to make a scraping noise or to try to break out pieces
+of wood. The work must be done in absolute quiet. Indeed, however
+careful you are, it is possible that some slight sound may be heard
+above, but, if noticed, it will probably be taken for the rats."
+
+Matteo and another of the young men at once fell to work; but it was
+not until the evening of the following day that cuts were made as deep
+as was considered prudent. The depth of wood remaining was tested by
+thrusting the point of a dagger through, and it was decided that little
+more than a quarter of an inch remained.
+
+Upon the following day the ship anchored, and remained for two days in
+some port. Provisions were brought on board and carried down into the
+hold, and the prisoners had no doubt that they were in harbour on the
+coast of either Sicily, or the south of Italy. They had not set sail
+many hours, when the motion of the ship told them that the wind was
+getting up, and by night the vessel was rolling heavily, the noise made
+by the dashing of the water against her planks being so great, that
+those below could scarcely hear each other speak. Their spirits had
+risen with the increase of the motion, for the opportunity for which
+they had been waiting was now at hand. In a gale the vessels would keep
+well apart from each other, to prevent the danger of a collision, and
+any outcry would be drowned by the noise of the wind and water.
+
+Each night Francis had paid a visit to the sailors forward, to enjoin
+patience until he should give them the order for making the attempt.
+They had long since cut through the planks, which were only retained in
+their place by the pressure of the sacks behind them. He had bade them
+be in readiness on the first occasion on which rough weather might set
+in, and knew that they would now be expecting the signal.
+
+As soon, then, as it became dark, and the hatch over the middle hold
+was closed; the planks were removed, and Francis and his party set to
+work shifting the sacks, in the corner where the sailors had cut the
+planks. Each sack was taken up, and placed against the pile further on,
+without the slightest noise, until at last all were removed that stood
+in the way of the planks being taken down. These were carried out into
+the hold.
+
+Francis entered the gap. The sailors had already been informed that the
+occasion had come, and that they were to remain perfectly quiet until
+bidden to move.
+
+"All is prepared," he said as he entered. "Rinaldo, do you see that the
+men come out one by one. As each comes out a weapon will be placed in
+his hands, and he will be then led to the starboard side of the hold,
+which is free from encumbrance, and will there stand until he receives
+orders to move further. Remember that not the slightest noise must be
+made, for if any stumbled and fell, and the noise were heard above, it
+might be thought that some of the stores had shifted from their places,
+and men would be sent below to secure them. The alarm would be given,
+and a light or other signal shown the other ships, before we could
+overpower all resistance. After the men are all ranged up as I have
+directed, they will have to remain there for some little time, while we
+complete our arrangements."
+
+As soon as the sailors were all armed, and ready for action, Francis
+entered the after hold, where Matteo and another had been engaged in
+cutting the planks quite through. They had just completed the task when
+he reached them, and had quietly removed the two pieces of plank.
+Francis had already given his orders to his companions, and each knew
+the order in which they were to ascend.
+
+A dim light streamed down from the hole. Two of his comrades lifted
+Francis so that his head was above the level of the hole, and he was
+enabled to see into the cabin. So far as he could tell, it was
+untenanted, but it was possible that the commander might be on the
+divan above him. This was not, however, likely, as in the gale that was
+now blowing he would probably be on deck, directing the working of the
+ship.
+
+Francis now gave the signal, and the others raised him still further,
+until he was able to get his weight upon the deck above, and he then
+crawled along underneath the divan, and lay there quiet until Parucchi
+and Matteo had both reached the deck. Then he gave the word, and all
+three rolled out and leaped to their feet, with their daggers in their
+hands, in readiness to fall upon the captain should he be on the divan.
+
+As they had hoped and expected, the cabin was untenanted. The other
+volunteers now joined them, the last giving the word to Rinaldo, who
+soon passed up, followed by the crew, until the cabin was as full as it
+could contain. There were now assembled some fifty men, closely packed
+together.
+
+"That is ample," Francis said, "as they will be unarmed and unprepared.
+We can issue out singly until the alarm is given, and then those that
+remain must rush out in a body. Simply knock them down with the hilts
+of your swords. There is no occasion to shed blood, unless in the case
+of armed resistance; but remember they will have their knives in their
+girdles, and do not let anyone take you by surprise."
+
+Opening the door, Francis walked along a passage, and then through an
+outer door into the waist of the ship. The wind was blowing fiercely,
+but the gale was not so violent as it had appeared to them when
+confined below. The night was dark, but after a week's confinement
+below, his eyes were able easily to make out almost every object on
+deck. There were but few sailors in the waist. The officers would be on
+the poop, and such of the crew as were not required on duty in the
+forecastle. Man after man joined him, until some thirty were gathered
+near the bulwarks. An officer on the poop caught sight of them by the
+light of the lantern, which was suspended there as a signal to the
+other vessels.
+
+"What are all you men doing down there?" he challenged. "There is no
+occasion for you to keep on deck until you are summoned."
+
+"Do you move forward with the men here, Parucchi. Knock down the
+fellows on deck, and rush into the forecastle and overpower them there,
+before they can get up their arms. I will summon the rest in a body,
+and we will overpower the officers."
+
+He ran back to the cabin door, and bade the men follow him. As they
+poured out there was a scuffle on the deck forward, and the officer
+shouted out again:
+
+"What is going on there? What does all this mean?"
+
+Francis sprang up the ladder to the poop, followed by his men, and
+before the officer standing there understood the meaning of this sudden
+rush of men, or had time to draw his sword, he was knocked down. The
+captain and three other officers, who were standing by the helm, drew
+their swords and rushed forward, thinking there was a mutiny among
+their crew; but Francis shouted out:
+
+"Throw down your weapons, all of you. We have retaken the ship, and
+resistance is useless, and will only cost you your lives."
+
+The officers stood stupefied with astonishment; and then, seeing that
+fully twenty armed men were opposed to them, they threw down their
+swords. Francis ordered four of the sailors to conduct them to the
+captain's cabin, and remain in guard over them; then with the rest he
+hurried forward to assist Parucchi's party.
+
+But the work was already done. The Genoese, taken completely by
+surprise, had at once surrendered, as the armed party rushed in the
+forecastle, and the ship was already theirs. As soon as the prisoners
+were secured, the after hatch was thrown off, and those whose turn to
+crawl up through the hole had not yet arrived came up on deck.
+
+"Rinaldo," Francis said, as soon as the crew had fallen into their
+places, "send a man aloft, and let him suddenly knock out the light in
+the lantern."
+
+"But we can lower it down, captain, from the deck."
+
+"Of course we can, Rinaldo, but I don't want it lowered down, I want it
+put suddenly out."
+
+Rinaldo at once sent a man up, and a minute later the light suddenly
+disappeared.
+
+"If we were seen to lower it down," Francis said to Matteo, "the
+suspicions of those who noticed it would be at once aroused, for the
+only motive for doing so would be concealment; whereas now, if it is
+missed, it will be supposed that the wind has blown it out. Now we have
+only to lower our sails, and we can drop unobserved out of the fleet."
+
+"There are sixteen lights, I have just been counting them," Matteo
+said.
+
+"These are probably the fourteen galleys captured with us, and two
+galleys as guards, in case, on their way, they should fall in with any
+of our ships.
+
+"Parucchi, will you at once muster the men, and see that all are armed
+and in readiness for fighting?
+
+"Matteo, do you and some of your friends assist the lieutenant."
+
+In a few minutes, Parucchi reported that the men were all ready for
+action.
+
+"Rinaldo, brail up the sails, so that we may drop into the rear of the
+squadron. Watch the lights of the vessels behind, and steer so that
+they shall pass us as widely as possible."
+
+This was the order the men were expecting to receive, but they were
+surprised when, just as the last light was abreast of them, Francis
+gave the order for the brails to be loosed again.
+
+"Signor Parucchi, do you tell off fifty men. I am going to lay the ship
+alongside that vessel, and recapture her. They will not see us until we
+are close on board, and will suppose it is an accident when we run
+alongside. No doubt they, like the Pluto, have only a complement of
+fifty men, and we shall overpower them before they are prepared to
+offer any resistance.
+
+"No doubt they have prisoners below. Immediately we have recaptured
+her, I shall return on board with the rest, leaving you with your fifty
+men in charge of her. As soon as you have secured the Genoese, free any
+prisoners there may be in the hold. I shall keep close to you, and you
+can hear me, and tell me how many there are."
+
+The Pluto was now edged away, till she was close to the other ship. The
+crew, exulting in having turned the tables on the Genoese, and at the
+prospect of recovering another of the lost galleys, clustered in the
+waist, grasping their arms. The ship was not perceived until she was
+within her own length of the other. Then there was a sudden hail:
+
+"Where are you coming to? Keep away, or you will be into us. Why don't
+you show your light?"
+
+Francis shouted back some indistinct answer. Rinaldo pushed down the
+helm, and a minute later the Pluto ran alongside the other vessel. Half
+a dozen hands, told off for the work, sprang into her rigging, and
+lashed the vessels together; while Francis, followed by the crew,
+climbed the bulwarks and sprang on to the deck of the enemy.
+
+Scarce a blow was struck. The Genoese, astonished at this sudden
+apparition of armed men on their deck, and being entirely unarmed and
+unprepared, either ran down below or shouted they surrendered, and in
+two minutes the Venetians were masters of the vessel.
+
+"Back to the Pluto," Francis shouted. "The vessels will tear their
+sides out!"
+
+Almost as suddenly as they had invaded the decks of the galley, the
+Venetians regained their own vessel, leaving the lieutenant with his
+fifty men on board the prize. The lashings were cut, the Pluto's helm
+put up, and she sheered away from her prize. Her bulwarks were broken
+and splintered where she had ground against the other vessel in the
+sea, and Rinaldo soon reported that some of the seams had opened, and
+the water was coming in.
+
+"Set the carpenter and some of the hands to work, to caulk the seams as
+well as they can from the inside, and set a gang to work at the pumps
+at once. It is unfortunate that it is blowing so hard. If the wind had
+gone down instead of rising, we would have recaptured the whole fleet,
+one by one."
+
+The Pluto was kept within a short distance of the captured vessel, and
+Parucchi presently shouted out that he had freed two hundred prisoners.
+
+"Arm them at once!" Francis shouted back. "Extinguish your light, and
+board the vessel whose light you see on your starboard bow. I will take
+the one to port. When you have captured her, lower the sails of both
+vessels. I will do the same. You will keep a little head sail set, so
+as to keep them before the wind; but do not show more than you can
+help. I wish the rest of the fleet to outrun us, as soon as possible."
+
+The Pluto sheered off from the prize, and directed her course towards
+the vessel nearest to her, which she captured as easily as she had done
+the preceding. But this time, not only were her bulwarks stove in, but
+the chain plates were carried away; and the mainmast, no longer
+supported by its shrouds, fell over the side with a crash.
+
+This vessel had but a hundred prisoners on board. They were wild with
+astonishment and delight, when they found that their vessel had been
+recaptured. Francis told them to keep by him through the night, as
+possibly he might need their assistance.
+
+For some hours the gale increased. The Pluto lay head to it, her mast
+serving as a floating anchor. As soon as the lights of the Genoese
+squadron disappeared in the distance, Francis hoisted a lantern on his
+mainmast, as a signal to the other vessels to keep near him.
+
+As soon as day broke, the galley they had last recaptured was seen,
+half a mile away, while the two others could be made out some six miles
+to leeward. The gale died out soon after daybreak, and Francis at once
+set his crew to work to get the mast on board, and to ship it by its
+stump.
+
+It was a difficult undertaking, for the vessel was rolling heavily. It
+was first got alongside, two ropes were passed over it, and it was
+parbuckled on board. Shears were made of two spars, and the end was
+placed against the stump, which projected six feet above the deck. By
+the aid of the shears, it was hoisted erect and lashed to the stump,
+wedges were driven in to tighten the lashings, and it was then firmly
+stayed; and by the afternoon it was in readiness for sail to be hoisted
+again.
+
+By this time Parucchi, with the vessel he had captured, was alongside.
+The Lion of Saint Mark was hoisted to the mainmast of the Pluto, and
+three similar banners were run up by the other vessels, the crews
+shouting and cheering with wild enthusiasm.
+
+
+
+Chapter 17: An Ungrateful Republic.
+
+
+"It is glorious, Francis," Matteo said, "to think that we should have
+recaptured four of our ships!"
+
+"It is very good, as far as it goes," Francis replied, "but it might
+have been a great deal better. If it hadn't been for the storm, we
+might have picked them all up one by one. Each vessel we took, the
+stronger we became, and I had calculated upon our capturing the greater
+number. But in such a sea, I don't think we could possibly capture more
+than we did."
+
+"I should think not," Matteo said. "I had never dreamt of doing more
+than recovering the Pluto, and when you first talked about that, it
+seemed almost like madness. I don't think one of us had the slightest
+belief in the possibility of the thing, when you first proposed it."
+
+"I thought it was to be managed somehow," Francis said. "It would have
+been a shame, indeed, if a hundred and fifty men were to be kept
+prisoners for a fortnight, or three weeks, by a third of their number."
+
+"Well, certainly no one would have thought of making the attempt, if
+you had not proposed it, Francis. I believe, even if you were to
+propose our sailing north, and capturing Genoa, there is not a man on
+board but would follow you willingly, with the firm conviction that you
+would succeed."
+
+"In that case, Matteo," Francis said, laughing, "it is very lucky for
+you that I am not at all out of my mind. Signal now to Parucchi to
+lower his boats, and come on board with our men. We may fall in yet
+with another Genoese squadron, and may as well have our full complement
+on board, especially as Parucchi has found two hundred men already on
+board the vessel we captured."
+
+Parucchi and his men soon transferred themselves to the Pluto, and the
+four vessels hoisted their sails, and made for the south. They had
+learned, from their captives, that the squadron had already passed
+through the Straits of Messina, and that it was at Messina they had
+stopped and taken in provision two days before. Indeed, when, late in
+the afternoon, the sky cleared and the sun shone out, they saw the
+mountains of Calabria on their left.
+
+Learning, from the captives, that no Genoese vessels had been seen in
+the straits as they passed through, Francis did not hesitate to order
+the course to be shaped for the straits, instead of sailing round
+Sicily, as he would have done had there been any chance of falling in
+with a hostile squadron, in passing between the islands and the
+mainland.
+
+"I should like to have seen the face of the commander of the Genoese
+squadron this morning," Matteo said, "when he discovered that four of
+his vessels were missing. He can hardly have supposed that they were
+lost, for although the wind was strong, it blew nearly dead aft, and
+there was nothing of a gale to endanger well-handled ships. I almost
+wonder that he did not send back the two fully manned galleys he had
+with him, to search for us."
+
+"Perhaps he did," Francis said; "but he would have been a hundred miles
+further north by daybreak, and it would have taken him a couple of days
+to get back to where we were lying."
+
+No hostile sail was seen during the voyage back to Venice. Francis
+remained in command of the little squadron, for the captains, and many
+of the superior officers, had been transferred to the galley of the
+officer in command of the squadron, and Francis happened to be the only
+second officer on board any of the four ships.
+
+Great care was observed when they approached Venice, as, for aught they
+knew, Doria's squadron might be blockading the port. The Genoese fleet,
+however, was still cruising on the coast of Dalmatia, capturing port
+after port of the Venetian possessions there.
+
+The four vessels passed through the channel of the Lido with their
+colours flying. When first observed from the watchtower of Venice, they
+were supposed to form part of the squadron of Zeno, but as soon as they
+cast anchor, and the news spread that they were four of Pisani's
+galleys, which had been recaptured from the Genoese, the delight of the
+population was immense.
+
+The ships were speedily surrounded by a fleet of boats, containing
+relatives and friends of those taken prisoners at the battle of Polo,
+and the decks were crowded with persons inquiring after their friends,
+or embracing with delight those whom they had, an hour before, believed
+to be either dead or immured in the dungeons of Genoa.
+
+One of the first to appear was Polani, who had early received the news
+by a swift boat from one of his ships in the port, that the Pluto was
+one of the vessels entering the harbour.
+
+"What miracle is this, Francis?" he asked, as he warmly embraced his
+young friend.
+
+"Not a miracle at all, Messer Polani. The Genoese fancied that a guard
+of fifty men was amply sufficient to keep a hundred and fifty Venetians
+captives, and we taught them their mistake."
+
+"It wasn't we," Matteo put in, as he shook hands with his kinsman. "We
+had no more idea of escaping than we had of flying. The whole thing was
+entirely the work of Francisco here."
+
+"I might have been sure the Genoese would not keep you long,
+Francisco," Polani said; "and the girls and I might have spared
+ourselves the pain of fretting for you. But how did it all come about?"
+
+"If you will take me to the Piazza in your gondola, I will tell you all
+about on the way," Francis replied. "For, absurd as it seems, I am the
+senior officer of the squadron, and must, I suppose, report to the
+council what has happened."
+
+"Take me, too, kinsman," Matteo said. "I know Francisco so well that I
+am quite sure that, of himself, he will never tell the facts of this
+affair, and will simply say that we broke out, avoiding all mention of
+his share in it, and how it was that under his orders we recaptured the
+other ships."
+
+"I think that a very good plan, Matteo; so do you come with us, and you
+shall tell me all about it, instead of my hearing it from Francis, and
+I will take care the council know the truth of the matter."
+
+"The admiral got safely back, I hope?" Francis asked. "We saw that his
+galley, with five others, broke through the Genoese fleet and got
+safely away, but of course, we knew not whether the brave admiral was
+himself hurt."
+
+"He arrived here safely," Polani replied; "but knowing the Venetians as
+you do, you will be scarcely surprised to hear that he has been
+sentenced to six months' imprisonment, for losing the battle."
+
+"But that is shameful," Francis exclaimed indignantly. "I heard from
+our captain, who was present at the council, that Pisani was opposed to
+fighting, and that he was only overruled by the proveditors. It is
+shameful. I will go on shore and make my report, and then I will come
+back to you, for I swear that not another blow will I strike on behalf
+of the republic, as long as Pisani is in prison."
+
+"It is a bad business, my lad," Polani said; "but you know that Pisani,
+popular as he is with the people, has few friends among the nobles.
+They are jealous of his fame and popularity, and, to say the truth, he
+has often irritated them, by his bluntness and his disregard for their
+opinion and rank. Consequently, they seized upon his defeat as an
+occasion for accusing him, and it was even a question in the council of
+taking his life, and he may be considered fortunate in getting off with
+the sentence of six months' imprisonment.
+
+"I do not think he will have to remain very long in confinement. We may
+expect the Genoese fleet here in a few days, for the Paduan army is
+already moving, as we heard last night. No doubt it is going to
+cooperate with the fleet. Once the danger presses, the populace will
+demand Pisani's release. There have already been demonstrations, and
+shouts of 'Viva Pisani!' have been raised in the Piazza.
+
+"At any rate, Francis, let me advise you, most strongly, not to suffer
+any expression of your feelings concerning him to escape you before the
+council. I need scarcely say it would do no good to the admiral, and
+would set the whole of his enemies against you. It is no affair of
+yours, if the governors of Venice behave ungratefully to one who
+deserves well at their hands, and you have made more than enough
+enemies by mingling in my affairs, without drawing upon yourself more
+foes, by your championship of Pisani."
+
+"I will, of course, follow your counsel," Francis said; "but I will
+certainly serve the state no more, until Pisani is freed."
+
+Several of the councillors were already assembled, on hearing the
+strange news that four of the ships, which had been captured by the
+Genoese, had entered port. Francis, on announcing his errand, was at
+once shown in to them. Polani accompanied him, explaining his presence
+to the council by saying:
+
+"I have ventured, signors, to accompany my young friend here, in order
+that I may give you a much further detail of the affair in which he has
+been engaged, than you are likely to hear from his own lips. I have
+just come on shore from his ship, the Pluto, and have heard the story
+from my kinsman, Matteo Giustiniani."
+
+"We have surely seen this young gentleman before, Messer Polani," one
+of the council said.
+
+"You have, signor," Polani replied. "You may remember that he greatly
+distinguished himself at the fight of Antium, was sent home by the
+admiral with his despatches, and had the honour of receiving, from you,
+the thanks of the republic and the gift of citizenship."
+
+"I remember now," the councillor said; and a murmur of assent from the
+others showed that they also recalled the circumstance. "Is he again
+the bearer of despatches, from the officer in command of the little
+squadron which, as it seems, has just, by some miracle, entered the
+port? And how is it that the officer did not present himself in person
+before us?"
+
+"The officer has presented himself," Polani said. "Messer Hammond is in
+command of the four ships which have just arrived. Not only is he in
+command by virtue of senior rank, but it is to him that their recapture
+from the Genoese is entirely due."
+
+There was a murmur of incredulity from the circle of councillors, but
+Polani went on quietly.
+
+"It may seem well nigh impossible to you, signors, but what I say is
+strictly true. If Messer Hammond will first relate to you the broad
+facts of the recapture of the ships, I will furnish you with such
+details as he may omit."
+
+Francis then briefly related the events which had led to the capture of
+the four galleys. He explained that by the death of the captain he, as
+second officer, succeeded to the command of the Pluto, and that
+afterwards being captured by the Genoese, Signor Parucchi, the sole
+other surviving officer, and ten gentlemen belonging to noble families
+and serving as volunteers on board the Pluto, were confined in one hold
+of that ship on her voyage as a prize to Genoa, the crew being shut up
+in the other; that by working at night they had effected a junction
+with the crew, and choosing a stormy night, when any noise that might
+be made would not be heard on board the ship, they made their way up to
+the deck above, through a hole they had cut in the planks, and
+overpowered the Genoese almost without resistance; that they had then,
+in the darkness, ran alongside another of the ships and captured her
+with equal ease; and Parucchi, with a portion of the crew of the Pluto,
+and the Venetian prisoners on board that ship, had retaken a third;
+while the Pluto had captured a fourth.
+
+"It may seem to you, signors," Francis concluded, "that we might, in
+the same way, have recaptured the rest of our ships, and it was a
+bitter disappointment to me that we failed to do so; but the storm was
+so high, and the sea so rough, that it was only with the greatest
+danger and difficulty that ships could lie alongside each other. The
+bulwarks of all four vessels were greatly damaged, and the Pluto lost
+her foremast while alongside the last ship we captured, and as the
+storm was increasing, rather than abating, we were, to our great
+chagrin, obliged to let the rest escape, since in striving for more we
+might have lost, not only our lives, but the vessels we had taken."
+
+"This is indeed a most notable achievement, Messer Hammond, and the
+restoration of four ships and their crews, at the present moment, is of
+great importance to the republic, threatened as she is with invasion by
+land and sea.
+
+"Now, Messer Polani, if you will give us the full details of which you
+spoke, we shall be glad."
+
+Polani then related to the council the full story of the means by which
+the crew of the Pluto had gained their liberty, showing how the
+recapture was entirely due to the initiative of Francis, and to the
+ingenuity with which he overcame all difficulties. He ended by saying:
+
+"My kinsman, Matteo, said that should you doubt whether this account is
+not tinged by his friendship and partiality for Messer Hammond, Signor
+Parucchi, and all the gentlemen who were confined with them in the
+hold, can substantiate the account that he has given. He said that
+Parucchi's evidence would be all the more valuable, since he and the
+other officers were in the first place much prejudiced against Messer
+Hammond, deeming it an indignity that one so young, and a foreigner by
+birth, should be appointed to the command over the heads of others,
+Venetian born, of good family, and his seniors in age. The
+circumstances which I have related to you have, however, completely
+altered his opinion, and he is as enthusiastic, with respect to Messer
+Hammond's conduct, as are my kinsman and all on board the ship."
+
+"I remember now," one of the council said, "that we had a letter from
+the admiral in the spring, and that, when describing how terribly the
+crews had been diminished and weakened by the severity of the winter,
+he said that the sole exception was the Pluto, whose crew was kept up
+to their full strength, and in excellent health, owing entirely to the
+care and attention that Messer Hammond, the officer second in command,
+had bestowed upon them."
+
+"Thanks, Messer Polani," the president of the council said, "for the
+light you have thrown on this matter.
+
+"Messer Hammond, it is difficult to overestimate the services that you
+have rendered to the state. We shall, at an early day, decide in what
+manner most fitly to reward them, and in the meantime you will remain
+in command of the squadron you have brought in."
+
+Francis returned thanks for the promise of the president, but expressed
+his desire to resign the command of the squadron at once.
+
+"I am in business," he said, "with Messer Polani, and although, for a
+short time, I abandoned commerce in order to sail under Admiral Pisani,
+I now, from various reasons, desire, as soon as my successor is
+appointed, to return to my work with Signor Polani.
+
+"I desire to recommend warmly to your excellencies Signor Parucchi, who
+is, except myself, the sole remaining officer of the Pluto. He seconded
+me most admirably in our enterprise, and himself commanded at the
+recapture of one of the ships. The gentlemen volunteers also worked
+with the greatest energy and spirit. Matteo Giustiniani has been acting
+as third officer, and to him also the thanks of the republic are due."
+
+On leaving the ship, Messer Polani had despatched a boat, to carry to
+his house the news that Francis had returned; and when they came back
+from the palace they found Giulia anxiously expecting them, and a few
+minutes later Matteo arrived with his brother Rufino, and Maria. The
+latter was far more effusive in her greeting of Francis than Giulia had
+been.
+
+"Matteo has been telling us all about it, Francis, and that he, and
+everyone else, owed their escape from the dungeons of Genoa entirely to
+your cleverness."
+
+"Not so much to his cleverness, Maria," Matteo corrected, "although he
+is wonderful in inventing things, but to his energy, determination, and
+steadfastness. There was not one of us but regarded a visit to the
+dungeons of Genoa as a foregone conclusion, and when Francis spoke of
+our recapturing the Pluto, as if it were the easiest and most natural
+thing in the world, it was as much as we could do not to laugh in his
+face. However, he set about it as quietly and calmly as if he were
+carrying on the regular work of a ship. We gradually caught some of his
+spirit, and when we began to see that there was a method in his
+madness, did our best to carry out his orders."
+
+"It is wonderful," Maria said; "and do you know, Francisco, that when
+we first knew you, after you had rescued us from the attack on the
+canal, I absolutely thought that, though you were brave and
+straightforward and honourable, yet that by the side of our own people
+of your age, you were rather stupid, and ever since then I have been
+learning how mistaken I was."
+
+Francis laughed.
+
+"I think your estimate of me was correct enough," he said. "You see
+people are often stupid one way, and sharp another. Matteo will tell
+you I was far behind most of those in the seminary in learning lessons,
+and certainly when it came to talking, and bandying jokes, I had no
+chance at all. I suppose that every lady I have ever spoken to, when I
+have been with you at entertainments, has thought me exceptionally
+stupid; and I am sure I am, in most things, only I suppose I have got a
+fair share of common sense, and a habit of thinking for myself. There
+was no cleverness at all in anything that Matteo is telling you of.
+
+"It was just the same here as it was when I was in that cell near
+Tunis. I wanted to get out. I supposed there must be some way out, if I
+could but discover it, and so I sat down to think how it was to be
+done; and of course, after trying in my mind every possible scheme, I
+hit upon the right one. There certainly was nothing clever in that."
+
+"But I have heard nothing about it yet," Giulia said; "and everyone
+else seems to know how it was done."
+
+"Matteo, do you tell Giulia," Maria ordered. "I have lots of questions
+to ask Francis."
+
+"By the way, Francis," Messer Polani said, "you will be glad to hear
+that I have succeeded in getting home your man Giuseppi. He returned
+two days ago, and I have no doubt is somewhere below waiting to see
+you."
+
+"I will go and see him at once," Francis said, hurrying away. "I am
+indeed glad to know that you have rescued him."
+
+Maria laughed, as the door closed behind Francis.
+
+"There, Rufino," she said, turning to him, "you pretend sometimes to be
+jealous of Francisco Hammond; and there, you see, just when I have said
+I have lots of questions to ask him, and five minutes after my arrival
+here to greet him, he races away without a word, directly he hears that
+his man Giuseppi has returned."
+
+"And he is quite right, Maria," Matteo said indignantly. "Giuseppi
+would give his life for Francisco, and the two have been together every
+day for the last six or seven years. I don't doubt the faithful fellow
+is crying with joy now. Francisco is quite right, not to keep him
+waiting for a minute."
+
+"Perhaps I cried for joy, too, Master Matteo," Maria said.
+
+"I believe I did see tears in your eyes, Maria; but I put them down to
+my own account. You would naturally be delighted to know that your
+brother-in-law was safe and sound, to say nothing of the fact that the
+family would be spared the expense of sending a thousand ducats or so
+to ransom him."
+
+"A thousand ducats, Matteo! A thousand soldi would more nearly
+represent your value, if the Genoese did but know it. But why don't you
+tell Giulia your adventures, as I ordered you?"
+
+"Because Giulia would very much rather hear them from Francisco's lips,
+and I have no doubt he will be equally glad to tell her himself, though
+certainly he is a bad hand at recounting his own doings. However, he
+shall have the pleasure of telling her of it, and I can fill up the
+details for her, afterwards."
+
+Two days later, a decree was published by the council stating that, in
+consideration of the very great service rendered to the state by
+Francisco Hammond, a citizen of Venice, in recapturing four galleys
+from the Genoese, the council decreed the settlement upon him, for
+life, of a pension of three hundred ducats a year.
+
+"You will not want it, Francisco," Messer Polani said, as he brought in
+the news, "for I intend, at the end of these troubles, to take you as a
+partner in my business. I told your father that I should do so; and you
+have not only proved yourself earnest in business, quick at learning,
+and full of resources, but you have vastly added to the debt of
+gratitude which first caused me to make the proposition, by again
+saving my daughters from falling into the hands of their enemy. I told
+your father that I should regard you in the light of a son, and I do so
+regard you, and as a son of whom I have every reason to be proud.
+
+"I need no thanks, my lad. I am still, and shall always remain, your
+debtor. You have very much more than fulfilled my expectations, and I
+shall be glad to place some of the burden of my business upon your
+shoulders.
+
+"There is another matter, which I have long had in my mind, but of
+which I will not speak just at present.
+
+"Thus, then, the three hundred ducats, which you will receive each year
+from the state, may not be needed by you. Still, you are to be
+congratulated upon the grant, because being the recipient of a pension,
+for distinguished services, will add to your weight and influence in
+the city. And so long as you do not need it--and no man can say what
+may occur, in the course of years, to hinder the trade of Venice--you
+can bestow the sum annually upon the poor of the city, and thus
+increase your popularity."
+
+"I shall be happy to do that, signor," Francis said, "although it seems
+to me that popularity is of little value in Venice. It has not saved
+the man whom, a short time since, the people hailed as their father,
+from unmerited disgrace and imprisonment."
+
+"It has not, Francisco, but it has saved his life. You may take my word
+for it, that the proposal, absolutely made in the council, for the
+execution of Pisani, would have been voted had it not been for fear of
+the people; and it may be that you will yet see, that the voice of the
+people will bring Pisani from his prison, long before the expiration of
+his term of imprisonment. Popularity is not to be despised, for it is a
+great power. That power may be abused, as when one, having gained the
+ear of the people, leads them astray for his own base ends, and uses
+the popularity he has gained to attack, and hurl from power, men less
+eloquent and less gifted in the arts of cajoling the people, but more
+worthy than himself. But, used rightly, the power of swaying and
+influencing the people is a great one, and especially valuable in a
+city like Venice, where private enmities and private feuds are carried
+to so great an extent. Already your name is in every mouth. Your rescue
+of Pisani, when sorely beset by the enemy, has been the theme of talk
+in every house; and this feat, which retrieves, to some extent, the
+misfortune of Pola, will make your name a household word in Venice."
+
+Immediately after the battle of Pola, the Venetians had entered into
+negotiations with Hungary, to endeavour to detach that power from the
+league against them. But the demands of King Louis were too extravagant
+to be accepted. He demanded the cession of Trieste, the recognition of
+the suzerainty of his crown on the part of the present doge, and all
+his successors, an annual tribute of one hundred thousand ducats, and
+half a million of ready money. This demand was so excessive that, even
+in their distress, the Venetians refused to accept it, and hastened on
+their preparations for a struggle for life or death.
+
+Fortunately, the Genoese continued for three months, after their
+success at Pola, to capture the outlying possessions of Venice, instead
+of striking at the capital. Towards the end of July, seventeen Genoese
+vessels appeared off Pelestrina, burned a merchant ship lying there,
+and spent the day in reconnoitring positions, and in taking soundings
+of the shallows and canals off Brondolo. They then sailed away for
+Dalmatia. In less than a week six galleys again hove in sight; and
+Admiral Giustiniani, who was in supreme command of the forces, issued
+out from the Lido, with an equal number of ships, to give them battle.
+
+On his way, however, a black object was seen in the water. As they
+neared it, this was seen to be the head of a swimmer. He was soon
+picked up, and was found to be a Venetian citizen, named Savadia, who
+had been captured by the enemy, but had managed to escape, and was
+swimming towards land to warn his countrymen that the whole Genoese
+fleet, of forty-seven sail, under Pietro Doria, was close at hand; and
+that the six ships in the offing were simply a decoy, to tempt the
+Venetians to come out and give battle.
+
+Giustiniani at once returned to port, and scarcely had he done so, than
+the whole Genoese fleet made its appearance. They approached the
+passage of the Lido; but the respite that had been afforded them had
+enabled the Venetians to make their preparations, and the Genoese
+found, to their disappointment, that the channels of the Lido and
+Malamocco were completely closed up with sunken vessels, palisades, and
+chains; and they sailed away to seek another entry through which they
+could strike at Venice.
+
+Had the same precautions, that had proved so effective at the Lido and
+Malamocco passages, been taken at all the other channels; Venice could
+have defied all the efforts of Doria's fleet.
+
+The city is situated on a group of small islands, rising in the midst
+of a shallow basin twenty-five miles long and five wide, and separated
+from the sea by a long sandbank, formed by the sediment brought down by
+the rivers Piave and Adige. Through this sandbank the sea had pierced
+several channels. Treporti, the northern of these channels, contained
+water only for the smallest craft. The next opening was known as the
+port of Lido, and separated the island of San Nicolo from Malamocco.
+Five miles farther on is the passage of Malamocco, between that island
+and Pelestrina. Southwest of Pelestrina lay Brondolo, behind which
+stood Chioggia, twenty miles distant from Venice. The southern point of
+Brondolo was only separated by a small channel--called the Canal of
+Lombardy--from the mainland.
+
+Unfortunately, at Brondolo the channel had not been closed. All
+preparations had been made for doing so, but the work had been
+postponed until the last moment, in order that trading vessels might
+enter and leave the harbour, the Chioggians believing that there was
+sure to be sufficient warning, of the approach of an enemy, to enable
+them to close the entrance in time. The sudden appearance of Doria's
+fleet before Brondolo upset all these calculations, and the Genoese
+easily carried the position. Little Chioggia, the portion of the town
+separated from the rest by the Canal of Santa Caterina, was captured
+without difficulty; but the bridge across the canal was strongly
+defended by bastions and redoubts, and here Pietro Emo made a brave
+stand, with his garrison of three thousand five hundred men.
+
+The enemy at once erected his batteries, and, on the 12th of August,
+the Genoese opened fire. The Venetians replied stoutly, and for three
+days a heavy cannonade was kept up on both sides. Reinforcements had
+reached the garrison from Venice, and, hour by hour, swift boats
+brought the news to the city of the progress of the fight.
+
+So far, all seemed going on well. The Genoese had suffered heavily, and
+made no impression upon the batteries at the head of the bridge. The
+days passed in Venice in a state of restless disquietude. It was hoped
+and believed that Chioggia could successfully defend itself; but if it
+fell, the consequence would be terrible.
+
+Already the Hungarians had overrun the Venetian possessions on the
+mainland, the Lord of Padua was in the field with his army, and
+communication was cut with Ferrara, their sole ally. Should Chioggia
+fall, the Genoese fleet would enter the lagoons, and would sail, by the
+great channel through the flats, from Chioggia to Venice; and their
+light galleys could overrun the whole of the lagoons, and cut off all
+communication with the mainland, and starvation would rapidly stare the
+city in the face.
+
+Polani made all preparations for the worst. Many of his valuables were
+hidden away, in recesses beneath the floors. Others were taken on board
+one of his ships in the port, and this was held in readiness to convey
+Giulia and Maria, whose husband had willingly accepted Polani's offer,
+to endeavour to carry her off by sea with Giulia, in case the Genoese
+should enter the city.
+
+The merchant made an excursion to Chioggia, with Francis, to see for
+himself how things were going, and returned somewhat reassured. Francis
+spent much of his time at the port visiting Polani's ships, talking to
+the sailors, and expressing to them his opinion, that the Genoese and
+Paduans would never have dared to lay siege to Chioggia, had they not
+known that Pisani was no longer in command of the Venetian forces.
+
+"I regard the present state of affairs," he said, over and over again,
+"as a judgment upon the city, for its base ingratitude to the brave
+admiral, and I am convinced that things will never come right, until we
+have him again in command of our fleet.
+
+"Giustiniani is no doubt an able man; but what has he ever done in
+comparison to what Pisani has accomplished? Why should we place our
+only hope of safety in the hands of an untried man? I warrant, if
+Pisani was out and about, you would see Venice as active as a swarm of
+bees, pouring out against our aggressors. What is being done now?
+Preparations are being made; but of what kind? Ships are sunk in the
+channel; but what will be the use of this if Chioggia falls? The canals
+to that place will be blocked, but that will not prevent the Genoese
+from passing, in their light boats, from island to island, until they
+enter Venice itself.
+
+"Do you think all these ships would be lying idly here, if Pisani were
+in command? Talk to your comrades, talk to the sailors in the port,
+talk to those on shore when you land, and urge, everywhere, that the
+cry should be raised for Pisani's release, and restoration to command."
+
+
+
+Chapter 18: The Release Of Pisani.
+
+
+On the morning of the 17th, the party were sitting at breakfast, when
+Giulia suddenly sprang to her feet.
+
+"Listen!" she exclaimed.
+
+Her father and Francis looked at her in surprise, but instinctively
+listened for whatever sound she could have heard. Then a deep, solemn
+sound boomed through the air.
+
+"It is the bell of the Campanile tolling," the merchant exclaimed. "It
+is the signal for all citizens to take up arms. Some terrible news has
+arrived."
+
+Hastily putting on his armour, the merchant started to Saint Mark's,
+accompanied by Francis, who put on a steel cap, which he preferred to
+the heavy helmet, and a breastplate. A crowd of citizens were pursuing
+the same direction. The numbers thickened as they approached the
+Piazza, which they found on their arrival to be already thronged with
+people, who were densely packed in front of the palace, awaiting an
+explanation of the summons.
+
+There was a look of deep anxiety on every face, for all felt that the
+news must be bad, indeed, which could have necessitated such a call.
+Presently the doge, accompanied by the council, appeared in the
+balcony. A complete silence fell upon the multitude, the bell ceased
+tolling, and not the slightest sound disturbed the stillness. One of
+the councillors stepped to the front, for the doge, Contarini, was now
+seventy-two years old, and his voice could hardly have been heard over
+so wide an area.
+
+"Citizens of the republic, gather, I pray you, all your fortitude and
+constancy, to hear the news which I have to tell. It is bad news; but
+there is no reason for repining, still less for despair. If Venice has
+but confidence in herself, such as she has throughout her history
+shown, when danger seemed imminent, be assured that we shall weather
+this storm, as we have done all that have preceded it. Chioggia has
+fallen!"
+
+An exclamation of pain and grief went up from the crowd. The speaker
+held up his hand for silence.
+
+"Chioggia, contrary to our hopes and expectations, has fallen; but we
+are proud to say, it has fallen from no lack of bravery on the part of
+its defenders. As you know, for six days the brave podesta, Emo, and
+his troops have repulsed every attack; but yesterday an unforeseen
+accident occurred. While our soldiers were holding their own, as usual,
+a Genoese fire ship exploded in the canal behind them. The idea,
+unfortunately, seized the troops that the bridge was on fire. The
+Genoese shouted 'The bridge is in flames!' and pressed onward, and our
+soldiers fell back, in some confusion, towards the bridge. Here Emo,
+with four brave companions, made a noble stand, and for a time checked
+the advance of the foe; but he was driven back. There was no time to
+destroy the communication behind him. The enemy pressed on, and,
+mingled with our retreating soldiers, entered the town. And so Chioggia
+was taken. Our loss in killed is said to be eight hundred and sixty
+men; while the rest of the garrison--four thousand in number--were
+taken prisoners."
+
+A loud cry of anguish burst from the crowd. Numbers of those present
+had relatives and friends among the garrison of Chioggia; and to all,
+the news of this terrible disaster was a profound blow. Venice was open
+now to invasion. In a few hours, the enemy might appear in her canals.
+
+The council and the nobles endeavoured to dispel the feeling of
+despair. While some harangued the people from the balconies, others
+went down and mingled with the crowd, assuring them that all was not
+yet lost, that already messengers had been despatched to Doria, and the
+Lord of Padua, asking for terms of peace; and even should these be
+refused, Venice might yet defend herself until Zeno arrived, with his
+fleet, to their rescue. The doge himself received deputations of the
+citizens, and, by his calmness and serenity, did much to allay the
+first feeling of terror and dismay; and in a few hours the city
+recovered its wonted aspect of tranquillity.
+
+The next morning the answer to the overtures was received. The Lord of
+Padua, who was doubtless beginning to feel some misgiving as to the
+final issue of the struggle, declared that he himself was not unwilling
+to treat upon certain terms, but that the decision must rest in the
+hands of his colleague. Doria, believing that Venice was now in his
+grasp, rejected the idea of terms with scorn.
+
+"By God's faith, my lords of Venice," he cried, "ye shall have no peace
+from the Lord of Padua, nor from our commune of Genoa, until I have put
+a bit in the mouths of the horses of your evangelist of Saint Mark.
+When they have been bridled you shall then, in sooth, have a good
+peace; and this is our purpose and that of our commune!
+
+"As for these captives, my brethren," he said, pointing to some Genoese
+prisoners of rank, whom the Venetians had sent with their embassy, in
+hopes of conciliating the Genoese, "take them back. I want them not;
+for in a few days I am coming to release, from your prisons, them and
+the rest."
+
+As soon as the message was received, the bell summoned the popular
+assembly together, and, in the name of the doge, Pietro Mocenigo
+described to them the terrible nature of the peril that threatened
+them, told them that, after the insolent reply of Doria, there was now
+no hope save in their own exertions, and invited all to rally round the
+national standard, for the protection of their hearths and homes. The
+reply of the assembly was unanimous; and shouts were raised:
+
+"Let us arm ourselves! Let us equip and man what galleys are in the
+arsenal! Let us sally out to the combat! It is better to die in the
+defence of our country, than to perish here from want."
+
+A universal conscription was at once ordered, new taxes were imposed,
+and the salaries of the magistrates and civil functionaries suspended.
+All business came to a standstill, and property fell to a fourth of its
+former value. The imposts were not found adequate to produce the sums
+required, and a new loan, at five per cent, was decreed. All subscribed
+to the utmost of their ability, raising the enormous sum of 6,294,040
+lire. A new captain general was elected, and the government nominated
+Taddeo Giustiniani to the post.
+
+The fortification of the city, with earthworks, was commenced. Lines of
+defence were drawn from Lido to San Spirito, and two wooden towers
+constructed at the former point, to guard the pass of San Nicolo.
+Events succeeded each other with the greatest rapidity, and all these
+matters were settled within thirty-six hours of the fall of Chioggia.
+In all respects the people, at first, yielded implicit obedience to the
+order of the council. They enrolled themselves for service. They
+subscribed to the loan. They laboured at the outworks. But from the
+moment the appointment of Taddeo Giustiniani was announced, they grew
+sullen. It was not that they objected to the new captain general, who
+was a popular nobleman, but every man felt that something more than
+this was required, in such an emergency, and that the best man that
+Venice could produce should be at the helm.
+
+The sailors of the port were the first to move in the matter, and
+shouts for Vettore Pisani were heard in the streets. Others took up the
+cry, and soon a large multitude assembled in the Piazza, and with
+menacing shouts, demanded that Pisani should be freed and appointed. So
+serious did the tumult become, that the council were summoned in haste.
+Pisani--so popular with the lower class that they called him their
+father--was viewed with corresponding dislike and distrust by the
+nobles, who were at once jealous of his fame and superiority, and were
+alarmed at a popularity which could have made him, had he chosen it,
+the master of the state.
+
+It was not, therefore, until after some hours of stormy debate, that
+they decided to give in to the wishes of the crowd, which was
+continually growing larger and more threatening; and it was late in the
+evening before the senators deputed by the council, followed by the
+exulting populace, hurried to the prison to apprise Pisani that he was
+free, and that the doge and senate were expecting him. Pisani heard the
+message without emotion, and placidly replied that he should prefer to
+pass the night where he was in reflection, and would wait on the
+seignory in the morning.
+
+At daybreak on Friday, the 19th of August, the senatorial delegates and
+the people, accompanied by the other officers who had been involved in
+the disgrace of Pisani, and who had now been freed, reappeared at the
+gates of the prison. These were immediately opened, and Pisani
+appeared, with his usual expression of cheerfulness and good humour on
+his face. He was at once lifted on to the shoulders of some sailors,
+and borne in triumph to the palace, amid the deafening cheers of the
+populace. On the staircase he was met by the doge and senators, who
+saluted him cordially. Mass was heard in the chapel, and Pisani and the
+council then set to business, and were for some time closeted together.
+
+The crowd waited outside the building, continuing to shout, and when
+Pisani issued out from the palace, he was seized and carried in triumph
+to his house in San Fantino. As he was passing the Campanile of Saint
+Mark, his old pilot, Marino Corbaro, a remarkably able seaman, but a
+perpetual grumbler against those in authority, met him, and elbowing
+his way through the crowd, drew close to him, loudly shouting at the
+same time:
+
+"Now is the time, admiral, for revenging yourself, by seizing the
+dictatorship of this city. Behold, all are at your service. All are
+willing, at this very instant, to proclaim you prince, if you choose."
+
+The loyalty of Pisani's nature was so affronted by this offer, that, in
+a fury of rage, he leaned forward and struck Corbaro a heavy blow with
+his fist, and then raising his voice shouted to those about him:
+
+"Let none who wish me well say, 'Viva Pisani!' but, 'Viva San Marco!'"
+
+And the populace then shouted, "Viva San Marco and our Father Pisani!"
+
+No sooner had Pisani reached his house than the news was bruited about,
+that the admiral had been merely appointed governor of Lido, and that
+Giustiniani remained in command of the navy. The people were furious;
+and a deputation of 600 waited upon Pisani and said:
+
+"We are yours. Command us as you will."
+
+Pisani told them that it was for the republic, and not for him, to
+command their services. The deputation then went to the council, and
+declared, in the name of fifty thousand Venetians, that not a man would
+embark on the galleys until Pisani received his command, as captain
+general of all the forces of the republic, by land and sea. The Council
+of Ten, finding it impossible to resist the popular demand, and
+terrified at the idea of the tumult that a refusal would arouse, at
+last agreed to their request.
+
+Fortunately for the republic, the four days which elapsed between the
+fall of Chioggia, and the appointment of Pisani to the supreme command,
+had not been utilized by the enemy. Carrara and Doria had always been
+at variance as to their plans of operations, and, as usual, they
+differed now. The Lord of Padua urged the necessity for following up
+their success by an instant attack upon Venice, while Doria insisted
+upon carrying out his original plan, and trusting as much to starvation
+as to military operations. He, however, gradually pushed forward two
+outposts, at Poreja and Malamocco, and on the latter island, at a
+distance of three miles from Venice, he erected a battery, many of
+whose shot fell at San Spirito.
+
+Francis had borne his share in the events which had led to the
+installation of Pisani in the supreme command. He had at first
+instigated the sailors of Polani to raise a cry in the streets for the
+restoration of the admiral, and had gone about with two or three of his
+friends, mingling with knots of persons, and urging that the only hope
+of the republic lay in the energy and talent of Pisani. Even Matteo had
+joined him, although Taddeo Giustiniani was his own uncle. But, as the
+lad said, "what matters it about relationship now? What will become of
+relationship, if the Genoese and Paduans land here, raze the city to
+the ground, and scatter us over the face of the earth? No. When it
+comes to a question of ordinary command, of course I should go with my
+family; but when Venice is in danger, and only one man can save her, I
+should vote for him, whoever the other may be."
+
+Polani had also exerted the great influence he possessed among the
+commercial classes, and had aided the efforts of Francis, by giving
+leave to the sailors of all his ships in port to go on shore. A few
+hours after Pisani's release the merchant, accompanied by Francis,
+called upon him.
+
+"Welcome, my friends," he said heartily.
+
+"Well, you see, Messer Hammond, that I was a true prophet, and that I
+have had my share of the dungeon. However, we need not talk of that
+now. I am up to my eyes in business."
+
+"I have no doubt of that, admiral," Polani said. "I have called to
+offer every ship I have in the harbour, for the defence of the city. I
+myself will continue to pay their crews, as at present. Use the vessels
+as you like. Make fire ships of them if you will. I can afford the
+loss."
+
+"Thanks, my friend," the admiral said. "We shall find a use for them,
+never fear.
+
+"As for you, Messer Hammond, even in my prison I heard of your gallant
+feat, in recapturing the Pluto and three other ships from the Genoese,
+and thus retrieving, to some extent, the losses of Pola. I hope to wipe
+off the rest of the score before long. I shall find a command for you,
+in a day or two. Age and rank go for nothing now. I am going to put the
+best men in the best position.
+
+"I have just appointed that old rascal, Corbaro, vice admiral of the
+Lido. He is a grumbling old scoundrel, and would have had me get up a
+revolution today, for which I had to knock him down; but he is one of
+the best sailors Venice ever turned out, and just the man for the
+place."
+
+"I would rather act as a general aide-de-camp to you, admiral, than
+have a separate command, if you will allow me," Francis said. "I am
+still too young to command, and should be thwarted by rivalry and
+jealousies. I would, therefore, far rather act under your immediate
+orders, if you will allow me."
+
+"So be it, then, lad. Come to me tomorrow, and I have no doubt I shall
+have plenty for you to do. At present, I cannot say what course I may
+adopt, for in truth, I don't know what position I shall hold. The
+people do not seem content with my having only the government of Lido;
+but for myself, I care nothing whether I hold that command, or that of
+captain general. It is all one to me, so that I can serve the republic.
+And Giustiniani is an able man, and will no doubt do his business well.
+
+"You do not think so, young man?" he broke off, when Francis shook his
+head.
+
+"I do not, indeed, sir. He has erected two wooden towers at the mouth
+of the Lido, which the first stone from a Genoese ballista would knock
+to splinters; and has put up a fence to San Spirito, which a Genoese
+soldier in full armour could jump over."
+
+"Well, we shall see, Messer Hammond," the admiral said, smiling. "I
+fear you have one bad quality among your many good ones, and that is
+that you are a partisan. But go along now. I have no more time to spare
+to you."
+
+No sooner had Pisani obtained the supreme command, than he set to work
+in earnest to provide for the safety of the city, the reorganization of
+the navy, and the conversion of the new levies into soldiers and
+sailors. The hulls of forty galleys, which were lying in the arsenals,
+were taken in hand, and two-thirds of them were equipped and ready for
+sea in three days.
+
+The population was full of ardour and enthusiasm, and crowded to the
+offices to register their names for service. The women brought their
+jewels, to be melted down into money; and all vied with each other in
+zeal.
+
+Pisani's first task, after seeing the galleys put in hand, was to
+examine the defences Giustiniani had erected. He at once pronounced the
+two wooden towers--of which Francis had spoken so disrespectfully--to
+be utterly useless, and ordered two tall towers, of solid masonry, to
+be erected in their stead.
+
+Giustiniani was indignant at this condemnation of his work; and he and
+his friends so worked upon the minds of those who were to carry out the
+work, that they laid down their tools, and refused to embark upon such
+useless operations. The news was brought to Pisani by one of his
+friends, and, starting in his gondola, he was soon upon the spot.
+
+He wasted no time in remonstrating with the workmen on their conduct,
+but, seizing a trowel, lifted a heavy stone into its place, shouting:
+
+"Let him who loves Saint Mark follow my example!"
+
+The success of the appeal was instantaneous. The workmen grasped their
+tools. A host of volunteers seized the stones and carried them to their
+places. When they were exhausted, fresh workmen took their places, and
+in the incredibly short time of four days, the two castles were
+finished.
+
+The workmen were next set to level the paling and earthwork, from Lido
+to San Spirito, and in the course of a fortnight the lofty and massive
+stone walls were erected. By this time, something like a fleet was at
+Pisani's disposal. In spite of the conduct of Taddeo Giustiniani,
+Pisani, with his usual magnanimity, gave him the command of three large
+ships, mounting the heaviest guns in the arsenal. The light boats were
+under the command of Giovanni Barberigo. Federigo Cornaro was stationed
+with a force of galleys at San Spirito. Nicholo Gallieano was charged
+with the defence of the Lazaretto, San Clemente, Santa Elena, and the
+neighbourhood; while on the strand between Lido and Malamocco, behind
+the main wall, were the mercenaries, eight thousand strong, under
+Jacopo Cavalli. Heavy booms were placed across all the canals by which
+it was likely that the enemy's fleet might advance.
+
+Francis found his office, under the energetic admiral, no sinecure. He
+was kept constantly moving from one point to the other, to see that all
+was going on well, and to report the progress made. The work never
+ceased, night or day, and for the first week neither Francis, nor his
+commander, ever went to bed, contenting themselves with such chance
+sleep as they could snatch.
+
+Having wasted eight precious days, the enemy, on the 24th of August,
+advanced to the attack. A Genoese force, under Doria's brother, landed
+upon San Nicolo; while the Paduans attacked San Spirito and Santa
+Marta. They found the besieged in readiness. Directly the alarm was
+given, the Venetians flocked to the threatened points, and repulsed the
+enemy with slaughter.
+
+The latter then attempted to make a junction of their forces, but
+Cornaro with his galleys occupied the canal, drove back the boats in
+which they intended to cross, and defeated the attempt. Doria had felt
+certain that the movement, which was attempted under cover of night,
+would succeed, and his disappointment was extreme.
+
+The Lord of Padua was so disgusted that he withdrew his troops to the
+mainland. Doria remained before Venice until the early part of October,
+but without making another attack. Indeed, the defences had long before
+become so formidable, that attack was well-nigh hopeless. At the end of
+that time he destroyed all his works and fell back upon Chioggia, and
+determined to wait there until Venice was starved into surrender.
+
+The suffering in the city was intense. It was cut off from all access
+to the mainland behind, but occasionally a ship, laden with provisions
+from Egypt or Syria, managed to evade the Genoese galleys. These
+precarious supplies, however, availed but little for the wants of the
+starving city, eked out though they were by the exertions of the
+sailors, who occasionally sailed across the lagoon, landed on the
+mainland, and cut off the supplies sent from Padua and elsewhere to the
+Genoese camp.
+
+The price of provisions was so enormous, that the bulk of the people
+were famishing, and even in the houses of the wealthy the pressure was
+great. The nobility, however, did their utmost for their starving
+countrymen, and the words of Pietro Mocenigo, speaking in the name of
+the doge to the popular assembly, were literally carried into effect.
+
+"Let all," he said, "who are pressed by hunger, go to the dwellings of
+the patricians. There you will find friends and brothers, who will
+divide with you their last crust."
+
+So desperate, indeed, did the position become, that a motion was made
+by some members of the council for emigrating from the lagoons, and
+founding a new home in Candia or Negropont; but this proposal was at
+once negatived, and the Venetians declared that, sooner than abandon
+their city, they would bury themselves under her ruins.
+
+So October and November passed. Carlo Zeno had not yet arrived, but by
+some letters which had been captured with a convoy of provisions, it
+was learned that he had been achieving the most triumphant success, had
+swept the seas from Genoa to Constantinople, had captured a Genoese
+galleon valued at three hundred thousand ducats, and was at Candia.
+
+This intelligence revived the hopes of Venice, and on the 16th of
+November Luigi Moroceni was despatched to order him, in the name of the
+government, peremptorily to hasten to the rescue of Venice. Almost at
+the same time, Giovanni Barberigo, with his light craft, surprised and
+captured three of the enemy's vessels, killing many of the sailors, and
+taking a hundred and fifty prisoners. The success was not in itself
+important, but it raised the hopes of the Venetians, as being the first
+time they had taken the offensive. Pisani himself had endeavoured to
+reconnoitre the position of the enemy, but had each time been sharply
+repulsed, losing ten boats and thirty men upon one occasion, when the
+doge's nephew, Antonio Gradenigo, was also killed by the enemy; but in
+spite of this, he advised government to make a great effort to recover
+Chioggia.
+
+He admitted that the chances of failure were great. Still, he
+maintained that success was possible, and it was better that the
+Venetians should die fighting than by hunger.
+
+As the result of his expeditions, he had found that Doria had at least
+thirty thousand men, fifty great ships, and from seven to eight hundred
+light craft. Moreover his troops were in high spirits, well fed, and
+well cared for, and should therefore be, man to man, more than a match
+for the starving soldiers of Venice. Nevertheless, there was a
+possibility of success, as Zeno would doubtless arrive by the time the
+siege had fairly commenced.
+
+After much debate, the council determined that the undertaking should
+be attempted. To stir the people to the utmost exertion, the senate, on
+the 1st of December, published a decree that the thirty plebeians, who
+should most liberally meet the urgent necessities of the state by the
+proffer of their persons or estates, should, after peace was made, be
+raised to the rank of nobility, and summoned to the great council; that
+thirty-five thousand ducats of gold should be distributed annually
+among those who were not elected, and their heirs, forever; that any
+foreign merchant, who should display peculiar zeal for the cause of the
+republic, should be admitted to the full privileges of citizenship; and
+that, on the other hand, such Venetians as might endeavour to elude a
+participation in the common burdens, and hardships, should be held by
+so doing to have forfeited all their civil rights.
+
+Seventy-five candidates came forward. Some offered money, some personal
+service or the service of their sons and relatives; some presented
+galleys and offered to pay their crews. Immense efforts were made, and
+by the 21st of December sixty ships, four hundred boats of all sizes,
+and thirty-four war galleys were equipped. The doge, although just
+seventy-three years old, signified his wish to assume the supreme
+command of the expedition, Pisani acting as his lieutenant and admiral.
+
+During the long weeks the siege continued, Francis saw little of the
+Polanis, his duties keeping him constantly near Pisani, with whom he
+took such meals as the time would afford, sleeping in his house, in
+readiness for instant service. Maria had returned to her father's
+house, for her husband was in command of the outpost nearest to the
+enemy, and was therefore constantly away from home. Maria's spirits
+were higher than ever. She made light of the hardships in the way of
+food, bantered Francis when he came on his business engagements, and
+affected to treat him with extreme respect, as the trusted lieutenant
+of Pisani. Giulia, too, kept up her spirits, and no one would have
+thought, listening to the lively talk of the two girls with their
+father and Francis, that Venice was besieged by an overwhelming force,
+and reduced to the direst straits by hunger.
+
+The greater part of Polani's ships were now in the service of the
+state. Those which remained, were constantly engaged in running across
+to the Dalmatian coast, and bringing in cargoes of provisions through
+the cordon of the Genoese galleys.
+
+The light gondola which, after being repaired, had been lying for two
+years under cover in Messer Polani's yard, had again been made useful.
+Giuseppi had returned to his old work, and he and another powerful
+oarsman made the light boat fly through the water, as Francis carried
+the orders of the admiral to the various posts. He had also been in it
+upon several of the reconnoitring expeditions, in the canals leading to
+Chioggia, and although hotly chased he had, on each occasion, left his
+pursuers behind. The evening before the expedition was to start Pisani
+said to him:
+
+"I think you have brought me more news, with that fast little craft of
+yours, than I have been able to obtain even at the cost of some hard
+fighting, and a good many lives. I wish that you would make an
+excursion for me tonight, and find out, if you can, whether the enemy
+have moved their position since the last time I reconnoitred them. I
+particularly wish to learn if they have strong forces near the outlets
+of the channels of Chioggia, and Brondolo, and the Canal of Lombardy.
+You know my plans, and with such a host of recruits as I shall have
+with me, it is all important that there should be no failure at first.
+Veterans can stand defeat, but a reverse is fatal to young troops.
+Heaven knows, they will have enough to bear, with wet, cold, exposure,
+and hunger, and success will be necessary to keep up their spirits. Do
+not push your adventure too far. Run no risk if you can help it. I
+would not, for much, that harm befell you."
+
+Francis at once accepted the commission, and left the admiral in order
+to make his preparations.
+
+"Giuseppi," he said, as he took his place in the boat, "I want you to
+find for me, for service tonight, a gondolier who is a native of
+Chioggia, and who knows every foot of the country round, and every
+winding of the canals. He must be intelligent and brave, for the risk
+will be no slight one."
+
+"I think I know such a man, Messer Francisco; but if he happens to be
+away, there will be no difficulty in finding another, for there are
+many fishermen here who escaped before the Genoese captured Chioggia."
+
+"When will you see him?"
+
+"As soon as you have landed me at Messer Polani's."
+
+"Go and fetch him, Giuseppi; and if you can find one or two old
+fishermen of Chioggia, bring them also with you. I want to gain as much
+information as possible regarding the country."
+
+"Is it true that the fleet starts tomorrow, Francisco?" Maria asked as
+he entered. "Everyone says so."
+
+"It is quite true. There will be no further change. The orders have
+been all issued, and you may rely upon it that we are going to sea."
+
+"And when will you return?"
+
+"That's another matter altogether," Francis laughed. "It may be a week,
+it may be three months."
+
+"But I thought we were going to fight the Genoese galleys. It does not
+seem to me that a week is wanted to do that. A day to go to Chioggia, a
+day to fight, and a day to return. What can you want more than that
+for?"
+
+"I do not think that we are going to fight the Genoese galleys,"
+Francis answered. "Certainly we shall not do so if we can help it. They
+are vastly stronger than we are; but I do not know that we need fear
+them for all that."
+
+"What do you mean, Francisco? You do not mean to fight--they are vastly
+stronger than you are--and yet you do not fear them. You are not given
+to speak in riddles; but you have puzzled me this time."
+
+"Well, I will explain myself a little," Francis said; "but you must
+remember that it is a secret, and not to be whispered to anyone."
+
+"That is right," Maria said. "I love a secret, especially a state
+secret.
+
+"Giulia, come and sit quite close, so that he can whisper it into our
+ears, and even the walls shall not hear it.
+
+"Now, sir, explain yourself!"
+
+"I will explain it without telling you," Francis said. "Have you not
+gone to see African lions, who were very much stronger and fiercer than
+yourself, and yet you did not fear them?"
+
+"Because they have been in cages," Maria said. "But what has that to do
+with it?"
+
+"It explains the whole matter," Francis said. "We do not mean to fight
+the Genoese fleet, if we can help it; but we are going to try to put
+them in a cage, and then we shall not be afraid of them."
+
+"Do not trifle with us, sir," Maria said sternly. "How can you put
+Genoese galleys in a cage?"
+
+"We cannot put them in a cage, but we can cage them up," Francis said.
+"Pisani's intention is, if possible, to close all the entrances to the
+canals round Chioggia. Thus, not only will the Genoese galleys be
+unable to sally out to attack us, but the whole of the Genoese army
+will be cooped up, and we shall then do to them what they have been
+doing to us, namely, starve them out!"
+
+"Capital, capital!" Maria said, clapping her hands. "Your Pisani is a
+grand man, Francisco. And if he can do this for us, there is nothing
+which we would not do to show our gratitude. But you won't find it
+easy; besides, in the game of starving out, are we likely to win? The
+contest will not be even, for they start on it full men and strong,
+while our people are half starved already."
+
+"I do not regard success as certain," Francis replied; "and Pisani
+himself acknowledges the chances are very great against us. Still, it
+is possible; and as nothing else seems possible, we are going to
+attempt it."
+
+Polani looked grave, when he heard of the mission which Francis was
+going to undertake. Giulia's bright colour fled at once, and Maria said
+angrily:
+
+"You have no right to be always running into danger, Francisco. You are
+not a Venetian, and there is no reason why you should be always running
+risks greater than those which most Venetians are likely to encounter.
+You ought to think of us who care for you, if you don't choose to think
+of yourself."
+
+"I did not volunteer for the service," Francis said. "I was asked by
+the admiral to undertake it, and even had I wished it, I could hardly
+have refused. The admiral selected me, not from any merit on my part,
+but because he knows that my boat is one of the fastest on the lagoons,
+and that I can easily run away from any of the Genoese rowboats. He
+particularly ordered me to run no unnecessary risks."
+
+"That is all very well," Maria said; "but you know very well that you
+will run risks, and put yourself in the way of danger, if there is a
+chance of doing so.
+
+"You should tell him not to go, father!"
+
+"I cannot do that, Maria; for the service he has undertaken is a very
+important one to Venice. Everything depends upon the success of
+Pisani's attempt, and undertaken, as it is, against great odds, it is
+of the utmost importance that there should be no mistake as to the
+position of the enemy. Whether Francis was wise or not, in accepting
+Pisani's offer that he should act as his aide-de-camp, may be doubted;
+but now that he has undertaken it, he must carry out his orders,
+especially as it is now too late to make other arrangements, did he
+draw back.
+
+"If you will come into my room, Francisco, I will give you a chart of
+the passages around Chioggia. You can study that, and you will then the
+better understand the information you may receive, from the men you are
+expecting."
+
+Half an hour later Giuseppi arrived with the gondolier he had spoken
+of, and two old fishermen, and from their explanations, and a study of
+the map, Francis gained an exact idea of the localities. From his
+previous expeditions he had learned where the Genoese were generally
+posted, and something of the strength of the forces at the various
+points.
+
+In truth, they kept but a careless watch. Feeling convinced that the
+Venetians possessed no forces capable of attacking him, and that their
+surrender must now be a matter of a few days only, Doria took no
+precautions. His troops were all quartered in the houses of Chioggia,
+his galleys moored alongside its quays, and the utmost he did was to
+post small bodies of men, with rowboats, at the entrances to the
+passages from the sea, and up the lagoons, to give warning of any
+sudden attempt on the part of Barberigo, with his light flotilla, to
+make a dash at the galleys, and endeavour to burn them.
+
+Having obtained all the information he could from the old fishermen,
+Francis dismissed them.
+
+"It is evident," he said to Giuseppi, "that we can hardly hope to
+succeed in passing the boats at the entrance to the canal seaward, or
+by going up the lagoon. The only plan that I can see is for us to land
+on the island of Pelestrina, which is held by us, to carry the boat
+across it, and to embark in the Malamocco channel. In this way, we
+should be within their cordon of boats, and can row fearlessly either
+out to the entrances, or to Chioggia itself. We are not likely to be
+detected, and if we are, we must make a race of it to Pelestrina."
+
+The gondolier agreed that the scheme was practicable, and Francis
+ordered Giuseppi and him to remove the burdens, and every bit of wood
+that could be dispensed with from the gondola, so as to facilitate its
+transport.
+
+
+
+Chapter 19: The Siege Of Chioggia.
+
+
+Late in the afternoon, Francis embarked in his gondola, and in an hour
+and a half landed at Pelestrina. He was well known, to those posted
+there, as the bearer of Pisani's orders, and as soon as it became dark,
+Rufino Giustiniani, who was in command, ordered a dozen men to carry
+the light gondola across the island to the Malamocco channel. While
+this was being done, Francis went to Rufino's tent, and informed him of
+what was going on in Venice, and that the whole fleet would set sail on
+the morrow.
+
+"We heard rumours, from the men who brought our rations, that it was to
+be so," Rufino said; "but we have heard the same story a dozen times.
+So, now, it is really true! But what can the admiral be thinking of!
+Sure he can't intend to attack Doria with this newly-manned fleet and
+rabble army. He could not hope for victory against such odds!"
+
+"The admiral's intentions are kept a profound secret," Francis said,
+"and are only known to the doge and the Council of Ten."
+
+"And to yourself," Rufino said laughing.
+
+"The admiral is good enough to honour me with his fullest confidence,"
+Francis said; "and in this matter, it is so important that the nature
+of the design should be kept wholly secret, that I cannot tell it even
+to you!"
+
+"You are quite right, Francisco; nor do I wish to know it, though I
+would wager that Maria, and her pretty sister, have some inkling of
+what is going on."
+
+Francis laughed.
+
+"The signoras are good enough to treat me as a brother," he said, "and
+I will not affirm that they have not obtained some slight information."
+
+"I will warrant they have!" Rufino said. "When my wife has made up her
+mind to get to the bottom of a matter, she will tease and coax till she
+succeeds.
+
+"Ah, here is Matteo! he has been out posting the sentries for the
+night."
+
+The two friends had not indulged in a talk for some weeks, though they
+had occasionally met when Francis paid one of his flying visits to the
+island.
+
+"I have just seen your boat being carried along," Matteo said, as he
+entered the tent. "I could not think what it was till I got close; but
+of course, when I saw Giuseppi, I knew all about it. What are you going
+to do--scout among the Genoese?"
+
+"I am going to find out as much as I can," Francis said.
+
+"It's a capital idea your bringing the boat across the island," Matteo
+said. "You are always full of good ideas, Francis. I can't make it out.
+They never seem to occur to me, and at the present time, especially,
+the only ideas that come into my mind are as to the comfortable meals I
+will eat, when this business is over. I never thought I cared much for
+eating before, but since I have had nothing but bread--and not enough
+of that--and an occasional fish, I have discovered that I am really
+fond of good living. My bones ache perpetually with lying on the bare
+ground, and if I escape from this, without being a cripple for life
+from rheumatism, I shall consider myself lucky, indeed. You are a
+fortunate fellow, Francisco; spending your time in the admiral's
+comfortable palace, or flying about in a smooth-rowing gondola!"
+
+"That is one side of the question certainly," Francis said, laughing;
+"but there is a good deal of hard work, too, in the way of writing."
+
+"I should not like that," Matteo said. "Still, I think you have the
+best of it. If the Genoese would come sometimes, and try and drive us
+off the island, there would be some excitement. But, except when the
+admiral wishes a reconnaissance, or Barberigo's galleys come down and
+stir them up, there is really nothing doing here."
+
+"That ought to suit you exactly, Matteo, for never but once did I hear
+you say you wanted to do anything."
+
+"When was that?" Rufino asked, laughing.
+
+"Matteo conceived a violent desire to climb Mount Etna," Francis said,
+"and it needed all my arguments to prevent his leaving the ship at
+Girgenti, while she was loading, and starting to make the ascent."
+
+"He would have repented before he had gone a quarter of the way up,"
+Rufino said.
+
+"I might have repented," Matteo replied stoutly, "but I would have done
+it, if I had begun. You don't know me yet, Rufino. I have a large store
+of energy, only at present I have had no opportunity of showing what I
+am made of.
+
+"And now, how do you intend to proceed, Francisco? Have you any plan?"
+
+"None at all," Francis replied. "I simply want to assure myself that
+the galleys are all in their usual places, and that the Genoese are
+making no special preparations against our coming."
+
+"I have seen no unusual stir," Rufino said. "Their ships, as far as one
+can see their masts, seem all in their usual position. I fancy that,
+since Barberigo carried off two of them, they have put booms across the
+channels to prevent sudden attacks. I saw a lot of rowboats busy about
+something, but I could not make out exactly what they were doing; but
+still, I fancy they were constructing a boom. Their galleys keep a
+sharp lookout at night, and you certainly would not have succeeded in
+passing them, had you not hit upon this plan of carrying your boat
+over.
+
+"Your greatest danger will be at first. When once you have fairly
+entered the inner canals, you are not likely to be suspected of being
+an enemy. They will take you for Chioggian fishermen late. We often
+make out their returning boats near the town. No doubt Doria is fond of
+fresh fish. Otherwise you would be detected, for the Genoese boats are,
+of course, quite different to ours, and even in the dark they would
+make out that you belonged to the lagoons.
+
+"Ah, here is supper! It is not often that I should have anything to
+offer you, but one of my men managed to catch three or four fish today,
+and sold them to me at about their weight in silver. However, I have
+some good wine from my own cellars, and a man who has good wine, fish,
+and bread can do royally, whatever this grumbling brother of mine may
+say."
+
+Half an hour later, a soldier brought the news that the gondola was in
+the water, and Francis bade adieu to his friends, and started at once.
+
+"Row slowly and quietly," he said, as he took his seat. "Do not let
+your oars make the slightest splash in the water, until we are well
+across to the opposite shore. They may have a guard boat lying in the
+channel."
+
+The light craft made her way noiselessly across the water. Once or
+twice they heard the sound of oars, as some Genoese galley passed up or
+down, but none came near enough to perceive them, and they crossed the
+main channel, and entered one of the numerous passages practicable only
+for boats of very light draught, without being once hailed. A broad
+shallow tract of water was now crossed, passable only by craft drawing
+but a few inches of water; then again they were in a deeper channel,
+and the lights of Chioggia rose but a short distance ahead.
+
+They paused and listened, now, for they were nearing the ship channel,
+and here the enemy would, if anywhere, be on the alert. Coming across
+the water they could hear the sound of voices, and the dull noise made
+by the movement of men in a boat.
+
+"Those are the galleys watching the boom, I expect," Francis said.
+
+"Now, Philippo, we can move on. I suppose there is plenty of water,
+across the flats, for us to get into the channel without going near the
+boom."
+
+"Plenty for us, signor; but if the boom goes right across the channel,
+heavy rowboats would not be able to pass. There are few shallower
+places in the lagoons than just about here. It may be that in one or
+two places even we might touch, but if we do, the bottom is firm enough
+for us to get out and float the boat over."
+
+But they did not touch any shoal sufficiently shallow to necessitate
+this. Several times Francis could feel, by the dragging pace, that she
+was touching the oozy bottom; but each time she passed over without
+coming to a standstill. At last Philippo said:
+
+"We are in the deep channel now, signor. The boom is right astern of
+us. The town is only a few hundred yards ahead."
+
+"Then we shall be passing the Genoese galleys, directly," Francis said.
+"Row slowly as we go, and splash sometimes with the oars. If we go
+quickly and noiselessly past, they might possibly suspect something,
+but if we row without an attempt at concealment, they will take us for
+a fisherman's boat."
+
+Soon the dark mass of Genoese ships, with their forests of masts, rose
+before them. There were lights in the cabins, and a buzz of talking,
+laughing, and singing among the crews on board.
+
+"What luck today?" a sailor asked them as they rowed past, twenty or
+thirty yards from the side of one of the ships.
+
+"Very poor," Giuseppi replied. "I think your ships, and the boats lying
+about, and the firing, have frightened the fish away from this end of
+the lagoons."
+
+It was half a mile before they passed the last of the crowd of vessels.
+
+"Would you like me to land here, signor?" Philippo said. "There would
+be no danger in my doing so. I can make my way, through the streets, to
+the house of some of my relatives, and find out from them whether there
+are any fresh movements among the Genoese. I will not enter any house;
+for aught I know there are soldiers quartered everywhere; but I am sure
+not to go many yards before I run against someone I know."
+
+"I think it will be a very good plan, Philippo. We will lie under the
+bank here, and wait your return."
+
+It was not more than twenty minutes before the gondolier was back.
+
+"I have spoken to three men I know, signor. They are agreed that there
+are no movements among the enemy, and no one seems to have an idea that
+the Venetians are about to put to sea. Of course, I was cautious not to
+let drop a word on the subject, and only said we had managed to get
+through the enemy's cordon to learn the latest news, and I expected to
+earn a ducat or two by my night's work."
+
+"That is excellent," Francis said. "Now, we will row out to the sea
+mouths of the channels, to assure ourselves that no ships are lying on
+guard there, for some are going in or out every day to cruise along the
+coast. A few may have taken up their station there, without attracting
+notice among the townspeople."
+
+The opening of the passage known as the Canal of Lombardy was first
+visited. To gain this, they had to retrace their steps for some
+distance, and to row through the town of Chioggia, passing several
+boats and galleys, but without attracting notice. They found the mouth
+of the canal entirely unguarded, and then returned and rowed out to the
+mouth of the Brondolo passage. Some blazing fires on the shore showed
+that there were parties of soldiers here, but no ships were lying
+anywhere in the channel.
+
+After some consultation they determined that, as no watch seemed to be
+kept, it would be shorter to row on outside the islands, and to enter
+by the third passage to be examined, that between Pelestrina and
+Brondolo. Here, however, the Genoese were more on the alert, as the
+Pelestrina shore was held by the Venetians. Scarcely had they entered
+the channel, when a large rowboat shot out from the shadow of the shore
+and hailed them.
+
+"Stop rowing in that boat! Who are you that are entering so late?"
+
+"Fishermen," Philippo shouted back, but without stopping rowing.
+
+"Stop!" shouted the officer, "till we examine you! It is forbidden to
+enter the channel after dark."
+
+But the gondoliers rowed steadily on, until ahead of the boat coming
+out. This fell into their wake, and its angry officer shouted threats
+against the fugitives, and exhorted his men to row their hardest.
+
+"There are two more boats ahead, signor. They are lying on their oars
+to cut us off. One is a good deal further out than the other, and I
+don't think we shall gain Pelestrina."
+
+"Then make for the Brondolo shore till we have passed them," Francis
+said.
+
+The boat whirled off her course, and made towards the shore. The
+Genoese galleys ahead at once made towards them; but in spite of the
+numerous oars they pulled, the craft could not keep up with the racing
+gondola, and it crossed ahead of them. In another five minutes' rowing,
+the three galleys were well astern, and the gondola again made out from
+the shore, her head pointing obliquely towards Pelestrina. The galleys
+were now fifty yards behind, and although their crews rowed their
+hardest, the gondola gradually gained upon them, and crossing their
+bows made over towards Pelestrina.
+
+"We are out of the channel now," Philippo said, "and there will not be
+water enough for them to follow us much further."
+
+A minute or two later a sudden shout proclaimed that the nearest of
+their pursuers had touched the ground.
+
+"We can take it easy now," Giuseppi said, "and I am not sorry, for we
+could not have rowed harder if we had been racing."
+
+A few minutes later, the light craft touched the mud a few yards
+distant from the shore.
+
+"Is that you, Francisco?" a voice, which Francis recognized as
+Matteo's, asked.
+
+"All right, Matteo!" he replied. "No one hurt this time."
+
+"I have been on the lookout for you the last hour. I have got a body of
+my men here, in case you were chased. We heard the shouting and guessed
+it was you."
+
+"If you have got some men there, Matteo, there is a chance for you to
+take a prize. A galley rowing twelve or fourteen oars is in the mud, a
+few hundred yards out. She was chasing us, and ran aground when at full
+speed, and I imagine they will have some trouble in getting her off. I
+suppose she draws a couple of feet of water. There! Don't you hear the
+hubbub they are making?"
+
+"I hear them," Matteo said.
+
+"Come along, lads. The night is cold, and I don't suppose the water is
+any warmer, but a skirmish will heat our blood."
+
+Matteo, followed by a company of some forty men, at once entered the
+water, and made in the direction of the sounds. Five minutes later,
+Francis heard shouts and a clashing of weapons suddenly break out. It
+lasted but a short time. Matteo and his band soon returned with the
+prisoners.
+
+"What! Have you waited, Francisco? I thought you would be on the other
+side of the island by this time."
+
+"I was in no particular hurry, Matteo; and besides, I want my boat; and
+although two men can lift her easily enough, she would be a heavy
+weight to carry so far."
+
+"You shall have a dozen, Francisco. It is owing to you we have taken
+these prisoners, and that I have had my first bit of excitement since I
+came out here.
+
+"Sergeant, here are a couple of ducats. When you have given the
+prisoners into safe custody, spend the money in wine for the company.
+
+"The water is bitterly cold, I can tell you, Francisco; but otherwise I
+am warm enough, for one's feet stick to the mud, and it seems, each
+step, as if one had fifty pounds of lead on one's shoes. But come along
+to my brother's tent at once. Your feet must be cold, too, though the
+water was only a few inches deep where you got out of your boat. A
+glass of hot wine will do us both good; and it will be an hour before
+your boat is in the water again. Indeed, I don't see the use of your
+starting before daybreak."
+
+"Nor do I, Matteo; but I must go, nevertheless. Pisani knows how long
+it will take me to get to Chioggia and return. He will allow an hour or
+two for me to reconnoitre, and will then be expecting me back. As it
+is, I shall be two hours after the time when he will be expecting me,
+for he knows nothing about the boat being carried across this island,
+and will make no allowance for that. Moreover, Polani and his daughters
+will be anxious about me."
+
+"Oh, you flatter yourself they will be lying awake for you," Matteo
+said, laughing. "Thinking over your dangers! Well, there's nothing like
+having a good idea of one's self."
+
+Francis joined in the laugh.
+
+"It does sound rather conceited, Matteo; but I know they will be
+anxious. They took up the idea it was a dangerous service I was going
+on, and I have no doubt they fidgeted over it. Women are always
+fancying things, you know."
+
+"I don't know anyone who fidgets about me," Matteo said; "but then, you
+see, I am not a rescuer of damsels in distress, nor have I received the
+thanks of the republic for gallant actions."
+
+"Well, you ought to have done," Francis replied. "You had just as much
+to do with that fight on board Pisani's galley as I had, only it
+happened I was in command.
+
+"Oh, there is your brother's tent! I see there is a light burning, so I
+suppose he has not gone to bed yet."
+
+"All the better," Matteo said. "We shall get our hot wine all the
+quicker. My teeth are chattering so, I hardly dare speak for fear of
+biting my tongue."
+
+Francis was warmly welcomed by Rufino Giustiniani.
+
+"I need hardly ask you if you have succeeded in reconnoitring their
+positions, for I know you would not come back before morning had you
+not carried out your orders.
+
+"Why, Matteo, what have you been doing--wading in the mud, apparently?
+Why, you are wet up to the waist."
+
+"We have captured an officer, and fourteen men, Rufino. They will be
+here in a few minutes. Their boat got stuck fast while it was chasing
+Francisco; so we waded out and took them. They made some resistance,
+but beyond a few slashes, and two or three thumps from their oars, no
+harm was done."
+
+"That is right, Matteo. I am glad you have had a skirmish with them at
+last. Now go in and change your things. I shall have you on my hands
+with rheumatism."
+
+"I will do that at once, and I hope you will have some hot spiced wine
+ready, by the time I have changed, for I am nearly frozen."
+
+The embers of a fire, outside the tent, were soon stirred together, and
+in a few minutes the wine was prepared. In the meantime, Francis had
+been telling Rufino the incidents of his trip. In half an hour, the
+message came that the gondola was again in the water, and Francis was
+soon on his way back to the city.
+
+"I was beginning to be anxious about you," was Pisani's greeting, as,
+upon being informed of his return, he sprang from the couch, on which
+he had thrown himself for an hour's sleep, and hurried downstairs. "I
+reckoned that you might have been back an hour before this, and began
+to think that you must have got into some scrape. Well, what have you
+discovered?"
+
+"The Genoese have no idea that you are going to put to sea. Their ships
+and galleys are, as usual, moored off the quays of Chioggia. The
+entrance to the Canal of Lombardy, and the Brondolo passage, are both
+quite open, and there appear to be no troops anywhere near; but between
+Pelestrina and Brondolo they have rowboats watching the entrance, but
+no craft of any size. There are a few troops there, but, so far as I
+could judge by the number of fires, not more than two hundred men or
+so."
+
+"Your news is excellent, Francisco. I will not ask you more, now. It is
+three o'clock already, and at five I must be up and doing; so get off
+to bed as soon as you can. You can give me the details in the morning."
+
+The gondola was still waiting at the steps, and in a few minutes
+Francis arrived at the Palazzo Polani. A servant was sleeping on a
+bench in the hall. He started up as Francis entered.
+
+"I have orders to let my master know, as soon as you return, signor."
+
+"You can tell him, at the same time, that I have returned without hurt,
+and pray him not to disturb himself, as I can tell him what has taken
+place in the morning."
+
+Polani, however, at once came to Francis' room.
+
+"Thank Heaven you have returned safe to us, my boy!" he said. "I have
+just knocked at the girls' doors, to tell them of your return, and, by
+the quickness with which they answered, I am sure that they, like
+myself, have had no sleep. Have you succeeded in your mission?"
+
+"Perfectly, signor. I have been to Chioggia itself, and to the
+entrances of the three passages, and have discovered that none of them
+are guarded by any force that could resist us."
+
+"But how did you manage to pass through their galleys?"
+
+"I landed on this side of Pelestrina, and had the gondola carried
+across, and launched in the channel inside their cordon; and it was not
+until we entered the last passage--that by Brondolo--that we were
+noticed. Then there was a sharp chase for a bit, but we outstripped
+them, and got safely across to Pelestrina. One of the galleys, in the
+excitement of the chase, ran fast into the mud; and Matteo, with some
+of his men, waded out and captured the officer and crew. So there is
+every prospect of our succeeding tomorrow."
+
+"All that is good," Polani said; "but to me, just at present, I own
+that the principal thing is that you have got safely back. Now I will
+not keep you from your bed, for I suppose that you will not be able to
+lie late in the morning."
+
+Francis certainly did not intend to do so, but the sun was high before
+he woke. He hurriedly dressed, and went downstairs.
+
+"I have seen the admiral," Polani said as he entered, "and told him
+that you were sound asleep, and I did not intend to wake you, for that
+you were looking worn and knocked up. He said: 'Quite right! The lad is
+so willing and active, that I forget sometimes that he is not an old
+sea dog like myself, accustomed to sleep with one eye open, and to go
+without sleep altogether for days if necessary.' So you need not hurry
+over your breakfast. The girls are dying to hear your adventures."
+
+As he took his breakfast, Francis gave the girls an account of his
+expedition.
+
+"And so, you saw Rufino!" Maria said. "Did he inquire after me? You
+told him, I hope, that I was fading away rapidly from grief at his
+absence."
+
+"I did not venture upon so flagrant an untruth as that," Francis
+replied.
+
+"Is he very uncomfortable?"
+
+"Not very, signora. He has a good tent, some excellent wine, an
+allowance of bread, which might be larger, and occasionally fish. As he
+has also the gift of excellent spirits, I do not think he is greatly to
+be pitied--except, of course, for his absence from you."
+
+"That, of course," Maria said. "When he does come here, he always tells
+me a moving tale of his privations, in hopes of exciting pity; but,
+unfortunately, I cannot help laughing at his tales of hardship. But we
+were really anxious about you last night, Francisco, and very thankful
+when we heard you had returned.
+
+"Weren't we, Giulia?"
+
+Giulia nodded.
+
+"Giulia hasn't much to say when you are here, Francisco, but she can
+chatter about you fast enough when we are alone."
+
+"How can you say so, Maria?" Giulia said reproachfully.
+
+"Well, my dear, there is no harm in that. For aught he knows, you may
+be saying the most unkind things about him, all the time."
+
+"I am sure he knows that I should not do that," Giulia said
+indignantly.
+
+"By the way, do you know, Francisco, that all Venice is in a state of
+excitement! A proclamation has been issued by the doge, this morning,
+that all should be in their galleys and at their posts at noon, under
+pain of death. So everyone knows that something is about to be done, at
+last."
+
+"Then it is time for me to be off," Francis said, rising hastily, "for
+it is ten o'clock already."
+
+"Take your time, my lad," the merchant said. "There is no hurry, for
+Pisani told me, privately, that they should not sail until after dark."
+
+It was not, indeed, until nearly eight o'clock in the evening, that the
+expedition started. At the hour of vespers, the doge, Pisani, and the
+other leaders of the expedition, attended mass in the church of Saint
+Mark, and then proceeded to their galleys, where all was now in
+readiness.
+
+Pisani led the first division, which consisted of fourteen galleys. The
+doge, assisted by Cavalli, commanded in the centre; and Corbaro brought
+up the rear, with ten large ships. The night was beautifully bright and
+calm, a light and favourable breeze was blowing, and all Venice
+assembled to see the departure of the fleet.
+
+Just after it passed through the passage of the Lido, a thick mist came
+on. Pisani stamped up and down the deck impatiently.
+
+"If this goes on, it will ruin us," he said. "Instead of arriving in
+proper order at the mouth of the passages, and occupying them before
+the Genoese wake up to a sense of their danger, we shall get there one
+by one, they will take the alarm, and we shall have their whole fleet
+to deal with. It will be simply ruin to our scheme."
+
+Fortunately, however, the fog speedily lifted. The vessels closed up
+together, and, in two hours after starting, arrived off the entrances
+to the channels. Pisani anchored until daylight appeared, and nearly
+five thousand men were then landed on the Brondolo's shore, easily
+driving back the small detachment placed there. But the alarm was soon
+given, and the Genoese poured out in such overwhelming force that the
+Venetians were driven in disorder to their boats, leaving behind them
+six hundred killed, drowned, or prisoners.
+
+But Pisani had not supposed that he would be able to hold his position
+in front of the whole Genoese force, and he had succeeded in his main
+object. While the fighting had been going on on shore, a party of
+sailors had managed to moor a great ship, laden with stones, across the
+channel. As soon as the Genoese had driven the Venetians to their
+boats, they took possession of this vessel, and, finding that she was
+aground, they set her on fire, thus unconsciously aiding Pisani's
+object, for when she had burned to the water's edge she sank.
+
+Barberigo, with his light galleys, now arrived upon the spot, and
+emptied their loads of stone into the passage around the wreck. The
+Genoese kept up a heavy fire with their artillery, many of the galleys
+were sunk, and numbers of the Venetians drowned, or killed by the shot.
+
+Nevertheless, they worked on unflinchingly. As soon as the pile of
+stones had risen sufficiently for the men to stand upon them, waist
+deep, they took their places upon it, and packed in order the stones
+that their comrades handed them, and fixed heavy chains binding the
+whole together.
+
+The work was terribly severe. The cold was bitter. The men were badly
+fed, and most of them altogether unaccustomed to hardships. In addition
+to the fire from the enemy's guns, they were exposed to a rain of
+arrows, and at the end of two days and nights they were utterly worn
+out and exhausted, and protested that they could do no more. Pisani,
+who had himself laboured among them in the thickest of the danger,
+strove to keep up their spirits by pointing out the importance of their
+work, and requested the doge to swear on his sword that, old as he was,
+he would never return to Venice unless Chioggia was conquered.
+
+The doge took the oath, and for the moment the murmuring ceased; and,
+on the night of the 24th, the channel of Chioggia was entirely choked
+from shore to shore. On that day, Corbaro succeeded in sinking two
+hulks in the passage of Brondolo. Doria, who had hitherto believed that
+the Venetians would attempt nothing serious, now perceived for the
+first time the object of Pisani, and despatched fourteen great galleys
+to crush Corbaro, who had with him but four vessels. Pisani at once
+sailed to his assistance, with ten more ships, and the passage was now
+so narrow that the Genoese did not venture to attack, and Corbaro
+completed the operation of blocking up the Brondolo passage. The next
+day the Canal of Lombardy was similarly blocked; and thus, on the
+fourth day after leaving Venice, Pisani had accomplished his object,
+and had shut out the Genoese galleys from the sea.
+
+But the work had been terrible, and the losses great. The soldiers were
+on half rations. The cold was piercing. They were engaged night and day
+with the enemy, and were continually wet through, and the labour was
+tremendous.
+
+A fort had already been begun on the southern shore of the port of
+Brondolo, facing the convent, which Doria had transformed into a
+citadel. The new work was christened the Lova, and the heaviest guns in
+the Venetian arsenal were planted there. One of these, named the
+Trevisan, discharged stones of a hundred and ninety-five pounds in
+weight, and the Victory was little smaller. But the science of
+artillery was then in its youth, and these guns could only be
+discharged once in twenty-four hours.
+
+But, on the 29th, the Venetians could do no more, and officers,
+soldiers, and sailors united in the demand that they should return to
+Venice. Even Pisani felt that the enterprise was beyond him, and that
+his men, exhausted by cold, hunger, and their incessant exertions,
+could no longer resist the overwhelming odds brought against him.
+Still, he maintained a brave front, and once again his cheery words,
+and unfeigned good temper, and the example set them by the aged doge,
+had their effect; but the soldiers required a pledge that, if Zeno
+should not be signalled in sight by New Year's Day, he would raise the
+siege. If Pisani and the doge would pledge themselves to this, the
+people agreed to maintain the struggle for the intervening forty-eight
+hours.
+
+The pledge was given, and the fight continued. Thus, the fate of Venice
+hung in the balance. If Zeno arrived, not only would she be saved, but
+she had it in her power to inflict upon Genoa a terrible blow. Should
+Zeno still tarry, not only would the siege be raised, and the Genoese
+be at liberty to remove the dams which the Venetians had placed, at
+such a cost of suffering and blood; but there would be nothing left for
+Venice but to accept the terms, however onerous, her triumphant foes
+might dictate, terms which would certainly strip her of all her
+possessions, and probably involve even her independence.
+
+Never, from her first foundation, had Venice been in such terrible
+risk. Her very existence trembled in the balance. The 30th passed as
+the days preceding it. There was but little fighting, for the Genoese
+knew how terrible were the straits to which Venice was reduced, and
+learned, from the prisoners they had taken, that in a few days, at the
+outside, the army besieging them would cease to exist.
+
+At daybreak, on the 31st, men ascended the masts of the ships, and
+gazed over the sea, in hopes of making out the long-expected sails. But
+the sea was bare. It was terrible to see the faces of the Venetians,
+gaunt with famine, broken down by cold and fatigue. Even the most
+enduring began to despair.
+
+Men spoke no more of Zeno. He had been away for months. Was it likely
+that he would come just at this moment? They talked rather of their
+homes. The next day they would return. If they must die, they would die
+with those they loved, in Venice. They should not mind that. And so the
+day went on, and as they lay down at night, hungry and cold, they
+thanked God that it was their last day. Whatever might come would be
+better than this.
+
+Men were at the mastheads again, before daylight, on the 1st of
+January. Then, as the first streak of dawn broke, the cry went from
+masthead to masthead:
+
+"There are ships out at sea!"
+
+The cry was heard on shore. Pisani jumped into a boat with Francis,
+rowed out to his ship, and climbed the mast.
+
+"Yes, there are ships!" he said. And then, after a pause: "Fifteen of
+them! Who are they? God grant it be Zeno!"
+
+This was the question everyone on ship and on shore was asking himself,
+for it was known that the Genoese, too, were expecting reinforcements.
+
+"The wind is scarce strong enough to move them through the water,"
+Pisani said. "Let some light boats go off to reconnoitre. Let us know
+the best or the worst. If it be Zeno, Venice is saved! If it be the
+Genoese, I, and those who agree with me that it is better to die
+fighting, than to perish of hunger, will go out and attack them."
+
+In a few minutes, several fast galleys started for the fleet, which was
+still so far away that the vessels could scarcely be made out, still
+less their rig and nationality. It would be some time before the boats
+would return with the news, and Pisani went ashore, and, with the doge,
+moved among the men, exhorting them to be steadfast, above all things
+not to give way to panic, should the newcomers prove to be enemies.
+
+"If all is done in order," he said, "they cannot interfere with our
+retreat to Venice. They do not know how weak we are, and will not
+venture to attack so large a fleet. Therefore, when the signal is made
+that they are Genoese, we will fall back in good order to our boats,
+and take to our ships, and then either return to Venice, or sail out
+and give battle, as it may be decided."
+
+The boats, before starting, had been told to hoist white flags should
+the galleys be Venetian, but to show no signal if they were Genoese.
+The boats were watched, from the mastheads, until they became specks in
+the distance. An hour afterwards, the lookout signalled to those on
+shore that they were returning.
+
+"Go off again, Francisco. I must remain here to keep up the men's
+hearts, if the news be bad. Take your stand on the poop of my ship, and
+the moment the lookouts can say, with certainty, whether the boats
+carry a white flag or not, hoist the Lion of Saint Mark to the
+masthead, if it be Zeno. If not, run up a blue flag!"
+
+
+
+Chapter 20: The Triumph Of Venice.
+
+
+Francis rowed off to the ship, got the flags in readiness for hoisting,
+and stood with the lines in his hand.
+
+"Can you make them out, yet?" he hailed the men at the mastheads.
+
+"They are mere specks yet, signor," the man at the foremast said.
+
+The other did not reply at once, but presently he shouted down:
+
+"Far as they are away, signor, I am almost sure that one or two of
+them, at least, have something white flying."
+
+There was a murmur of joy from the men on the deck, for Jacopo Zippo
+was famous for his keenness of sight.
+
+"Silence, men!" Francis said. "Do not let a man shout, or wave his cap,
+till we are absolutely certain. Remember the agony with which those on
+shore are watching us, and the awful disappointment it would be, were
+their hopes raised only to be crushed, afterwards."
+
+Another ten minutes, and Jacopo slid rapidly down by the stays, and
+stood on the deck with bared head.
+
+"God be praised, signor! I have no longer a doubt. I can tell you, for
+certain, that white flags are flying from these boats."
+
+"God be praised!" Francis replied.
+
+"Now, up with the Lion!"
+
+The flag was bent to the halyards and Francis hoisted it. As it rose
+above the bulwark, Pisani, who was standing on a hillock of sand,
+shouted out at the top of his voice:
+
+"It is Zeno's fleet!"
+
+A shout of joy broke from the troops. Cheer after cheer rent the air,
+from ship and shore, and then the wildest excitement reigned. Some fell
+on their knees, to thank God for the rescue thus sent when all seemed
+lost. Others stood with clasped hands, and streaming eyes, looking
+towards heaven. Some danced and shouted. Some wept with joy. Men fell
+on to each other's necks, and embraced. Some threw up their caps. All
+were wild with joy, and pent-up excitement.
+
+Zeno, who, in ignorance of the terrible straits to which his countrymen
+were reduced, was making with his fleet direct to Venice, was
+intercepted by one of the galleys, and at once bore up for Brondolo,
+and presently dropped anchor near the shore. As he did so, a boat was
+lowered, and he rowed to the strand, where the Venetians crowded down
+to greet him. With difficulty, he made his way through the shouting
+multitude to the spot, a little distance away, where the doge was
+awaiting him.
+
+Zeno was of medium height, square shouldered and broad chested. His
+head was manly and handsome, his nose aquiline, his eyes large, dark,
+and piercingly bright, and shaded by strongly-marked eyebrows. His air
+was grave and thoughtful, and in strong contrast to that of the merry
+and buoyant Pisani. His temper was more equable, but his character was
+as impulsive as that of the admiral. He was now forty-five years of
+age--ten years the junior of Pisani. Zeno was intended for the church,
+and was presented by the pope with the reversion of a rich prebendal
+stall at Patras. On his way to Padua, to complete his studies at the
+university, he was attacked by robbers, who left him for dead. He
+recovered, however, and went to Padua. He became an accomplished
+scholar; but was so fond of gambling that he lost every penny, and was
+obliged to escape from his creditors by flight. For five years he
+wandered over Italy, taking part in all sorts of adventures, and then
+suddenly returned to Venice, and was persuaded by his friends to
+proceed to Patras, where his stall was now vacant.
+
+When he arrived there, he found the city besieged by the Turks. In
+spite of his clerical dignity, he placed himself in the front rank of
+its defenders, and distinguished himself by extreme bravery. He was
+desperately wounded, and was again believed to be dead. He was even
+placed in his coffin; but just as it was being nailed down, he showed
+signs of returning life. He did not stay long at Patras, but travelled
+in Germany, France, and England.
+
+Soon after he returned to Patras he fought a duel, and thereby
+forfeited his stall. He now renounced the clerical profession, and
+married a wealthy heiress. She died shortly afterwards, and he married
+the daughter of the Admiral Marco Giustiniani.
+
+He now entered upon political life, and soon showed brilliant talents.
+He was then appointed to the military command of the district of
+Treviso, which the Paduans were then invading. Here he very greatly
+distinguished himself, and in numberless engagements was always
+successful, so that he became known as Zeno the Unconquered.
+
+When Pisani was appointed captain general, in April, 1378, he was
+appointed governor of Negropont, and soon afterwards received a
+separate naval command. He had been lost sight of for many months,
+prior to his appearance so opportunely before Brondolo, and he now
+confirmed to the doge the news that had been received shortly before.
+He had captured nearly seventy Genoese vessels, of various sizes, had
+cruised for some time in sight of Genoa, struck a heavy blow at her
+commerce, and prevented the despatch of the reinforcements promised to
+Doria. Among the vessels taken was one which was carrying three hundred
+thousand ducats from Genoa.
+
+He reported himself ready with his men to take up the brunt of the
+siege forthwith, and selecting Brondolo as the most dangerous position,
+at once landed his crews. The stores on board ship were also brought
+ashore, and proved ample for the present necessities of the army.
+
+In a few days, he sailed with his galleys and recaptured Loredo,
+driving out the Paduan garrison there. This conquest was all important
+to Venice, for it opened their communication with Ferrara, and vast
+stores of provisions were at once sent by their ally to Venice, and the
+pressure of starvation immediately ceased.
+
+The siege of Brondolo was now pushed on, and on the 22nd of January the
+great bombard, the Victory, so battered the wall opposite to it that it
+fell suddenly, crushing beneath its ruins the Genoese commander, Doria.
+
+The change which three weeks had made in the appearance of the Venetian
+forces was marvellous. Ample food, firing, and shelter had restored
+their wasted frames, and assurance of victory had taken the place of
+the courage of despair. A month of toil, hardship, and fighting had
+converted a mob of recruits into disciplined soldiers, and Zeno and
+Pisani seemed to have filled all with their own energy and courage.
+Zeno, indeed, was so rash and fearless that he had innumerable escapes
+from death.
+
+One evening after dusk his own vessel, having been accidentally torn
+from its anchorage near the Lova Fort by the force of the wind and
+currents, was driven across the passage against the enemy's forts,
+whence showers of missiles were poured into it. One arrow pierced his
+throat. Dragging it out, he continued to issue his orders for getting
+the galley off the shore--bade a seaman swim with a line to the
+moorings, and angrily rebuked those who, believing destruction to be
+inevitable, entreated him to strike his flag. The sailor reached the
+moorings, and, with a line he had taken, made fast a strong rope to it,
+and the vessel was then hauled off into a place of safety. As Zeno
+hurried along the deck, superintending the operation, he tumbled down
+an open hatchway, and fell on his back, almost unconscious. In a few
+moments he would have been suffocated by the blood from the wound in
+his throat, but with a final effort he managed to roll over on to his
+face, the wound was thus permitted to bleed freely, and he soon
+recovered.
+
+On the 28th of February, he was appointed general in chief of the land
+forces, and the next day drove the Genoese from all their positions on
+the islands of Brondolo and Little Chioggia, and on the following
+morning established his headquarters under the ramparts of Chioggia,
+and directed a destructive fire upon the citadel. As the Genoese fell
+back across the bridge over the Canal of Santa Caterina, the structure
+gave way under their weight, and great numbers were drowned. The
+retreat of the Genoese was indeed so hurried and confused, and they
+left behind them an immense quantity of arms, accoutrements, and war
+material, so much so that suits of mail were selling for a few
+shillings in the Venetian camp.
+
+So completely were the Genoese disheartened, by the change in their
+position, that many thought that the Venetians could at once have taken
+Chioggia by assault; but the leaders were determined to risk no
+failure, and knew that the enemy must yield to hunger. They therefore
+contented themselves with a rigorous blockade, cutting off all the
+supplies which the Lord of Padua endeavoured to throw into the city.
+The Venetians, however, allowed the besieged to send away their women
+and children, who were taken to Venice and kindly treated there.
+
+The army of Venice had now been vastly increased, by the arrival of the
+Star Company of Milan, and the Condottieri commanded by Sir John
+Hawkwood. The dikes, erected across the channels with so much labour,
+were removed, and the fleet took their part in the siege.
+
+On the 14th of May there was joy in Chioggia, similar to that which the
+Venetians had felt at the sight of Zeno's fleet, for on that morning
+the squadron, which Genoa had sent to their assistance under the
+command of Matteo Maruffo, appeared in sight. This admiral had wasted
+much valuable time on the way, but had fallen in with and captured,
+after a most gallant resistance, five Venetian galleys under
+Giustiniani, who had been despatched to Apulia to fetch grain.
+
+The Genoese fleet drew up in order of battle, and challenged Pisani to
+come out to engage them. But, impetuous as was the disposition of the
+admiral, and greatly as he longed to avenge his defeat at Pola, he
+refused to stir. He knew that Chioggia must, ere long, fall, and he
+would not risk all the advantages gained, by so many months of toil and
+effort, upon the hazard of a battle. Day after day Maruffo repeated his
+challenge, accompanied by such insolent taunts that the blood of the
+Venetian sailors was so stirred that Pisani could no longer restrain
+them. After obtaining leave from the doge to go out and give battle, he
+sailed into the roadstead on the 25th. The two fleets drew up in line
+of battle, facing each other. Just as the combat was about to commence
+a strange panic seized the Genoese, and, without exchanging a blow or
+firing a shot, they fled hastily. Pisani pursued them for some miles,
+and then returned to his old station.
+
+The grief and despair of the garrison of Chioggia, at the sight of the
+retreat of their fleet, was in proportion to the joy with which they
+had hailed its approach. Their supply of fresh water was all but
+exhausted. Their rations had become so scanty that, from sheer
+weakness, they were unable, after the first week in June, to work their
+guns.
+
+Genoa, in despair at the position of her troops, laboured unceasingly
+to relieve them. Emissaries were sent to tamper with the free
+companies, and succeeded so far that these would have marched away, had
+they not been appeased by the promise of a three days' sack of
+Chioggia, and a month's extra pay at the end of the war. Attempts were
+made to assassinate Zeno, but these also failed. The Genoese then
+induced the pope to intercede on their behalf; but the council
+remembered that when Venice was at the edge of destruction, on the 31st
+of December, no power had come forward to save her, and refused now to
+be robbed of the well-earned triumph.
+
+On the 15th of July, Maruffo, who had received reinforcements again
+made his appearance; but Pisani this time refused to be tempted out. On
+the 21st a deputation was sent out from Chioggia to ask for terms, and
+though, on being told that an unconditional surrender alone would be
+accepted, they returned to the city, yet the following day the Genoese
+flag was hauled down from the battlements.
+
+On the 24th the doge, accompanied by Pisani and Zeno, made his formal
+entry into Chioggia. The booty was enormous; and the companies received
+the promised bounty, and were allowed to pillage for three days. So
+large was the plunder collected, in this time, by the adventurers, that
+the share of one of them amounted to five hundred ducats. The republic,
+however, did not come off altogether without spoil--they obtained
+nineteen seaworthy galleys, four thousand four hundred and forty
+prisoners, and a vast amount of valuable stores, the salt alone being
+computed as worth ninety thousand crowns.
+
+Not even when the triumphant fleet returned, after the conquest of
+Constantinople, was Venice so wild with delight, as when the doge,
+accompanied by Pisani and Zeno, entered the city in triumph after the
+capture of Chioggia. From the danger, more imminent than any that had
+threatened Venice from her first foundation, they had emerged with a
+success which would cripple the strength, and lower the pride of Genoa
+for years. Each citizen felt that he had some share in the triumph, for
+each had taken his share in the sufferings, the sacrifices, and the
+efforts of the struggle. There had been no unmanly giving way to
+despair, no pitiful entreaty for aid in their peril. Venice had relied
+upon herself, and had come out triumphant.
+
+From every house hung flags and banners, every balcony was hung with
+tapestry and drapery. The Grand Canal was closely packed with gondolas,
+which, for once, disregarded the sumptuary law that enforced black as
+their only hue, and shone in a mass of colour. Gaily dressed ladies sat
+beneath canopies of silk and velvet; flags floated from every boat, and
+the rowers were dressed in the bright liveries of their employers. The
+church bells rang out with a deafening clang, and from roof and
+balcony, from wharf and river, rang out a mighty shout of welcome and
+triumph from the crowded mass, as the great state gondola, bearing the
+doge and the two commanders, made its way, slowly and with difficulty,
+along the centre of the canal.
+
+Francis was on board one of the gondolas that followed in the wake of
+that of the doge, and as soon as the grand service in Saint Mark's was
+over, he slipped off and made his way back to the Palazzo Polani. The
+merchant and Giulia had both been present at the ceremony, and had just
+returned when he arrived.
+
+"I guessed you would be off at once, Francisco, directly the ceremony
+was over. I own that I, myself, would have stayed for a time to see the
+grand doings in the Piazza, but this child would not hear of our doing
+so. She said it would be a shame, indeed, if you should arrive home and
+find no one to greet you."
+
+"So it would have been," Giulia said. "I am sure I should not have
+liked, when I have been away, even on a visit of pleasure to Corfu, to
+return and find the house empty; and after the terrible dangers and
+hardships you have gone through, Francisco, it would have been unkind,
+indeed, had we not been here. You still look thin and worn."
+
+"I think that is fancy on your part, Giulia. To my eyes he looks as
+stout as ever I saw him. But certainly he looked as lean and famished
+as a wolf, when I paid that visit to the camp the day before Zeno's
+arrival. His clothes hung loose about him, his cheeks were hollow, and
+his eyes sunken. He would have been a sight for men to stare at, had
+not every one else been in an equally bad case.
+
+"Well, I thank God there is an end of it, now! Genoa will be glad to
+make peace on any terms, and the sea will once more be open to our
+ships. So now, Francisco, you have done with fighting, and will be able
+to turn your attention to the humbler occupation of a merchant."
+
+"That will I right gladly," Francis said. "I used to think, once, I
+should like to be a man-at-arms; but I have seen enough of it, and hope
+I never will draw my sword again, unless it be in conflict with some
+Moorish rover. I have had many letters from my father, chiding me for
+mingling in frays in which I have no concern, and shall be able to
+gladden his heart, by writing to assure him that I have done with
+fighting."
+
+"It has done you no harm, Francisco, or rather it has done you much
+good. It has given you the citizenship of Venice, in itself no slight
+advantage to you as a trader here. It has given you three hundred
+ducats a year, which, as a mark of honour, is not to be despised. It
+has won for you a name throughout the republic, and has given you a
+fame and popularity such as few, if any, citizens of Venice ever
+attained at your age. Lastly, it has made a man of you. It has given
+you confidence and self possession. You have acquired the habit of
+commanding men. You have been placed in positions which have called for
+the exercise of rare judgment, prudence, and courage; and you have come
+well through it all. It is but four years since your father left you a
+lad in my keeping. Now you are a man, whom the highest noble in Venice
+might be proud of calling his son. You have no reason to regret,
+therefore, that you have, for a year, taken up soldiering instead of
+trading, especially as our business was all stopped by the war, and you
+must have passed your time in inactivity."
+
+In the evening, when the merchant and Francis were alone together, the
+former said:
+
+"I told you last autumn, Francis, when I informed you that, henceforth,
+you would enter into my house as a partner in the business, when we
+again recommenced trade, that I had something else in my mind, but the
+time to speak of it had not then arrived. I think it has now come. Tell
+me, my boy, frankly, if there is anything that you would wish to ask of
+me."
+
+Francis was silent for a moment; then he said:
+
+"You have done so much, Signor Polani. You have heaped kindness upon
+me, altogether beyond anything I could have hoped for, that, even did I
+wish for more, I could not ask it."
+
+"Then there is something more you would like, Francisco. Remember that
+I have told you that I regard you as a son, and therefore I wish you to
+speak to me, as frankly as if I was really your father."
+
+"I fear, signor, that you will think me audacious, but since you thus
+urge upon me to speak all that is in my mind, I cannot but tell you the
+truth. I love your daughter, Giulia, and have done so ever since the
+first day that my eyes fell on her. It has seemed to me too much, even
+to hope, that she can ever be mine, and I have been careful in letting
+no word expressive of my feelings pass my lips. It still seems, to me,
+beyond the bounds of possibility that I could successfully aspire to
+the hand of the daughter of one of the noblest families in Venice."
+
+"I am glad you have spoken frankly, dear lad," the merchant said. "Ever
+since you rescued my daughters from the hands of Mocenigo, it has been
+on my mind that someday, perhaps, you would be my son-in-law, as well
+as my son by adoption. I have watched with approval that, as Giulia
+grew from a child into a young woman, her liking for you seemed to
+ripen into affection. This afternoon I have spoken to her, and she has
+acknowledged that she would obey my commands, to regard you as her
+future husband, with gladness.
+
+"I could not, however, offer my daughter's hand to one who might reject
+it, or who, if he accepted it, would only do so because he considered
+the match to be a desirable one, from a business point of view. Now
+that you have told me you love her, all difficulties are at an end. I
+am not one of those fathers who would force a marriage upon their
+daughters, regardless of their feelings. I gave to Maria free choice
+among her various suitors, and so I would give it to Giulia. Her choice
+is in accordance with my own secret hopes, and I therefore, freely and
+gladly, bestow her upon you. You must promise only that you do not
+carry her away altogether to England, so long as I live. You can, if
+you like, pay long visits with her from time to time to your native
+country, but make Venice your headquarters.
+
+"I need say nothing to you about her dowry. I intended that, as my
+partner, you should take a fourth share of the profits of the business;
+but as Giulia's husband, I shall now propose that you have a third.
+This will give you an income equal to that of all but the wealthiest of
+the nobles of Venice. At my death, my fortune will be divided between
+my girls."
+
+Francis expressed, in a few words, his joy and gratitude at the
+merchant's offer. Giulia had inspired him, four years before, with a
+boyish love, and it had steadily increased until he felt that, however
+great his success in life as Messer Polani's partner, his happiness
+would be incomplete unless shared by Giulia. Polani cut short his words
+by saying:
+
+"My dear boy, I am as pleased that this should be so as you are. I now
+feel that I have, indeed, gained a son and secured the happiness of my
+daughter. Go in to her now. You will find her in the embroidery room. I
+told her that I should speak to you this evening, and she is doubtless
+in a tremble as to the result, for she told me frankly that, although
+she loved you, she feared you only regarded her with the affection of a
+brother, and she implored me, above all, not to give you a hint of her
+feelings towards you, until I was convinced that you really loved her."
+
+Two months later, the marriage of Francis Hammond and Giulia Polani
+took place. There were great festivities, and the merchant spent a
+considerable sum in giving a feast, on the occasion, to all the poor of
+Venice. Maria told Francis, in confidence, that she had always made up
+her mind that he would marry Giulia.
+
+"The child was silly enough to fall in love with you from the first,
+Francisco, and I was sure that you, in your dull English fashion, cared
+for her. My father confided to me, long since, that he hoped it would
+come about."
+
+Francis Hammond lived for many years with his wife in Venice, paying
+occasional visits to England. He was joined, soon after his marriage,
+by his brother, who, after serving for some years in the business,
+entered it as a partner, when Messer Polani's increasing years rendered
+it necessary for him to retire from an active participation in it.
+
+Some months after his marriage, Francis was saddened by the death of
+Admiral Pisani, who never recovered from the fatigue and hardships he
+suffered during the siege of Chioggia. He had, with the fleet,
+recovered most of the places that the Genoese had captured, and after
+chasing a Genoese fleet to Zara, had a partial engagement with them
+there. In this, Corbaro, now holding the commission of admiral of the
+squadron, was killed, and Pisani himself wounded. He was already
+suffering from fever; and the loss of Corbaro, and the check that the
+fleet had suffered, increased his malady, and he expired three days
+later.
+
+Venice made peace with Genoa, but the grudge which she bore to Padua
+was not wiped out until some years later, when, in 1404, that city was
+besieged by the Venetians, and forced by famine to surrender in the
+autumn of the following year; after which Zeno, having been proved to
+have kept up secret communications with the Lord of Padua, was deprived
+of his honours and sentenced to a year's imprisonment. Thus, in turn,
+the two great Venetian commanders suffered disgrace and imprisonment.
+
+As she had been patient and steadfast in her time of distress, Venice
+was clement in her hour of triumph, and granted far more favourable
+terms to Padua than that city deserved.
+
+At the death of Messer Polani, Francis returned with his wife and
+family to England, and established himself in London, where he at once
+took rank as one of the leading merchants. His fortune, however, was so
+large, that he had no occasion to continue in commerce, and he did so
+only to afford him a certain amount of occupation. His brother carried
+on the business in Venice, and became one of the leading citizens
+there, in partnership with Matteo Giustiniani. Every two or three years
+Francis made a voyage with his wife to Venice and spent some months
+there, and to the end of his life never broke off his close connection
+with the City of the Waters.
+
+
+
+***END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE LION OF SAINT MARK***
+
+
+******* This file should be named 17546.txt or 17546.zip *******
+
+
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/dirs/1/7/5/4/17546
+
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://www.gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/pglaf.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://www.gutenberg.org/about/contact
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit:
+http://www.gutenberg.org/fundraising/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+